VOL V-Electrical PDF

TAMIL NADU GENERATION AND
DISTRIBUTION CORPORATION LTD.
EPC TENDER FOR

Establishment of Captive Coal Jetty with unloading
facilities and Pipe Conveyor for 2x660 MW Udangudi
Supercritical Thermal Power Project
VOLUME - V
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SPECIFICATION NO. - SE/C/UP/EE/M/OT No.03/2014-15

Establishment of Captive Coal Jetty with unloading facilities and Pipe Conveyor
for 2x660 MW Udangudi Supercritical Thermal Power Project
VOLUME-V
MAIN INDEX
INDEX
VOLUME SECTION TITLE
I COMMERCIAL & GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
II GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
III DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – CIVIL WORKS
IV DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – MECHANICAL
V DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
VI DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – CONTROL &

INSTRUMENTATION
VII DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – NAVIGATION AIDS,

APPROACH BRIDGE AND BERTH APPURTENANCES
VIII TENDER DRAWINGS
IX ATTACHMENTS TO TENDER DOCUMENT
SHEET 1 OF 1
VOLUME-V
INDEX
SPECIFICATION
Sl.No. TITLE
NUMBER
SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR
1. TCE.7347A-EL-200
ELECTRICAL
2. TCE.7347A-EL-201 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HT SWITCHGEAR
3. TCE.7347A-EL-202 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT SWITCHGEAR
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL

4. TCE.7347A-EL-203
CONTROL PANEL
5. TCE.7347A-EL-204
INTERFACE OF PLC SYSTEM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POWER
6. TCE.7347A-EL-205
TRANSFORMERS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ONLOAD TAP
7. TCE.7347A-EL-206
CHANGING GEAR FOR TRANSFORMERS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR NEUTRAL EARTHING
8. TCE.7347A-EL-207
RESISTOR
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CAST RESIN DRY
9. TCE.7347A-EL-208
TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH VOLTAGE
10. TCE.7347A-EL-209
INDUCTION MOTORS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
11. TCE.7347A-EL-210
INDUCTION MOTORS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR VARIABLE
12. TCE.7347A-EL-211
FREQUENCY DRIVE
13. TCE.7347A-EL-212 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CABLES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR H. V. CABLE

14. TCE.7347A-EL-213
TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS (3.3KV TO 33KV)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CABLING
15. TCE.7347A-EL-214
ACCESSORIES, CABLE TRAYS, CONDUITS & PIPES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR UNINTERRUPTIBLE
16. TCE.7347A-EL-215
POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STATIONARY LEAD
17. TCE.7347A-EL-216
ACID STORAGE BATTERY
18. TCE.7347A-EL-217 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BATTERY CHARGER
19. TCE.7347A-EL-218 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELEVATOR SYSTEM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

20. TCE.7347A-EL-219
AND ACCESSORIES
SHEET 1 OF 2
VOLUME-V
SPECIFICATION
Sl.No. TITLE
NUMBER
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
21. TCE.7347A-EL-220
EQUIPMENT
22. TCE.7347A-EL-221
INSTALLATION WORK
23. TCE.7347A-EL-222 CABLE TRAY GENERAL NOTES
EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

24. TCE.7347A-EL-223
SYSTEMS - INSTALLATION NOTES
25. TCE.7347A-EL-224 LIGHTING INSTALLATION NOTES
26. TCE.7347A-EL-225 DATA SHEETS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SHEET 2 OF 2
SPEC.NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED

TCE.7347A-EL-200 SHEET 1 OF 24
ELECTRICAL
1. DESIGN CRITERIA – ELECTRICAL

1.1 Scope of work- Electrical
1.1.1 The scope shall include design, engineering, procurement, manufacture, testing at
manufacturers works, packing, transportation, shipping, unloading at port, transportation
to site, unloading, storage, insurance, transportation from stores to erection site,
erection, site testing, commissioning, demonstration of performance guarantee test of
the power distribution system and handing over to Client including submission of
hardcopy and soft copy of all as-built drawings, O&M manuals etc. required for
successful operation of coal jetty.2 Nos of 33 kV feeder will be made available in
existing power plant boundary by others. The scope indicated in the following clauses
shall be read in conjunction with detailed technical specification of this tender and the
bid drawings. The major items covered under the power distribution system are as
follows:
1 . 1 . 2 2 nos of 33/11.55KV power transformer with required capacity, complete with all fittings
and accessories.
1.1.3 11/0.433kV, dry type, cast resin distribution transformers of required quantity and
required capacity, complete with all fittings and accessories.
1.1.4 415V/415V lighting transformer, auxiliary transformer of required quantity and required
capacity, complete with all fittings and accessories.
1.1.5 33KV and 11KVswitchgear complete with all relays, instruments, VCB, meters,
indication lamps, etc.
1.1.6 415V PCC, 415V MCC panel complete with ACBs, MCCBs, relays, instruments, meters,
indication lamps, etc.
1.1.7 HT(11KV & 33KV) and LT power, control cables and Pair cables with required numbers
of glands, lugs, termination kits, jointing kits, etc as required for interconnection between
bidder’s supplied equipments, between bidder supplied equipments and those supplied
by “Others(33KV Switchgear)” along with cable markers.
1.1.8 Complete carrier system including cable trays, supports, brackets, clamps etc as well as
GI conduits, HDPE pipes and all other installation materials as required for laying of
above power and control cables. HDPE pipes encased in concrete to be provided for
crossing of cables below roads.
1.1.9 Indoor & outdoor Lighting system for complete coal jetty building, approach road,
JNT tower, shore buildings and any other buildings covered in this package, etc. LDBs,
lighting transformers, Junction Boxes, Lighting Panels, lighting poles, light fixtures of
various types, isolating switches, switch boxes, switch socket outlets, cables, wires,

ELECTRICAL
GI conduits with all accessories, civil works required for installation of road lighting
poles and area lighting masts, earthing, etc.
1.1.10 System earthing as well as earthing of all non-current carrying metallic parts as per
IS3043 and lightning protection system as per Mesh/Rolling Sphere method of IEEE
complete with deep bore earth pits, treated earth pits, earthing conductor etc. as
required for Power Distribution System. The contractor has to do the soil resistivity test
to find the resistance of the ground.
1.1.11 Plante lead acid battery, float cum boost charger, DCDB, complete with battery
racks, inter-cell and inter-tier connectors and all other accessories required for all
electrical equipment.
1.1.12 DG set for emergency lighting of shore area, JNT1 tower and jetty area along with the
required panels.
1.1.13 63A receptacles for shore buildings, approach road, jetty buildings with all necessary
accessories.
1.1.14 24 V DC Lighting system, VFD for required motors.
1.1.15 Elevator system with all necessary accessories.
1.1.16 UPS system along with required batteries, racks and other accessories.
1.1.17 Electrical system related miscellaneous items namely, three phase welding receptacles,
rubber mats, danger boards, first aid charts, first aid boxes, insulated hand gloves,
shock treatment chart, etc.
1.1.18 Fire proof sealing system comprising fire stops and fire breaks for the cable and cable
trays, any wall/floor openings.
1.1.19 Civil work for earth pits, lighting poles, minor chipping works for lighting inside
building, cable burial including excavation, back filling and compression etc as detailed
in technical specification. Foundation frames, bolts, bolts of special design,
embedment’s, anchor fasteners and inserts.
1.1.20 Complete relay setting and coordination documentation with calculation for the Power
Distribution System shall be submitted by the successful bidder.
1.1.21 The contractor has to do the system study including load flow analysis and short circuit
study, motor starting study for the electrical system and submit the report for the client
approval.
1.1.22 All safety equipments required in the electrical substation and other installations shall be
as per the statutory requirement shall be provided by the contractor.

ELECTRICAL
1.1.23 All the required approvals shall be in the scope of the contractor and all the required
statutory fee, coordination charges, professional charges, etc. shall be in the scope of
the contractor.
1.1.24 All equipment supplied and all works executed under this contract including system
design and detailed engineering, shall comply with the statutory requirements and local
regulations. The scope of work includes obtaining necessary statutory
approvals/clearances from all the concerned authorities for various systems covered in
this specification.
1.1.25 It is not the intent to completely specify herein all details of design and
construction of the equipment/systems. However, all equipment/systems shall conform
in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and
shall be capable of performing continuous operation up to the successful BIDDER’s
guarantees in a manner acceptable to the purchaser who will interpret the meaning of
drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work or material which
in his judgement are not in full accordance with the requirements. All the major equipment
shall be installed tested and commissioned under supervision of representative of original
manufacturer of respective equipment.
1.1.26 All components included in this specification are not explicitly identified and/or listed
herein, these shall be supplied under this contract to ensure completeness of the system
and facilitate proper operation and easy maintenance of the substation.
1.1.27 All equipment shall be suitable for smooth, efficient and trouble free operation for power
supply variations as mentioned herein below. The equipment shall be designed to give
efficient and reliable performance under heavily polluted atmosphere (dusty).
1.1.28 All services necessary for the erection, testing and commissioning and all
instruments/services required for carrying out performance testing of all items of the plant
electrics covered under this specification shall be arranged by the BIDDER.
1.1.29 BIDDER to submit filled up data sheet B of the subsequent sections along with the
offer.
1.1.30 Contractor has to prepare and submit all design drawings/calculations and vendor
drawings for the approval to the client.
1.1.31 In case of any contradiction between various referred standards specification/datasheets
statutory regulations more stringent shall govern.
1.1.32 The contractor has to submit the detailed design calculations, drawings and all required
necessary documents for construction to client for approval before proceeding with the
construction.

ELECTRICAL
1.1.33 All the electrical equipment must be suitable for coastal/salt laden environment. special
care shall be taken for painting and all hardware which shall be subjected to approval of
client during detailed engineering stage.
1.1.34 The Electrical Drives , Transformers , Switch gears & etc for Shore unloader to be
designed for 2000 TPH.
1.1.35 The Electrical Drives , Transformers , Switch gears & etc for Berth Belt conveyor to be
designed for 4000 TPH.
1.1.36 All equipment shall follow the KKS code.
1.2 Design Specification-Electrical:
1.2.1 Power Supply Conditions
11kV, 3-phase, 3 Wire
System Voltage 415kV, 3-phase, 4 Wire
240 V, 3-phase, 4-wire (Lighting)
Frequency 50 Hz
33KV: +10 to (-) 10%
11kV: +10 to (-) 10%
Voltage Variation
415V: +10 to (-) 10%
110VDC: +5 to (-) 5%
Frequency Variation +3% to -5%
Combined voltage and
10%
frequency variation
33 KV: Solidly earthed
System grounding 11 kV: Resistance earthed
415 V : Solidly earthed
33KV: 25KA for 3 Sec
Fault Level
11 kV: 50 kA for 3 Sec
(For selection of
415V: 50 kA for 1 Sec
equipment)
110V DC: 25kA for 1Sec
Design ambient
50 deg
temperature
Relative humidity 75%

ELECTRICAL
1.2.2 Power Distribution

i. The contractor has to design the electrical system by considering the following criteria.
For better understanding of power distribution refer the SLD TCE.7347A-271-EL-
3001.
ii. The following substations has to be provided.
a. Shore substation (At Shore area)
b. Jetty Substation (At Jetty area)
c. Intermediate substations(At approach bridge)
iii. Shore substation(At Shore area)
a. 2 Nos of 33KV supply shall be tapped off from 33 KV breaker at sea water intake
pump house located inside proposed Udangudi Thermal Power Plant boundry to
cater the loads for all three substations.
b. The incomers shall be connected to the 33KV switchgear with bus coupler.
Incomers and buscoupler shall be provided with momentary synchronization
facility and the buscoupler with auto/manual change over facility. 33KV supply
shall be further step down to 11KV by using 2 x 100 % 33/11.55 KV transformers.
c. The 2 numbers of transformers shall be connected to 11KV switchgear with bus
coupler with auto/manual changeover. Momentary syncronising facility shal also
be provided.
d. All HT loads in the shore area like pipe conveyers-I & II drives at JT-1 inside
Udangudi Power Plant boundry, etc.,and Jetty substation shall be connected to
11KV switchgear at Shore substation through 11 KV power cable.
e. 2 nos of Capacitor bank feeder provision shall be provided in the 11KV panel
with all necessary relays, meters and indication lamps, etc. The capacitor bank
shall be connected in the future.
f. 11KV supply will be further step-down to 415V by using 11/0.433KV step down
transformer.
g. All the LT loads and other auxiliary loads in the shore area and half of the
approach bridge will be connected to this LT panel. LT switchgear shall be
provided with two incomers with buscoupler. Each incomer shall be fed from
independent transformers which in turn fed by 11KV switchgear.UPS and battery
charger shall be connected to this main LT panel.
h. 415V emergency panel shall be provided with 2 incomers. One incomer shall be

ELECTRICAL
from the DG and other from the LT panel. All emergency lighting and any other
emergency loads shall be connected to the emergency LT panel.
iv. Jetty Substation(At Jetty area)
a. 11KV switchgear at jetty area will get the supply from the 11KV switchgear from
Shore substation.
b. Jetty switchgear shall have 2 incomers with bus-coupler.
c. All HT loads like Shore un-loader –I & II, Berth conveyer-I & II shall be connected
to 11KV jetty switchgear. This switchgear shall also be supplied with 2 Nos.
11 KV switchgear panels for shore unloaders III & IV.
d. 11KV supply will be further step-down to 415V by using 11/0.433KV step down
transformer.
e. All the LT loads and other auxiliary loads in the jetty area and half of the
approach bridge shall be connected to this LT panel. LT switchgear shall be
provided with two incomers with buscoupler. Each incomer shall be fed from
independent transformers which in turn fed by 11KV switchgear. UPS and battery
charger shall be connected to this main LT panel.
f. 415V emergency panel shall be provided with 2 incomers. One incomer shall be
from the UPS and other from the LT panel. All emergency lighting and any other
emergency loads shall be connected to the emergency LT panel.
v. Intermediate substations(At approach bridge)(ISS)
a. The lighting and power for Approach Bridge shall be fed from the shore
substation and from the jetty substation based on the voltage drop limits.
b. In order to limit the voltage drop intermediate substation are planned and it shall
be out door type.
c. In order to limit the losses in the Lighting and receptacle power distribution in the
approach bridge, intermediate substation which contain auxiliary transformer and
lighting transformer shall be used in a periodic interval along the approach
bridge. The number of such intermediate substations shall be decided such a
way that the drop of lighting and receptacle power shall be limited to 5%.
d. ISS should have the MLDB with lighting transformer and MPDB with auxiliary
transformer housed in a container.
e. The transformers on Approach Bridge shall be kept in the FRP enclosure along
with the required LDB and PDB. The enclosure shall be designed to withstand
the wind load and other environment criteria. The LDB & PDB shall be integrated

ELECTRICAL
with the transformer.

1.2.3 Intermediate substation enclosure (ISS)
a. The enclosure for intermediate substation shall be made of FRP sheet tropicalised
to saline weather environment.
b. The preferred colour shall be RAL 1001 (cream).
c. The structure of the substation shall be capable of supporting the gross weight of
all equipment.
d. ISS shall be with double doors equipped with key lock, and rubber seals. The
doors shall be suitable for padlocking and/or lock protected.
e. To avoid the entry of rodent in the transformer compartment, stainless steel mesh
should be provided from inner side of louvers.
f. Considering the outdoor application of the substation the doors shall be provided
with proper interlocking arrangement for safety of operator and to avoid corrosion
door should have stainless steel hinges. Door should be provided with stoppers.
g. All metallic components shall be earthed to a common earthing point. It shall be
terminated by an adequate terminal intended for connection to the earth system of
the installation, by way of flexible jumpers/strips & Lug arrangement. The continuity
of the earth system shall be ensured taking into account the thermal & mechanical
stresses caused by the current it may have to carry. All the internal equipments
shall be connected to the earth.
h. Labels for warning, manufacturer’s operating instructions etc. shall be durable &
clearly legible.
1.2.4 DG ( High Speed Diesel System)
i. Standby power generation is required for illumination and essential loads.
ii. In case of power failure, standby power generation will have enough capacity to
provide power to Shore substation, control building, Port operation building,
approach road lighting, jetty lights, control tower and essential loads.
iii. DG shall be sized to maximum continues load of 80%. DG shall be Prime rated.
iv. During the largest motor starting DG terminal voltage should be limited to 15%
considering all other loads are operating.
v. AMF panel shall be supplied along with the DG. Separate numerical relay shall be
provided for DG protection.
vi. DG shall be outdoor or indoor as per the system requirement.

ELECTRICAL
vii. DG system shall be with Manual transfer of HSD from barrel through hand/motorized
pump
viii. Diesel Engine shall be of proven design, multi-cylinder direct injection; turbo charged
compression ignition type, operating at a speed of 1500 rpm and shall be silent,
vibration free while in operation and comply Center/State Pollution Control Board
norms and shall conform to ISO 3046,8528-1 / BS 649,5514. The fuel grade shall be
high speed diesel.
ix. The brake horse power of the engine with all attached accessories as shall not be
less than that which is required by the full load rating of the alternator at site
operating conditions taking into consideration losses, plus a reserve factor of at least
10%.
x. Exhaust stack, shall be self supported and designed as per IS 6533. The stack shall
be complete with all accessories and insulated up to a height of two (2) meters from
ground level.
xi. The exhaust piping shall be fabricated from 6mm thick MS pipes and applied with
anti corrosive painting as the environment is saline and corrosive.
xii. The height of the exhaust stack shall be based on the following formula:
H = h + 0.2 (kVA) ½
Where H = Total stack height in metres
h = Height of diesel generator building in metres
kVA = Maximum capacity of alternator.
xiii. The exhaust of stack shall be designed as per pollution control board norms as
applicable. If required vendors to provide scrubber for the exhaust stack.
xiv. All pipes shall be of carbon steel pipes: ASTM A 106 Gr. B as per ASME B 36.10.
xv. All valves shall be of ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB, 150 CL., RF and fire safe AF 51/52.
xvi. The piping shall be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of finishing epoxy
painting.
1.2.5 Selection of transformer:
i. 33/11.55KV main power transformer shall be outdoor type. It shall be earthed using
NGR. NGR shall be designed for 400A, 30sec. OLTC will be provided for the main
power transformer with taps of +10% to -10% with a step of 1.25%.
ii. The power and distribution transformer shall be sized such a way that if one transformer
fails other transformer capable to cater full load. (operation of both conveyors
simultaneously)

ELECTRICAL
iii. All the distribution transformer shall be indoor shall be cast resin, dry type.
iv. All power transformers shall be oil filled type.
v. All distribution transformers shall be solidly earthed.
vi. Bidder to submit the detailed calculation sheet of complete transformer sizing for
purchasers approval.
vii. For oil type transformer individual drain oil pit and common oil pit shall be provided as
per the standards.
viii. Nitrogen fire protection system shall be provided for the oil type power transformer.
ix. For power transformer all mechanical protection like Buchholz, 49WTI, OTI, PRD, MOG
shall be provided. Respective alarm and trip relays shall be considered in the
switchgear.
x. 2 Hrs fire rated wall shall be provided between the two oil type power transformers.
xi. Sizing shall also be such as to permit starting of the largest motor with the remaining
normal load operating without exceeding the secondary bus permissible voltage
drop(15% at motor terminal during starting).
xii. Transformer shall be designed such that the maximum efficiency shall be at 50% of its
loading.
xiii. All the transformer shall be designed for maximum of 90% loading.
xiv. Total design margin of 10% shall be considered while sizing the transformer.
xv. All transformers shall be sized by considering the future load requirement.
1.2.6 Selection of HT and LT Switchboard
i. HT Panel
a. 11/33KV panel shall be metal clad, self standing dust proof construction, indoor
cubicle type fitted with vacuum circuit breakers, Aluminum bus bar, fully draw out
type. Degree of protection of 11/33KV panel shall be IP4X or better.
b. All 11KV feeders shall be with VCB. Each rating of feeder shall have at least 1 no
of spare feeder and overall 10% spare feeder shall be considered.
c. Motor rating above 200KW shall be connected to 11KV.
d. The thickness of the load bearing members shall be 2.5mm and the non load
bearing members shall be 2mm
e. Required de-rating factors shall be considered while sizing the bus bars and

ELECTRICAL
breakers for switchgear. The size selected shall be such that the currents shall
be carried safely by the bus bars and breakers inside the panel without injurious.
f. The incomers of the 11KV switchgear shall be provided momentary paralleling
facility. Under voltage, check synchronizing & other required auxiliary relays shall
be provided. The bus coupler shall have dead bus and auto closure.
g. Sensitive earth fault protection with CBCT shall be provided for all HT motor
feeders.
h. Cable differential protection shall be give if the length of the cable exceeds more
than 1500Mts.
i. Motor rated above 1000 KW shall be provided with differential protection.
j. All the relays in the HT panel shall be numerical type with communication facility.
The minimum protections for the feeders shall be as follows:
33KV incomer
IDMT over current and DMT earth fault
33KV Outgoing feeder to feeders
Instantaneous & IDMT over current
Instantaneous earth fault.
Differential protection.
11KV incoming feeder from Power Transformer (33/11KV Oil type):
All mechanical protection like Buchholz, 49WTI, OTI, PRD, MOG shall be
provided. Respective alarm and trip relays shall be considered in the
switchgear.
IDMT over current and.
Restricted earth fault.
Standby earth fault protection thro neutral CT
11KV feeder from shore substation to jetty substation at both end:
IDMT over current and sensitive earth fault
Cable Differential Protection
11KV outgoing feeder to Distribution Transformer (11/433KV)
IDMT over current (51)

ELECTRICAL
Instantaneous over-current (50) & Instantaneous sensitive earth

fault.(50N)
IDMT standby earth fault detected through neutral CT for distribution
transformer
Transformer W T I (all trip and non-trip faults shall be individually
annunciated)
11KV outgoing feeder to 11KV Motor feeder
Comprehensive motor protection relay
Differential Protection for motor above 1000KW
k. Separate energy meter shall be provided for the 33KV incoming feeders as per
CEA regulations.
l. Electronic Multifunction meters (3 phase Current, 3 phase Voltage, KW, KWH,
KVA, PF, Hz, KVAr) with 0.5 class accuracy shall be provided for all feeders with
communication port. Multifunction meters shall be EMC compliant, four quadrant
type.
m. All the HT Motor feeders shall have the energy ammeter and dial type ammeter.
ii. LT panel
a. LT panel shall be metal clad, self standing dust proof construction, indoor cubicle
type fitted with ACB/MCCB, fully drawout type. Degree of protection of indoor LT
panel shall be IP52 or better and out door panel shall be IP65.
b. For LT MCC/PCC feeders rated more than 400A, ACB shall be used. For all
other feeders Microprocessor based MCCB shall be used. In case MCCB is used
adequate number of spare MCCB shall be supplied by the contractor.
c. 415V PCCs/MCC incomer and busbar shall be rated for full load current of the
total load connected /feeding transformer as applicable plus a margin of 20%,
rounded off to the next standard rating. The material of busbar shall be
Aluminum.
d. All outgoing feeder modules from each PCC/MCC shall be rated for the full
load current plus 10% margin, rounded off to the next standard rating. All
PCCs/MCC shall be provided with 20% spare feeders of each rating and type.
e. The thickness of the load bearing members shall be 2 mm and the non load
bearing members shall be 1.6mm.
f. Motor rating upto 200KW shall be connected to 415V.

ELECTRICAL
g. All the relays in the LT panel shall be numerical type with communication facility.
The minimum protections for the feeders shall be as follows:
LT incoming feeder from Distribution Transformer
IDMT over current and IDMT earth fault
Standby earth fault.
annunciated)
LT incoming feeder from LT panel
LT outgoing feeder to other LT panel
LT outgoing feeder to LT distribution/Lighting Transformer
annunciated)
LT outgoing feeder to LT Motor feeder
Upto 30KW - MPCB
Above 30KW upto 100KW - MCCB with Bimetallic thermal overload relay.
Above 100KW – ACB with numerical comprehensive motor protection
relay.
h. Electronic Multifunction meters (3 phase Current, 3 phase Voltage, KW, KWH,
KVA, PF, Hz, KVAr) with 0.5 class accuracy shall be provided for all feeders with
communication port. Multifunction meters shall be EMC compliant, four quadrant
type.
i. Motors above 5.5KW, metering current transformer shall be provided.
j. All the LT incomers and lighting feeders shall have the energy meter.
k. All the LT Motor feeders shall have the energy meter and dial type ammeter.
1.2.7 Electrical Control philosophy
a. All HT & LT breakers shall be controlled from PLC. Monitoring and metering shall
also be done from PLC through soft link.

ELECTRICAL
b. Control from PLC shall be hardwired through IPR. Monitoring shall be through
numerical relay interface with PLC. Metering shall be through meters interfaced
with PLC.
c. Numerical relays shall be serially interfaced in daisy chain or redundant radial
loop or ring and connected to a data concentrator which inturn will be connected
to PLC through redundant link. The protocol shall be an open protocol which can
transmit time stamped data either IEC 60870-103, TCP/IP, OPC. Exact protocol
shall be finalized during detailed engineering after coordination with Numerical
relay vendor. Required coordination to be done by the Bidder. No of numerical
relays that will be interfaced in a loop shall be limited to 8. Required mapping
files shall be provided by the Numerical relay vendor for PLC configuration.
d. Data concentrator shall be provided with dual processor, power supply modules.
The architecture diagram shall be submitted by the Vendor which will be
approved by client. The architecture shall be such that cut in a link or failure of
any one component shall not hamper the system apart from the failed
component. Data concentrator shall be located in switchgear room.
e. If Ethernet switches are used, same shall be provided with contact to alarm the
failure and shall have dual power supply inputs, three spare ports. All
components, communication links shall have diagnostic facility and any failure
shall be annunciated in OWS.
f. For metering interface with PLC, the meters shall be looped serially and
connected to the Data concentrator. The protocol shall be modbus. NO of meters
to be connected in a loop shall be limited to 8.
g. Time synchronising of numerical relays, meters, data concentrator shall be done
through network.
h. One separate operator workstation and one engineering work station shall be
provided for electrical control, monitoring and metering.
1.2.8 Selection of Power Cables
i. HT Cable
a. All 33kV HT power cables shall be earthed(E),11KV cables shall be UnEarthed
(UE) grade, single / multicore, stranded aluminium/copper conductor, XLPE
insulated, with PVC inner sheath, wire/strip armoured and outer sheath made of
FRLS PVC compound.
b. 33KV & 11KV cables shall have the insulation screen and conductor screen.
c. The incomer of jetty substation shall be 11KV single core copper.

ELECTRICAL
d. The colour of outer sheath of power and control cable shall be decided during
detailed engineering.
e. All HT cable termination kit and jointing shall be heat shrinkable.
f. In general, Power Cables shall be sized to satisfy the following three criteria.
Full load current carrying capacity under installation conditions
considering the various derating factors like thermal resistivity of soil, ambient
air/ground temperature, grouping, method of laying, depth of laying etc
Short circuit current withstand capacity for applicable fault current and
duration (Please refer below for short circuit duration).
Maximum voltage drop limits under steady state and voltage dip during motor
starting.
The overall voltage drop shall be limited to 5% and the voltage dip shall be
limited to 15%.
g. The cable cross section shall be designed to withstand the rated short circuit
current for a minimum time indicated below as per the cable connectivity,
For HT cable connecting between
i. 33KV panel and 33KV panel shall be 0.5 second.
ii. 33KV panel and Power transformer incomer shall be 0.16 Second.
iii. Power Transformer and the 11KV panel shall be 1 second.
iv. 11KV panel and the 11KV panel shall be 0.5 seconds.
v. 11KV panel and 11/0.433KV transformer shall be 0.16 seconds.
vi. 11KV panel and 11KV motor shall be 0.16 seconds.
ii. LT Power Cable
a. All the LT power cables shall be 1100V grade, single / multicore, stranded
aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated, with PVC inner sheath, armoured and
outer sheath made of specially formulated FRLS PVC compound. The cables will
conform IS 7098 -Part1 (cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed
cables) in all other respects.
b. Power cables up to 16 Sq.mm Copper conductors shall be used.
c. For crane and unloader application power cable shall be trailing type cable.
Trailing cable shall have the Elasto polymer (EPR) insulation instead of XLPE

ELECTRICAL
insulation.
d. In general, Power Cables shall be sized to satisfy the following three criteria.
Full load current carrying capacity under installation conditions
considering the various derating factors like thermal resistivity of soil, ambient
air/ground temperature, grouping, method of laying, depth of laying etc
Short circuit current withstand capacity for applicable fault current and
duration for breaker controlled feeders.
Maximum voltage drop limits under steady state and voltage dip during motor
starting.
The overall voltage drop shall be limited to 5% and the voltage dip shall be
limited to 15%.
e. For 415V distribution feeders from Distribution Transformer to respective
PCC/PMCC, the cable size shall be decided on the basis of 1.1 times the full
load current of the transformer.
f. The cable cross section shall be designed to withstand the rated short circuit
current for a minimum time indicated below as per the cable connectivity,
Cable connecting 11/0.433KV transformer and LT panel shall be 1
seconds.
Cable connecting LT panel and LT panel shall be 0.5 seconds.
Cable connecting LT panel and LT motor shall be 0.16 seconds.
g. Cable glands shall be double compression type.
iii. Control Cables
a. The LT control cables shall be 1100V grade, multicore, 2.5 sq.mm cross section,
stranded copper conductor having 7 strands, PVC insulated, inner PVC
sheathed, galvanised steel wire/formed wire armoured and outer sheath made of
FRLS PVC compound conforming to the performance requirements outlined
above will be used . The cables will conform to IS:1554 (Part-I) - 1988 / IEC-502
(1983) in all other respects.
b. Voltage transformer leads shall be checked for voltage drop which shall be
limited to within 1% for all cases.
c. Minimum of 2 Nos of spare core or 20% Spare core whichever is higher shall be
provided.

ELECTRICAL
d. In case the voltage drop in PT circuit with 2.5sq.mm conductors exceeds the
above values, higher conductor sizes shall be used.
e. For crane and unloader application control cable shall be trailing type cable.
Trailing cable shall have the Elasto polymer (EPR) insulation instead of PVC
insulation.
iv. Pair cable
a. Pair cable with Overall screen
All instrumentation cables will be 600V grade, single pair/multi pair, stranded,
tinned, annealed, high conductivity copper conductor (class 2 as per IS
8130), extruded PVC compound type-A insulated, cores identified by colour
and coding, individual pair twisted (20 twist/meter), cores wrapped by non
hygroscopic material by taping or extrusion, non metallic rip cord under
wrapping, cabling elements suitably grouped, colour coded, cables overall
screened with tinned copper wire braids of 0.15 mm dia with minimum
coverage of 85% or aluminium mylar tape of 0.04 mm thick with overlap of
30%, inner sheathed with extruded PVC compound type ST1, armoured with
GI wire of 0.9mm dia and outer sheathed with extruded FRLS PVC
compound type ST1 complying with IEC.189-Part 1&2 and other applicable
codes.
The instrumentation cables carrying digital signals shall have overall
screening along with drain wire and analog signal carrying cables shall have
each pair screening and overall screening along with each pair drain wire and
overall drain wire.
b. Pair cable with pair screen and overall screen
All instrumentation cables will be 600V grade, single pair/multi pair , stranded,
tinned, annealed, high conductivity copper conductor (class 2 as per IS
8130), extruded PVC compound type-A insulated, cores identified by colour
and coding, individual pair twisted (20 twist/meter), cores wrapped by non
hygroscopic material by taping or extrusion, non metallic rip cord under
wrapping, individual pair screened with aluminium mylar tape of 0.04 mm
thick or copper tape of 0.04 mm thick or copper laminated plastic tape with
30% overlap, provided with 0.5 sq mm tinned copper drain wire for each
cabling element, cabling elements suitably grouped, colour coded, cables
overall screened with tinned copper wire braids of 0.15 mm dia with minimum
coverage of 85% or aluminium mylar tape of 0.04 mm thick with overlap of
30%, inner sheathed with extruded PVC compound type ST1, armoured with

ELECTRICAL
GI wire of 0.9mm dia and outer sheathed with extruded FRLS PVC
compound type ST1 complying with IEC.189-Part 1&2 and other applicable
codes.
The instrumentation cables carrying digital signals shall have overall
screening along with drain wire and analog signal carrying cables shall have
each pair screening and overall screening along with each pair drain wire and
overall drain wire.
1.2.9 Cable carrier system
i. The scope shall include supply, laying & installation of cable carrier system along with
supports and accessories.
i. Cable carrier system shall be designed for 60% loading.
ii. The cable trays shall be prefabricated ladder type and 2500MM length.
iii. Cable tray shall be made up of Fiber Reinforcement Plastic (FRP) material.
iv. Separate cable trays will be used for 33000,11000 V, 415 V power and control cables.
v. The arrangement of trays shall be high voltage trays in 1st tier, medium voltage trays in
2nd tier, electrical control trays in 3rd tier and instrumentation trays in 4th tier.
vi. There shall be a maximum spacing of 1500 mm between cable tray supports, except
fittings (elbows, tees, etc.) This shall be supported at each splice.
vii. The flange height of the cable tray shall be 100MM for all the trays.
viii. 150MM,300MM,450MM,600MM width cable trays shall be used.
ix. Single core cable shall be laid in trefoil arrangement.
x. Cable gallery shall be provided for all the substation.
xi. The cable from shore to jetty shall not be routed by supporting on the pipe
conveyers. It shall be routed by considering the maintenance aspect and it shall not be
exposed to sea water. It is preferable to run the power cable by forming a cable trench in
between the two pipe conveyors.
1.2.10 Fire Barriers and fire sealants (Fire stop)
i. Fire barriers and fire sealants (Fire stop) of two hours rating shall be provided for
switchgear openings, wall openings, floor openings, cable trays such that fire at one
location shall not spread over to other areas. All openings in the floor/wall/cable trenches
made for cable installation shall be sealed and made water proof.
ii. Fire break of thirty minutes rating shall be provided along the horizontal and vertical

ELECTRICAL
trays. The fire-break shall be provided by applying a suitable fire- resistant coating
on cables and cable trays for the required length. Fire break shall be provided every 30
mts of interval.
1.2.11 Earthing and Lightning Protection System
i. The System earthing will be as follows:
33KV,50Hz,3 Phase, Solidly earthed.
11kV, 50Hz, 3 Phase, star connected, resistance earthed system
0.415kV, 50Hz, 3 Phase, 4 wire, star connected, solidly earthed system
ii. The contractor has to do the soil resistivity test for earthing calculation. Soil resistivity
report shall be submitted to client for approval.
iii. All the equipments of substation and various other services will be earthed at two points.
There will be one earth grid formation using 75 x 10 mm GI strip and all the equipment
earthing will be connected to this earth grid. This grid will connect the pipe electrodes.
However, the neutrals of transformers and DG sets will be earthed separately. Each
neutral will be connected to 2 Nos. separate pipe earth electrodes using copper
conductor. Earthing system will be designed as per IS: 3043 & IEEE 142.
iv. All Electronic equipment shall be earthed. Electronic earthing as per IEEE 1100.
v. The material for the earthing conductors shall be as follows:
a) Conductors above ground : Galvanised Iron (GI)
b) Conductors buried in ground : Galvanised Iron (GI)
c) Embedded in concrete /Floor slab: Galvanised Iron (GI)
d) Pipe electrodes : Galvanised Iron (GI) (63 mm dia, 3000mm Long)
vi. Main earthing conductors will be buried in earth around each building at a distance of 1500
mm from the outer boundary of the building. Minimum two tap offs from this earthing loop
will be taken inside the building and connected to the earthing conductor embedded in the
floor slab with approximately 50mm concrete cover.
vii. Layout of the earthing conductor inside the building will be planned to provide earthing
connection to all equipment and structures by short and direct earthing leads.
viii. Cable trays, steel pipes/conduits, steel columns etc. will not be used as earth continuity
conductors.
ix. Grounding conductor for indoor cable trays shall run in the bottom most tray all the above

ELECTRICAL
cable trays shall be earthed by interconnecting this grounding conductor at an interval of

2.5m each. Further this grounding conductor shall be interconnected to the embedded
main earthing conductor running in the nearest floor/roof at an interval of 25m each.
x. For lightning protection separate earth pits will be provided. Exact number of earth pits can
be worked out after earthing and lightning protection calculation during detailed
engineering stage measuring the soil resistively at site.
xi. For Jetty equipment, earthing conductor shall be connected to the pile as per international
standard IEC 61892.
1.2.12 Illumination System
i. Lighting System Design
a. Port operation will be carried out in three shifts almost 24hrs of the day. Thus
proper lighting is very important for the entire port, for port operations. The
following aspects are considered to provide sufficient lighting inside the
terminal.
b. Light meters used should have an accuracy of less than 1 lux. All meters
should have a wide angle of acceptance in order to minimise errors due to
directionality or low sensitivity to different types of light sources or to be
provided with relevant correction factors.
c. LED Lights shall be used for indoor applications.
d. At berths High mast Towers are provided for necessary illumination. For other
outdoor area, metal halide/light emitting plasma shall be considered.
e. The illumination of the approach Bridge will be by means of metal halide/light
emitting plasma Street Lights Lamp fittings are provided with shades and
diffusers to prevent light pollution and glares. Dazzle to small ships due to
reflection of light on water should be prevented.
f. As per MOEF-CRZ clearance,trestle lighting shall be provided at both end to
avoid accidents of moving boats.
g. All light fitting shall be suitable saline application.
h. Housing / Body of fitting shall be Aluminium Extrusion housing with corrosion
resistant polyester powder coated having high conductivity.
i. Cover / glass shall be toughned / tempered glass.
j. THD of the indoor LED shall be less than 10%.
k. K rated Lighting transformer shall be used for lighting.

ELECTRICAL
l. The warranty for LED fittings shall be 5 Years including fixtures, drivers and
other accessories.
m. LED should have minimum of 50000 burning hours. Driver should have
minimum of 25000 burning hours.
n. 3 Meter height lighting pole shall be used for the approach road lighting.
o. Separate lighting shall be used Conveyer walk way in the approach bridge.
p. Adequate number of DC hand lamps shall be provided in the jetty area.
q. For jetty & shore area adequate number of high mast shall be provided. High
mast shall be provided with MH fixtures.
r. Shore area each high mast shall have minimum 6(Six) number of fixtures.
s. All the outdoor lighting poles shall be made up of FRP material.
t. The minimum lux level requirement shall be as per the below table:
Sl.No. Area Minimum Lux
required
1) Jetty area 150 Lux
2) Substation, Pump House and Fire Houses 250 Lux
3) External Road Lighting 20 Lux
4) Inside workshops and repair areas 200 Lux
5) Control room 300 Lux
6) Battery room 250 Lux
7) Approach bridge road 20 Lux
8) Conveyer walk way 10 Lux
u. The lighting layout shall be designed to provide uniform illumination with
minimum glare. The layout design shall meet all the statutory requirement, local
rules etc.
v. 20% emergency shall be provided for all the areas except street lights.
w. 10% of DC lighting shall be provided for all the areas except street lights.
x. Lighting design for roadways shall consider a maintenance factor of 0.6 for
average conditions.
y. Ratio of minimum to average illumination shall not be less than 0.3. The road

ELECTRICAL
lighting layout shall consider the width of the road to decide whether the lighting
poles shall be located on one side, on either side or in the central verge.
z. For battery room corrosion proof fittings shall be provided.
aa. 5A/15A receptacles shall be provided in all buildings. Quantity shall be as per
the client requirement.
bb. 63A Welding receptacle shall be given every 500Mts of the approach bridge. For
all other areas 63A welding receptacle shall be provided as per the client
requirement. In deck area minimum 2 nos of 63A receptacle shall be provided.
cc. Minimum of 3 nos of 63A receptacle shall be provided in jetty area and
substations.
dd. All the outdoor receptacles shall be kept in a FRP enclosure.
ee. Any other safety lighting needs to be provided as per the statutory requirement,
the contractor has to provide the same.
ii. Lighting Distribution Boards (LDB)
a. Main Lighting distribution board (MLDB) shall be kept in the shore substation and
jetty substation. Separate lighting distribution board shall be provided for each
building, external lighting and approach road lighting.
b. Considering the voltage drop for approach bridge lighting if more number of
lighting transformers are required each lighting transformer shall have the
dedicated MLDB.
c. Each of the LDBs shall be provided with voltmeter and ammeter along with
selector switches, `Supply ON' indicating lamps, etc. The LDBs shall be sheet
steel enclosed and shall be fully dust and vermin proof, with a degree of
protection of IP 54. Outdoor panels shall be weather proof type with IP - W55
degree of protection.
d. AC lighting panels shall have 3 phase, 3 wire incomer and required number
of 2 phase, 2 wire outgoing circuits controlled by MCBs for feeding the lighting
fixtures in indoor areas.
e. All receptacles shall be connected to the Power Distribution Boards.
f. Main Power distribution board (MPDB) shall be kept in the shore substation and
jetty substation. Separate power distribution board shall be provided for each
building, external application and approach road receptacles.
g. Considering the voltage drop for approach bridge receptacles if more number of

ELECTRICAL
auxiliary transformers are required each auxiliary transformer shall have the
dedicated MPDB.
h. The selection of MPCB/MCCB/MCB shall be as per proper coordination for
isolation of fault current.
i. The distribution of lighting fixtures/receptacles shall be such that the loading on
each phase of the LDB is approximately equal.
j. For Intermediate substation LDB shall be integrated with the lightinh transformer.
i. Wiring
a. For outdoor lighting, the cable shall be buried at a minimum depth of 750 mm
from ground level. The buried cables shall have suitable bedding, protective
covers & markers.
ii. Lighting circuit design
a. In an area, the lighting fixtures shall be fed from different phases to the extent
possible such that in case of outage of one phase, complete lighting is not
affected. The loading on each circuit shall be restricted to 80% of the MCB
rating.
b. For approach bridge adjacent lighting fixtures shall be connected from different
cables.
1.2.13 Selection of DC system
a. DC system shall be 110V. For signaling and other requirement contractor has to
use the suitable converter.
b. Separate DC banks and DCDB shall be used for jetty area and the shore area.
c. Each buildings shall be provided with separate DCDB.
d. 2X100%Battery shall be plante lead acid battery. Battery shall be sized with the
design margin of 10%. Battery shall be sized to cater the auxiliary supply
required for the electrical equipment and other required applications. 2X100%
Float and Float cum Boost charger shall be provided.
e. The battery shall be designed for 8 Hrs.
f. Scheme for earth fault detection will be provided.
g. Open type racks shall be provided for batteries.
1.2.14 Selection of UPS
a. UPS system shall be IGBT based and transformer less design. Suitable rating K-

ELECTRICAL
Rated isolation transformer shall be provided. UPS shall be parallel redundant

with bypass. UPS shall be supplied along with the required batteries, battery rack
and other accessories. Battery shall be sized with the design margin of 10% and
aging factor of 1.25.Battery shall be sized to cater the auxiliary supply required
for the electrical equipment like PLC, etc. and emergency lighting of the jetty
area. The backup required for 30min.
b. All the battery requirements shall be as per the DC system battery.
c. Separate UPS system and UPSDB shall be used for jetty area and the shore
area.
d. Each buildings shall be provided with separate UPSSDB.
1.2.15 Selection of Elevator
a. For all the building more than G+1 and height more than 10mts elevator has to
be provided.
b. Minimum capacity of the passenger’s elevator shall be 8.
c. For JNT-1 tower minimum of 2 Ton service elevator shall be provided.
d. All the elevators shall be machine room less type, shall have Stainless Steel
finish with automatic door.
1.2.16 Selection of Motors
a. Motors rated above 200KW shall be connected to the 11KV. Motor rated upto
200KW shall be connected to the 415V.
b. All the LT motors having continuous rating shall be IE2 type efficiency and HT
Motors efficiency shall be more than 95%.
c. Conveyer motor shall be designed to start at loaded condition.
d. The winding overhang shall be epoxy coated. FRP Canopy shall be provided for
all outdoor motors.
e. All constituent of the motor shall be suitable for highly corrosive, salt laden
coastal environment. Special focus shall be on windings, insulators, terminals,
hardware (including washers) and space heaters.
f. The paint shall be: One coat of inorganic zinc silicate primer with an average
dryfilm thickness (DFT) of 75 microns after initial surface preparation. One coat
of high build MIO epoxy with a minimum dry film thickness of 125 microns. One
coat of polyurethane finish with minimum dry film thickness of 40 microns.
g. The starting current of the HT motor shall be limited to 5 times of the full load

ELECTRICAL
current.
1.2.17 Design Criteria- VFD
a. Main and hot standby VFD shall be provided for HT & LT conveyor motors. The
VFD shall be ‘state of the art’ Voltage Source, using high voltage semiconductors
(e.g. SGCT, IGCT or HV IGBT) as switching device. The control circuits shall be
designed such that if the main VFD fails the standby VFD shall automatically
feed the load immediately. Option for manual operation shall also be provided in
addition to the automatic changeover. Air conditioned environment shall be
provided for the VFD.
b. If any discrepancy between the above VFD design criteria and detailed technical
specification (TCE.7347A-EL-211) the above design criteria shall govern.
.
SPEC NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LTD
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 1 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The Scope of this specification covers Supply, design, manufacture,

inspection and testing at manufacturer’s works, delivery for site including
packing, forwarding, loading, transportation of following HT Switchgear
and its accessories with short time current rating as per the scope/design
document.
a. 33kV Switchgear
b. 11kV Switchgears
c. Earthing Trucks
d. Base channels for mounting the switchgear
e. Any other accessories required to make the system complete
1.2 The tentative minimum feeder’s lists for the above boards are indicated in
the attached SLD. However it is the responsibility of the EPC contractor to
meet the system requirement. .
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 The design, material, construction, manufacture, inspection, testing and

performance of Metal Clad switchgear shall comply with all currently
applicable standards, statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality
where the Equipment will be installed. The Equipment shall comply latest
editions of the Codes and Standards specified in Data Sheet-A2 of this
Section. Nothing in this specification will be construed to relieve the
contractor of this responsibility.
2.2 In the event of conflict between the codes and standards referred to
elsewhere in the specification and the requirements of this specification,
the requirements of this specification shall govern.
2.3 All codes and standards referred to in this specification shall be

understood to be the latest version on the date of offer made by the
Bidder unless otherwise indicated.
3.0 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The switchgear shall be of metal clad, self standing dust proof
construction, indoor cubicle type fitted with vacuum circuit breakers, fully
drawout type. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 2 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
3.2 The VENDOR shall submit design and performance data of equipment
offered, by filling up Data Sheets-B of this Section for the Switchgears.
3.3 33kV system shall be Solidly earthed system.
3.4 11kV system shall be 3 phase, 3 wire. medium resistance grounded with
fault current limited to 400A.
3.5 The design ambient temperature shall be 50 deg.C.
3.6 The BIDDER shall furnish type test certificates for all ratings of breakers,
different ratings of current transformers, voltage transformers, protective
relays, switches, contactors and fuses etc., offered by him along with the
bid.
3.7 The material of busbar shall be electrolytic grade Aluminium. All busbar
joints shall be shrouded with removable, reusable type moulded shrouds.
3.8 The VENDOR shall furnish calculations establishing the adequacy of the
busbar sizes to meet the continuous and short time current ratings
specified. Continuous current ratings of the droppers in each vertical
section shall be at least equal to the total load on the complete vertical
section. However, short time current rating shall be same as the short time
current rating of the main bus bars. Should it be found at any stage that
the cross section is inadequate, Vendor shall provide suitable bus bars
without commercial / delivery implications.
3.9 Design margin of 10% shall be considered for sizing of various equipments
3.10 All feeders shall be controlled from PLC based control system , CCR ECP
and from the switchgear. All the protection and safety interlocks shall be
hardwired in the Switchgear itself. Local / Remote selection shall be
provided in switchgear. Local selection is envisaged for local operation
from Switchgear. Remote selection shall enabled rom ECP / PLC. A
ECP/PLC selector switch shall be proved in the ECP. Local trial start of
Motor is envisaged from Local push button station also.
3.11 Local start push button shall be hardwired to PLC control system so as to
check the process permissive for starting the drives/fans/pumps, whereas
local stop push button shall be directly hard wired to concerned switch gear
for tripping. One more status contact for latched condition of stop push
button shall be hard wired to PLC control system for necessary alarming
4.0 MECHANICAL DESIGN
4.1 Metal clad switchgear and control gear shall comprise components
ISSUE
arranged in separate compartments with metal enclosures intended to be R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 3 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
earthed. It shall be sheet steel clad, floor mounted free standing design.
4.2 Metal-clad unit shall be precision manufactured and shall comprise rigid
welded structural frame enclosed completely by sheet steel - minimum 2.5
mm thick (hot rolled) or 2.0 mm thick (cold rolled), smooth finished,
leveled and free from flaws. Switchgear cubicles shall be provided with
bottom sheet steel plates (CRCA) of 2.5 mm thickness. For single core
cable, removable plates of nonmagnetic material shall be provided.
4.3 Degree of protection shall be IP4X or better.
4.4 The switchgear shall be provided with base frame which can be directly
welded to the insert plates provided in the floor slab.
4.5 The partitions between the breaker compartment and the bus and cable
connecting compartment respectively shall be made of sheet steel metallic
barriers. These plates can carry individual FRP/metallic shutter for the
primary contact arms.
4.6 FRP/Nylon shrouds shall be provided in the main horizontal bus bar joints.
4.7 Seal-off bushing wherever bus bars pass through metallic partitions shall
be provided.
4.8 The Transport unit shall not be larger than 2.2 meters. Removable lifting
arrangement for each transport unit shall be provided.
4.9 Compartments with doors for access to operating mechanism shall be so

arranged as not to allow access to high voltage circuits. Switchgear
cubicle shall be provided with hinged door on the front with facility for
padlocking door handle.
4.10 The switchgear shall have provision for extensibility on both sides of the
panel.
4.11 Screwed wire mesh for bus bar and CT chambers to prevent accidental
contact with live parts shall be provided. Explosion vents for different
chambers shall be provided.
4.12 Cable gland plate thickness shall be minimum of 3.0 mm.
4.13 Pressure relief flaps which cannot be opened from outside to release
pressure that builds up in the event of arcing faults inside the cubicle to be
provided.
4.14 Control cable entry shall be from front side. ISSUE

R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 4 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
4.15 Door shall be supported by strong hinges and braced in such a manner as
to ensure freedom from sagging, bending and general distortion of panel
or hinged parts.
4.16 Door locks shall require special keys to ensure opening of the same by
authorized person.
4.17 All removable covers shall be gasketed all around with neoprene gaskets.
All louvers shall have removable screens with wire mesh. Vent openings
where necessary shall be covered with grills so arranged that hot gases or
other material cannot be discharged through them in a manner that can
injure the operation personnel. The screens and grills shall be made of
either brass or G.I. wire mesh with mesh size of less than 1 mm.
4.18 Mounting sills in form of mild steel channels properly drilled shall be
supplied along with anchor bolts for mounting & bolting the switchgear
cubicles to the mounting sills. These shall be dispatched in advance so
that these may be installed and levelled (during civil works).Not
withstanding such a requirement, vendor shall preferably supply mounting
frames which can be directly fastened to the floor slab during switchgear
installation, thus not warranting any interface with civil work.
4.19 LABLES
4.19.1 Each switchgear cubicle shall be fitted with a label on the front and rear of
the cubicle indicating the switchgear designation, rating, etc. On the rear
side, the labels shall be provided on that part of the switchgear which is
not removable. Each relay, instrument, switch, fuse and other devices
shall be provided with separate label. Size, wording and languages of the
labels shall be subject to the Client approval.
4.19.2 The Labels shall be made on non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid with
engraved inscriptions of white letters (minimum 3 mm high) on black
ground.
4.20 SURFACE TREATMENT
4.20.1 All metal parts of the panel to undergo surface treatment that includes de-
rusting, cleaning, chemically degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing,
phosphating and passivating followed by spraying with two coats of zinc
oxide primer and baking in oven.
4.20.2 Shade of paint :
Panel interior & exterior : RAL 7032 Powder coating
ISSUE
4.21 BUSBAR AND CONNECTIONS R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 5 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
4.21.1 Busbars shall be of electrolytic grade aluminium and provided with flame
retardant heat shrinkable sleeves. Control and auxiliary buses shall be of
electrolytic grade copper / copper wires. Bus bar arrangement shall be as
per IS 375 – 1963.
4.21.2 Maximum temperature of the main busbars and busbar connections,

under operating conditions, when carrying rated normal current at rated
frequency shall not be more than 40 deg. C above ambient, Temperature
rise for silver plated joints/connections will not exceed 105 deg. C. Busbar
temperature limits shall be adhered to without forced cooling method. For
tap off busbars, the current rating shall be at least equal to corresponding
breaker(s) rating. The busbar sleeves & shroud material shall be suitable
for continuous operating temperature of 5 Deg. C higher than the
maximum permissible operating temperature of busbars / joints.
4.21.3 All busbar joints and bus tap joints will preferably be silver faced. In case
of aluminium busbars with bare joints, suitable neutral grease will be
applied to the meeting surfaces after finishing the surfaces to prevent
oxide formation. For joints to be made at site, sufficient quantity of grease
will be supplied by the contractor in suitable containers.
4.21.4 Both horizontal and vertical bus bars to be designed and supported to
withstand the thermal and dynamic stress corresponding to rated short
time and peak withstand current specified.
4.21.5 Cross section of main horizontal bus to be uniform throughout the

switchboard and continuous in one transport unit.
4.21.6 Busbar support insulators/ spout bushing arrangement shall be of non-

hygroscopic material having high impact and dielectric strength with an
anti tracking contour.
4.21.7 Busbar configuration shall be red, yellow, blue for three phase AC from
front to back or top to bottom or left to right when viewed from front.
4.21.8 Provision for 240V AC single phase feeding arrangement for the purpose
of panel space heating, plug and socket etc. shall be provided and each
shall be separately fed by individual MCBs.
4.22 Instruments, relays and control devices shall be flush-mounted on hinged

door of the metering compartment located in the front portion of cubicle.
5.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
5.1 The 33kV & 11kV Switchgear shall be provided with two incomers & one
bus coupler.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 6 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
5.2 Switchgears shall be designed for simultaneous parallel running of both

streams of conveyors
5.3 Momentary paralleling facility shall be provided for the 11kV Switchgear
located in receiving substation.
5.4 The HT Switchgear Vendor shall provide necessary contacts and

terminals in the Switchgear to achieve the operational philosophy
described in the design specification.
5.5 All hardware required for meeting the functional requirements stated
above, whether specifically listed out in the specification or not, shall be
included in the VENDOR’s scope of supply.
5.6 It shall be the responsibility of the VENDOR to ensure that the

characteristics of the CTs, VTs, relays and all other devices offered by him
are such as to be suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
5.7 All the 33kV & 11kV AC devices/equipment like bus support insulators,
circuit breakers, VTs etc., mounted inside the switchgear shall be suitable
for continuous operation and satisfactory performance under supply & site
conditions outlined in Section-B. CT & PT sizing calculations shall also be
submitted along with Scheme drawing submission.
5.8 To avoid any interference between floor supporting beams and panel
cable entry space, VENDOR shall adjust the location and orientation of
the vertical panels to clear the interference. The VENDOR, if required for
this purpose, shall supply dummy panels.
6.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
6.1 CONFIGURATION AND DEGREE OF PROTECTION
6.1.1 Switchgear shall comprise of Indoor Metal-Clad, fully drawout -Vacuum

Circuit Breaker (VCB) operated as specified in Data Sheet-A1.
The Switchgear shall have compartmentalized design with separate

sections for the following components:
a) Set of 3-Phase busbars
b) Each of main switching devices
c) Voltage transformers
ISSUE
d) Cable Termination and current transformers R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 7 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
e) Metering and relaying devices
and the degrees of protection provided by the compartments shall be -
Complete protection against approach to live parts or contact with internal

moving parts i.e. IP-2X class as per IEC 60529 for all the above
compartments.
For panel, the degree of protection shall be IP-4X.
6.2 SAFETY INTERLOCKS & FEATURES
Switchgear shall be provided with the following interlocks:-
6.2.1 Withdrawal or engagement of a Circuit breaker shall not be possible

unless it is in the open position.
6.2.2 Operation of a circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is in service

position, withdrawn to test position or fully drawn out. It shall not be
possible to close electrically the circuit breaker in service position, without
completing the auxiliary circuit between the fixed and moving portions.
6.2.3 Circuit breaker cubicles shall be provided with safety shutters operated
automatically by the movement of the Circuit breaker carriage to cover the
stationary isolated contacts when the breaker is withdrawn. Padlocking
facilities shall be provided for locking the shutters positively in the closed
position. It shall, however, be possible to open the shutters intentionally
against spring pressure for testing purposes.
6.2.4 The breaker carriage shall be earthed before the circuit breaker reaches
the test position from fully withdrawn position. In case of breakers with
automatic disconnecting type of auxiliary disconnects, the carriage shall
be earthed before the auxiliary disconnects are made and the carriage
earthing shall break only after the auxiliary disconnects break.
6.2.5 Caution nameplate, “Caution Live Terminals” shall be provided at all points
where the terminals are likely to remain live and isolation is possible only
at remote end, i.e. incomer to the switchgear. Suitable interlock shall be
wired for the purpose.
6.2.6 The closing and tripping circuits of each cubicle will be interlocked
electrically with the other equipment and the VENDOR shall arrange the
necessary interlocks.
6.2.7 The following interlocks shall be provided for incomer breakers.

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 8 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
i. If upstream trips, then downstream shall trip.
ii. If upstream breaker is in off condition, then downstream breaker

shall be inhibited from closing.
6.3 SWITCHGEAR EARTHING
6.3.1 An earthing bus shall be provided and extended throughout the length of
the switchgear. It shall be bolted to the framework of each unit and brazed
to each breaker earthing contact bar.
6.3.2 The earth bus shall have sufficient cross section to carry the momentary
short circuit and short time fault current for at least (1) second without
exceeding maximum allowable temperature rise causing damage to the
switchgear.
6.3.3 Suitable clamp type terminals at each end of the earth bus shall be
provided to suit the size of the grid earthing conductors.
6.3.4 Bolted joints, slices, taps etc. to the earth bus shall be made with at least
two bolts.
6.3.5 Positive earthing of circuit breaker frame shall be maintained when it is in

the connected position and in all other positions whilst the auxiliary circuits
are not totally disconnected.
6.3.6 Hinged doors shall be earthed through flexible earthing braid of adequate
cross section.
6.3.7 All non-current carrying metal work of the switchgear shall be effectively
bonded to the earth bus.
6.3.8 Earthing truck shall have PT and alarm provision (separate trucks shall be
provided for breaker feeders and bus earthing through bus PT panel in
each switchboard.) 1 No. earthing truck for feeder earthing and 1 no. for
busbar earthing shall be provided. Separate earthing trucks shall be
supplied for each type/size of breaker to facilitate breaker earthing.
6.3.9 It shall not be possible to use bus earthing truck for feeder earthing and
vice-versa.
6.3.10 Rating of earthing device shall be in line with associated board.
6.3.11 Circuit/Busbar Earthing Facility

ISSUE
a) It shall be possible to connect each circuit or set of 3 phase busbars of R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 9 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
the switchgear to earth through truck mounted earthing devices.
b) For both busbar and cable side earthing, failsafe solenoid interlock shall
be provided so that earthing truck cannot be racked in service position
unless permissive command from interlock scheme is available. In case
of incomer cable, earthing status for cable being live shall be taken
from respective line PT/upstream breaker interlock (if line PT is not
available). Further in case of non availability of control supply, the
solenoid interlock shall prevent rack in operation of earthing trucks.
Instruction plates shall be provided on each breaker panel indicating
sequential operation practice of cable / bus side earthing.
c) The earthing facilities proposed to be provided by the VENDOR shall be

clearly detailed in the Bid and shall be subject to client approval.
d) Auxiliary contacts (min. 2 NO + 2 NC) shall be provided on each

earthing device and shall be wired to the terminal block for interlocking
purpose.
7.0 VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
7.1 Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB) shall conform to relevant standards

specified in Data Sheet and shall be of the horizontal draw-out type.
Circuit breakers shall comprise three separate identical single pole units
operated through a common insulated shaft by the operating mechanism.
Breakers of identical ratings shall be fully interchangeable without any
adjustment.
7.2 Vacuum breakers shall have completely sealed interrupting units for
interruption of arc inside the vacuum. It shall be possible to isolate easily
the Vacuum interrupter unit from the operating mechanism for mechanical
testing of the interrupter to check loss of vacuum. Circuit Breaker with
forced air-cooling for increasing its rating will not be acceptable.
7.3 Breaker rating as specified in the datasheet is ‘In-panel’ rating. Vendor

may select higher rating of breaker if there is derating factor for ‘In-Panel’
rating.
7.4 VCBs should be of trolley mounted/Cassette type. If Cassette type is

provided by the Vendor then separate trolley shall be supplied for handling
the breaker.
7.5 Circuit breaker along with its operating mechanism shall be mounted on a
wheeled carriage moving on guides, designed to align correctly and allow
easy movement. Plugs and sockets for power circuits shall be silver faced
and shall be insulated with suitable insulating material shrouds.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 10 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
7.6 There shall be ‘Service’, ‘Test’ ‘Fully withdrawn’ positions for the breakers.
In the ‘Test’ position, the circuit breaker shall be capable of being tested
for operation without energising the power circuits, i.e. the control circuits
shall remain undisturbed while the power contacts shall remain
disconnected. Separate limit switches, each having a minimum of 2 ‘NO’
+ 2 ‘NC’ contacts, shall be provided for both ‘Service’ and ‘Test’ positions
of the circuit breakers for client use. These contacts shall be rated for
110V DC.
7.7 Provision shall be made available in the switchgear for locking the VCBs
mechanically in the test and service positions.
7.8 Auxiliary Connection / Contacts
7.8.1. Connection of the control/interlocking circuits between the fixed portion of

the cubicle and the breaker carriage shall be preferably by means of plug
& socket arrangement.
7.8.2. Self aligning disconnects shall have adequate number of contacts to meet
the requirements of control and interlocking scheme. Contact between
the fixed and moving parts of the disconnects shall be established to
enable testing of breaker outside panel.
7.8.3. Plug and socket arrangement when provided, shall have adequate number
of pins to meet the requirements of control and interlocking scheme with a
minimum of 24 pins. The plug and socket arrangement shall be so
designed that it shall be possible to insert the plug in the socket in one
position only. The plug, after insertion, shall be secured in position by
spring clamps, which need considerable force to operate. The length of
the plug chord will be such that the plug can be inserted into the socket
only when the breaker is pushed into the test position. Suitable interlock
will be provided to permit further pushing of the breaker only if the plug is
inserted correctly into the socket. It shall not be possible to remove the
plug when the breaker is in service position and it shall be necessary to
withdraw the plug from the socket before the breaker can be pulled out
from the test position to fully withdrawn position.
7.8.4. The following interlocks are to be provided.
a) The truck cannot be moved from test to service or vice versa when
the breaker is ‘ON’.
b) The circuit breaker cannot be switched on when the truck is in any

position between test and service position.
c) The control wiring plug cannot be disconnected from the socket

when the breaker is in service position. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 11 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
d) Provide a suitable interlock to avoid the withdrawal of circuit breaker

from service position when it is in closed condition.
7.8.5. Supporting insulators for the poles shall be of epoxy cast resin type and
shall be able to withstand stresses due to maximum short circuit current.
7.8.6. The bus bars fixed in the breaker shall be of aluminium of suitable cross
section to withstand the short circuit current.
7.8.7. Inter pole insulation shall be provided between adjacent poles. All the
joints / connections end shall be silver plated. Adequate contact pressure
shall be ensured.
7.8.8. Control wiring for the breaker shall be with single core, flexible, 650V
grade insulated wire with multi strand copper conductor of suitable cross
section.
8.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATING MECHANISM
8.1 Circuit breaker shall be power operated by a motor charged spring

operated mechanism. It shall be strong, rigid, positive and fast in operation
to ensure that
8.1.1 Main poles of the breakers shall be such that unless otherwise specified,
the maximum difference between instants of contacts touching during
closing shall not exceed half cycle of rated frequency.
8.1.2 Main poles of the breakers shall operate simultaneously. There shall be no
objectionable rebound of moving contacts and the mechanism shall not
require any critical adjustment.
8.2 Operating mechanism shall be non-pumping electrically and mechanically

under every method of closing (except during manual closing of a breaker
for maintenance).Electrical antipumping feature shall be obtained by
means of an auxiliary relay and use of a contactor to achieve this feature
shall not be acceptable.
8.3 Mechanism shall be such that failure of any auxiliary spring shall not
prevent tripping and will not cause tripping or closing operation of the
power operated closing devices. When the circuit breaker is already
closed, failure of any auxiliary spring shall not cause damage to the circuit
breaker or endanger the operator.
8.4 The closing release shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between
85% and 110% of the rated voltage. A shunt trip shall operate correctly
under all operating conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 12 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and all values of supply voltage
between 70% and 110% of rated voltage.
8.5 Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material.

Bearings which require grease shall be equipped with pressure type
grease fittings. Bearing pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately
pinned and locked to prevent loosening or changing adjustment with
repeated operation of the breaker.
8.6 Auxiliary switches mounted on the fixed portion of the cubicles and directly
operated from the breaker operating mechanism on each breaker having
6 ‘NO’ and 6 ‘NC’ potential-free contacts rated for 10 amp, 110V DC shall
be provided. The contacts shall be in addition to those utilised in the
control circuit of each breaker and shall be exclusively meant for the
external interlocks and controls.
8.7 SPRING OPERATED MECHANISM
8.7.1 Spring operated mechanism, shall be complete with motor of adequate

rating, opening spring, closing spring with limit switch for automatic
charging and all necessary accessories to make the mechanism a
complete operating unit.
8.7.2 As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of

closing and opening operations shall be possible. After failure of power
supply to the motor, at least one open-close-open operation of the circuit
breaker shall be possible.
8.7.3 Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be used
solely for charging the closing spring.
8.7.4 Closing action of the circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring
ready for tripping.
8.7.5 When closing springs are discharged, after closing a breaker, closing
springs shall automatically be charged for the next operation.
8.7.6 Motor shall be such that it requires only about 15 sec. for fully charging the
closing spring. Motors shall be rated for 110 V DC and shall operate
satisfactorily at all values of voltage between 85% to 110% of rated
voltage. Motor shall be protected against overloads and stalling.
8.7.7 Mechanical indicators to indicate charged and discharged condition of

spring shall be provided.
8.7.8 Alternate means must be provided to charge the closing springs manually.
ISSUE
Necessary handles shall be supplied with Circuit Breakers. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 13 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
9.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
9.1 Separate CTs / CT cores shall be provided for:
Protection
Metering
9.2 The CTs and VTs shall be of cast resin type with winding insulation of
class B or better and shall be able to withstand the thermal and
mechanical stress resulting from the rated short time withstand and peak
withstand current ratings of the Switchgear.
9.3 The vendor shall be solely responsible for co-ordinating the relay
characteristics with suppliers for the proper selection of all CTs with
special attention.
9.4 For differential and core balance CT accuracy class PS shall be provided.
Metering CT for 33KV incomer shall have accuracy class of 0.2S.
9.5 Measuring CTs of Switchgear/board incomers and outgoing feeders shall

have Cl 1 accuracy class & it shall be of Cl 0.5 accuracy class if it is
connected to Multifunction meter(MFM).
9.6 For differential application separate CT shall be provided. Other protection

and metering shall be combined in single CT with different cores.
9.7 The CTs shall be mounted in the fixed portion of the Switchgear.
Adequate space shall be available for termination using heat shrinkable
type cable termination in cable compartment.
9.8 The ratings of the instrument transformers shall be based on the

calculations during the detailed engineering stage. The calculations shall
be submitted for the client approval. It shall be the responsibility of the
VENDOR to ensure that the ratings are adequate for the relays and
meters furnished by him taking into consideration the lead resistance for
the remote connected equipment.
9.9 In case the CTs shall have polarity marks indelibly marked on each
transformer and at the associated terminal block, Facility shall be provided
for short circuiting and earthing the CT secondary at the terminal blocks.
9.10 Calculations for sizing and selection of various parameters shall be

submitted for owner’s approval.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 14 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
9.11 CT ratios of outgoing feeders are tentative. The VA burden, Knee-Point

voltage, CT resistance and magnetizing current shall be calculated by the
vendor and the same shall be reviewed and approved by client before
proceeding with manufacture. Final CT ratio shall be furnished during
drawing review stage.
9.12 VTs (both Bus VTs and Line VTs) shall be Single phase, drawout type and
housed in a separate sheet metal enclosure. Those terminals required to
be connected to earth shall be earthed by an isolating link without a fuse.
Fuses on primary side shall have rupturing capacity equal to the
switchgear rating.
9.13 High voltage side of VTs shall have HRC fuses and MCBs on low voltage
side.
9.14 Low voltage star winding shall have all three phase and neutral
connections brought out to terminals and star point shall be earthed.
10.0 INSTRUMENTS & PROTECTIVE RELAYS
10.1 All meters shall be of Analogue type with 1.0 accuracy class and Multi
function meter shall be of digital function meter with accuracy class of 0.5.
10.2 All ammeters shall be provided with 4 way selector switch.
10.3 All indicating instruments shall conform to IS : 1248 – 1983 and IS – 2419
– 1979. It shall be located in the upper part of the panel.
10.4 Digital Multifunction Meters shall be provided with bright LED/LCD display
for local indication and shall be provided with communication port suitable
for communicating on MODBUS protocol to PLC. It shall display various
parameters like 3 phase currents, voltages, PF, MD, KW, KVA, etc. for
local indication and shall be provided with minimum 8 nos. of user
programmable registers for communicating any of the displayed
parameters to the remote.
10.5 The meters shall comply with the CEA requirements. The meters shall be
suitable for flush mounting or semi-flush mounting on vertical panels.
Watt-hour and var-hour measurements shall be suitable for un-balance
loads.
10.6 Surge arrestor
The surge arrestors shall be provided for all motor/ dry transformer
feeders to limit the switching over voltages to 2.2PU. The surge arrestors
shall be metal oxide, gapped or gap less type generally in accordance with
ISSUE
IEC 60099- 1 and suitable for indoor duty. These shall be mounted within R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 15 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
the switchgear cubicle between line and earth, preferably in the cable
compartment. Surge arrestor selected shall be suitable for non-effectively
earthed system and rating shall be in such a way that the value of steep
fronted switching over voltage generated at the switchgear terminals shall
be limited to the requirements of feeding equipment
10.7 Meters shall be 96 sq. mm square, 240 deg. scale, flush case, non-
reflecting bezels, clearly divided and indelibly marked scales, sharply out
lined pointers and zero adjusting device.
10.8 Each voltmeter shall be calibrated with coil hot. The scale shall be open
between 60% to 125% of normal volts and shall be suppressed below
60% of normal volts.
10.9 All relays shall be of Numerical type, except master trip (86) relay & Under
voltage relay (27). The relays shall be provided with RS485 port at the rear
& RS232 port at front. The relay make shall be of one make only. Auxiliary
relays shall be of Electromechanical/Static type.
10.10 Only major relays, meters and controls are indicated in the data
sheets/drawings. Any auxiliary relays, timers, switches, etc. as required
while developing the control schematics and necessary for safe operation,
even if these are not specifically included, shall be supplied by the vendor
without any time & price implication.
10.11 Numerical relays shall have metering, status and protective functions.
10.12 All Indications lamps shall be Cluster type LEDS.
10.13 The transducer shall be of galvanically isolated dual output. The

transducers shall have 4–20 mA dual output and accuracy class shall be
1.0. For all the remote monitoring of metering parameters transducers
shall be provided.
10.14 The 33kV & 11kV panel shall be controlled from Control panel, for which
all the necessary contacts required shall be provided in the switchgears
and wired upto their terminal block. The necessary contacts, interfacing,
contact multiplication etc. can be provided, discussed and finalised during
detailed engineering stage.
10.15 At least 4NO + 2NC spare contacts of all relays shall be wired to terminal
block. The contact rating shall be suitable for 110V DC. In the event of
shortage of contacts in circuit breakers, contact-multiplying relays shall be
used. The same shall be two coils, latching type with electrical reset.
10.16 During the Vendor drawing review, if it is felt necessary that the system
requires output additional DI/DO cards or IPRs, the same needs to be ISSUE
provided without any commercial implication. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 16 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
10.17 All relay setting assistance shall be undertaken by vendor and vendor
shall furnish the relay setting chart and relay co-ordination curves.
10.18 As a minimum, vendor shall provide the following potential free normally
open contacts for remote indication / annunciation.
Incomer
a) Breaker ON/OFF
b) Master trip relay operated (86)
c) Under voltage relay
d) Trip Circuit unhealthy
e) DC Control supply failure
Transformer Feeder:
a) Tripped on fault
b) Transformer Trouble
Line PT
a) PT Secondary MCB OFF
Bus PT
a) PT Secondary MCB OFF
b) DC control supply failure
Miscellaneous
a) Suppliers not paralleled
All these annunciation contacts from various feeders of a bus section shall
be wired to respective incomer or bus PT panel for remote wiring to
annunciation panel.
Required hardware and provision for interface for control, monitoring, ISSUE
status and control panel shall be provided in the switchgear. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 17 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
10.19 Auxillary relays shall be provided for Transformer for wiring mechanical
protections i.e
1. Buchholz trip & alarm
2. Winding Temp high trip & alarm
3. Oil Temp high trip & alarm
4. PRD trip
5. Low oil level alarm
10.20 The contacts of auxiliary relays provided for transformer faults shall be
wired upto the terminal blocks for external use.
10.21 The protective relays shall have high degree of reliability, low power
consumption and plug-in or draw-out type, of modular assembly to
facilitate maintenance.
10.22 All relays, metering and control components shall be mounted on the
panel front only. All dummy panels and rear extensions required for bus
trunking, cable terminations, mounting of relays, metering and control
components etc. shall be supplied by vendor.
10.23 All the relays shall be wired in such a way that power supply failure to the
relay does not cause mal operation of another relay.
10.24 The relays shall be completely tropicalised to operate satisfactorily in the

ambient conditions specified in Project Information.
10.25 Protective relays shall be suitable for secondary rating of CTs and when
drawn out should short CT secondary which should not even momentarily
get open circuited.
10.26 Test plugs shall be provided with each relay.
10.27 Master trips relays shall be provided for protection trips. It shall meet the
following requirements.
i) It shall be latch in type with hand reset.
ii) Operating time shall not exceed 20ms.
ISSUE
iii) It shall have heavy duty normally closed (NC) contacts. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 18 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
iv) Supervision of the relays shall be possible.
10.28 Required number of high speed trip relays, supervision relays, auxiliary
relays, timers, contact multiplication relays, etc., shall be provided in the
panels to meet the system requirements and to meet the system operation
philosophy indicated in the specification elsewhere.
10.29 All numerical relays communication ports to be interlinked and wired to

any one of the panel.
10.30 The relays shall be square or rectangular in shape and shall have dust
tight, transparent covers removable from the front.
10.31 The relays shall be in drawout cases with built-in test facilities or plug in
type with proper testing facilities. Necessary test plugs shall be supplied
loose and shall be included in the VENDOR’s scope of supply. Test
blocks and switches, where provided, shall be located immediately below
each relay for testing. Relay cases shall be suitable for flush mounting
with only flanges projecting on the front with connections from the rear.
10.32 Relay cases shall have adequate number of terminals for making potential
free connections to the relay coils and contacts including spare contacts.
Relay case size shall be so chosen as not to introduce any limitations on
the use of available contacts of the relay due to inadequate number of
terminals. Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each
relay for the purpose of testing and maintenance.
10.33 The protective relays shall conform to following requirements:
10.33.1 All the relays shall be wired in such a way that power supply failure to the
relay does not cause maloperation of another relay.
10.33.2 All relays shall be of numerical type and shall meet the various
performance requirements stipulated herein.
10.33.3 The protective relays shall have high degree of reliability, low power
consumption and plug-in or draw-out type, of modular assembly to facilitate
maintenance.
10.33.4 The relays shall be completely tropicalised to operate satisfactorily in the

ambient conditions specified in Project Information Memorandum.
10.33.5 The relays shall be equipped with either hand reset type mechanically
operated operation indicator or LEDs for visual indication. The LED lamps
shall be resettable by a push button located in an easily accessible place
on relay case. On 3-phase relays with separate operation indicator for
ISSUE
each phase, the indicator shall be clearly marked with the reference phase. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 19 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
Each operation indicator shall have its function and the principle of
operation in a symbol inscribed clearly.
10.33.6 Protective relays shall be suitable for secondary rating of CTs and when
drawn out should short CT secondary which should not even momentarily
get open circuited.
10.33.7 Test plugs shall be provided with each relay.
10.34 Software for relay setting, data transfer and parameterisation of all the
numerical relays in 33 kV and 11 kV switchgears shall be loaded in a
laptop, which is included in bidder’s scope, for locally setting the relays
10.35 Numerical relays shall be serially interfaced in daisy chain or redundant

radial loop or ring and connected to a data concentrator which inturn will
be connected to PLC through redundant link. The protocol shall be an
open protocol which can transmit time stamped data either IEC 60870-
103, TCP/IP, OPC. Exact protocol shall be finalized during detailed
engineering after coordination with Numerical relay vendor. Required
coordination to be done by the Bidder. No of numerical relays that will be
interfaced in a loop shall be limited to 8. Required mapping files shall be
provided by the Numerical relay vendor for PLC configuration.
11.0 CABLING REQUIREMENTS
11.1 Cables for 33kV & 11kV Switchgears (in 33kV receiving substation) will be
XLPE, 33kV earthed & 11kV Unearthed grade, Aluminium/Copper
conductor, PVC inner sheathed, armoured and outer sheath made out of
FRLS PVC.
11.2 Cables for 11kV Switchgear located (in Jetty Substation) will be XLPE,
11kV, Earthed grade, Copper conductor, PVC inner sheathed, armoured
and outer sheath made out of FRLS PVC.
11.3 For control, it is 1100 V grade multicore, copper conductor, PVC insulated,
PVC inner sheathed, armoured and outer sheath made out of FRLS PVC.
11.4 All components inside the module are required to be earthed individually
with green wire of size 4 sq.mm stranded copper conductor and are to be
looped & connected to horizontal earth bus.
12.0 INTERNAL CONTROL WIRING
12.1 Control wiring by 650V grade PVC insulated single core stranded copper
wire of minimum cross section 2.5 sq. mm.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 20 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
12.2 Flexible wire of 2.5 sq. mm shall be used from CT chamber to relay
chamber and shall have protection against heat & mechanical damage due
to flash over. Use of heat-proof sleeves and rigid conduit shall be made to
run the control wires from back to front.
12.3 Flexible wires shall be protected against mechanical damage for wiring to
door mounted devices.
12.4 Wires identified at each end in accordance with schematic diagrams shall
have interlocked type ferrules. These shall be firmly located so that these
do not move.
12.5 All connections external to a feeder and all the auxiliary contacts of the HV
breaker and at least 1 NO + 1 NC spare contacts of the relays shall be
brought to terminal blocks.
12.6 Interconnection between panels of adjacent shipping sections to be

brought out to a separate terminal block.
12.7 Control wires shall be run in earthed metallic flexible conduits when laid in
HV bus chamber.
13.0 EXTERNAL TERMINATION
13.1 Vendor shall provide suitable terminals in the respective panel for
interfacing incoming contacts from CP / other locations. Current rating for
these CP / other locations contacts shall be 0.5A, 110V DC. Contractor to
ensure the adequacy of contact rating and if required shall provide
auxiliary relays to meet the making & breaking current requirements.
13.2 All hardwired signals (with minimum requirement specified below) from
various feeders of bus sections for CP interface shall be wired and
terminated in the marshalling cabinet,
13.3 CONTROL TERMINATIONS
650 V grade multi-way open type terminal blocks shall be of non-

tracking moulded plastic complete with insulated barriers, stud type
terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts and identification strips.
All terminals going out of the switchboard shall be brought to a separate

terminal board marked “External Termination”. These shall be easily
accessible.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 21 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
External terminal block shall be of minimum rating 10 amps and

suitable to receive two numbers 2.5 sq.mm copper conductors and
shall preferably be of cage clamp type.
For CT wiring, stud type terminals shall be provided. CT wiring shall be

with 2.5 sq.mm.wire and CT terminals shall have provision for shorting
the CTs.
20% spare terminals in each control terminal block shall be provided.
13.4 POWER TERMINATIONS
Suitable for accepting cable
Sufficient space and support arrangement inside each panel to

accommodate HT cable termination kits and sealing kits suitable for the
cable sizes as per sizing calculations during detailed engineering.
Dummy panels to be provided adjacent to the switch panel where the

required number of cable termination can not be accommodated in the
cabling chamber of the main panel. Rear extension not acceptable.
Where more than one cable have to be terminated per unit, the
arrangement shall permit connection and disconnection of cables
separately without disturbing other cables.
Power cable termination facilities shall be designed to facilitate easy

approach to CTs.
13.5 All Power and control terminals shall be stud type (ELMEX make) only.
ELMEX make terminals type CATDM4 shall be used for CT connections.
At least 20% spare terminals for client external connection shall be
provided in each terminal block. For all external cables, including power
cables, only stud type terminals suitable for eyelet type cable lugs shall be
provided – terminals suitable for pin type terminal lugs is not acceptable.
Cable terminations shall be arranged such that it shall be possible to
attend to any termination without having to disturb / switch off any other
feeder or its constituents.
13.7 TEST AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
13.7.1 Each board to be supplied with
1 set of test plugs.

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 22 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
1 common transport trolley for interchanging with drawable units,

height of the trolley lifting arm adjustable for raising lowering the units.
1 No Numerical relay test kit OMICRON – CMC 256+ or equivalent
1No latest high end lap top with 15.6 LED monitor, chord less
keyboard and mouse and other accessories shall be supplied. (the
configuration shall be decided during DDE)
Any other special purpose tools for maintenance.
14.0 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES
14.1 Provision shall be made for receiving, distribution, isolating and fusing of 2
nos of auxiliary 110V DC Source supply with auto changeover facility and
monitoring facility. The protective relay shall not give a trip signal for
momentary loss of control voltage.
14.2 Also provision shall be made to receive 240V AC supply for panel space
heating. Panel space heater shall be provided by the vendor.
15.0 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS
15.1 The VENDOR shall completely assemble, with all the associated
equipment including bought out items mounted and wired and test each
cubicle as per relevant standards.
15.2 Vendor shall ensure to use calibrated test equipment having valid
calibration test certificates from standard laboratories traceable to National
Standards.
15.3 Routine tests shall be carried out on completely assembled equipment as

per relevant standards. All Routine tests, for the HT Switchgear will be
carried out at manufacturer’s works in presence of client or his
representative.
15.4 Functional tests shall be carried out to demonstrate the specified control
and interlocks.
15.5 Copies of the test certificates for all bought out items shall be submitted for
the client approval before despatch of the switchgear. Catalogues of
Relays, PT, CT, auxiliary contactors and breakers need to be submitted.
15.6 Oscillographic test records for closing and tripping timings of the
breakers/contactors shall also be furnished. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201
SHEET 23 OF 23
HT SWITCHGEAR
15.7 Type test certificates of HT Switchgear for similar equipment supplied by

the Contractor should be submitted.
(a) Temperature rise test
(b) Short circuit current withstand
(c) Impulse withstand test
15.8 In case type test certificate for similar equipment is not available, the same
shall be conducted and submitted for our approval.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION STANDARDS

1 METAL CLAD SWITCHGEAR IS : 3427 IEC : 62271-200
2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS IS : 13118 IEC : 62271-100
IEC :56 IS : 2516
3 ARRANGEMENT FOR IS :5578,11353 IEC :

SWITCHGEAR BUSBARS, MAIN
CONNECTION AND AUXILIARY
WIRING
4 BUSBARS IS :5082 IEC :
ALUMINIUM
5 BUSBAR SUPPORT IS : 2544 IEC :
INSULATORS
6 DEGREE OF PROTECTION IS : 3427 IEC : 529
7 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS IS : 2705 IEC : 185
8 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS IS : 3156 IEC : 186
9 ELECTRICAL RELAYS FOR IS : 3231 IEC :
POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
10 HRC FUSES IS : 13703 IEC : 262
11 CODE OF PRACTICE FOR IS : 6005 IEC :
PHOSPATING IRON
AND STEEL
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-201 SHEET 1 OF 3 OF
HT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-C
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR AFTER THE AWARD OF CONTRACT
1.0 SWITCHGEAR CUBICLES
1.1 FINAL DIMENSIONS :

a) WIDTH _______________ mm
b) HEIGHT _______________ mm
c) DEPTH _______________ mm
d) MINIMUM SPACE REQUIRED IN FRONT FOR
DRAWING OUT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
_______________ mm
e) MINIMUM SPACE REQUIRED AT THE BACK _______________ mm
f) LARGEST PACKAGE FOR TRANSPORT _______________ mm
W X D X H MM
1.2 WEIGHTS
a) CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH OPERATING _______________ Kg.

MECHANISM, OIL ETC
b) CUBICLE WITHOUT BREAKER TRUCK _______________ Kg.
c) CUBICLE COMPLETE WITH BREAKER _______________ Kg.
d) IMPACT LOADING FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN TO
INCLUDE THE DEAD LOAD PLUS IMPACT DUE TO
BREAKER OPERATION IN TERMS OF THE
EQUIVALENT DEAD LOAD _______________
Kg./BKR.
e) HEAVIEST PACKAGE FOR TRANSPORT _______________ Kg.
2.0 LIST OF DRAWINGS
2.1 SWITCHGEAR CUBICLES : OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENT, INCLUDING PLAN,
FRONT ELEVATION, REAR ELEVATION, SIDE
ELEVATION AND RELEVANT CROSS-SECTIONAL
VIEWS
2.2 SWITCHGEAR LAYOUT PLAN INCLUDING FLOOR
OPENINGS AND FIXING ARRANGEMENT
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
HT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-C
2.3 SCHEMATIC CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

2.4 DETAILED WIRING DIAGRAMS INCLUDING TERMINAL
BLOCK NUMBERS, FERRULE NUMBERS AND CABLE
CONNECTIONS
2.5 RELAY AND INSTRUMENT PANEL GENERAL
ARRANGEMENT
2.6 INTERPANEL INTERCONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS
3.0 TEST CERTIFICATES
THE VENDOR SHALL FURNISH THE FOLLOWING TEST
CERTIFICATES, ALONG WITH THE TENDER.
3.1 a) CIRCUIT BREAKERS
b) DISCONNECTS
c) CTS
d) VTS
e) RELAYS
f) BUSHING AND INSULATORS
3.2 ROUTINE TEST CERTIFICATES FOR THE FOLLOWING
:
a) CIRCUIT BREAKERS
b) DISCONNECTS
c) CTS
d) VTS
e) RELAYS
f) BUSHING AND INSULATORS
g) INSTRUMENTS
3.3 EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE DESPATCHED UNLESS
THE TEST CERTIFICATE ARE DULY APPROVED BY
THE CLIENT
3.4 COMPILED AND APPROVED TEST CERTIFICATES
SHALL BE SUBMITTED IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE
DESPATCH OF EQUIPMENT
4.0 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
THE VENDOR SHALL FURNISH SPECIFIED NUMBER
OF COPIES OF THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL WHICH
WOULD CONTAIN DETAILED STEP BY STEP
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
HT SWITCHGEAR
DATA SHEET-C
ALL ERECTION, OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE

REQUIREMENTS. THE MANUAL SHALL INCLUDE,
AMONG OTHER INFORMATIONS, THE FOLLOWING
ASPECTS :
4.1 STORAGE FOR PROLONGED DURATION _______________
4.2 UNPACKING _______________
4.3 HANDLING AT SITE _______________
4.4 ERECTION _______________
4.5 PRECOMMISSIONING TESTS _______________
4.6 OPERATING PROCEDURES _______________
4.7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
4.8 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN DURING OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE WORK
_______________
4.9 OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS SHOWING
RELEVANT CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEWS AND
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
4.10 CATALOGUE NUMBERS OF ALL COMPONENTS LIABLE
TO BE REPLACED DURING THE LIFE OF THE
SWITCHGEAR.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SPECIFICATION FOR LT SWITCHGEAR
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The Scope of this specification covers Supply, design, manufacture,

inspection and testing at manufacturer’s works, delivery FOR site including
packing, forwarding, loading, transportation of LV switchgears/boards and its
accessories with short time current rating of not less than 50kA for 1sec and
momentary current withstand capability of 105kA (peak).

performance of Metal Clad switchgear shall comply with all currently
applicable standards, statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality
where the equipment will be installed. The equipment shall comply latest
editions of the Codes and Standards specified in Data Sheet of this section.
2.2 In the event of conflict between the codes and standards referred to
elsewhere in the specification and the requirements of this specification, the
requirements of this specification shall govern.
2.3 All codes and standards referred to in this specification shall be understood to
be the latest version on the date of offer made by the Bidder unless otherwise
indicated.
3.0 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The switchgear shall be of metal clad, self standing dust proof construction,
indoor cubicle type fitted with Moulded case circuit breakers and fully draw out
type.
3.2 The VENDOR shall submit design and performance data of equipment
offered, by filling up Data Sheets-B of this section for this switchgear.
3.3 The design ambient temperature shall be 50 deg.C.
3.4 The Incomers, bus coupler & outgoing feeders for the Switchgear/boards will
be controlled from Switchgear/boards itself.
3.5 The BIDDER shall furnish type test certificates for all ratings of breakers,
different ratings of current transformers, voltage transformers, protective
relays, switches, contactors and fuses etc., offered by him along with the bid.
3.6 The VENDOR shall furnish calculations establishing the adequacy of the
busbar sizes to meet the continuous and short time current ratings specified.
Continuous current ratings of the droppers in each vertical section shall be at
least equal to the total load on the complete vertical section. However, short ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
time current rating shall be same as the short time current rating of the main
bus bars. Should it be found at any stage that the cross section is inadequate,
Vendor shall provide suitable bus bars without commercial / delivery
implications.
3.7 Selection, sizing and suitability of all components shall be the vendor’s
responsibility and all equipment required for safe and satisfactory operation
shall be included by the vendor even if not specifically mentioned.
3.8 Any auxiliary relays, timers, switches, etc as required while developing the
control schematics and necessary for safe operation, even if these are not
specifically included, shall be supplied by the vendor without any price
implication.
3.9 Breaker or other component rating as specified in the data sheets / SLD is “in-
panel” rating. Vendor may select higher rating of the breaker or other
components if there is derating factor for “in-panel” rating.
3.10 CT ratios / details, load details, feeder nos., name plate details etc. for the
switchgear shall be finalized at the time of review of the vendor drawings
which shall be taken care by the vendor without any impact on cost and time
to owner.
3.11 cable sizes shall be finalized during drawing review stage without any
additional cost and time implication to the owner.
3.12 Numerical protection / control and monitoring system shall be provided for all
incomers, bus couplers, outgoing breaker feeders in PCCs/MCCs as per SLD.
All the protective relays for these switchgears shall be numerical relays of one
make only.
3.13 Atleast 20% of feeder modules covering the range of motors/outgoing feeders
used subject to minimum one module in each bus section shall be provided as
spare.
3.14 Atleast 20% of control terminals in each subject to a minimum of two terminals
shall be provided as spare.
4.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The LT switchgear vendor shall provide necessary contacts and terminals in
the switchgear to achieve the dead bus closing ,manual synchronizing, auto
changeover facilities.
4.2 All hardware required for meeting the functional requirements stated above,
whether specifically listed out in the specification or not, shall be included in
ISSUE
the VENDOR’s scope of supply.
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
4.3 Switchboard shall be completely lined up in one straight row with the type and
quantities of feeders shall be as per the requirement.
4.4 The quantity of each type of modules (Incomer, bus coupler, motor feeder,
power supply feeder, Bus PT, DC & AC control supply arrangement) required
for various switchgear shall be as per the requirement.
4.5 It shall be the responsibility of the VENDOR to ensure that the characteristics
of the CTs, VTs, relays and all other devices offered by him are such as to be
suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
4.6 All the devices/equipment like bus support insulators, circuit breakers, VTs
etc., mounted inside the switchgear shall be suitable for continuous operation
and satisfactory performance under supply & site conditions CT & PT sizing
calculations shall also be submitted along with scheme drawing submission.
4.7 To avoid any interference between floor supporting beams and panel cable
entry space, VENDOR shall adjust the location and orientation of the vertical
panels to clear the interference. The VENDOR, if required for this purpose,
shall supply dummy panels without any commercial implication. The extent of
interference will be furnished to successful BIDDER during the VENDOR
drawing review.
4.8 Design margin of 20% shall be considered for sizing of various

equipments(busbars,etc.,).
4.9 All feeders shall be controlled from PLC based control system , CCR ECP and
from the switchgear. All the protection and safety interlocks shall be hardwired
in the Switchgear itself. Local / Remote selection shall be provided in
switchgear. Local selection is envisaged for local operation from Switchgear.
Remote selection shall enabled rom ECP / PLC. A ECP/PLC selector switch
shall be proved in the ECP. Local trial start of Motor is envisaged from Local
push button station also.
4.10 Local start push button shall be hardwired to PLC control system so as to
check the process permissive for starting the drives/fans/pumps, whereas
local stop push button shall be directly hard wired to concerned switch gear
for tripping. One more status contact for latched condition of stop push button
shall be hard wired to PLC control system for necessary alarming
5.1 MECHANICAL DESIGN
5.1.1 The LT switchgear shall be sheet steel metal-clad, floor mounted, free
standing design.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
5.1.2 The switchgear shall be of indoor, floor mounted of uniform height, made up of
the requisite vertical sections, dust and vermin proof construction. The degree
of protection for ratings upto 2500A should be IP54 or better and for rating
more than 2500A it should be IP 42 or better.
5.1.3 Adjacent switchgear cubicles shall be provided with side sheets on either side
to ensure complete isolation. The switchgear shall be easily extendable on both
sides by the addition of vertical sections.
5.1.4 All the floor mounted Switchgears/boards shall be provided with base frame
which shall be suitable for tack welding to the floor embedded channels.
5.1.5 Removable gland plates shall be provided for power and control cables. The
gland plates shall be 3mm thick for panel with breaker cubicles and 2mm thick
for other cubicles. The gland plates for single core cables shall be of non-
magnetic material. The gland plate shall be of anti rusting, undrilled removable
gland plates.
5.1.6 Operating devices shall be incorporated only in the front of the switchgear. No
equipment needing manual operation shall be located less than 250 mm above
ground level and operating height not to exceed 1800mm.
5.1.7 The switchgear shall be divided into distinct vertical sections comprising of
a) Individual feeder module which shall be integral multiples of basic

module, containing all associated equipment, enclosed in sheet steel
enclosure on all sides and the rear except cable alley side and provided
with hinged door on the front.
b) A complete metal enclosed, busbar compartment running horizontally,

and a vertical busbar compartment serving all modules in vertical
section.
c) A vertical cable alley covering the entire height, except horizontal

busbar compartment with minimum 300mm width for Switchgear/board
modules at right hand side.
d) A horizontal separate enclosure or enclosures separated by hylum /

FRP sheets for power and control buses with tap off connections to
each vertical section.
5.1.8 The current transformers shall be mounted on the fixed portion of the
switchgear but not directly on buses or the breaker truck.
5.1.9 The incomer & outgoing feeders of all Switchboards shall be fully drawout type
as specified in the enclosed drawings.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
5.1.10 All identical equipment and corresponding parts including chassis of drawout
modules of the same size shall be fully interchangeable, without having to carry
out modifications. Similar equipments and components shall be of same make.
5.1.11 The draw-out contacts shall be made of copper/ copper alloy/aluminium faces,
which shall be silver or tinplated.
5.1.12 Instruments, relays and control devices shall be flush-mounted on hinged

door of the metering compartment located in the front portion of cubicle.
5.1.13 Door shall be supported by strong hinges and braced in such a manner as to
ensure freedom from sagging, bending and general distortion of panel or
hinged parts.
5.1.14 Door locks shall require special keys to ensure opening of the same by
authorized person.
5.1.15 All removable covers shall be gasketed all around with neoprene gaskets. All
louvers shall have removable screens with wire mesh. Vent openings where
necessary shall be covered with grills so arranged that hot gases or other
material cannot be discharged through them in a manner that can injure the
operation personnel. The screens and grills shall be made of either brass or
G.I. wire mesh with mesh size of less than 1 mm.
5.1.16 Busbars
a) The Bus bar and connection shall be of high conductivity Aluminium of

suitable hardness and purity complying with as per IS 5082.
b) Three phase, neutral (with minimum 50% rating of main bus bar) and
continuous earth Bus. Bus bar and tapping shall be provided with Heat
shrinkable PVC Sleeves.
c) Maximum temperature of the main busbars and busbar connections,

under operating conditions, when carrying rated normal current at rated
frequency shall not be more than 40 deg. C above ambient of 50 deg. C,
Temperature rise of joints shall be as per the relevant standards. Busbar
temperature limits shall be adhered to without forced cooling method. For
tap off busbars, the current rating shall be at least equal to
corresponding breaker(s) rating. The busbar sleeves & shroud material
shall be suitable for continuous operating temperature of 10 Deg. C
higher than the maximum permissible operating temperature of busbars /
joints.
d) Both horizontal and vertical bus bars to be designed and supported to

withstand the thermal and dynamic stress corresponding to rated short
time and peak withstand current specified. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
e) Cross section of main horizontal bus to be uniform throughout the

switchboard and continuous in one transport unit.
f) Busbar support insulators shall be of non-hygroscopic material having

high impact and dielectric strength with an anti tracking contour.
g) All the busbars shall be insulated with close fitting sleeve and all bus
taps, joints shall be insulated with moulded caps.
h) Bus bar sleeves shall be of colour-coded type. If the colour-coded type

insulating sleeves are not available, busbars shall be colour coded with
coloured bands at suitable intervals.
i) Busbar configuration shall be red, yellow, blue for three phase AC from
front to back or top to bottom or left to right when viewed from front.
j) Rating of horizontal buses shall be in line with incomer rating and vertical
bus bar for the compartment shall commensurate with all outgoing
feeders. The selected busbar size shall be suitable for the full short-
circuit power.
k) The material of control power supply buses shall be electrolytic copper.

These buses shall be insulated, adequately supported and sized to suit
specific requirements.
l) Provision for 230V AC single phase feeding arrangement for the purpose
of motor space heating, panel space heating, plug and socket etc. shall
be provided and each shall be separately fed by individual MCBs.
m) All bus connectors shall be silver/tin plated.
n) Power busbar joints shall be bolted type with spring washers. Bolts and
washers shall be cadmium plated.
o) Busbars shall be 3 phase and neutral running horizontally or vertically.
p) Neutral bus shall run on insulators with facility for connection to earth
busbar.
q) Removal of busbars shall be possible without disconnecting external

cables.
5.1.17 Lables
a) Each switchgear cubicle shall be fitted with a label on the front and rear ISSUE
of the cubicle indicating the switchgear designation, rating, etc. On the R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
rear side, the labels shall be provided on that part of the switchgear
which is not removable. Each relay, instrument, switch, fuse and other
devices shall be provided with separate label. Size, wording and
languages of the labels shall be subject to the client approval.
b) The Labels shall be made by non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid with

engraved inscriptions of white letters on black ground.
5.1.18 Surface Treatment
a) All metal parts of the panel to undergo surface treatment that includes
de-rusting, cleaning, chemically degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing,
phosphating and passivating followed by spraying with two coats of zinc
oxide primer and baking in oven.
b) Shade of paint :
Panel interior : RAL 7032
Panel exterior : RAL 7032
5.2 SAFETY INTERLOCKS & FEATURES
The switchgears shall be provided with the following interlocks:-
5.2.1 Withdrawal or engagement of circuit breakers or switch (isolator) shall not be

possible unless it is in the open position.
5.2.2 Breaker cannot be closed in any intermediate position other than the 3 fixed
positions.
5.2.3 With the breaker in closed condition, it cannot be racked in from any of the 3
positions to another.
5.2.4 Operation of a circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is in service

position, withdrawn to test position or fully drawn out. It shall not be possible
to close electrically the circuit breaker in service position, without completing
the auxiliary circuit between the fixed and moving portions.
5.2.5 Mechanical stopper to prevent accidental falling while withdrawing.
5.2.6 Remote closing of breaker not permitted with door open.
5.2.7 Insertion of breaker into ‘Service’ position not possible if the shutters are not
free. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
5.2.8 Door can be opened only when breaker is OFF and is in ‘Isolated’ position.
5.2.9 Caution nameplate, “Caution Live Terminals” shall be provided at all points
where the terminals are likely to remain live and isolation is possible only at
remote end, i.e. incomer to the switchgear. Suitable interlock shall be wired
for the purpose.
5.3 SWITCHGEAR EARTHING
5.3.1 Continuous earth bus of minimum size 50 x 10 mm copper, designed to carry

the peak short circuit and short time fault current as specified.
5.3.2 Provision at the bottom extending throughout the length of the board, bolted /
brazed to the frame work of each panel with an earthing terminal at each end
for terminating external earth conductor including provision for termination of
cable armouring at earth bus.
5.3.3 The earth bus shall have sufficient cross section to carry the momentary short
circuit and short time fault current for at least (1) second without exceeding
maximum allowable temperature rise causing damage to the switchgear.
5.3.4 Vertical earth bus for earthing individual functional units.
5.3.5 Looping of earth connection resulting in loss of earth connection to other

devices when the loop is broken, not permitted.
5.3.6 Withdrawable units provided with self-aligning, spring loaded, silver plated
copper scrapping earth contacts of make before / break after type ensuring
earth continuity from service to the test position.
5.3.7 Positive earthing of circuit breaker frame shall be maintained when it is in the
connected position and in all other positions whilst the auxiliary circuits are
not totally disconnected.
5.3.8 Hinged doors shall be earthed through flexible earthing braid of adequate
cross section.
5.3.9 Bolted joints, slices, taps etc. to the earth bus shall be made with at least two
bolts.
5.3.10 All non-current carrying metal work of the switchgear shall be effectively
bonded to the earth bus.
6.0 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
6.1 ELECTRICAL FEATURES ISSUE

R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
6.1.1 Air break triple pole / four pole draw out type conforming to IS 2516-1980.
6.1.2 Rated continuous current as specified.
6.1.3 Rating above 400 A shall be controlled by ACB.
6.1.4 Symmetrical interrupting capacity shall be 50kA.
6.1.5 Performance category : P2
6.1.6 Auxiliary switches mounted on the fixed portion of the cubicles and directly
operated from the breaker operating mechanism on each breaker having 6
‘NO’ and 6 ‘NC’ potential-free contacts rated for 0.5 amp (inductive breaking)
110V DC shall be provided. The contacts shall be in addition to those utilised
in the control circuit of each breaker and shall be exclusively meant for the
client use in external interlocks and controls.
6.2 CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATING MECHANISM:
6.2.1 Circuit breaker shall be power operated by a motor charged spring operated
mechanism. It shall be strong, rigid, positive and fast in operation to ensure
that
a. Main poles of the breakers shall be such that unless otherwise

specified, the maximum difference between instants of contacts
touching during closing shall not exceed half cycle of rated frequency.
b. Main poles of the breakers shall operate simultaneously. There shall be

no objectionable rebound of moving contacts and the mechanism shall
not require any critical adjustment.
6.2.2 Operating mechanism shall be non-pumping electrically and mechanically

under every method of closing (except during manual closing of a breaker for
maintenance). Electrical antipumping feature shall be obtained by means of
an auxiliary relay and use of a contactor to achieve this feature shall not be
acceptable.
6.2.3 Mechanism shall be such that failure of any auxiliary spring shall not prevent
tripping and will not cause tripping or closing operation of the power operated
closing devices. When the circuit breaker is already closed, failure of any
auxiliary spring shall not cause damage to the circuit breaker or endanger the
operator.
6.2.4 The closing release shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between
85% and 110% of the rated voltage. A shunt trip shall operate correctly under
all operating conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity
of the circuit breaker and all values of supply voltage between 70% and 110%
of rated voltage.
6.2.5 Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material.

Bearings which require grease shall be equipped with pressure type grease ISSUE
fittings. Bearing pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately pinned R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
and locked to prevent loosening or changing adjustment with repeated

operation of the breaker.
6.2.6 Spring charged stored energy mechanism to ensure high speed closing and
tripping independent of the operating forces.
6.2.7 The circuit breakers shall be fully draw out type. The circuit breakers shall have
distinct service, test, isolated and maintenance positions. In the test position the
circuit breakers shall be capable of being tested for operation without
energising the power circuits.
6.2.8 The test position should preferably be obtained without the need to disconnect
normal control connections and use extension cords for testing.
6.2.9 Emergency tripping by mechanically operated trip push button (shrouded to

prevent accidental tripping directly on the trip bar.)
6.2.10 Mechanical indication to show:

a) Closing spring charged.
b) Breaker ON / OFF / TRIP indication.
c) Breaker in Test/Service Positions.
6.2.11 Non-reset type operation counters.
6.2.12 One opening and one closing operation without control supply.
6.2.13 Provision also for manual charging with spring charging motor
automatically de-coupled as soon as charging handle is inserted.
6.2.14 Local Remote Selector switch (lockable) type to be provided for each breaker
panel.
6.3 SPRING OPERATED MECHANISM
6.3.1 Spring operated mechanism, shall be complete with motor of adequate rating,
opening spring, closing spring with limit switch for automatic charging and all
necessary accessories to make the mechanism a complete operating unit.
6.3.2 As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of closing

and opening operations shall be possible. After failure of power supply to the
motor, at least one open-close-open operation of the circuit breaker shall be
possible.
6.3.3 Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be used
solely for charging the closing spring.
6.3.4 Closing action of the circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring ready
for tripping.
6.3.5 When closing springs are discharged, after closing a breaker, closing springs
shall automatically be charged for the next operation. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
6.3.6 Motor shall be such that it requires only about 15 sec. for fully charging the
closing spring. Motors shall be rated for 110 V DC shall operate satisfactorily
at all values of voltage between 85% to 110% of rated voltage. Motor shall be
protected against overloads and stalling.
6.3.7 Mechanical indicators to indicate charged and discharged condition of spring

shall be provided.
6.3.8 Alternate means must be provided to charge the closing springs manually.
Necessary handles shall be supplied with Circuit Breakers.
6.4 DRAW-OUT FEATURES
6.4.1 Distinct position viz. service, test, and isolated with the door closed.
6.4.2 Mechanical position indication and locking / latching facility for all 3
positions.
6.4.3 Power connections – self aligning, plug-in type contacts.
6.4.4 Control connections – sliding or plug socket type, mechanically coupled, to

prevent wrong insertion, continuous rating 16 amps minimum.
6.4.5 Automatic safety shutters to prevent accidental contact with live parts
when the breaker is withdrawn.
6.4.6 The break contact shall be on the breaker side.
6.4.7 The following interlocks are to be provided:
a) The circuit breaker cannot be moved from test to service or vice versa
when the breaker is ‘ON.’
b) The circuit breaker cannot be switched on when the breaker is in any

position between test and service position.
c) The control wiring plug cannot be disconnected from the socket when the
breaker is in service position.
d) Provision shall be made to trip the breaker if tried to draw out when the
breaker is in closed condition.
e) Breaker cannot be racked in from isolated to ‘test’ position with the door
open together with provision for defeat of this interlocking, however, the
door can be closed only when the breaker is brought back to ‘isolated’
position.
7.0 MCCB
7.1 All MCCBs shall have extended rotary handle and extended busbar link. ISSUE
Operating handle for operating MCCBs from door of board shall be provided. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
7.2 For all MCCBs, Ics = 100% of Icu.
7.3 All protective components especially MCCBs installed in Normal/Emergency

panels shall be with Utilisation Category "B" (i.e. offering time discrimination
with downstream devices).
7.4 MCCBs shall be of current limiting type. Operating mechanism shall be quick-
make, quick-break and trip-free type.
7.5 The instantaneous short circuit release of MCCB shall be so chosen by the
VENDOR as to operate at a current in excess of the peak motor inrush
current and a range of settings shall be provided for the client selection.
7.6 MCCB terminals shall be shrouded and designed to receive cable lugs for
cable sizes relevant to circuit ratings.
7.7 Protection tripping of MCCB shall be identified with Trip/Alarm contact.
7.8 MCCB shall have auxiliary contacts for indications.
7.9 Trip position/status of MCCB shall be distinct.
7.10 MCCBs shall be designed to enable safe on-site installation of auxiliaries such
as voltage releases (shunt and undervoltage releases) and indication switches
as follows:
a) they shall be separated from power circuits,
b) all electrical auxiliaries shall be of the snap-in type and fitted with terminal
blocks,
c) all auxiliaries shall be common for the entire range,
d) auxiliary function and terminals shall be permanently engraved on the

case of the circuit breaker and the auxiliary itself,
e) the addition of auxiliaries shall not increase the volume of the circuit
breaker.
8.0 MPCB
8.1 The MPCB shall comply with the latest IEC 60947 –1 (general rules), IEC
60947 – 2 (for circuit breakers) and IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starters). The
MPCB shall be suitable for AC3 duty applications (motor applications) at
415V, 50Hz. The MPCB shall have a typical electrical life of 100000 ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
operations (at AC3 duty). It shall be three-pole.
8.2 The MPCB shall be of current limiting type with a range of breaking capacity
of 50kA at 415 V, 50Hz.
8.3 It should be resistant to flame, shock and vibration to support the use of
MPCB in adverse condition.
8.4 The MPCB should have built in phase loss prevention. The MPCB shall have
continuously adjustable thermal overload setting from 60% - 100% (approx) of
frame’s rated current (A) and the magnetic pick-up (for short circuit protection)
should get automatically adjusted to offer coordinated protection. The thermal
elements (overload protection) should include automatic compensation for
ambient temperature variations.
8.5 In order to ensure maximum safety, the power contacts will be isolated by a
chamber from other functions such as operating mechanism, the enclosure,
the release, the auxiliaries .The operating mechanism of the motor circuit
breaker will be snap action for opening and closing with free tripping of the
operating handle. All the poles will trip open and close simultaneously.
Because they are suitable for isolation, these circuit breakers, in open
position, provide an adequate isolation distance & indicate the actual position
of moving contact by the position of the operator. All live parts are protected
against direct finger contact from front.
8.6 The state of operation will be clearly indicated through “ON”, “OFF” & “TRIP”
position.
8.7 The MPCB should be capable of 100% discrimination and Type 2 co-
ordination wherever required, and the vendor shall furnish a selection chart for
the same.
8.8 The MPCB shall have built in facility for padlocking in ‘OFF’ position. The
MPCB shall have provision for mounting electrical auxiliaries like ON / OFF
indication, TRIP indication, remote switch-off through shunt or under voltage
coil and panel building accessories like door interlock, common bus bar, etc.
the addition of electrical control or rotary control must neither hide nor lock the
adjustments of the breaker.
8.9 The auxiliaries will be separated from the power contacts and will be common
for the complete range. The addition of the auxiliaries will not increase the
volume of the device
9.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
9.1 The CTs and VTs shall be dry type, withstand momentary and short time
current ratings of the associated switchgear. For feeders with fuse, CTs shall ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
have withstood capacity equal to let-through current of associated fuse.
9.2 The thermal and dynamic stability current for CTs shall be same as for the air
circuit breakers. CT ratio shall be as per requirement. Protection and
measuring current transformer shall be bar primary / window type with 1A
secondary conforming to IS-2705.
9.3 Measuring CTs of Switchgear/board incomers and outgoing feeders shall

have Cl 1 accuracy class & it shall be of Cl 0.5 accuracy class if it is
connected to Multifunction meter(MFM). The CTs shall have saturation factor
of not less than 1.5 and higher limit shall be compatible with the overload
capacity of the instrument connected on the secondary side.
9.4 Protection CTs shall have their accuracy and burden as-required by the
protection circuits in which they are used and shall have saturation factor of
not less than 20.
9.5 CTs shall be provided with test links in both secondary leads for carrying out
current and phase angle measurement.
9.6 CTs shall have polarity marks indelibly marked on each transformer and at
the associated terminal block. Facility shall be provided for short circuiting
and earthing the CT secondary at the terminal blocks.
9.7 Line PTs provided on each incomer and Bus PTs provided in the bus shall be
of drawout type. The PTs shall be dry epoxy resin moulded type.
9.8 High voltage windings of voltage transformer shall be protected by current

limiting HRC fuses. The voltage transformer and fuses shall be completely
disconnected and visibly grounded in fully draw-out position. ( Option of using
PT shall be provided with MCB on primary side and MCB on secondary side
shall be explored)
9.9 LED indications for voltage availability in line PT and Bus PT modules shall
be provided.
9.10 The CTs and VTs shall be of cast resin type with winding insulation of class B
or better and shall be able to withstand the thermal and mechanical stress
resulting from the rated short time withstand and peak withstand current
ratings of the Switchgear.
9.11 The ratings of the instrument transformers shall be based on the calculations
during the detailed engineering stage. The calculations shall be submitted for
the client approval. It shall be the responsibility of the VENDOR to ensure that
the ratings are adequate for the relays and meters furnished by him taking
into consideration the lead resistance for the remote connected equipment.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
9.12 The VA burden Knee-Point voltage, CT resistance and magnetizing current

shall be calculated by the vendor and the same shall be reviewed by client
before proceeding with manufacture. Final CT ratio shall be furnished during
drawing review stage.
10.0 COMPARTMENT DESIGN
10.1 Pilot devices operable from the front.
10.2 Vertical wire way to accommodate all cables.
10.3 Protection against accidental contact with live parts while doing maintenance
work in a compartment and keeping others in service.
10.4 Compartment door interlocked with the main power isolating device for safety
with provision for defeating it by authorized person.
10.5 All compartments to have covering at the bottom to preclude entry of dust,
rats, lizards etc.
10.6 Space of about 200mm to be left vacant at bottom throughout the length of
the Switchgear/board for ease of cabling.
10.7 Power circuit isolation device to have facility for locking.
10.8 Module ON, OFF & TRIP indications shall be provided through LED indication
lamps.
11.0 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS:
11.1 Shall be capable of interrupting ten times the rated current for rated sizes
upto 100A and eight times the rated current for larger sizes.
11.2 Suitable to carry the prospective short circuit without damage or injurious
heating till the protective device operates.
11.3 Coil shall be designed for AC. No economy resistors shall be used.
11.4 Insulation for coils shall be class ‘E’ or better.
11.5 Shall pick up positively at voltage between 85% to 110% of rated value.
11.6 Drop out shall be not more than 70% of rated value.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
11.7 For frequently reversing drives, AC 3 rating selected shall be 50% higher than
full load current of the motor at the specified duty cycle.
11.8 Derated AC4 ratings shall be selected for inching and plugging operation of
the drive.
11.9 Minimum 2 NO + 2 NC auxiliary contacts with minimum rating of 10A, 415V

for rated duty AC-11 and 2A, 110V for rated duty DC-11.
11.10 DC contactors shall be provided with adequately rated magnetic blow out coil
for effective arc quenching.
11.11 For reversible drives, electrically & mechanically interlocked contactors shall
be used.
12.0 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
12.1 Dry type 415V / 240V.
12.2 Control transformers shall be provided in bus section of individual

Switchgear/board for deriving control supply at 240V AC, 1 phase.
13.0 FUSES
13.1 Fuses generally shall be of the HRC cartridge fuse-link type having a certified
rupturing capacity of not less than 80 kA at 440V.
13.2 Fuses shall be provided with visible indication to show that they have
operated.
13.3 Fuse ratings chosen by the VENDOR for application in various circuits shall
be subject to the client approval.
13.4 Fuses shall preferably be mounted in moulded plastic carriers and shall be
complete with fuse bases.
13.5 Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall be directly
mounted on plug-in type of bases. In such cases an insulated fuse pulling
handle shall be provided for each size of fuse for each switchboard.
14.0 MOTOR STARTERS
ISSUE
14.1 CONTACTORS R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
14.1.1 Motor starter contactor shall be of the electromagnetic type rated for
uninterrupted duty as defined in applicable standards
14.2 DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS
14.3 Direct-on-line starters shall be suitable for Class AC 3 utilisation category as

specified in applicable standards.
14.4 AUTOMATIC STAR-DELTA STARTERS
14.4.1 Automatic star-delta starters shall comprise three sets of contactors one for the
line, one for the star point and one for the delta, and a timer to automatically
change the connections from star to delta.Star-delta contactors shall be
electrically interlocked to permit starting of the motor in the proper sequence,
namely star contactor closing, line contactor closing, timer energised after time
delay, timer contact de-energising the star contactor, and delta contactor
closing.Star-delta starters shall be suitable for AC 3 utilisation category as
specified in applicable standards.
14.5 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
14.5.1 Starters shall be complete with a three element, positive acting, ambient
temperature compensated, time lagged thermal overload relay with adjustable
settings and built in single phasing preventer. The setting range shall be
properly selected in accordance with the rating of the motor.
14.5.2 Bimetal overload relays with single phase preventer shall be provided
wherever required along with necessary command, feed back cable, coupling
relays etc. Provision shall be made for resetting of Bimetal overload relays
without opening the module door.
14.5.3 Thermal overload relays shall be hand reset type,
14.5.4 'Stop' push button of the starter and hand reset device shall be separate from
each other.
15.0 RELAYS
15.1 Flush mounted Protection Relays of Numerical type shall be provided on the
front panel for each incomer, bus coupler and outgoing/motor feeders. All the
Relay’s parameters, i.e. protection functions, logic controls, communication,
LEDs inputs and outputs shall be programmed and modified by the
pushbuttons located on the front panel. An alphanumeric, 32 character LCD
screen display for relay’s data (setting, measurements, etc.) on front panel
shall be provided. Protection Relay shall perform and offer the following
function in compact design;
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
a) Protection
b) Monitoring
c) Diagnosis
15.2 Application Software provided for Numerical relays shall be possible to asses
via the RS232 port on the front panel to pre-set all the relay parameters.
15.3 Software shall be fully compatible with windows, and download relay settings,
pull up current relay setting and upload measurement values, diagnostic data,
fault records, disturbance records, start-up current and voltage shapes and
event logging data.
15.4 Contractor shall offer Numerical relay with fibre optic communication port as
an optional.
15.5 Numerical Relay shall be provided with LED indication for each protection and
hand reset pushbutton to reset the protection manually. Also remote reset
shall be possible through communication link.
15.6 The auxiliary relays and timers may be provided in fixed cases. All protective
relays, auxiliary relays and timers shall be provided with hand reset operation
indicators (flags) or LED's with push button for resetting.
15.7 DC auxiliary relays shall be designed for 110V DC without external resistor
unless otherwise specified elsewhere and shall operate satisfactorily between
75% and 110% of the rated voltage. Relays shall have adequate thermal
capacity for continuous operation in circuit in which they are used.
15.8 All relays shall withstand the test voltage 2 kV AC rms for one minute.
15.9 The motor data and characteristics for all motors shall be furnished to the
vendor at the time of drawing review. The motor protection relay
characteristics and the recommended setting for each motor feeder/other
feeders shall be decided by the vendor based on the motor characteristic /
data supplied by the owner.
15.10 The vendor shall provide relay setting assistance during commissioning stage
& shall furnish technical information required like relay setting chart and relay
co-ordination curves.
15.11 The protective relays shall have high degree of reliability, low power
consumption and Plug-in / draw-out type, of modular assembly to facilitate
maintenance.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
15.12 All relays, metering and control components shall be mounted on the panel
front only. All dummy panels and rear extensions required for bus trunking,
cable terminations, mounting of relays, metering and control components etc.
shall be supplied by vendor.
15.13 All the relays shall be wired in such a way that power supply failure to the
relay does not cause mal operation of another relay.
15.14 The relays shall be completely tropicalised to operate satisfactorily in the

ambient conditions specified in Project Information.
15.15 Protective relays shall be suitable for secondary rating of CTs and when
drawn out should short CT secondary which should not even momentarily get
open circuited.
15.16 Master trips relays shall be provided for protection trips. It shall meet the
following requirements:
a) It shall be latch in type with hand reset facility.
b) Operating time shall not exceed 20ms.
c) It shall have heavy duty normally closed (NC) contacts.
d) Supervision of the relays shall be possible.
15.17 Required number of high speed trip relays, supervision relays, auxiliary
relays, timers, contact multiplication relays, etc., shall be provided in the
panels to meet the system requirements and to meet the system operation
philosophy indicated in the specification elsewhere.
15.18 All the numerical relays shall comply with the prevalent emission and
immunity levels. Necessary certificates as per IEC/EN shall be furnished /
made available during review of documents / detail engineering.
16.0 INSTRUMENTS & ACCESSORIES
16.1 Accuracy class for indicating instruments shall be 1.0 or better.
16.2 Ammeter & Voltmeter shall be of Analogue type.
16.3 Multi function meter shall be of digital type and accuracy class of 0.5
16.4 All indicating instruments shall conform to IS : 1248 – 1983 and IS – 2419 –
1979. It shall be located in the upper part of the panel. ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
16.5 Meters shall be 96 sq.mm square, 90 deg. scale, flush case, non-reflecting
bezels, clearly divided and indelibly marked scales, sharply out lined pointers
and zero adjusting device.
16.6 Control and instrument switches shall be rotary type provided with
escutcheon plates clearly marked to show operating position and suitable for
semiflush mounting with only switch front plate and operating handle
projecting out.
16.7 Breaker control switches shall be pistol grip black and selector switches shall
be oval or knob, black. Breaker control switches shall be 3 position spring
return to neutral. Instruments selector switches shall be of the maintained
stay-put type. Contacts of the switches shall be spring assisted and contact
faces shall be with rivets of pure silver. The contact ratings shall be adequate
to meet the requirements of circuit capacity in which they are used. If
specified in data sheets, control switches with built-in flashing type
discrepancy lamp shall be provided to control circuit breaker.
16.8 Push buttons shall be provided wherever specified. They shall be provided with
inscription plates engraved with their functions. Push buttons shall be rated for
10A at 240V AC and 2A at 110 V DC, with 2 NO and 2NC contacts. Start PB
shall be green in colour and Stop PB shall be red coloured stay put type.
16.9 The ammeter range should be such as to read the motor full load current at
75% of scale and 6 times the motor current at 100% of scale the scale being
suppressed between 75% to 100%.
16.10 Indicating lamps shall be Cluster type LEDS.
16.11 Space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided inside each panel. They
shall be suitable for 240 V, 1 ph, 50 cycles supply. They shall be complete with
MCB or HRC fuses, isolating switches and adjustable thermostat.
16.12 Each switchgear panel shall be provided with 240 Volts, 1 phase, 50 cycles, 5
amps. 3 pin receptacle with switch located in a convenient position.
16.13 The single phasing preventer relay shall be provided with the following
characteristics.
a) Operate for supply voltage unbalance of more than + 5% and when relay
internal wiring is open circuited.
b) Not operate for 3 ph supply failure.
c) Instantaneous hand reset type.

ISSUE
d) Visual indication for operation. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
e) Suitable for reversible and non-reversible motors.
17.0 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES
17.1 Provision shall be made for receiving, distribution, isolating and fusing of
auxiliary 110V DC Source supply with monitoring relay. The protective relays
shall not give a trip signal for momentary loss of control voltage .
17.2 Also provision shall be made to receive 230V AC supply for panel space
heating. Panel space heater shall be provided by the vendor.
17.3 One 110 V DC feeder shall be provided in each board for power supply of
control, shunt tripping and annunciation purpose.
17.4 Control supply shall have supervision facility, alarm shall be provided for non-
availability of the control supply.
17.5 LEDs shall be provided for the indication purpose.
17.6 Isolation arrangement shall be provided on each panel to facilitate fault

location and testing. Separate fuses shall be provided for spring charging
motors, for indication lamps and for closing / Tripping circuits of each cubicle.
18.0 INTERNAL CONTROL WIRING
18.1 Control wiring by 650V grade PVC insulated, single core stranded copper
conductor of min. cross section 1.5 sq. mm. CT wiring shall be with 2.5
sq.mm conductor.
18.2 Flexible wire, protected against mechanical damage for wiring to door-
mounted devices.
18.3 Wires identified at each end in accordance with schematic diagrams by PVC
type interlocked ferrules. These shall be firmly located so that these do not
move.
18.4 Interconnection between panels of adjacent shipping sections to be brought

out to a separate terminal block, wires for interconnection properly labelled,
looped and bunched inside the panel for connection at site.
18.5 Not more than two connections on any one terminal.
18.6 All spare contacts and terminals of cubicle mounted equipment and devices
shall be wired to terminal blocks.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
18.7 Switchgear shall be supplied completely wired internally upto terminal blocks.
Inter panel wiring between cubicles of same switchgear shall be routed inside
by the VENDOR.
19.0 EXTERNAL TERMINATION
19.1 Vendor shall provide suitable terminals in the respective panel for interfacing
incoming contacts from other locations. Current rating for these other
locations contacts shall be 110V DC. Contractor to ensure the adequacy of
contact rating and if required shall provide auxiliary relays to meet the making
& breaking current requirements.
19.2 For Motor feeders / Incomers / other feeders, interface requirement shall be
defined during detail engineering and same shall be suitably incorporated in
the control logic by the vendor without any additional cost and time
implication to the owner.
20.0 CONTROL TERMINATON
20.1 650V grade multi-way terminal blocks of non tracking moulded plastic
complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock
nuts and identification strips.
20.2 External terminal block shall be of minimum rating 10 amps and suitable to
receive two numbers 2.5 sq.mm copper conductor and shall preferably be of
cage clamp type.
20.3 Terminal blocks for CTs and VTs shall be provided with test links and
isolating facilities and CT terminals shall have short circuiting and earthing
facility.
20.4 Power and control terminals segregated.
20.5 For CT wiring, stud type terminals shall be provided. CT wiring shall be with
2.5sq.mm.wire and CT terminals shall have provision for shorting the CTs.
20.6 20% spare terminals in each control terminal block shall be provided.
21.0 POWER TERMINATIONS
21.1 Suitable for accepting cables / bus trunking as specified.
21.2 Where more than one cable have to be terminated per unit, the arrangement
shall permit connection and disconnection of cables separately without
disturbing other cables.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
21.3 Power cable termination facilities shall be designed to facilitate easy

approach to CTs.
21.4 The Power terminals provided for all type of feeders should be suitable for the
cable sizes as per the approved calculation.
22.1 The switchgear, circuit breakers and all associated equipment shall be tested in
accordance with relevant standards. All routine tests shall be carried out.
22.2 All meters and other reference devices used for testing shall have valid
calibration from reputed national laboratories/institutes. Inspection by client will
not be carried out unless the vendor confirms that calibrated equipment are
ready for proceeding with the tests.
22.3 Type test certificates of all associated equipment shall be furnished along with
bid.
22.4 The VENDOR shall completely assemble, with all the associated equipment
including bought out items mounted and wired and test each cubicle as per
relevant standards.
22.5 Routine tests shall be carried out on completely assembled equipment as per
relevant standards.
22.6 Functional tests shall be carried out to demonstrate the specified control and
interlocks.
22.7 Copies of the test certificates for all bought out items shall be submitted for the
client approval before despatch of the switchgear. Catalogues of Relays, PT ,
CT , auxiliary contactors and breakers need to be submitted.
22.8 Oscillographic test records for closing and tripping timings of the
breakers/contactors shall also be furnished.
22.9 Type test certificates for similar equipment supplied by the Bidder shall be
submitted. In case type test certificate for similar equipment is not available, the
same shall be conducted in presence of client or his representative if client so
desires.
22.10 Switchboard and Circuit breakers offered shall be of proven design and shall
have been successfully type tested. In case the type tests on the offered
designs of switchboards have not been conducted within the past five years
from the final bid opening date, all required type test shall be conducted by
the successful bidder on the offered design of equipments after order ISSUE
finalization without any extra cost and delivery impact. R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
22.11 Equipment shall not be dispatched unless the test certificates (Type test /
Routine test) are duly approved by the client.
Sl.No. DESCRIPTION STANARDS

1 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND  IS : 13947-1 IEC :
CONTROL GEAR, GENERAL RULES
2 AC CIRCUIT BREAKERS  IS : 13947-2 IEC :
3 ARRANGEMENT FOR SWITCHGEAR BUSBARS, IS :5578,11353 IEC :

MAIN CONNECTION AND AUXILIARY WIRING
4 BUSBARS IS: 5082 IEC:
ALUMINIUM
5 BUSBAR SUPPORT INSULATORS IS : 2544 IEC :
6 ELECTRICAL RELAYS FOR POWER IS : 3231 IEC :
SYSTEM PROTECTION
7 HRC FUSES IS : 13703 IEC : 262
8 CODE OF PRACTICE FOR PHOSPATING IRON IS : 6005 IEC :
AND STEEL
9 FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES OF  IS: 8623 IEC :
SWITCHBOARD AND CONTROL GEAR FOR
VOLTAGES UPTO & INCLUDING 1000V AC &
1200 V DC
10 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND  IS: 13947-3 IEC :

CONTROL GEAR, SWITCHES,
DISCONNECTORS, SWITCH  IEC 947-3 IEC :
DISCONNECTORS AND FUSE
COMBINATION UNIT
11 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS  IS : 8828 IEC :

12 D TYPE FUSES  IS : 8187 IEC :
CONTROL, CONTACTORS AND MOTOR
STARTERS, SECTION-1
ELECTROMECHANICAL CONTACTORS AND
MOTOR STARTERS.

CONTROL GEAR, CONTROL CIRCUIT
DEVICES AND SWITCHING ELEMENTS,
SECTION-1, ELECTROMECHANICAL
CONTROL DEVICES.
15 CODE OF PRACTICE FOR PHOSPHATING  IS : 5082

ALUMINIUM AND ALUMINIUM ALLOYS FOR
ELECTRICAL PURPOSES
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
16 CONTROL TRANSFORMER FOR  IS : 12021

SWITCHBOARD AND CONTROL GEAR FOR
VOLTAGES NOT EXCEEDING 1000V AC
17 STARTERS  IS:8544 IEC:947-4-1

18 CONTROL SWITCHES/PUSH BUTTONS  IS:6875 BS: IEC:
19  IS:2705 BS:7626
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
IEC:185
20
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS  IS:3156 BS:7625
IEC:186
21
INDICATING INSTRUMENTS  IS:1248 BS:89
IEC:51
22  IS:8530 BS:37
AC ELECTRICITY METERS
IEC:
23 CODE OF PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION  IS:10118 BS:
AND MAINTENANCE OF SWITCHGEAR IEC:
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPECIFICATION NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED
TCE.7347A-EL-203 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL SHEET 1 OF 5 O
1.0 SCOPE OF ENQUIRY
1.1 The Scope of work shall comprise of but not limited to the design,
engineering., manufacture, testing and inspection at manufacturer's works,
packing, supply, transportation, delivery to site, unloading and handling at
site, storage, erection and commissioning of hardwired Electrical Control
Panels– ECP to cater for Control, Monitoring, Measurement, Annunciation of
all feeders of 33KV,11KV switchgear and the 415V MCC panels.
2.0 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL – CONTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Two numbers of separate ECP panels shall be provided in the following
substations.
a) Shore substation (Shore ECP)
b) Jetty substation (Jetty ECP)
2.2 The Colour of ECP shall match with the colour of other panels located in the
control Room.
2.3 The Vendor shall consider mosaic type mimic control panel and the mosaic
size shall be of 24 x 24mm each.
3.0 ELECTICAL CONTROL PANEL – OPERATIONAL REQUIREMNTS
3.1 CONTROL AND MONITORING OF CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3.1.1 Shore ECP:
3.1.1.1 The following breaker status and metering shall be monitored in the ECP.
All feeders of 33KV & 11KV switchgear

All feeders of LT emergency panel and LT auxiliary MCC.
3.1.1.2 The Pipe conveyer feeders shall be controlled from ECP in addition to the
local and PLC control. Pipe conveyer feeders shall be provided with
discrepancy type breaker control switch with Close - After Close - Trip - After
Trip position to perform close and open operations from ECP.
3.1.2 Jetty ECP:
3.1.2.1 The following breaker status and metering shall be monitored in the Jetty
ECP.
All feeders 11KV switchgear

All feeders of LT emergency panel and LT auxiliary MCC.
3.1.2.2 The Berth conveyer feeders shall be controlled from from ECP in addition to
the local and PLC control. Berth conveyer feeders shall be provided with
discrepancy type breaker control switch with Close - After Close - Trip - After
Trip position to perform close and open operations from ECP.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

3.2 MIMIC
3.2.1 Mimic shall be provided on the front facia of the ECP.
3.2.2 Mimic strips shall be made of anodised Aluminium and the colour shade of
which shall comply with voltage grade colour code as per IS5921.
3.2.3 The Mimic strip shall be of 6mm width and 4mm thick fixed to the panel by
mechanical means and not by application of adhesive / Bonding glue. The
Mimic for the complete switchgear shall be continuous i.e there shall not be
any gap between the panels.
3.3 MEASUREMENT
3.3.1 All meters shall be transducer driven Analog/digital meter. The meters shall
be duplicated as per the metering in the switchgear. The detailed SLD will be
submitted by the successful EPC contractor for client approval.
3.3.2 For each measurand a 4-20 mA signal would be available from the
corresponding Transducers from Switchgear mounted as a part of the
respective feeder module.
3.3.3 The range of each parameter to be displayed by the meter shall be furnished
to the successful bidder during post bid engineering stage.
3.4 LABELS
3.4.1 All devices on the ECP mounted externally or internally shall be provided with
labels. Only spare feeders shall be with MIMIC & components but without
labels.
3.5 ANNUNCIATION
3.5.1 An Annunciation system comprising an audio – visual display for annunciating

feeders abnormal or failure conditions shall be provided on the ECP.
4.0 AUXILIARY SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
4.1 DC SUPPLY
4.1.1 ECP shall be provided with a provision to receive two (2) numbers of 110V
DC feeders from existing 110V DCDB panel. Manually operated Selector
switch with positions called source-I & source II, shall be provided to select
any one as control supply. The selector switch and the fuses shall be
mounted inside the panel.
4.1.2 Separate fuses shall be provided to all outgoing feeders (for Indications,
Annunciation circuits etc.,) distribution system.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

4.1.3 Supply supervision
Each DC auxiliary supply shall be supervised by supply supervising relays.

The NC contact of the relays shall be delayed on drop off by approximately
100 to 200 msec. for annunciation in Electrical control panel. The relay shall
be provided with flag indicators wherever required.
Failure of DC supply shall be annunciated on 240V AC.
4.2 AC SUPPLY
240V single phase AC supply shall be provided for panel illumination,

heating, Hooter circuit, plug and socket etc..
5.0 EARTHING
5.1 The panels shall be equipped with an earth bus.
5.2 Earth buses of adjoining panels shall be connected for continuity. The
continuous earth bus so formed shall be connected to the main earth grid.
5.3 All metallic cases of the mounted equipment shall be separately connected to
the earth bus by 2.5mm2 copper wires. No loops in the earth wiring shall be
permitted.
5.4 VT neutral secondary shall only be earthed at the terminal block of the panel
through links, such that the earthing of one group may be removed without
disturbing others.
6.0 WIRING
6.1 All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged readily
accessible and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks.
6.2 All wiring associated with DC & AC Supplies shall be carried out with 1100 V
grade stranded copper wires of minimum size 1.5sqmm.
6.3 Wire terminations shall be made with solder-less crimping type of tinned
copper lugs which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves
shall be provided at all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification
plastic ferrules marked to correspond with the wiring diagram shall be fitted at
both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wires shall not fall off
when the wires get disconnected from the terminal blocks.
6.4 All terminals including spare terminals shall be wired up to the terminal block.
7.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE BIDDER
Following drawings and documents need to be submitted by the bidder. ISSUE

R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

a) Control panel dimensions and drawings showing plan, front view,

foundation details, inside view, terminal block location, etc.
b) Detailed GA and Mimic drawings of ECP showing the layout / Location
of following components and devices:
- Analog / Digital Meters
- Annunciator and associated
- Control Switches / Selector switches
- Flasher relays.
- Check synchronizing relays.
- Auxiliary relays as required.
c) Design & preparation of erection drawing of the panels which shall
include floor space requirement, base details, floor opening, earthing
details, etc.
d) Design & preparation of MIMIC, Schematic and wiring diagrams,
Annunciation, Metering of complete system controlled from ECP need
to be furnished for our approval.
e) Type test certificates.
f) Descriptive and illustrative literature of Instruments, meters,
annunciators, control switches, selector switches, push buttons etc.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

Sl.N Description Standards

o.
1. Switchgear general requirements  IS:4237  BS: 7354  IEC
2. Panel wiring  IS 5578 &  
113
53
3. Factory built assemblies of switchgear and  IS:8623 BS : EN  IEC 439
control gear for voltages upto and including 60947
1000V AC and 1200V DC
4. Miniature circuit breakers  IS: 8828 BS:3871  IEC
(P1)
5. HRC cartridge fuse  IS:9224  BS: 88  IEC
6. D Type Fuses  IS: 8187 BS:  IEC :
7. Control switches / push buttons  IS:6875  BS :  IEC :

(P1 & P2)
8. Current transformers  IS 2705 BS:3938  IEC
9. Voltage transformers  IS:3156  BS: 7625  IEC 186
10. Relays  IS 3231 BS:142  IEC 255
11. Indicating instruments  IS: 1248  BS: 89  IEC 51
12. A. C. Electricity meters  IS 722 BS:5685  IEC

13. Elec. graphic (Recording) instruments.  IS:  BS: 90  IEC
14. Degree of Protection  IS 2147 BS:EN6052  IEC

9
15. Climate proofing electrical equipment  IS   IEC
16. Code of practice for phosphating iron and  IS 6005 BS:3189  IEC
steel
17. Environmental test for electronic and  IS:9000  BS:  IEC
electrical equipment
18. Environmental requirements for  IS 6553 BS:  IEC
semiconductor devices and integrated
circuits
19. Technical documentation to be supplied  IS 6756 BS:  IEC
with electronic measuring equipment
20. Metal clad base material for printed circuits  IS: 5921  BS:  IEC
for use in electronic and telecommunication
equipments
21. Terminals for electronic equipment  IS 4007 BS  IEC
22. Transformers and conductors (Power,  IS 6297  BS  IEC
Audio, Pulse & Switching) for electronic
equipment
23 Guide for colour coding of electrical mimic  IS:11954
diagrams
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SPEC NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED
TITLE SHEET 1 OF 9 OF
TCE.7347A-EL- Electrical interface of PLC system
204
1.0 REQUIREMENTS OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1.1 All the measurements, monitoring, control etc. of the HT & LT switchgears is
envisaged through PLC based Control System.
1.2 Control, monitoring, measurement, annunciation, synchronising of complete

electrical system supplied under this contract will be possible from PLC based
Control system through CRTs / keyboards.
1.3 Minimum functional requirement of PLC based control system in respect of

electrical system will be as below:
1.3 PLC BASED SYSTEM - CONTROLS
1.3.1 All 33KV & 11kV breakers in HT Switchgear, 415V breakers in 415V LT Switchgear
will be controlled from PLC based control system. Interlock building will be done in
respective Switchgear.
1.3.2 Control of incomers and bus-coupler breakers of main 33/11KV switchgear will be
possible from PLC based control system through check synchronizing. Check
synchronizing relay will be housed in the respective switchboards. Provision will be
made in PLC based system for selection of only one breaker at a time for
synchronising. The synchronising selection will also activate the check
synchronising relay provided in the respective switchgear panels.
1.3.3 Soft selector switch for selection of operation of equipment from CRT will be
provided in the PLC based control system.
1.3.4 Control of all breakers/contactors from PLC based control system will be done
through interposing relays which will be located in respective switchgear. Control
from PLC shall be possible only when the L/R switch of the breaker is in remote
position.
1.4 Monitoring
PLC based control system will include the following functions:
(1) Indication-Status of breakers position of Local/Remote selector switches,
spring charged indication, service/test position etc.,
(2) Abnormal conditions to be considered for alarm inputs to CRT are:
(i) HV System ( 11&33KV Switchgear)
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
Operation of each Transformer protection, motor protection. Trip

circuit unhealthy of each equipment, protection unhealthy of each
equipment, , CT/VT circuit unhealthy of each CT/VT, Signals
generated in Transformer MB about abnormal operating
conditions of Transformer, DC supply failure of each
protection/control scheme as appropriate, Successful /
Unsuccessful changeover of 33KV&11KV supplies.
(ii) LV System (415V)
Breaker auto trip, individual protective relay operation, trip circuit
failure, DC supply failure, bus under voltage, VT fuse failure.
(iii) Transformers
All alarm and trip conditions of Power & service transformers.
(iv) DC System
DC earth fault, DC under voltage, Individual faults in case of DC
boards, etc.
(v) UPS System
All abnormal conditions of UPS system with details
vi) Battery charger
Individual trouble alarm for chargers with details as available from
equipment.
3) Single line diagram showing Voltage, current, frequency, MW and MVAR
flows, breaker positions will be available on CRT. More than one frame can
be used if all the details cannot be represented on a single frame.
4) Trending facility provided for all analogue parameters.
1.5 Measurement
Transducers, if any required for giving analogue input to PLC system from HT and
LT modules will be provided in the switchgear modules.
Feeder Description CRT
(a) Incoming feeders of 33KV,11KV, V(All phases)

415V Switchgears & MCCs
A(All phases)
kW
kWh, KVAr, Hz
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
Feeder Description CRT
(b) Buscoupler breakers of 33KV,11KV, A(All phases)

& 415V switchgears
(c) 33KV,11KV, & 415V Buses V(All phases)
(d) DC and UPS System A

V
Outgoing feeders
(e)
A,KW,KWhr
33KV,11KV switchgears–
11KV APFCR feeder A,KVAR
415V switchgears A,KW.
1.6 Event logging will be provided for all manual operations and relay operations as detailed
below:
a) Status of each breaker/vacuum contactor of all equipment being controlled.
b) Close and open commands
c) Each protective relay, trip relay, alarm relay operation. Event logging for each
phase will be provided wherever applicable (eg. fuse fail alarm, etc.)
d) Event logger will be a part of the PLC based control system with first up feature.
It will have a time resolution of 1 ms.
1.7 Trending of parameters during disturbance will be with a resolution of 0.5/1.0 sec., and
at 15 minutes during normal operation. The change from normal mode to disturbance
mode will be through threshold/gradient settings provided in the system for analogue
quantities and external binary signals obtained from selected protective relays.
Capturing of momentary values of all these parameters will also be possible triggered
either by a protective relay or by a manual keyboard command.
1.8 Interface with Numerical relays and meters
a) Control from PLC shall be hardwired through IPR. Monitoring shall be through
numerical relay interface with PLC. Metering shall be through meters interfaced
with PLC.
b) Numerical relays shall be serially interfaced in daisy chain or redundant radial
loop or ring and connected to a data concentrator which inturn will be connected
to PLC through redundant link. The protocol shall be an open protocol which can
transmit time stamped data either IEC 60870-103, TCP/IP, OPC. Exact protocol
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
shall be finalized during detailed engineering after coordination with Numerical

relay vendor. Required coordination to be done by the Bidder. No of numerical
relays that will be interfaced in a loop shall be limited to 8. Required mapping
files shall be provided by the Numerical relay vendor for PLC configuration.
c) Data concentrator shall be provided with dual processor, power supply modules.
The architecture diagram shall be submitted by the Vendor which will be
approved by client. The architecture shall be such that cut in a link or failure of
any one component shall not hamper the system apart from the failed
component. Data concentrator shall be located in switchgear room.
d) If Ethernet switches are used, same shall be provided with contact to alarm the
failure and shall have dual power supply inputs, three spare ports. All
components, communication links shall have diagnostic facility and any failure
shall be annunciated in OWS.
e) For metering interface with PLC, the meters shall be looped serially and
connected to the Data concentrator. The protocol shall be modbus. NO of meters
to be connected in a loop shall be limited to 8.
f) Time synchronising of numerical relays, meters, data concentrator shall be done
through network. One separate operator workstation and one engineering work
station shall be provided for electrical control, monitoring and metering.
1.9 Synchronising
a) The incomers of the 33KV & 11KV switchgear shall be provided momentary
paralleling facility. The bus coupler shall have dead bus and auto closure.
b) The functional requirement indicated above are minimum, the Contractor will
provide all necessary controls indications, interlock s & devices required for the
system offered by him. Also, any additional requirement arising during detailed
engineering will be provided by the Contractor without any additional cost to the
Owner.
1.12 Interposing Relays

(a) The interposing relays required for the switchgear / equipment being supplied
under this contract will be located in the respective switchgear.
(b) The coupling relays will be rated for 10 Amp breaking at 110V DC and 10 Amp
make and continuous current at 110V V DC.
1.13 Refer the attached I/O list for the Analogue and SER inputs from various systems to
PLC based system.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
PLC I/O LIST (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)
Analogue SER DI DO
Circuit Description Input
11kV/33KV swgr Circuit Breaker Tripped 1 1
incomer Circuit Breaker Lock out relay 1 1
operated
Protection relays Faulty 1 1
O/C Relay Operated 1 1
E/F Relay operated 1 1
PT Fuse fail 1 1
Trip coil faulty 1 1
Current 1
1
MW
1
Voltage
MWH 1
MVAR 1
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
11KV Motor Circuit Breaker Tripped 1 1
Feeder Circuit Breaker/Vacuum Contactor 1 1
Lock out relay operated
Thermal Overload Protection 1 1
operated
Negative Sequence Operated 1 1
Blocked rotor protection operated 1 1
Trip Coil faulty 1 1
Current 1
1
MW
1
Voltage
MWH
Core Balance protection 1
Differential Protection 1
EPB operated 1
Struck Breaker protection operated 1
Lockout relay operated 1
Thermal pre trip alarm 1
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
Analogue SER DI DO
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
11KV/33KV swgr Circuit breaker tripped 1 1
Bus coupler Circuit Breaker Lock out relay 1 1
operated
Protection relays faulty 1 1
O/C relay operated 1 1
E/F relay operated 1 1
1 1
Bus-A Under Voltage relay operated
1 1
Bus-B under voltage relay operated
1 1
Bus-A PT fuse fail
1 1
Bus-B PT fuse fail
1 1
DC Supply fail
1
Current
1
MW
1
Bus-A Voltage
1
Bus –B Voltage
1
Bus-A frequency
1
Bus –B frequency
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
Power Circuit Breaker tripped 1 1
transformer Circuit Breaker Lock Out relay 1 1
feeder operated
Standby E/F relay operated 1 1
Inst O/C Relay operated 1 1
Bucholz Alarm 1 1
Bucholz Trip 1 1
Oil temp Alarm 1 1
Oil temp trip 1 1
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
Analogue SER DI DO
Winding temp Alarm 1 1
Winding temp trip 1 1
Oil Level Low 1 1
Pressure relief device operated 1 1
Current 1
MW 1
MWH 1
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
415V /MCC Circuit breaker tripped 1 1
Incomers Circuit Breaker Lock out relay 1 1
operated
Voltage 1
MW 1
Current 1
MWH 1
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
415V Motor Circuit Breaker/Vacuum contactor 1 1
feeders Tripped
Circuit Breaker/ Vacuum contactor 1 1
Lock out relay operated
operated
Current 1
1
MW
1
Voltage
MWH
EPB operated 1 1
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
Analogue SER DI DO
415V Board Circuit Breaker tripped 1 1
Feeders Circuit Breaker Lock out relay 1 1
operated
O/C Protection Operated 1 1
E/F protection operated 1 1
Current 1
1
MW
1
Voltage
MWH 1
Lock out relay operated 1
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
415V MCC Bus Circuit Breaker tripped 1 1
Coupler Circuit Breaker Lock out relay 1 1
operated
O/C Protection Operated 1 1
E/F protection operated 1 1
415V Main swgr Bus-A Under 1 1
voltage relay operated
415V Main swgr Bus-B under voltage 1 1
relay operated
DC Supply fail 1 1
415V Main swgr Bus –A PT fuse fail 1 1
415V Main swgr Bus-B PT fuse fail 1 1
1
Current
1
415V Main swgr Bus–A Voltage
1
415V Main swgr Bus-B Voltage
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
DC Control supply failure 1 1
Common
UPS system faulty 1 1
1
UPS System Voltage
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
204
Analogue SER DI DO
1
DC system faullty
1
DC system voltage
415V Contactor Tripped 1 1
MCCB/MPCB Protection relays Faulty 1 1
controlled
motor feeders
operated
Current 1
MW 1
Voltage 1
MWH 1
Breaker OPEN 1 1
Breaker CLOSE 1 1
NOTE 1: THE GIVEN I/O LIST IS ONLY TENTATIVE. THIS LIST IS TO BE FINALISED BY
CONTRACTOR DURING DETAIL DESIGN STAGE BASED ON FUNCTIONAL
REQIREMENTS.
NOTE 2 ; THE ENERGY METERS WILL HAVE A SERIAL LINK INTERFACE WITH PLC
SYSTEM.
1.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
1.1 SHUNT CAPACITORS FOR POWER  IS 13585 & 13925 BS
SYSTEMS IEC
1.2 SERIES REACTOR  IS 5553 BS IEC
1.3 INTERNAL FUSES AND INTERNAL  IS 12672 BS IEC
OVERPRESSURE
DISCONNECTORS FOR SHUNT
CAPACITORS
1.4 PORCELAIN POST INSULATORS  IS2544 BS IEC
(3.3 KV AND ABOVE)
1.5 LIGHTENING ARRESTORS  IS 15086 BS IEC
(SURGE ARRESTORS)
1.6 CONTACTORS  IS:2959 BSEN-60947-1
IEC:9474-1
1.7 AC CIRCUIT BREAKERS  IS:13118 BSEN 60947-2 IEC
947-2
BS:3871(PI) MCCB
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

. .
SPEC NO TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED
TCE.7347A-EL-205 TITLE SHEET 1 OF 23 OF
POWER TRANSFORMERS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general design, material, construction features,

manufacture, inspection, site and performance testing of oil filled power
transformers.

performance of power transformers shall comply with all currently applicable
statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will
be installed. The equipment shall also conform to the latest applicable
standards and codes of practice as on the date of the offer. Nothing in this
specification shall be construed to relieve the VENDOR of this responsibility.
2.2 Transformers shall conform to the current applicable standards and codes of
practice as specified in Data Sheet.
3.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
3.1 All material used shall be of best quality and of the class most suitable for
working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of
temperature and atmospheric conditions without distortion or deterioration or
the setting up of undue stresses in any part, and also without affecting the
strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to
perform.
3.2 Similar parts, particularly removable ones, shall be interchangeable.
3.3 Pipes and pipe fittings, screws, studs, nuts and bolts used for external
connections shall be as per the relevant standards. Steel bolts and nuts
exposed to atmosphere shall be galvanized.
3.4 Nuts, bolts and pins used inside the transformers and tap changer
compartments shall be provided with lock washers or locknuts.
3.5 Exposed parts shall not leave pockets where water can collect.
3.6 Internal design of transformer shall ensure that air is not trapped in any
location.
3.7 Facility shall be provided for lubrication of bearings and mechanisms.
3.8 Materials in contact with oil shall be such as not to contribute to the formation
of acid in oil. Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium
plated.
3.9 Labels, indelibly marked, shall be provided for all identifiable accessories like
relays, switches, fans, current transformers etc. All label plates shall be of
incorrodible material.
3.10 All internal connections and fastenings shall be capable of operating under
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
overloads and over excitation allowed as per specified standards without injury.
3.11 The transformers shall be free from annoying hum and vibration when it is in
operation, even at 110 % rated voltage.
3.11 Painting
3.11.1 The interior of all transformer tanks and other oil filled chambers and internal
structural steel work shall be cleaned of all scale and dust by shot blasting
unless otherwise approved. These surfaces shall be painted with not less than
two coats of heat resistant, oil insoluble and insulating varnish. Steel surfaces
exposed to the weather shall be thoroughly cleaned and have a priming coat of
zinc chromate applied. The second coat shall be of an oil and weather
resistant nature, preferably of distinct colour from the prime and finish coats.
The final coat shall be of a glossy oil and weather resisting non fading paint of
specified shade.
3.11.2 Metal parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion-resistant
material.
3.11.3 Interior surfaces of mechanism chambers and marshalling kiosks shall receive
three coats of paint after proper cleaning. The final coat shall be of a light
coloured anti condensation paint.
4.0 ELECTRICAL AND PERFORMANCE RQUIREMENTS
4.1 Transformers shall operate for continuous duration without injurious heating at
the rated KVA at any voltage within +/- 10 percent of the rated voltage of that
particular tap.
4.2 Transformers shall be capable of taking the load of both the conveyors
simultaneously.Transformers shall be capable of delivering the rated current at
a voltage equal to 105 percent of the rated voltage without exceeding the
limiting temperature rise under the following operating conditions.
Voltage variation ± 10% of rated voltage of that particular tap
Frequency variation +3% -5% of rate frequency
Combined voltage and frequency variation not exceeding the rated v/f
ratio 10%.
4.3 Transformer for two or more limits of voltage or frequency or both shall deliver
its rated KVA under all the rated conditions of voltage or frequency or both;
provided an increase in voltage is not accompanied by a decrease in
frequency.
4.4 Transformers shall be designed for operation at a frequency of 50 Hz.
4.5 The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yokes, at normal voltage
and frequency shall be such that the flux density under continuous overvoltage
conditions as per clause 4.1, 4.6 and 4.7 shall not exceed the maximum
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
permissible values for the type of core and yoke material used. The type of
material and values of flux density in the core/yoke for the 100%, 110%, 125%
and 140% and the hysterics characteristic curves shall be included in the Bid
and in relevant Data Sheet B, and shall be subject to the client approval during
detailed engineering stage.
In case of transformers with variable flux density the voltage variation which
affects the flux density at every tap shall be kept in view while designing
transformers.
4.6 Transformers intended to be connected directly to generator leads in such a

way that they may be subjected to load rejection conditions shall be able to
withstand 1.4 times the rated voltage for 5 seconds and 1.25 times for 1 minute
at the transformer terminals to which the generator is to be connected.
4.7 Transformers shall be designed for the following overfluxing withstand

capability :
a. 110% - Continuous for all transformers
b. 125% - For 1 minute ) For generator transformers unit auxiliary

transformers and other special trans-
c. 140% - For 5 seconds ) formers as specified in Data Sheet-A
Transformers shall operate below the knee of the saturation curve at 110
percent voltage to preclude ferroresonance and non-linear oscillations.
4.8 Unless otherwise stated, transformers shall be capable of operation

continuously, in accordance with the applicable standard loading guide at their
rated KVA and at any of the specified voltage ratios.
4.9 Transformers provided with mixed cooling shall comply as regards rating,
temperature rise and overloads, with the appropriate requirements of
applicable standard when operating with natural cooling and with mixed
cooling.
4.10 Overloads shall be allowed within the conditions defined in the loading guide of
the applicable standard. Under these conditions, no limitations by terminal
bushings, on-load tap changers or other auxiliary equipment shall apply.
4.11 For transformers with tappings, the category of voltage variation will be as
specified in Data Sheet. For transformers with (a) constant flux voltage
variation (CFVV) and (b) variable flux voltage variation (VFVV) full power
tappings shall be provided. (CbVV) the tapping power shall be as applicable in
specified standards.
4.12 Transformers designed for mixed cooling shall be capable of operating under
the natural cooled condition upto the specified load. The forced cooling
equipment shall come into operation by preset contacts in winding temperature
indicator and the transformer will operate as a forced cooled unit. The
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
manufacturer shall set the controls to operate at the temperature he

recommends as being proper for the transformer design. He shall state on the
test report the actual temperature settings which have been applied.
4.13 Starting from hot condition, transformers shall be capable of remaining in

operation for following conditions without injurious heating, after failure of
forced cooling :
a. At full load for not less than 10 minutes, after outage of all forced cooling.
b. Transformers fitted with two coolers each capable of dissipating 50 percent

of the losses shall be capable of remaining in operation at full load for not
less than 20 minutes in the event of failure of all forced cooling associated
with one cooler.
4.14 Transformers, complete with bushings/cable boxes, shall be designed and

constructed to withstand without damage, the effects of external short circuits
as per the specified standards. Account shall be taken of the different forms of
system faults that can arise in service, such as line to earth faults and line to
line faults associated with the relevant system and transformer earthing
conditions.
4.15 Transformers with territory/stabilising windings shall be capable of withstanding
the mechanical and thermal effects of short circuits resulting from different
forms of system faults that can arise in service associated with relevant system
earthing conditions, including transfer surges which could be reflected through
capacitive couplings with HV & LV windings.
4.16 The thermal ability to withstand short circuit shall be demonstrated by the
VENDOR by calculations.
4.17 The dynamic ability to withstand short circuit shall be demonstrated by tests or
by reference to tests on similar transformers.
4.18 The neutral terminal of windings with star or zig-zag connection shall be
designed for the highest fault current that can flow through this winding.
4.19 Every care shall be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of all
transformers shall be such as to reduce noise and vibration to the level
obtained in good modern practice. The VENDOR shall ensure that the noise
level shall be as per the NEMA TR1.
4.20 The transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression
of harmonic voltage, especially the third and fifth, so as to eliminate wave form
distortion and from any possibility of high frequency disturbances reaching
such a magnitude as to cause interference with communication circuits.
4.21 Following tests shall also be conducted as stipulated in IS depending upon the
rated voltage of the transformer:
a. Switching impulse withstand voltage as specified in the applicable
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
standards.
b. Partial discharge test at the line and neutral terminals of the winding as
specified in the applicable standards.
4.22 All rated quantities subject to the VENDOR’s guarantees shall be within the
tolerances given in applicable standards.
4.23 Polarity for single phase transformers shall be subtractive.
5.0 CORE
5.1 The magnetic circuit shall be constructed from high grade cold rolled non-
ageing grain oriented silicon steel laminations.
5.2 The laminations shall be free of all burrs and sharp projects. Each sheet shall
have an insulating coating resistant to the action of hot oil.
5.3 The construction is to be of ‘core’ type.

5.4 The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be
such as to withstand a voltage of 2000 V for one minute.
5.5 The completed core and coil assembly of core type units shall be so
assembled that the axis and the plane of the outer surface of the coil stack
shall not deviate from the vertical plane by more than 25 mm.
5.6 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly shot or sand
blasted, after cutting drilling and welding.
5.7 The finally assembled core with all the clamping structures shall be free from
deformation and shall not vibrate during operation.
5.8 The core clamping structure shall be designed to minimise eddy current loss.
5.9 The core shall be provided with lugs suitable for lifting the complete core and
coil assembly.
5.10 The core and coils assembly shall be so fixed in the tank that shifting will not
occur during transport or short circuits.
5.11 The framework and clamping arrangements shall be securely earthed in

accordance with clause 6.0.
6.0 INTERNAL EARTHING
6.1 All internal metal parts of the transformer, with the exception of individual
laminations, core bolts and their individual clamping plates shall be earthed.
6.2 The top clamping structure shall be connected to the tank by a copper strap.
The bottom clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following
methods :
a. By connection through vertical tie rods to the top structure.
b. By direct metal to metal contact with the tank base.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
c. By a connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the
main earth connection to the tank.
6.3 The magnetic circuit shall be connected to the clamping structure at one point
only and this shall be brought out of the top cover of the transformer tank
through a suitably rated bushing. A disconnecting link shall be provided on
transformer tank to facilitate disconnections from ground for IR measurement
purpose.
6.4 When the magnetic circuit is sub divided by oil ducts or insulated barriers
above 0.25 mm thick, tinned copper strip bridging pieces shall be inserted to
maintain electrical continuity between segments of core.
6.5 Coil clamping rings of metal at earth potential shall be connected to the
adjacent core clamping structure on the same side as the main earth
connection in clause 6.2.
7.0 WINDINGS
7.1 Windings shall be subjected to a shrinking and seasoning process, so that no

further shrinkage occurs during service. Adjustable devices shall be provided
for taking up possible shrinkage in service.
7.2 Coils shall be supported at frequent intervals by means of wedge type

insulation spacers permanently secured in place and arranged to ensure
proper oil circulation. To ensure permanent tightners of winding assembly, the
insulation spacers shall be dried and compressed at high pressure before use.
7.3 All low voltage windings for use in the circular coil concentric winding shall
wound on a performed insulating cylinder for mechanical protection of the
winding in handling and placing around the core.
7.4 Windings shall not contain sharp bends which might damage the insulation or
produce high dielectric stresses. No strip conductor wound on edge shall have
width exceeding six times the thickness.
7.5 Materials used in the insulation and assembly of the winding shall be insoluble,
non-catalytic and chemically inactive in the hot transformer oil, and shall not
soften or be otherwise affected under the operating conditions.
7.6 Varnish application on coil windings may be given only for mechanical
protection and not for improvement in dielectric properties. In no case varnish
or other adhesive be used which will seal the coil and prevent evacuation of air
and moisture and impregnation by oil.
7.7 All threaded connections shall be locked. Leads from the winding to the
terminal board and bushings shall be rigidly supported to prevent injury from
vibration. Guide tubes shall be used where practicable.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
7.8 Windings and connections shall be braced to withstand shocks during transport
or short circuits.
7.9 Coil clamping rings shall be of steel or of a suitable insulating material.
7.10 Permanent current carrying joints in the windings and leads shall be welded or
brazed. Clamping bolts for current carrying parts inside oil shall be made of oil
resistant material which shall not be affected by acidity in the oil. Steel bolts, if
used, shall be suitably treated.
7.11 Terminals of all windings, also of stabilizing windings, shall be brought out of
the tank through bushings for external connections.
7.12 Windings shall be of copper. The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient

intervals in order to minimize eddy currents and equalize the distribution of
currents and temperatures along the windings.
7.13 The completed core and coil assembly shall be dried in vacuum at no more
than 0.5 mm of mercury absolute pressure and shall be immediately
impregnated with oil after the drying process to ensure the elimination of air
and moisture within the insulation. Vacuum may be applied in either vacuum
over tank or in the transformer tank. Vapour phase dry out shall be preferred.
8.0 TANK
8.1 Tank shall be made from good commercial grade low carbon steel and shall be
of welded construction.
8.2 Tank shall be designed to permit lifting by crane or raising by jacks of the
complete transformer assembly filled with oil. Suitable lugs and bosses shall be
provided for this purpose.
8.3 Tank together with radiators, coolers, conservator, bushings vessel and other
fittings, shall be designed to withstand without permanent distortion the
following conditions :
(a) Full vacuum of 760 mm, of Hg. For filling with oil by vacuum.
(b) Internal gas pressure of 0.35 kg/cm2 (5 lbs/sq.in) with oil at operating level.
8.4 The transformer top shall be provided with a detachable tank cover with a
bolted flanged gasket joint. Lifting lugs shall be provided for removing the
cover. The surface of the cover shall be suitably sloped so that it does not
retain rain water.
8.5 Manholes with bolted covers shall be provided in the top or sides of
transformer for easy access to the lower ends of bushings, tap changers and to
permit replacement of auxiliaries without removing tank cover.
8.6 Adequate space shall be provided at the bottom of the tank for collection of
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
sediment.
8.7 The transformer base shall be designed to permit skidding of the complete
transformer unit in any direction, when using plates or rails. The underbase
shall be detachable unless transport facilities permit a fixed base. Pulling eyes
shall be provided for moving the transformer in either direction.
8.8 Bell type construction i.e the tank shall have an oil tight bolted flanged gasket
joint near the base of the transformer, so that the tank can be lifted off to have
access to core and coils may be followed as per the manufacturer’s proprietary
design with approval of customer. Suitable projecting guides shall be provided
to facilitate removal and lowering of the tank over the assembly of core and
coils.
8.9 Necessary measures shall be adopted like increased clearances and separate
aluminium shields to minimize eddy current losses in large capacity and high
impedance transformers.
8.10 The material used for gaskets shall be cork-neoprene or approved equivalent.
gasketted joints for tank and manhole covers, bushings and other bolted
attachments shall be so designed that the gasket will not be exposed to the
weather. Spare gaskets shall be provided for all openings as shipping gaskets
will not be reused.
8.11 Tank shall be provided with valves as per clauses 9.0, 11.3 and 11.4.
8.12 Tank shall be provided with a pressure relief device which shall operate at a
pressure below the test pressure for the tank and radiators. The device shall be
rain proof after blowing and shall be provided with a device visible from ground
to indicate operation. An equaliser pipe connecting the pressure relief device
to the conservator shall be supplied. This device shall have potential free trip
contact for wiring to remote control panel.
9.0 VALVES
9.1 Valves shall be of forged carbon steel upto 50 mm size and of gun metal or of
cast iron bodies with gun metal fittings for sizes above 50 mm. They shall be of
full way type with screwed ends and shall be opened by turning counter
clockwise when facing the hand wheel. There shall be no oil leakage when the
valves are in closed position.
9.2 Every valve shall be provided with an indicator to show the open and closed
positions and shall be provided with facility for padlocking in either open or
closed position. All screwed valves shall be furnished with pipe plugs for
protection.
9.3 All valves shall be provided with flanges having machined faces drilled to suit
the applicable requirements. Oil tight blank flanges shall be provided for each
connection for use when any radiator is detached and for all valves opening to
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
atmosphere. If any special radiator valve tools are required, the VENDOR shall
supply the same.
9.4 Each transformer shall be provided with following valves on the tank ;
a. Drain valve so located as to completely drain the tank. The sizes shall be
80mm.
b. Two filter valves on diagonally opposite corners shall be of 50 mm size.
c. Oil sampling valves not less than 8 mm, at top and bottom of main tank.
d. One 15 mm air release plug.
e. Valves between radiators and/or coolers as specified below.
f. Two plugged pipe outlets for applying vacuum.
10.0 UNDER CARRIAGE
The under carriage of the transformer shall be provided with detachable steel
flanged wheels Flanged wheels shall be spaced to allow specified rail gauge.
Wheels shall be provided with suitable bearings which will resist rust and
corrosion and shall be equipped with fittings for lubrications. Unless otherwise
approved, it shall be possible to swivel the wheels or rollers in two directions, at
right angles to or parallel to the main axis of the transformer, thereby permitting
movement in two directions. The wheels or rollers will be swiveled after jacking
the transformer and they shall be lockable in the two positions.
11.0 TRANSFORMER COOLING EQUIPMENT
11.1 Radiators and coolers shall be designed to withstand the vacuum and pressure
conditions specified for the tank. They shall be so designed as to avoid pockets
in which moisture may collect, to completely drain oil into the tank and to
prevent formation of gas pockets when the tank is being filled.
11.2 The clearance between all pipe work and live parts shall be more than the
clearance for live parts to earth.
11.3 Built on Radiators
Tank mounted radiators/coolers shall be of the detachable type with bolted and
gasketted flanged connections. The following accessories shall be provided for
radiator :
a. Shut off valves and blanking plates on transformer tank at each point of
connection.
b. Top and bottom shut off valves and blanking plates on each radiator.
c. Lifting lugs
d. Top oil filling plug, 19 mm size
e. Air release plug at top
f. Oil drain plug at bottom, 19 mm size
11.4 Separately mounted Radiators
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
Separately mounted radiator banks shall have bolted flanged connections and
pipe extensions to permit withdrawal of transformer tank without disturbing the
radiators. Flexible joints shall be provided in the interconnecting pipes (unless
otherwise approved) to facilitate erection and dismantling and reduce transfer
of vibrations from tank to radiator. The interconnecting pipes shall be provided
with drain plug and air release vents. The following accessories shall be
provided for each radiator bank.
a. Shut-off valves and blanking plates for transformer tank at each point of
connection at the inlet and outlet header
b. Upper and lower shut off valves and blanking plates for each group of
radiators when radiators are assembled in groups.
c. Lifting lugs, pulling eyes
d. Top and bottom oil filtering valves
e. Air release plug at top
f. A drain valve at bottom, 25 mm size
g. A thermometer pocket with thermometer fitted with a captive screwed

cap on the inlet and outlet pipes.
11.5 Forced Air and Forced Oil / Forced Air Coolers
11.5.1 When transformers with ONAF/OFAF ratings are specified, the VENDOR shall
provide either separately mounted radiator banks or tank mounted unit coolers
or both alternatives.
11.5.2 When separately mounted radiator banks are provided, the cooling system
shall comprise two (2) 50 percent capacity radiator banks with 10% additional
fins for each bank. Each bank shall be provided with required number of fans,
two 100% oil pumps and with one spare fan. Each radiator bank shall be
provided with unidirectional bypass valve which will permit oil to bypass the
pump and flow through a pump bypass line in the event of failure of an oil
pump. It shall also be possible to completely isolate one radiator bank for
maintenance while keeping the other radiator bank in service.
11.5.3 When tank mounted unit cooler arrangement is provided, the BIDDER shall
advise exact number of unit coolers required for the full load operation of the
transformer. In addition the BIDDER shall provide one (1) additional tank
mounted unit cooler to serve as spare. Each unit cooler shall comprise fans
(the number of which is dependent on the VENDOR’s design) and one (1) oil
pump.
11.7 Oil Pumps

The oil pump and motor assembly shall be of the completely oil immersed
glandless type. It shall be removable for maintenance without the need for
lowering oil in the transformer or coolers and without disturbing pump
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
foundation fixing. It shall be feasible to operate the transformer at its ON rating

after removing oil pump and fitting suitable pipe extensions. Bleeding device
shall be provided to ensure that air is not returned to the transformer when the
oil pump is put back into service. Measures shall be taken to prevent mal-
operation of Buchholz relay when all oil pumps are simultaneously put into
service. Suitable baffles shall be provided inside the tank at oil inlet points
when forced oil circulation is used.
11.8 Fans or Air Blowers
Air blowers shall not be overhung from radiator fins. They shall be mounted on
suitably structural members using vibration mounts or independently of the
coolers. They shall be provided with a galvanized wire mesh guard. Terminal
covers and greasing cups of fan motors shall be accessible without removing
the guard. The air blower shall be removable without dismantling supporting
framework.
12.0 MOTORS
12.1 The motors for oil pumps, fans and OLTC gear shall comply with enclosed
OLTC specification.
13.0 COOLING SYSTEM CONTROL
13.1 All features and devices required for the cooler control scheme shall be
supplied, mounted and wired up by the VENDOR.
13.2 Control equipment for the cooling system shall be mounted in a weather proof
marshalling box.
13.3 Control shall be suitable for both manual and automatic operation of each
group of fans and oil pumps.
13.4 The starting and stopping impulses for fans and oil pumps shall be given by
winding temperature detectors at preset temperature limits. Control shall be
such that hunting i.e. frequent start stop operations for small temperature
differentials shall not occur. The VENDOR shall set the controls to operate at
the temperature he recommends for the transformer design. He shall state in
the test report the actual temperature settings which have been applied.
13.5 Selector switches shall be provided for selection of fans and pump equipment
to be in ‘service’ or on ‘standby’. It shall be possible to test the fan and pump
individually.
13.6 The VENDOR shall supply all necessary equipment for automatic changeover
from 415V, 3-phase, 3-wire normal to standby incoming supply, in the event of
failure of normal supply. Automatic transfer equipment shall include a 5-
second time delay relay to prevent immediate transfer from the normal to
emergency source.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
13.7 A magnetic contactor with thermal overload relays and MCCBs for short circuit
protection shall be provided for each individual oil pump motor and fan.
Overload relays shall be hand reset type.
13.8 The following alarm initiating devices having normally open contacts shall be
included, as applicable for the method of cooling :
a. Cooler power supply auto changeover
b. Cooling fan/fans failure for each radiator bank and/or unit cooler.
c. Oil pump failure for each pump
d. Low oil flow for each pump
e. Low water flow
13.9 The following initiating contacts for lamp indicators shall be included :
a. Cooling fans start
b. Oil pump start
c. Water pump start
d. Cooling system on automatic control
e. Cooling system on manual control
13.10 Auxiliary equipment shall be rated as follows :
a. Fan and pump motors – 415V, 3-phase, 3-wire, 50Hz.

13.11 All contacts provided for alarm, tripping and indications shall be suitable for
110V DC . Each shall be electrically free and brought out to separate
terminals.
14.0 TAP CHANGE GEAR
14.1 On-Load Tap Changing Gear (OLTC)
The OLTC gear if specified shall comply with the requirements of enclosed
OLTC specification
15.0 CONTROL CABINETS
OLTC remote control OLTC local control cabinet,

cabinet marshalling box and cooler
control cabinet
15.1 Execution Indoor Outdoor, weather proof
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
15.2 Mounting Floor mounted Tank mounted or mounted on

a separate foundation.
15.3 Wiring All alarm and trip circuits shall be wired for auxiliary
DC supply as specified.
General In accordance with enclosed specification for control

Specification cabnet.
Specification Cabinet shall Bottom shall be at least 600

requirements match with all mm from floor level. Top
other panel in surface shall be sloped.
respect of colour Indicating lamps and meters
and dimensions shall be covered by a glass
window. Gland plates and
cable glands as required
shall be provided at the
bottom.
16.0 BUSHINGS
16.1 All porcelain used in bushings shall be homogeneous, non porous,

uniformly glazed to brown colour and free from blisters, burns and other
defects.
16.2 Stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the bushing shall
not lead to deterioration.
16.3 Bushings shall be designed and tested to comply with the applicable
standards.
16.4 Liquid/oil filled bushings 36 kV and above shall be equipped with liquid level
indicators and means for sampling and draining the liquid. The angle of
inclination to vertical shall not exceed 300.
16.5 Oil in oil filled bushings shall meet the requirements of the transformer oil
applicable standards.
16.6 Bushings rated 72.5 KV and above shall be of the oil filled condenser type
with a central tube and draw in conductor which shall be connected to the
connector housed in the helmet of the bushings. The pull through lead shall
be fitted with a gas bubble deflector. Condenser type bushings shall be
equipped with following in addition to requirements mentioned above.
a. Provision for power factor testing without disconnecting main leads.
b. Stress rings and lower end shields.
c. Current transformers shall be provided, if specified and the bushing

shall be so arranged that it can be removed without disturbing the
current transformers and secondary terminals.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
d. Bushing turrets shall be provided with vent pipes which shall be

connected to route any gas collection through a Buchholz relay.
16.7 Bushings rated for 400A and above shall have non ferrous flanges and
hardware.
16.8 Fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised.
16.9 Bushings shall be so located on the transformers that full flashover strength
will be utilised and minimum clearances as required for the BIL shall be
realised between live parts and live parts to earthed structures.
16.10 All applicable routine and type tests (if certificates of same are not
available), as stated in the specified bushing standards shall be carried out.
Also, following type tests shall be applicable for condenser type bushings:
a. Thermal stability test
b. Measurement of partial discharge
c. Power frequency withstand voltage test of voltage and test tappings

insulation.
d. Switching impulse withstand voltage test for bushings rated 300 kV

and above.
16.11 Bushings shall be supplied with terminal connector/clamp suitable for fixing
to bushing terminal and the required size of conductors. The
connector/clamp shall be rated to carry the bushing rated current without
exceeding a temperature rise of 450C in an ambient temperature of 500C.
The connector/clamp shall be designed to be corona free at the maximum
rated line to ground voltage.
17.0 BUSHING CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
17.1 Current transformers shall comply with specified standard.

17.2 It shall be possible to remove turret mounted CT’s from the transformer
tank, without removing the cover.
17.3 All secondary leads (Minimum 2.5 sq.mm), including tappings, shall be
brought to a weatherproof outlet box near the bushing. The VENDOR shall
arrange conduit wiring from this outlet box upto the transformer marshalling
box or control cabinet.
17.4 Bushing current transformer name plate shall be mounted on the equipment
tank adjacent to the terminal box or the same can be indicated in the rating
and diagram plate of the transformer.
18.0 CABLE BOXES AND DISCONNECTING CHAMBERS
18.1 When connection is by cable, disconnecting chamber shall be provided for

disconnecting and moving away the transformer without unsealing the
cables or draining oil from the main tank, leaving the cable box or chamber
behind on external supports.
18.2 Cable boxes and sealing ends shall be complete with jointing materials,
compound and all other accessories including wiping glands, armour and
earthing clamps.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
18.3 The cable box shall have all standard facilities including fitting and drain
plugs, relief vent, level glass and body earth terminal.
18.4 Cable boxes shall be designed to accommodate all cable joint fittings or
sealing ends as required, including stress/cones or other approved means
for grading voltage stress on the terminal insulation of cables operating at
voltages of 22kV and above.
18.5 The disconnecting chamber shall preferably be air insulated. If oil insulated,
the oil shall be segregated from transformer tank oil or cable box oil.
Bushings, oil fitting and drain plugs, relief vent, level glass, removable links
and removable covers shall be provided for the disconnecting chamber.
Plates, through which high current carrying conductors pass, shall be non-
magnetic
18.6 Phase to phase and phase to ground clearances within the chamber shall
be such as to enable either the transformer or each cable to be subjected
separately to H V tests, when filled with transformer oil. Clearances shall be
subject to the client approval.
19.0 Not used
20.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
The following fittings and accessories shall be provided :
20.1 Inspection manhole (s) with cover (s) on the top cover of the transformer.
20.2 Lifting lugs or eyes for lifting of fully assembled transformer by crane.
20.3 Jacking pads, atleast four in number, at suitable height, for lifting the
complete transformer filled with oil.
20.4 Lifting arrangements for (a) complete transformer filled with oil (b) for the
assembly of core and coils and (c) for lifting the tank of large transformers
whenever specified.
20.5 Hauling eyes on each face of the transformer

20.6 Skids at the base of the transformer.
20.7 A ladder assembly shall be provided to reach the top of the transformer for
maintenance work. It shall be possible to padlock the ladder to the
transformer tank so that ladder cannot be removed. Usage of transformer
structure / marshalling boxes etc as means to climb transformer are not
acceptable.
20.8 Earthing pads: Two earthing pads of copper or other non-corrodible material
shall be welded at the bottom corners of the transformer tank and supplied
with clamp type terminals suitable for the main grid earthing conductors.
Suitable earthing terminals on cable boxes and separately mounted radiator
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
banks shall also be provided.
20.9 Neutral earthing bar of tinned copper of specified section installed from the
neutral bushing to ground level for making bolted connection to galvanised
steel flats connected to grounding mat suitably supported along its run on
porcelain insulators, together with clamping arrangements at neutral
bushing and for two earth conductors. The supporting insulators shall be
tank mounted.
20.10 Terminal marking and rating plates shall be as per the specified standard
and shall also give the following additional information:
a) Connection diagram showing the internal connections.
b) Guaranteed Temperature rise of winding and oil.
c) Insulation levels of the windings, including neutral end of windings with
uniform insulation.
d) Transportation weight.
e) Un-tanking weight.
f) Core and winding weight.
g) Table giving the tapping voltage, tapping current and tapping power
factor for each tap.
Values of short circuit impedance on the extreme tappings and on the
principal tapping and indication of the winding to which the impedance is
relates.
20.11 The transformer shall also be provided with the following non-corrodible
plates, indelibly marked showing:
a. Location and function of all valves and plugs and indication of the
maintenance instrument reference for applying vacuum of drying and
oil filling.
b. Valves connection diagram
20.12 The conservator shall be of sufficient volume to maintain the oil seal from
the minimum ambient temperature of – 50C up to an oil temperature of
1000C, with oil level varying within the minimum and maximum visible
levels. The conservator shall be provided with the following accessories:
a. Filling plug, sump and drain valve of 15 mm size for conservator of
size 650 mm and 25 mm size for conservator above 650 mm
diameter.
b. 150 mm diameter magnetic type oil level gauge with low oil level
alarm contacts and a prismatic oil sight gauge and provided with
markings for minimum oil level and oil level at rated temperature
rise.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
c. A bolted cover at one end for cleaning.
d. Valve for shutting off oil to the transformers.
e. Weather proof dehydrating breather with silica gel and oil seal to
eliminate constant contact with the atmosphere, mounted at a level
of about 1400 mm above ground level.
20.13 Not used

20.14 Gas and Oil Actuated Relay (Buchholz Relay)
A double float type Buchholz relay as per specified standard shall be

provided. All gas evolved in the transformer shall collect in this relay. The
relay shall be provided with a test cock suitable for a flexible pipe
connection for checking its operation. A 5 mm copper pipe shall be
connected from the relay test cock to a valve located about 1.25 M above
ground level to facilitate sampling with the transformer in service. The
device shall be provided with two electrically independent ungrounded
contacts, one for alarm ‘on’ gas accumulation and the other for tripping on
sudden rise of pressure. These contacts shall be wired up to the
transformer marshalling box. The relay shall be provided with shut off
valves on the conservator side as well as the tank side
20.15 Temperature Indicators
20.15.1 Dial Type Thermometer
All transformers shall be provided with a 150 mm dial type thermometer for
top oil temperature indication. The thermometer shall have adjustable,
electrically independent ungrounded alarm and trip contacts, maximum
reading pointer and resetting device. The contacts shall be rated minimum
0.5 A making and 0.2A breaking at 110V DC.
20.15.2 Winding Temperature Indicator
A device for measuring the hot spot temperature of the winding shall be
provided. It shall comprise of the following:
a. Temperature sensing element.
b. Image coil
c. Current transformer
d. 150 mm dia local indicating instrument with four adjustable
electrically independent ungrounded contacts, two for control of
cooling equipment and two for winding temperature alarm and trip.
e. A pointer to register the highest temperature reached and capable of
being reset without tools.
f. Calibration device
g. Automatic ambient temperature compensation.
h. In addition to the above the following remote indication equipment
shall be provided.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
- Top oil resistor temperature detector with output of 4 – 20 mA

- Winding temperature detector for specified windings with
output of 4 – 20 mA.
- Remote winding temperature indicator, flush mounted
instrument for mounting on the panel.
20.15.3 All contacts shall be rated for minimum 0.5A making and 0.2A breaking at
110V DC, and accessible on removal of cover. Connections from contacts
shall be brought from the device to terminals placed inside the marshalling
box.
21.0 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Following optional accessories shall be furnished.

21.1 Anti Earthquake clamping device to keep the transformer from moving
during an earthquake. The clamping device shall be suitable to be fixed to
the foundation.
21.2 Oil preserving equipment of either of the following types shall be furnished
for large generator transformers.
a. Inert gas (nitrogen) pressure system. Gaseous nitrogen shall be
sealed in the space above the oil level in the conservator or the
tank. The system furnished shall be automatic in operation, shall
provide for expansion and contraction of oil due to variation in daily
oil temperature without discharging gas and shall seal the interior
from atmosphere. A separate nitrogen chamber may be provided if
the conservator capacity is insufficient. Particular care shall be taken
to eliminate gas leakage. A low gas pressure electric alarm device
shall be supplied to be connected to the remote annunciation.
The system shall be complete with a gas cylinder filled with high
pressure gas, an automatic reducing valve, a breathing regulator
and a mechanical relief valve. A compound pressure gauge shall be
provided for gas pressure indication (high pressure in cylinder and
the working pressure, which can be regulated) and an instruction
plate giving nitrogen pressure vs. maximum temperature of oil. A
bracket for attaching block and tackle shall be provided to assist in
removal of the gas cylinder.
Sufficient gas for blowing out and displacing the air in the
transformer shall be supplied in addition to the full initial supply of
gas required for initial operation.
b. Sealed expansion tank type. A flexible oil resistant air bag shall be
provided in the conservator to prevent the air from coming into
contact with the oil. The air bag shall be designed to withstand
repeated expansion and contraction due to changes in oil level. The
conservator shall be furnished with all valves and accessories as
stated in specification. A device shall be provided so that in the
event that air enters the conservator as a result of rupture of the
bag, an alarm sounds.
21.3 With nitrogen seal system, a sudden pressure relay shall be supplied with
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
one set of 110V DC alarm contacts on pressure switch. The contacts shall
be wired upto the marshalling box (kiosk) terminals. The relay shall be
connected to the nitrogen chamber and the relay shall function depending
on the rate of change of pressure and should not operate on the normal
pressure variations in the tank.
21.5 Shock recorders to record maximum shock forces during shipment/
transport.
21.6 Apparatus for complete oil testing.
21.7 A set of hydraulic jacks suitable for the transformer under supply.
22.0 TESTS
All transformers shall be completely assembled at works to ascertain that all

parts fit correctly.
22.1 Routine Tests
Routine tests as per specified standards shall be performed on all

transformers. The following additional points may be noted :
a. Resistance of each winding of each phase shall be measured at

principal and at all the taps and corrected to 750C.
b. Impedance voltage shall be measured at principal and at all the

taps.
c. No load loss and exciting current shall be measured at rated

frequency at 90%, 100% and 110% rated voltage. These tests shall
be done after impulse tests if the latter are specified. Exciting
current shall be measured on each phase and recorded. Form
factor shall be noted during the test and included in the test report.
d. Oil leakage test: The main transformer tank and all oil filled
compartments necessary for a complete transformer including
coolers shall be filled with transformer oil and subjected to a
pressure of 0.35 kg/cm2 above the pressure that would obtain under
normal conditions with full head of oil. The pressure shall be
maintained for 12 hours during which time no oil leakage shall occur.
When heat run test is specified, the oil pressure test shall be
performed immediately after heat run. Otherwise the test may be
performed at ambient temperature.
e. Power taken by cooling equipment shall be measured for all
transformers and mentioned in the test report.
f. Magnetic balance test for 3 phase units.
g. HV test on magnetic circuit test as per CBIP.
h. Pressure test on each size of pressure relief device as per CBIP
i. Calibration of temperature indicators and relays
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
j. CT tests viz. IR, ratio, polarity, excitation etc.
k. Measurement of zero sequence impedance
l. Measurement of tank and capacitance of each winding to earth (with

all other windings earthed) and between all windings (connect
together) to earth.
22.2 Additional tests

a. On the tank of each transformer size the following tests shall be
conducted.
i) Pressure test as per CBIP
ii) Vacuum test as per CBIP
b. Vacuum test on radiator of each size similar to test on tank.
22.2 Type Tests

The type tests, if specified, shall be carried out by the VENDOR shall
include but not be limited to the following:
a. Lightning Impulse test (For windings for which it is not routine test. It
shall include chopped wave test also).
i) Impulse test on one leg (HV & LV) of the transformer
ii) Impulse test on all legs of the transformer
iii) Impulse test on neutral of the star connected non uniform

windings
b. Temperature rise test
c. Dissolved gas analysis of the oil, before and after the temperature
rise test.
d. Measurement of acoustic noise level.
e. Short Circuit Impedance of each limb of the transformer with single-

phase voltage from both HV and LV sides.
f. Vacuum withstand test on tank and radiators
g. Short circuit withstand test
22.3 All auxiliary equipment shall be tested as per the relevant standard. Test
certificates shall be submitted for bought-out items. High voltage withstand
test shall be performed on auxiliary equipment and wiring after complete
assembly.
22.4 Test Reports
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
Test results shall be corrected to a reference temperature of 750C.
Additional bound copies as per enclosed distribution schedule of complete

test results including all tests on transformers, auxiliaries, current
transformer characteristics shall be furnished with the transformer.
23.0 LOSSES
23.1 Bids will be evaluated based on the formula for capitalization of losses
furnished in Data Sheet.
23.2 The quoted load losses and iron losses shall be maximum including the
applicable tolerances as per standards.
24.0 REJECTION
The client may reject any transformer if during tests or service any of the
following conditions arise:
24.1 No load loss exceeds the guaranteed value.
24.2 Load loss exceeds the guaranteed value.
24.3 Impedance value exceeds the guaranteed value of ± 10% or more.
24.4 The difference in impedance values of any two phases during single-phase
short circuit impedance test exceeds 2 percent of the average value
guaranteed by the VENDOR.
24.5 Oil or winding temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed value.
24.6 Transformer fails on impulse test
24.7 Transformer fails on power frequency voltage withstand test.
24.8 Transformer is proved to have been manufactured not in accordance with

the agreed specification.
24.9 The client reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it
into service until the VENDOR replaces, at no extra cost to the client, the
defective transformer by a new transformer.
24.10 Alternatively, the VENDOR shall repair or replace the transformer within a
reasonable period to the client satisfaction at no extra cost to the client.
25.0 Efficiency shall not be less than 99% at 0.85 PF at full load.
26.0 INCLUSIONS
The following items shall be deemed to be included in the VENDOR’s basic

scope of supply.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
26.1 Interconnecting cables with supporting and terminating accessories for

connections between the transformer main marshalling kiosk and all
electrical measuring, monitoring and protective devices mounted on the
transformer. For this purpose, either PVC insulated wires in GI conduits or
PVC insulated, armoured cables shall be used.
26.2 Necessary compression type, brass cable glands shall be provided at the
marshalling box (kiosk) for the cables mentioned in specification as well as
for terminating the incoming cables from remote panels.
26.3 Ten percent extra oil in addition to that required for first filling of complete
transformer shall be supplied in non-returnable drums.
26.4 One 10 litre tin of paint for touching up the external surface after erection
and during periodic maintenance.
26.5 All necessary sealing ends with glands, compound, tapes, cable lugs,
armour earthing clamps and accessories required for termination of the HV
and LV power cables.
1.1 Power Transformer IS:2026, BSEN:60076,

IEC60076 CBIP:295
1.2 Fittings and Accessories  IS:3639 BSEN:50216

IEC
1.4 Loading of immersed transformer  IS:6600 BS:7735:

IEC: 60354
1.5 Oil  IS:335 BS: 148

IEC:60296
1.6 Bushings  IS:2099 BSEN: 6013

IEC:60137
1.7 Degree of protection  IS:12063 BS:

IEC:60529
1.8 Tests  IS:2026 BSEN:60076

IEC:60076
1.9 Tolerances on guaranteed particulars  IS:2026 BSEN:60076

IEC:60076
1.10 Buchholz relay  IS:3637 BS: IEC
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

. .
POWER TRANSFORMERS
1.11 Thermal evaluation and classification  IS:1271 BS:

of electrical insulation IEC:60085
1.12 Guide for sampling of gases and oil  IS:9434, BS:

from oil filled equipment and for the IEC:60567
analysis of free and dissolved gases
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM NO. 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-205 POWER TRANSFORMERS SHEET 1 OF 4 OF
DATA SHEET-C
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR AFTER

AWARD OF CONTRACT
Information to be furnished within 2 months of award of contract:
1.0 Positive Sequence impedance at maximum voltage tap.
2.0 Positive Sequence impedance at minimum voltage tap.
3.0 Zero sequence impedance at principal tap.

4.0 Efficiency at 750C winding temperature
4.1 At full load
4.2 At 75% full load
5.0 Maximum efficiency and load at which it occurs
6.0 Regulation at full load at 750C winding temperature at
6.1 Unity power factor
6.2 0.85 power factor lag.
7.0 Resistance per phase at
HV winding: ohms
MV winding : ohms
LV winding: ohms
8.0 Conductor area ( sq. Mm. ) and current density ( amp / cm2)
HV winding
MV winding
LV winding
9.0 Type of winding

HV
MV
LV
10.0 Insulating materials for inter-turn insulation

HV winding
MV winding
LV winding
11.0 Insulating materials for inter-winding insulation
HV – MV
MV – LV
12.0 Insulating materials between
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
DATA SHEET-C
12.1 LV Winding and core
12.2 Laminations of core
13.0 Shipping details :
13.1 Size of the largest package (mm) Length x Width x Height
13.2 Weight of the largest package ( Tonnes )
13.3 Total gross weight to be handled ( Tonnes )
13.4 Total gross volume to be handled ( Cu. Metres )
14.0 Make, type and size of all valves
15.0 Make, type, dial size, number of contacts (if provided) and contact ratings
(current and voltage ratings) for following :
15.1 Magnetic oil level gauge
15.2 Dial type thermometer
15.3 Winding temperature indicator (local and remote)
16.0 Gas and oil actuated relay / sudden pressure relay

Make
Type
Number of contacts
Contacts
a) Number
b) Voltage rating
c) Current rating
17.0 All auxiliary relays and timers :
The VENDOR shall furnish a list of the relays and timers, also indicating the
make, type, auxiliary supply requirements, contact rating etc.
18.0 Cubicle heaters.
18.1 Rating (kW).
18.2 Number provided in cooler control cabinet
18.3 Number provided in OLTC control cabinet.
19.0 Cubicle illumination lamps
19.1 Rating of each (W).
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
DATA SHEET-C
19.2 Total numbers
20.0 Motor starters:
20.1 Make.
20.2 Type.
20.3 Range of setting for thermal overload protection.
20.4 Recommended settings (The VENDOR shall furnish such details for each
type of motor starter separately).
21.0 Conservator.
21.1 Total volume of conservator ( litres )
21.2 Volume of conservator between the highest and lowest levels of oil ( litres
)
22.0 Calculated of time constants
22.1 Natural cooling
22.2 Forced cooling
23.0 Capacity of the transformer if all the cooling equipment including the
standby fans and pumps were simultaneously in operation.
24.0 Thermal withstand capability under full short circuit conditions, in terms of
number of times of occurrence of short circuit and corresponding
anticipated percentage reduction in transformer life. Relevant calculations
shall be submitted.
25.0 Drawings
The following drawings shall be submitted for the client approval in the
stipulated time
25.1 General outline drawings as submitted at the bidding stage but with binding
dimensions and weight within 1.5 months of award of Contract
25.2 General outline drawings showing plan, front elevation, and side elevation,
with all fittings and accessories, locating dimensions of cable entries,
earthing terminals, foundation/floor fixing details, jacking pads and weights
of the following within 2.5 months of award of Contract
25.2.1 Cooler control cabinet
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
DATA SHEET-C
25.2.2 OLTC cabinet (if applicable)
25.2.3 Marshalling box
25.2.4 Cooler pumps (if applicable)
25.2.5 Cable boxes
25.2.6 Disconnecting chambers
25.3 Bushings
Plan, elevation, terminal details, mounting details, make and type number,
current and voltage rating, creepage distances and principal characteristics,
Rating and diagram plates

25.4
25.5 Cooler control circuits: Schematic circuit diagram and actual detailed wiring
diagram giving terminal numbers within 5 months of award of Contract.
25.6 OLTC control circuits: Schematic circuit diagram and actual detailed wiring
diagram giving terminal numbers within 5 months of award of Contract.
25.7 Marshalling box terminal connections wiring diagram.
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 1 OF 7 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
206 ON LOAD TAP CHANGING GEAR FOR
TRANSFORMERS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers on load tap changing gear (OLTC) for power
transformers.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS
2.1 The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall comply

with IS: 8468, IS: 8478, IEC 60214, IEC 60542 and all other currently
applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality where the
equipment will be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed
to relieve the VENDOR of this responsibility.
2.2 Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall conform to the latest

applicable Indian & IEC standards. Equipment complying with any other
authoritative standards such as British, USA, VDE etc. will also be
considered, if offered.
2.3 All codes and standards referred to in the specification shall be

bidder unless otherwise indicated.
3.0 REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The OLTC gear shall be designed to complete successfully tap changes
for current equal to 120% of current at minimum tap position of the
transformer. Also, OLTC over loading capability shall be compatible with
that of transformer specified in IS/IEC specification “Guide for loading of
oil immersed transformers”. Devices shall be incorporated to prevent tap
change when the through current is in excess of the safe current that the
tap changer can handle. The OLTC gear shall withstand through fault
currents without injury.
3.2 When a tap change has been commenced it shall be completed

independently of the operation of the control relays and switches.
Necessary safeguard shall be provided to allow for failure of auxiliary
power supply or any other contingency which may result in the tap
changer movement not being completed once it is commenced.
3.3 Oil in compartments which contain the making and breaking contacts of
the OLTC shall not mix with the oil in other compartments of the OLTC or
with transformer oil. Gases released from these compartments shall be
conveyed by a pipe to a separate oil conservator or to a segregated
compartment within the main transformer conservator. An oil surge relay
shall be installed in the above pipe. The conservator shall be provided
with a prismatic oil level gauge.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 2 OF 7 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
TRANSFORMERS
3.4 Oil, in compartments of OLTC which do not contain the make and break
contacts, shall be maintained under conservator head by valved pipe
connections. Any gas leaving these compartments, shall pass through the
oil surge relay before entering the conservator.
3.5 Oil filled compartments shall be provided with filling plug, drain valve with
plug, air release vent, oil sampling device, inspection window with view
glass.
3.6 OLTC driving mechanism and its associated control equipment shall be
mounted in an outdoor, weather proof cabinet conforming to degree of
enclosure protection IP55. The finish shall match with that of the
transformer on which it is mounted. The cabinet shall include:
(a) Driving motor (415 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz, AC squirrel cage)
(b) Mechanically & electrically interlocked motor starting contactors with

thermal overload relay, isolating switch and HRC fuses / MCCBs.
(c) Duplicate sources of power supply with automatic changeover from

the running source to the standby source and vice versa will be
provided in transformer cooler control cabinet / marshalling box and
one no. out going feeder extending to OLTC DM cabinet, with
appropriate provision for receiving the same.
(d) Control switch: Raise/off/lower (spring return to normal type) or

independent push buttons.
(e) Emergency ‘OFF’ push button (maintained type).
(f) Remote/local selector switch (maintained contact type).
(g) Mechanical tap position indicator.( LED display)

(h) Limit switches to prevent motor over-travel in either direction and
final mechanical stops.
(i) Appropriate scheme/device to permit only one tap change at a time

on manual operation.
(j) Emergency manual operating device (hand crank or hand wheel).
(k) A five digit operation counter.
(l) Space heaters with thermostat and HRC fuses / MCB.
(m) Control transformers with HRC fuses / MCBs on HV and LV sides

for each supply.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 3 OF 7 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
TRANSFORMERS
(n) Interior lighting fixture with lamp , door switch/ ON-OFF switch and
HRC fuses / MCB.
(o) Gasketted and hinged door with locking arrangement.
(p) Terminal blocks, internal wiring, earthing terminals and cable glands
for power and control cables.
(q) Necessary relays, contactors, current transformers etc.
(r) Transducers or any other appropriate device for remote tap position
indication.
3.7 Control Requirements for OLTC
The following electrical control features shall be provided:
(a) Positive completion of load current transfer, once a tap change has
been initiated, without stopping on any intermediate position, even
in case of failure of external power supply.
(b) Only one tap change from each tap change command even if the
command is maintained.
(c) Cut-off of electrical control when manual operation is resorted to.
(d) Cut-off of a counter impulse for a reverse tap change until the
mechanism comes to rest and resets the circuits for a fresh
operation.
(e) Cut-off of electrical control when it tends to operate the tap beyond
its extreme position.
3.8 Remote Control Equipment
The OLTC remote control equipment shall be housed in an indoor sheet

steel cubicle to be located in a remote control room. It shall conform to
degree of enclosure protection IP42 or better and shall comprise the
following:
(a) Control switch: Raise / Off / Lower (spring return to normal type) or
independent push buttons.
(b) Auto / manual selector switch (maintained contact type) and other
items as listed at 3.8.1 below.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 4 OF 7 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
TRANSFORMERS
(c) If parallel operation is specified, master / independent / follower

selector switch (maintained contact type) with ‘out of step’
annunciation.
(d) Tap position indicator.
(e) Facia type alarm annunciators with “accept”, “lamp test” facilities
and hooter / buzzer for alarms as listed at 3.8.2.
(f) Necessary auxiliary relays.
(g) Lamp (LED clusters) indications for:
i. Tap change in progress
ii. Lower limit reached
iii. Upper limit reached
iv. Transformer cooler control apparatus (if specified)

v. OLTC mechanism stuck
vi. Control supply healthy
vii. Any other features/control/annunciation as required.
(h) Cable glands for power and control cables.
(i) 240 V rated panel space heater with thermostat.
(j) CFL type interior lighting fixture with lamp and door switch.
(k) HRC fuses / MCBs.
(l) Terminal blocks.
(m) Internal wiring.
(n) Earthing terminal.
(o) Apparatus for control of transformer cooler equipment. The control

and annunciation shall consist of Manual and Auto switch,
indication of “On” condition of each pump and fan, and all
annunciations related to cooler.
(p) Hook up for the remote operation of tap lower and raise operation
and contact / signal for tap position indication to be incorporated in
the panel
3.8.1 Automatic Control of OLTC
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 5 OF 7 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
TRANSFORMERS
Automatic voltage regulator (AVR) for auto control of OLTC shall include:
(a) Voltage setting device
(b) Voltage sensing and voltage regulating devices
(c) Line drop compensator with adjustable R and X elements.
(d) Timer 5-25 seconds for delaying the operation of the tap changer in
the first step for every tap change operation.
(e) Adjustable dead band for voltage variation.
(f) Additional features as required when parallel operation with other

transformers is specified.
3.8.2 Alarms
The following alarms shall be provided:
(a) A.C. supply failure
(b) Drive motor auto tripped
(c) Other protective purpose considered essential by the VENDOR.
(d) Out of step operation when paralleled transformers supposed to

operate on the same tap are operating at different taps.
(e) Tap change delayed
(f) AVR failure
(g) Transformer cooler fail
(h) For the all specified above a “OLTC trouble” group alarm to be
provided in PLC which is located in control room.
(i) Others, as specified.
3.9 TESTS
3.9.1 Routine Tests

Routine tests as per IS: 8468 shall be performed on all OLTC’s & Motor
drive mechanisms. Over and above, Pressure and Vacuum tests shall be
conducted as per IEC: 60214.
3.9.2 Type Tests
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 6 OF 7 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
TRANSFORMERS
Type tests as per IS: 8468 shall be carried out on OLTC & Motor drive
mechanism when called for. The bidder shall indicate in his price
schedule extra price, if any, for carrying out these tests. If type tests are
not called for, type test reports for tests conducted on a similar OLTC &
Motor drive mechanism shall be submitted for Consultants / Purchasers
approval.
4.0 Wiring and terminal blocks

4.1
a) All control cabinets, marshaling boxes, etc. shall be fully wired at the
factory to ensure proper functioning of the control, protection and
interlock schemes. All contacts including spare contacts of switches,
relays and other devices shall be wired up to the terminal block. The
inter-connection cables shall not touch transformer body to avoid
heating.
b) Wiring shall be done with flexible 650 V grade XLPE cables with
stranded copper conductor of minimum size 2.5 sq.mm. Not more
than two wires shall be connected to a terminal. Wiring shall be
identified at both ends with ferrules bearing wire numbers as per
approved drawing. Wire termination shall be made with crimping type
connectors with insulating sleeves. Wires shall not be spliced between
terminals.
c) Terminal blocks shall be of 650 V grade suitable for terminating
required cable size. Terminals for CT secondary shall have provision
for shorting & earthing. Not more than two wires shall be connected to
any terminal. 20% spare terminals shall be provided.
d) All devices and terminals blocks within the panel shall have
identification numbers as per schematic diagram.
e) The marshaling box shall have degree of protection of IP 55.
4.2 Earthing Terminals
a) Two earthing pads (each complete with two nos. holes, M10 bolts,
plain and spring washers) suitable for connection to galvanised steel
earthing flat shall be provided each at position close to earth of the
two diagonally opposite bottom corners of the tank.
b) Two earthing terminals shall also be provided on cooler, cooler control

cabinet and anyother equipment mounted separately.
5.0 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Tap position indicators and OLTC control switch shall be supplied loose if
customer decides to mount the same in the power transformer control
panel.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 7 OF 7 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
TRANSFORMERS
5.2 In addition to the items listed at item 3.8 above, the remote OLTC control
panel shall be provided with apparatus required for control and monitoring
of transformer cooling equipment if the same is specified elsewhere.
5.3 The finish and dimensions of the panel shall be as specified so as

to match with the other panels in remote control room.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-207 NEUTRAL EARTHING RESISTOR SHEET 1 OF 3 OF
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the requirements of Neutral Earthing Resistors

required for connecting to the neutral of power transformer to obtain a
resistance grounded system.
1.2 The enclosed Data Sheets-A, B & C form integral part of this specification.
2.1 The design manufacture and performance of the equipment shall comply with
all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes in the locality
where the equipment will be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be
construed to relieve the VENDOR of this responsibility.
2.2 Neutral earthing resistor shall conform to latest applicable standards. In case
of conflict between Standards and this specification, this specification shall
govern.
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENT
3.1 RESISTOR ELEMENT
3.1.1 The element material shall possess a balanced combination of properties,

uniformity of resistance and mechanical stability over the intended
temperature range, without any injurious effects on the elements and its
associated insulation.
3.1.2 The resistor assembly shall be designed for a maximum temperature rise as
per IEEE 32, Table 6, Column 7. The maximum operating temperature shall
not be higher than 80% of the maximum design temperature.
3.1.3 The material of resistor shall be non-inductive and made of non-magnetic

material punched stainless steel. The resistor shall be of dry type and
maintenance free.
3.1.4 DC resistance shall not vary more than +10% of the rated value at design
ambient temperature. DC resistance at maximum temperature specified shall
not be more than +15% of the rated value.
3.1.5 The resistor shall be enclosed in aluminum enclosure of not less than 2 mm.
3.2 DEGREE OF PROTECTION
3.2.1 The minimum degree of protection for the resistor element shall be IP 34.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION
ISSUE NO.
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
3.3.1 The construction of the resistor assembly shall be such that the minimum
required insulation resistance is maintained under all atmospheric conditions,
without a space heater.
3.3.2 The front and back covers shall be removable for access to internal resistor
connection and for removal of resistor banks.
3.3.3 The resistor shall be housed in a free standing and self supporting metal
enclosure suitable for installation under saline environment. For outdoor
installation the top of the enclosure shall be protected against direct sun
radiation.
3.3.4 The neutral earthing resistor shall be designed to operate satisfactorily with
one face flush to brick/concrete wall.
3.3.5 The enclosure shall be suitable for installation on a concrete foundation.
3.4 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
3.4.1 Current Transformer shall be installed in the terminal box for the primary side
connection.
3.4.2 When current transformers are included with neutral earthing resistor, they
shall be in accordance with IEC 185 and comply with the requirements as
specified.
3.4.3 All secondary terminals of current transformers shall be wired to a terminal

block in an auxiliary cable connecting box. The terminals shall be provided
with short circuiting links. One side of the secondary winding of each current
transformer circuit shall be earthed at this terminal block.
3.4.4 Individual terminals shall be provided for each external cable block.
3.4.5 Terminals shall be of the non loosening wedge type, obviating the need for
cable lugs and constructed in such a way that direct contact between screw,
bolt or nut and conductor is avoided.
3.4.6 Auxiliary terminal box protection shall be minimum IP 55 for outdoor

installation.
3.5 TERMINATIONS
3.5.1 The connection box and terminals shall be suitable for the required size of
cable. Bolted type isolation links shall be provided for connection of cable to
the resistor at HV side. Adequate space shall be provided for termination of
cable.
3.5.2 All conductor terminations shall be bolted welded or brazed. Low melting
ISSUE NO.
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
alloys used to join connectors, which would be adversely affected by the

resistor operating temperatures, shall not be used. All conductor
terminations must be mechanically secured to provide continuous electrical
continuity and shall be rated for the full system voltage.
3.5.3 Terminal box protection shall be minimum IP 55 for outdoor installation.
3.5.4 Cable gland plate shall be made of non-magnetic metal.
4.0 CORROSION PROTECTION
4.1 All metal parts shall be protected against corrosion by galavanizing and shall
be suitable for the saline environmental conditions.
4.2 The BIDDER shall submit in his offer his standard surface preparation and
epoxy painting system for client review.
5.0 GENERAL
5.1 The BIDDER shall submit duly filled in data sheet-B along with his proposal.
6.0 TESTS
6.1 The following tests on resistors shall be performed and test certificate shall
be furnished prior to despatch :
i) High voltage withstand test.
ii) Ohmic value test on off-load on complete resistor.
iii) Heat run test on complete assembly.
iv) Insulation resistance measurement test.

v) Temperature rise test
vi) Power frequency voltage withstand test
6.2 Field Test:
i) Power frequency voltage withstand test at 80% of routine test voltage.
ii) Insulation resistance test for enclosure circuit
iii) Measurement of DC resistance
6.2 The test equipment, meters, instruments etc. used for testing shall be
calibrated at recognised test laboratories at regular intervals and valid
certificate shall be made available to client/ client representative at the time
of testing. The calibrating instrument used as standard shall be traceable for
national/ international standards.
ISSUE NO.
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
DATA SHEET-C
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR AFTER AWARD OF

CONTRACT
The following drawings shall be submitted for the client approval.
1.0 General outline drawing as submitted at the bidding stage but with binding
dimensions and weights.
2.0 Detailed outline drawing showing plan, front elevation, end elevation, inner
view, locating dimensions of cable entries, terminal details, structure/floor
fixing details and weight of the neutral earthing resistor.
3.0 Schematic diagram of resistor with taps, terminal box connections, terminal
details, ohms, current and voltage rating, voltage class of the stand
insulators.
4.0 Temperature coefficient of resistance.
5.0 Sizing calculations.
6.0 Manufacturing quality plan.
7.0 Field quality plan.
ISSUE NO.
P1
TCE FORM 329R5

.
SHEET 1 OF 9 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-208 SPECIFICATION FOR CAST RESIN DRY TYPE

DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of cast resin dry type distribution
transformers and accessory equipment. The scope of the works covers
supply, erection, testing and commissioning of the distribution Transformer.
2.1. The design, manufacture, installation, testing, commissioning and

performance of equipment shall comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be
installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the
VENDOR of his responsibility.
2.2. The equipment shall conform to the standards mentioned in Data Sheet latest
editions applicable as on the date of offer.
3.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
3.1. All material used shall be of best quality and of the class, most suitable for
working-under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of
temperature and atmospheric conditions, overloads, over-excitation, short-
circuits as per specified standards, without distortion or deterioration or the
setting up of undue stresses in any part, and also without affecting the
strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to
perform.
3.2. Transformers shall be designed with maximum temperature rise of 900 C over
design ambient temperature of 500C.
3.3. The transformer shall be compact and suitable for easy installation at site
3.4. The transformer shall be provided with 4 Nos. bi-directional cast iron rollers
fitted on cross channels to facilitate the movement of the transformer in
both directions.
3.5. These rollers shall be suitable for being turned through an angle of 90deg.
and locked in that position when the transformer/enclosure is jacked up.
3.6. Steel bolts and nuts shall be galvanized.
3.7. Transformer shall be suitable for tropical climate & shall be anti-fungal
treated. It shall be capable of withstanding thermal effect and stresses
caused by short circuit or voltage surges.
3.8. Rating and diagram plates of stainless steel shall be provided on LT box of
the transformer and shall be easily accessible. Rating and diagram plate shall
be riveted to the transformer enclosure at a proper height so that it is
readable. The rating diagram plate shall bear details as specified in relevant
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 2 OF 9 OF

standards.
3.9. Lifting eyes or lugs shall be provided on all parts of the transformer, which
require independent handling, during loading, unloading, assembly or
dismantling.
4.0 CORE
4.1. The magnetic circuit shall be constructed from high grade cold-rolled non-
ageing grain oriented silicon steel laminations with non-hygroscopic insulation
material on both sides. The magnetic circuit shall be of “core type”
construction. The core shall be built up with ‘step-lap' configuration. The
grade of laminations shall be low loss type to meet the loss figures specified
in the Data Sheet.
4.2. It shall be carefully interlaced steplap epoxy arranged yoke. It shall be

mitered to have low noise and losses.
4.3. An adequate painting of resin coat shall cover the complete core and the
clamping structure and shall protect it against corrosion.
4.4. The bandages for the core shall be of polyester tape/fiber glass the spacers
for clamping the windings shall be of high quality rubber/fiber glass to
withstand the temperature rise specified in Data Sheet and the supports shall
be of porcelain.
4.5. The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be
such as to withstand a voltage of 2000V for one minute.
5.0 WINDINGS
5.1 LV WINDING
5.1.1 LV Winding shall be of Copper, coated with class F insulation, epoxy resin
reinforced with fibre glass layers pre-impregnated and casted under vacuum,
to be thermally bound to the winding.
5.1.2 The conductors shall be transposed at suitable intervals in order to minimize

eddy current and to equalize the distribution of current and temperature along
with windings.
5.1.3 Insulation of LV winding shall be adequate to withstand surge voltages

appearing across them as result of transfer due to an impulse striking on HV
terminals.
5.1.4 Adequate cooling ducts in epoxy cast shall be provided in the LV winding to
obtain the required cooling in axial and radial directions.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 3 OF 9 OF

5.2 HV Winding
5.2.1 HV Winding shall be of Copper wire, double layer winding, and cast under
vacuum with epoxy resin. The resin shall be pure low viscosity epoxy resin,
fiber glass reinforced. The resin cast winding shall be void free.
5.2.2 Insulation of HV winding shall be Class ‘F‘ with temperature rise limited to
Class ‘F’.
5.2.3 The winding shall be designed to reduce to a minimum the out of balance
forces in the transformer at all voltage ratios at all operating conditions.
5.2.4 HV and LV winding shall be suitably braced and supported at top as well
bottom to withstand short circuit stresses set up by surges and damage
because of inertia.
5.2.5 The resin casting process shall be carried out under the most strict and
automated controlled conditions in order to ensure optimum insulating and
mechanical properties.
5.2.6 The coil finishing shall provide smooth surface eliminating dust accumulation
and give effective cooling.
6.0 ENCLOSURE
6.1 The enclosure shall be of CRCA mild steel sheet with a minimum thickness of
2 mm while the roof and vertical supports shall be formed from minimum 3
mm thick steel.
6.2 Enclosure shall be provided with adequate doors, covers for inspection,
maintenance and removal of the active parts from the enclosure. Minimum 4
Nos. limit switches shall be provided for transformer enclosure door interlock.
Each limit switch shal have 1 NO & 1 NC contact. All NO contact switches
shall be connected series and NC contacts shall be connected parallel. Limit
switch shall be used for HT circuit breaker tripping and HT circuit closing
permissive.
6.3 The material used for gaskets shall be cork neoprene or nitrite butyl rubber
gasket. Suitable mechanical stops shall be provided to prevent excess
squeezing of gaskets.
6.4 The louvers for ventilation shall be provided with suitable dust catchers and
the enclosure shall comply with degree of protection of IP 23 or better
6.5 Enclosure doors/covers shall be pad lockable and shall have limit switch for
tripping HV circuit breaker to avoid accidental contact with live parts.
Instruction in three languages (Hindi/English/Local language) shall be
displayed on each open-able door/cover.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 4 OF 9 OF

6.6 The transformer shall be natural air cooled.
6.7 The enclosure door shall be interlocked with service transformer incoming
breaker such that the door can be opened only when the service transformer
HV side circuit breaker is in Test/Isolated position and HV side circuit breaker
can be closed only when the doors are closed
7.0 EARTHING
7.1. The framework and clamping arrangement of core and coil shall be suitably
earthed internally to the body of enclosure. Separate 2 nos. earthing
terminals shall be provided on enclosure for connection to earth grid.
7.2. Core shall be earthed to the frame. Suitable arrangement shall be provided
for disconnecting the core earthing for insulation measurement.
7.3. 2Nos. separate earthing pad / terminals shall be provided on the HV cable
box for armour earthing from inside and for owner’s grid connection from
outside.
7.4. Apart from the neutral leads for power connection, a separate neutral terminal
shall be provided to facilitate termination of 2 nos. earthing conductors,
which in turn will be connected to two (2) distinct earthing pits by direct
connection. The connection may be by insulated cable or by bare strip. In
case of cable connection, suitable cable box to terminate the cables shall be
provided.
7.5. Flexible earthing braid shall be provided between all metal parts joined with
gaskets.
8.0 TERMINATION
8.1. Transformers shall be suitable for the following terminal arrangements:
8.1.1 LV :- The LV side including the neutral shall be brought out through bushings
and suitable arrangement for cable box suitable for bottom cable entry.
8.1.2 HV cable box:- HV side leads shall be brought out through bushings to a
cable box and cable box shall be suitable for bottom entry and provided with
plug-in terminals. The cable box shall be with IP 55 protection.
9.0 MARSHALLING BOX
9.1. A marshalling box shall be provided for housing transformer control & other
signaling equipment. The marshalling box shall be of mild steel sheet and
shall be with IP 54 degree of protection for enclosure.
9.2. The marshalling box shall be complete with necessary cable glands and
cable lugs. All sensor and equipment connection shall be wired up to the
terminal with ferrules.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 5 OF 9 OF

9.3. The marshalling box shall accommodate digital temperature indicator and
gland plates for incoming and outgoing cables. Marshalling box shall be
provided with toughened glass visor to facilitate the reading of temperature
indicators.
9.4. Marshalling box shall be provided with cubicle illuminating lamp along with
control switch and door limit switch and a thermostatically controlled space
heater. Also it shall have one 16A utility socket.
9.5. All spare contact and terminals shall be wired up to the terminal block. 20%
spare terminals shall be provided.
9.6. Control voltage shall be 110V DC for all equipment.
10.0 PAINTING
All interiors and exteriors of transformer/enclosure / shall be finished and

painted to produce a neat, fire resistant and durable surface which would
prevent rusting and corrosion. Sheet metal components shall be pre-treated
using the seven tank phosphating process consisting of de-greasing, acid
picking, de-rusting, phosphating and passivation including repeated rinsing in
between thickness of painting shall be minimum 75-80 microns.
11.0 ELECTRICAL AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
11.1. Transformers shall operate without injurious heating at the rated KVA at any
voltage within + /- 10 percent of the rated voltage of that particular tap.
11.2. Transformer shall be capable of delivering rated current at a voltage equal to

105% of rated voltage
11.3. Transformers shall be designed for 110% continuous overfluxing with stand
capability. Transformers directly connected to the generators shall in addition
shall have an overfluxing capability of 125% for 60 seconds and 140% for 5
seconds.
11.4. Transformers shall be capable of operating at 110% rated voltage for a

period of 1 minute and 140% rated voltage for 10 seconds due too sudden
load throw off.
11.5. Overloads shall be allowed within the conditions defined in the loading guide
of the applicable standard. Under these conditions, no limitations by
terminals, tap changers or other auxiliary equipment shall apply.
11.6. Transformer losses shall be as per ECBC norms.
11.7. Transformer shall be self-extinguishing in the event of fire or arcing and no

toxic or corrosive gases shall be released.
11.8. There shall not be any risk of cracking of the epoxy casting in the
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 6 OF 9 OF

transformer.
11.9. Transformer shall have partial discharge level of less than (10pC).
11.10. Transformer shall be of low no load loss & low noise. Values of noise level &
testing shall be as specified in IEC/applicable standards.
11.11. Transformer shall be certified for following:
a) Class F1 : - “Fire Behavior”
b) Class C2 : - “Climatic”
c) Class E2 : - “Condensation and humidity”
11.12. Vendor to confirm the suitability of the transformer for high inductive loads
(high current, short time, unbalance loads).
11.13. Transformer shall be suitable for switching with Vacuum Circuit Breakers
(VCBs). Resonance frequency of the winding shall be such as to avoid
resonance with the switching impulse of VCBs & overstress of the insulation.
11.14. The sound level of the transformer shall not exceed the limit indicated by
NEMA – TR1 standard under any specified operating conditions.
12.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
The transformer shall be provided with following fittings and accessories:
12.1. Enclosure with Top cover
12.2. Rating & diagram plate
12.3. Terminal markings plate.
12.4. 2 Earthing terminals.
12.5. Cable box with HV plug-in connectors.
12.6. Bus duct termination arrangement/ cable box
12.7. neutral cable box for neutral earthing
12.8. Lifting lugs
12.9. Hauling lugs
12.10. Base Channel
12.11. Undercarriage with 4 nos. rollers, which can be turned 90 degrees and
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 7 OF 9 OF

bidirectional.
12.12. High-voltage danger notices against touching of coils.
12.13. Louvers
12.14. Winding Temperature indicator with RTD sensor (minimum 2 per phase). Pre
set PTC sensors shall be provided and attached to each of the LV winding as
close as possible to the hottest spot. The PTC sensors shall be selected in
order to protect both, HV and LV windings. Seven channel temperature
scanner shall be provided in the marshalling box and the shall be hooked
upto PLC control system. Contacts for alarm and trip and shall be suitable for
110V D.C.
12.15. Marshalling Box.
12.16. Off Circuit Tap Changing Links
The tap-changing shall be performed by link mechanism. The links shall be

accessible after opening the door/cover.
Vendor to indicate the method of tapping from the main winding (braced joint
or any other type)
12.17. Cast resin current transformer on transformer neutral for stand-by earth fault
protection, Restricted Earth fault protection.
12.18. All necessary cable glands, cable lugs, armour earthing clamps, terminal
connectors, cable sealing ends and accessories required for termination of
the cables shall be included
13.0 TESTS
13.1 The routine tests shall be carried out as per applicable standards and shall be
deemed to be included in the VENDOR'S scope. The following additional
points/tests shall also be considered as part of routine tests and included in
the scope.
a) Resistance must be measured at extreme taps also in addition to

principal tap.
b) Impedance must be measured at extreme steps also in addition to

principal tap.
c) No load loss and exciting current shall be measured at rated frequency

at 90%, 100% and 110% rated voltage. These tests shall be done after
impulse tests if the latter are specified.
d) No load loss and exciting current shall be measured and recorded with
415V, 3-phase, 50 Hz. Input on LV side.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 8 OF 9 OF

e) Magnetic circuit(Isolation) test as per CBIP.

f) Measurement of zero sequence impedance
13.2 Type tests, if required, shall be carried out, as per applicable standards and
the VENDOR shall quote extra unit prices for carrying out each of the type
test.
13.3 In addition, if required, special Tests as listed below shall be carried out as
per applicable standards with out any commercial implication.
a) Partial Discharge test
b) Acoustic Sound Level measurement
c) Short Circuit Test
d) Thermal Shock Test
e) Environmental Test
f) Climate Test
g) Fire Behavior Test
14.0 LOSSES
Maximum value of loss shall be as per the ECBC norms.
15.0 REJECTION
Client may reject any transformer if during tests or service any of the
following conditions arise:
15.1 No load loss exceeds the guaranteed value.
15.2 Load loss exceeds the guaranteed value.
15.3 Impedance value differs the guaranteed value by +/-10% or more.
15.4 Winding temperature rise exceeds the specified value
15.5 Transformer fails on any High voltage tests.
15.6 Transformer is proved to have been manufactured not in accordance with the
agreed specification.
15.7 The client reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it into
service until the VENDOR replaces, at no extra cost to client, the defective
transformer by a new acceptable transformer.
15.8 Alternatively VENDOR shall repair or replace the transformer within a

reasonable period to the client satisfaction at no extra cost to the client.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 9 OF 9 OF

Sl.No Description Standard

.
1. Power Transformer □ IEC 60076 (Part 1,2,3,4,5,11)
 IS 2026 (Part 1,2,3,4,5)
2. Dry type power transformer □ IEC 60076-11  IS 11171
3. Fittings and Accessories □ Relevant IEC  IS 3639
4. Loading of transformer □ IEC 60905  IS 6600
5. Degree of protection  IEC:60144
6. Tests & tolerances on guaranteed  IEC:60076-11

particulars
7. Electrical insulation classified by □ Relevant IEC  IS 1271

thermal stability
8. Bushing for alternating voltages above  IS 2099

1000 Volts.
9. Bushing for alternating voltages below  IS 7421

1000 Volts.
10. Dimension for porcelain and  IS 3347

transformer bushings
11. Low voltage switchgear and control  IS 13947

gear
12. Specification for painting and colour  IS 5

shade
13. Climate proofing □ Relevant IEC
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-208 TITLE SPECIFICATION FOR CAST SHEET 1 OF 2
RESIN DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
DATA SHEET-C
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR AFTER

AWARD OF CONTRACT
A. Information to be furnished within two (2) months of award of contract :
1.0 Positive Sequence impedance at principal voltage tap.
2.0 Zero sequence impedance at principal tap.

0
3.0 Efficiency at 75 C winding temperature
3.1 At full load
3.3 At 50% full load.
4.0 Maximum efficiency and load at which it occurs
5.0 Regulation at full load at 750C winding temperature at
5.1 Unity power factor
5.2 0.85 power factor lag.
5.3 0.5 power factor lag
6.0 Resistance per phase at
HV winding : ohms
LV winding : ohms
7.0 Conductor area ( sq. mm. ) and current density ( A / cm2)
HV winding
LV winding
8.0 Type of winding
HV
LV
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-208 TITLE SPECIFICATION FOR CAST SHEET 2 OF 2
RESIN DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
DATA SHEET-C
9.0 Insulating materials for winding insulation
HV winding
LV winding
10.0 Insulating materials for interwinding insulation
11.0 Insulating materials between
11.1 Winding and core
11.2 Laminations of core
12.0 Details of Winding temperature indicator

13.0 Thermal withstand capability under full short circuit conditions, in terms of
number of times of occurrence of short circuit and corresponding
anticipated percentage reduction in transformer life. Relevant calculation
shall be submitted.
B DRAWINGS
The following drawings/ documents shall be submitted for the client

approval/ information in the stipulated time
1.0 General outline drawings showing plan, front elevation, and side elevation,
with all fittings and accessories, foundation details and weights within 1
month of award of Contract for approval.
2.0 Rating and diagram plate drawing in two months for approval
3.0 Wiring diagram of marshalling box in two months for information
4.0 Catalogs of the temperature sensors and temperature scanners/indicators

within two months for approval
C TEST REPORTS
The testing of transformers shall be carried out in the presence of the

Owners’ representative. Test results shall be corrected to a reference
temperature of 900C.
1.0 Two copies of test results shall be submitted for client approval before
despatch of transformer.
2.0 Additional bound copies, as required by the client contract, of complete test
results including all tests on transformer, current transformer (if provided ) ,
shall be furnished with the transformer.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.7347A-EL-209 HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS SHEET 1 OF 10
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The specification covers the design, material, constructional features, manufacture,
inspection and testing at the VENDOR'S/his SUB-VENDOR'S works, delivery to site
and performance testing of High Voltage induction motors rated above 1000V.

performance of induction motors shall comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed.
The equipment shall also conform to the applicable standards specified in data
sheet latest revision as on the date of offer. Nothing in this specification shall be
3.0 DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
3.1 When this specification forms part of the driven equipment specification, information
not given in the Data Sheet-A will be governed by the driven equipment
specification.
3.2 Motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as per
the requirement for the driven equipment. The motor characteristics shall match the
requirements of the driven equipment so as that adequate starting, accelerating,
pull up, break down and full load torques are available for the intended service. The
service shall be considered as 1.0 only.
4.0 PERFORMANCE AND CHARACTERISTICS
4.1 Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the expected life
span when operated continuously under the supply conditions mentioned in the
design specification
4.2 Motors shall be suitable for the method of starting as per the requirement.
4.3 Motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation at full load at a supply voltage of
80% of the rated voltage for 5 minutes, commencing from hot condition.
4.4 FAST BUS TRANSFER: Motors shall withstand the voltage and torque stresses
developed due to the vector difference between the motor residual voltage and the
incoming supply voltage equal to 150% of the rated voltage, during fast change
over of buses. The duration of this condition is envisaged for a period of one
second.
4.5 Efficiency of the motors shall be more than 95%.
4.6 STARTING-REQUIREMENTS
4.5.1 Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the applicable
method of starting, without exceeding acceptable winding temperatures, when the
ISSUE
R0
supply voltage is 80% of the rated voltage above 1000 kW and 85% of the rated
voltage below 1000 kW.
4.5.2 The locked rotor current / starting current of the motors shall not exceed the
following values which are inclusive of 20% tolerance.
i. 600% of full load current for motors upto and including 1500 kW,
ii. 450% of full load current for motors above 1500 kW
iii. Locked rotor current of VFD controlled AC motors shall be limited to 300 %
of full load current and is subjected to IS tolerance.
4.5.3 NO. OF STARTS : Motors when started with the driven equipment coupled shall be
capable of withstanding at least three successive starts from cold conditions &
three starts from hot condition ( with initial temperature of the motor at full load
operating level) without injurious heating of windings. The motors shall also be
suitable for three equally spread starts per hour under the above referred supply
conditions
4.7 LOCKED ROTOR WITHSTAND TIME : The locked rotor withstand time under hot
conditions at 110% rated voltage shall be more than the starting time at minimum
permissible voltage (clause 4.1 above) by at least three seconds or 15% of the
accelerating time whichever is greater. Provision of speed switch shall be avoided
to the extent possible. In case the speed switch is required, it shall be indicated out
by the bidder in his offer.
4.6.1 When a speed switch is mounted on the motor shaft, the same shall remain closed
for speeds lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the rated speed.
The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% over speed in either
direction of rotation. If the speed switch requires any auxiliary voltage, it shall be
suitable for the auxiliary voltage of 110V DC
4.8 Motors shall be capable of developing the rated full load torque even if the supply
voltage drops to 70% of the rated voltage. The pull out torque of the motor shall be
atleast 205% of full load torque.
5.0 INSULATION AND COOLING
5.1 All Motors shall have class F insulation but, limited to class B temperature rise.
5.2 Motors shall be given power house treatment. Additional treatments to withstand
heavily salt polluted or similar atmospheric conditions.
5.3 The insulation system shall withstand steep front impulse voltage of value given as
per Table-1 of IEC-34-15 having front time of 0.2 microseconds.
5.4 Cooling
The motor shall be self ventilated type, either totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) or
closed air circuit air cooled (CACA).
ISSUE
R0
For large capacity motors, totally enclosed tube ventilation (TETV) shall be
considered. In case water-cooling is required for very large motors, prior approval of
customer is to be obtained before proceeding ahead with design and manufacture.
Flow switches shall be provided for monitoring cooling water flow if CACW motors
are specified.
6.0 TEMPERATURE RISE
6.1 a) The temperature rises for air cooled motors shall not exceed 70 deg C by
winding resistance measurement method. .
b) For water cooled motors, the temperature rise shall be 80 deg. C over inlet
cooling water temperature mentioned elsewhere.
c) Under extremes of supply condition (clause 4.1), the temperature rise shall not
exceed the value indicated in IS by 10oC.
6.2 For motors specified for outdoor installation heating due to direct exposure to solar
radiation shall be considered.
6.3 Atleast six numbers duplex/twelve numbers simplex resistance type temperature
detectors for the stator winding each having D.C. resistance of 100 ohms at 0oC,
embedded in the stator winding at locations where highest temperatures may be
expected, shall be provided. The material of the RTD's shall be platinum. One RTD
shall be provided for each of the motor bearing & shall be wired upto the terminal
box. The temperature detectors shall be of 3 wire, duplex type. RTD for heat
exchanger shall be provided if required.
7.1 All insulated windings shall be of Copper. The winding insulation shall be Non-
hygroscopic, oil resistant and, flame resistant.
7.2 All Motors shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other means to facilitate safe
lifting.
7.3 Motors shall be provided with drain plugs, so located to drain water, resulting from
condensation or due to other causes, from all pockets in the motor casing.
7.4 Noise level and vibration limit should not exceed as specified in relevant IS / IEC.
7.5 Vibration pads shall be provided for all HT motors for mounting vibration detectors.
7.6 Motors shall have IP 55 protection.
7.7 For HT motors, insulation shall be Vacuum Impregnated (VPI).
ISSUE
R0
7.8 HT motors shall withstand 1.2/50 micro sec impulse Voltage wave of 4U+5 kV
(U=Line voltage in kV). The coil inter-turn insulation shall be as per IEC-60034 –
Part 15 followed by 1 min power frequency high voltage test of appropriate voltage
on inter turn insulation.
7.9 Canopy shall be provided for all the motors located outdoor.
8.0 BEARINGS
8.1 Motor shall be provided with antifriction bearings, unless sleeve bearings are
required by the motor application. motor bearings shall not be subjected to any
external thrust load.
8.2 Unless otherwise specified, motor bearings shall have an estimated life of atleast
40,000 hrs.
8.3 The bearings shall permit running of the motor in either direction of rotation.
8.4 When forced oil lubrication is required, prior approval from the client shall be
obtained.
8.5 When forced oil lubrication or water cooling is required, the machine shall be
suitable for starting & continuous operation for atleast 10 minutes, without the
availability of lubrication or cooling system.
8.6 If the bearings are oil lubricated, a drain plug shall be provided for draining residual
oil & an oil level sight gauge shall be provided to show the precise oil level required
for stand still and running conditions.
8.7 It shall be possible to lubricate the bearings without dismantling any part of the
motor.
8.8 Each bearing shall be provided with a duplex RTD and shall be wired up to the
terminal box.
8.9 The contact rating of the potential free contacts shall be 110V DC
8.10 The thermometers shall be located at a convenient height for easy reading and
handling.
8.11 Bearings shall be insulated to prevent shaft currents and resultant bearing damage.
8.12 For all VFD operated motors shall have insulated bearings to prevent flow of shaft
currents.
9.0 TERMINAL BOX
9.1 Motor terminal box shall be detachable type and located in accordance with Indian
Standards clearing the motor base-plate/foundation.
ISSUE
R0
Separate terminal boxes shall be provided for each of the following:
a. Stator Leads
b. Rotor leads (wound motors)
c. Space Heaters
d. Temperature Detectors
9.1.1 The three phases shall be segregated by barriers of metal or fibre glass. The
neutral leads shall be brought out in a separate terminal box (not necessarily
phase segregated type) with shorting links for star connection.
9.2 For Motor above 1000 KW, separate neutral terminal box shall be provided to
mount three differential current transformers (CT). 3 Nos of neutral CTs shall be
supplied and mounted by the Bidder. 3 Nos of phase side CTs shall be supplied
by the Bidder in loose to mount it in the Switchgear panel.
9.2.1 The neutral box arrangement shall be such as to permit easy access for C.T.
testing and replacement.
9.2.2 The arrangement shall be such as to permit easy access for C.T. testing and
replacement.
9.3 The cable box design shall be suitable for any type of cable termination kits
available. Cable glands shall be double compression brass type.
9.4 Terminal boxes shall have a degree of protection of atleast IP 55 for out door
application.
9.5 The terminal box shall be capable of being turned through 360o in steps of 90o.
9.6 Terminals shall be of stud type & the terminal box shall be complete with
necessary lugs, nuts, washers.
9.7 When single core cables are to be used the gland plates shall be of non magnetic
material.
9.8 Sizes of terminal boxes and lugs shall suit the cable sizes as per the approved
calculation during detailed engineering. In case of motor terminal box being not
suitable for specified cable size/number, suitable trifurcating box shall be provided
with proper phase segregation and same shall be subjected to prior approval.
9.9 The terminal box shall be capable of withstanding maximum system fault current
for duration of 0.25 sec.
10.0 PAINT AND FINISH
10.1 All motor parts exposed directly to atmosphere shall be finished and painted to
produce a neat and durable surface which would prevent rusting and corrosion. The
ISSUE
R0
equipment shall be thoroughly degreased, all rust, sharp edges and scale removed
and treated with one coat of primer and finished with two coats of grey epoxy paint
and the paint film thickness shall not be less than 150 microns.
11.0 HEATING DURING IDLE PERIODS
11.1 Motors shall have space heaters suitable for 240V, single phase, 50 Hz, AC supply.
Space heaters shall have adequate capacity to maintain motor internal temperature
above dew point to prevent moisture condensation during idle period. The space
heaters shall be placed in easily accessible positions in the lowest part of the motor
frame.
12.0 ACCESSORIES
12.1 Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor,
for bolted connection of the main earthing conductors. The earthing pads shall be of
non-corrodible metal welded or brazed. These earthing points shall be in addition to
earthing stud provided in the terminal box.
12.2 Except when otherwise specified, the motors shall be provided with a bare shaft
extension having a key slot and a key at the driving end.
12.3 The following details, in addition to those specified in applicable standards shall be
included on the rating plate.
12.3.1 Temperature rise of windings in degree centigrade at rated load, rated voltage,
frequency and ambient conditions and the method of measuring temperature rise.
(Thermometer / Winding resistance).
12.3.2 Type of bearings, recommended lubricant, lubricating interval & re-lubricating

quantity.
13.0 TESTS
13.1 Motor shall be subjected to all the routine tests as per applicable standard in the
presence of the client/client representative. Copies of test certificates of type and
routine tests shall be furnished as specified in the distribution schedule, for the
client approval. The VENDOR shall ensure to use calibrated test
equipment/instruments having valid calibration test certificates from standard
laboratories traceable to national/international standards.
13.2 Type test certificates for similar motors shall be furnished with the Bid. If type tests
have not been carried out on similar Motors, or if the type test reports submitted are
not found in order, then VENDOR shall carry out these tests without any extra cost
to the client.
ISSUE
R0
13.3 The induced shaft voltage shall be measured at the manufacturer's works during
shop testing. The maximum value of induced voltage in the motor shaft shall not
exceed 250mV.
13.4 The polarisation index test shall be carried out on all motors. The minimum value of
the polarisation index shall be 2 when determined as per IS-7816.
13.5 Coils of HV motors shall be tested as per IEC-34-15. Dielectric tests to establish the
insulation withstand level of Motors as indicated in above shall be performed on a
sample coil (identical to that to be used in the motor quoted for) for each type of HT
Motor.
13.6 Loss tangent measurement of coils for all motors and shall be done as per IS-
13508.
13.7 All other routine tests shall be carried out as per applicable standards.
14.0 Name plates
14.1 Motors shall have stainless steel name plate(s) showing diagram of connections, all
particulars as per as IS 325/IS12615 and shall have ”BEE” marking.
In addition to the minimum information required by IEC/IS, the following information

shall be shown on the motor rating plate.
Temperature rise in ◦C under rated condition and method of measurement.
Degree of protection
Bearing identification no. and recommended lubricant.
Location of insulated bearings.
15.0 Installation
Installation shall be carried out as per IS:900.
SL.N
BRIEF TITLE REFERENCE NUMBER OF STANDARDS
O.
1. THREE PHASE INDUCTION  IS-325  BS-4999  IEC-34
MOTORS
2. ROTATING ELECTRICAL  IS-4722  BSEN60034-  IEC-34-

MACHINES 1 1
3. SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION  IS-996  BS  IEC

MOTORS
4. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR  IS  BS-6751  IEC

CLIMATE PROOFING
5. DESIGNATIONS FOR TYPES  IS-2253  BSEN60034-  IEC-34-
ISSUE
R0
SL.N
O.
OF CONSTRUCTION AND 7 7
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
OF ROTATING ELECTRICAL
MACHINES
6. TERMINAL MARKING &  IS-4728  BS-4999-108  IEC-34-

DIRECTION OF ROTATION 8
FOR ROTATING ELECTRICAL
MACHINERY
7. DESIGNATION OF METHODS  IS-6362  BSEN  IEC-34-

OF COOLING FOR ROTATING 60034-6-1994 6
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
8. DEGREES OF PROTECTION  IS-4691  BS-EN60529  IEC-

PROVIDED BY ENCLOSURE 529
MACHINERY
9. GUIDE FOR TESTING THREE  IS-4029  BSEN60034-  IEC-34-

PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS 2 2
10. MEASUREMENT AND  IS-12075  BS-4999142  IEC-34-

EVALUATION OF VIBRATION 14
MACHINES
11. CLASSIFICATION OF  IS-5572  BS  IEC-79

HAZARDOUS AREAS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
12. DIMENSIONS OF SLIDE RAILS  IS-2968  BS-4999-141  IEC

FOR ELECTRIC MOTORS
13. PERMISSIBLE LIMITS OF  IS-12065  BSEN  IEC

NOISE LEVEL FOR ROTATING 60034-9-1994
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
14. GUIDE FOR TESTING  IS-7816  BS  IEC

INSULATION RESISTANCE OF
ROTATING MACHINES
15. INDUCTION MOTORS- IS-12615  IEC-

ENERGY EFFICIENT THREE 60034-3
PHASE SQUIRREL CAGE-
SPECIFICATION
ISSUE
R0
SL.N
O.
16. FLAME PROOF A C MOTORS  IS- 3682

FOR USE IN MINES.
17. FLAME PROOF ENCLOSURES  IS-2148

OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS
18. STARTING PERFORMANCE IS-8789  BSEN-  IEC-34-

OF SINGLE SPEED THREE 60034-12 12
PHASE CAGE INDUCTION
MOTORS FOR VOLTAGE UP
TO 600 V
19. CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS  IEC-34-

WHEN FED FROM 17
CONVERTERS –
APPLICATION GUIDE
20. ADJUSTABLE SPEED  BS-EN-  IEC-

ELECTRICAL POWER DRIVE 61800 61800
SYSTEM- EMC
REQUIREMENTS AND
SPECIFIC TEST METHODS.
21. DIMENSIONS AND OUTPUT  IS-1231  BS-4999-141  IEC-

SERIES FOR ROTATING 72-1
ELECTRICAL MACHINES.
22. ELECTRICAL APPARATUS IS-5571  BSEn-60079  IEC-79-

FOR EXPLOSIVE GAS 10
ATMOSPHERE –
CLASSIFICATION OF
HAZARDOUS AREA.
23. TANGENT DELTA & DELTA  IS-13508  BS  IEC

TANGENT DELTA TEST
24. IMPULSE VOLTAGE  IS  BS  IEC-34-

WITHSTAND TEST 15
25. TEMPERATURE RISE  IS-12802  BS  IEC

MEASUREMENT OF
ROTATING ELECTRICAL
MACHINES
26. TYPE OF DUTY AND CLASSES  IS 12824  BS  IEC
ISSUE
R0
SL.N
O.
OF RATING ASSIGNED TO
ROTATING ELECTRICAL
MACHINES
27. CBIP RECOMMENDATION

FOR MOTORS
ISSUE
R0
TITLE DATA SHEET-C
HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE VENDOR

AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
Technical particulars as per data sheet B of tender specification. (Based on

1.0
motor manufacturer)
2.0 Type and frame size :
3.0 Starting time (Secs)
3.1 With 100% voltage at terminals
3.2 With minimum voltage at terminals (at ____ % Rated voltage)
4.0 Safe stall time at 100/110% rated voltage under hot/cold condition.
5.0 Type and size of cable for which gland is provided in the terminal box :
6.0 Type of bearings and expected life.
7.0 Total weight of motor (kg)
7.1 Weight of Stator (kg)
7.2 Weight of Rotor (kg)
8.0 Motor GD2 :
9.0 Efficiency (%)
9.1 Full Load Efficiency
9.2 75% Load Efficiency
10.0 Power Factor
10.1 Full Load Power Factor
10.2 75% Load Power Factor
11.0 Torque (% FLT)
11.1 Starting
11.2 Maximum (Pullout torque)
11.3 Pull up torque
12.0 Type of Enclosure
13.0 Cooling designation
14.0 Space heaters
14.1 Rated voltage/number
ISSUE
P1
FILE NAME: M4-203-02-R10.DOC TCE FORM 329 R5

TITLE DATA SHEET-C
14.2 Rating total

14.3 Separate terminal box provided
15.0 Motor reactances (Pu)
15.1 Sub transient reactance
15.2 Transient reactance
15.3 Steady state reactance
16.0 Guaranteed losses (kW)
16.1 Iron loss
16.2 Copper loss
16.3 Friction, Windage & Stray losses.
17.0 Motor outline dimension drawing (Number of copies as per distribution schedule)
18.0 Type test certificates (Number of copies as per distribution schedule)
19.0 Speed torque curve at rated & minimum starting voltage.
20.0 Current - speed curve.
21.0 Current - time curve.
22.0 Efficiency, power factor, slip, current against output curve.
23.0 Thermal withstand characteristic for motors - Hot & Cold.
24.0 Negative sequence current Vs time curve for motor.
25.0 Rotor voltage/Rotor current (for wound motors).
26.0 Bearing temperature indicator
26.1 Type and make
26.2 Quantity of BTDs
26.3 Number of contacts in each indicator
26.4 Contact rating at 220V DC at 240V AC
A separate dimensioned outline and general arrangement drawing of motor
shall furnished indicating the following: Name of Manufacturer, Weight of motor
(kg.) – Static and dynamic Centre line of motor Foundation details, Openings ,
embedment details in foundation for entry of all cables such as power, space
27.0
heater, etc. Connection details of motor i.e, start/delta terminal markings,
clearance between phases, Cable disconnecting facilities and direction of cable
entry and cable glands (if provided).
Dimensions of terminal boxes for main power leads, space heater leads and
28.0
ETD leads.
29.0 Size, type and overall diameter of cable for which terminal boxes are suitable.
Openings and embedment’s in foundation for cable entry for power leads, space
30.0 heater leads, ETD leads and earthing conductor, etc. with relative locating
dimensions and sizes in all views of motor.
ISSUE
P1

TITLE DATA SHEET-C
31.0 Location of bearing thermometers and pockets for the same.

32.0 No. & type (NO/NC) of contacts provided on bearing thermometers.
33.0 Location and size of earthing terminals/holes in earthing pads.
Coupling type, diameter of shaft extension, dimensions of key slot and details of
34.0
half coupling (if specified).
The following additional data/details should be shown on the motor drawing,
35.0
when applicable.
36.0 Cooling water requirement for water cooled bearing (Lts/min).
37.0 Cooling water requirement for water cooled windings (Lts/min).
38.0 Required pressure of cooling water (kg/cm2).
39.0 Required maximum temperature of cooling water (oC).
40.0 Weight of cooler if removable (kg).
41.0 Oil level sight gauges for oil lubricated bearings
B. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR INFORMATION.

1. Insulation
1.1. Material and treatment of insulation
2. Winding
2.1. Stator winding
(a) Connection
(b) Resistance/phase
2.2. Rotor winding
(a) Connection
(b) Resistance/phase
3. Bearing
3.1. DE Bearing
3.1.1. Type, No. & make
3.1.2. Lubricant
3.1.3. Initial quantity
3.1.4. Relubricating interval
3.1.5. Relubricating quantity
3.1.6. Anticipated life
3.2. NDE Bearing
3.2.1. Type, No. & make
ISSUE
P1

TITLE DATA SHEET-C
3.2.2. Lubricant
3.2.3. Initial quantity
3.2.4. Relubricating interval
3.2.5. Relubricating quantity
3.2.6. Anticipated life
4. Motor bearing lubrication system -
Self lubrication/Forced oil lubrication
4.1. Forced oil lubrication system (if provided)
Whether this is compatible with forced oil lubrication system of driven
a)
equipment.
b) If NO, furnish the following details for motor bearing
i. Type, make and specification of oil
ii. Flow rate (Ltrs/Sec)
iii. Pressure (Kg/cm2)
iv. Quantity of lube oil pump sets provided for each motor
v. Local control panel provided for forced oil lubrication system of each motor
Make, type and name plate particulars of lube oil pumps & 415V, 3 phase, 50Hz
vi.
motors.
vii. Filters - Make & type
5. Air temperature detector (Internal)
(CACA/CACW motor)
5.1. Type & make
5.2. Number
5.3. Number of contacts in each indicator
5.4. Contact rating at - 220V DC- 240V A
6. Terminal box
6.1. Location of main terminal box
viewed from non drive end (Right/Left)
7. No load current of motor at rated
voltage & frequency (for each type of motor)
8. Limiting rotor temperature for determining safe stall time
9. Instruction Manual (Number of copies as per distribution schedule)
ISSUE
P1

TCE.7347A-EL-210 LOW VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS SHEET 1 OF 7
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The specification covers the design, material, constructional features, manufacture,
inspection and testing at the VENDOR's / his SUB-VENDOR'S works, delivery to
site and performance testing of Low Voltage induction motors rated up to 1000V.

performance of induction motors shall comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed.
The equipment shall also conform to the applicable standards specified in data
sheet latest revision as on the date of offer. Nothing in this specification shall be
construed to relieve the VENDOR of this responsibility. In case of conflict between
the standards and this specification, this specification shall govern.
3.0 DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
3.1 Motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as
specified in the motor Data Sheet and as specified for the driven equipment. The
motor characteristics shall match the requirements of the driven equipment so as
that adequate starting, accelerating, pull up, break down and full load torques are
available for the intended service. The service shall be considered as 1.0 only.
4.0 PERFORMANCE AND CHARACTERISTICS
4.1 Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the expected life
span when operated continuously under the supply conditions mentioned in the
design specification
4.2 Motors shall be suitable for the method of starting as per the project requirement.
4.3 The minimum permissible voltage shall be 85% of the rated voltage during motor
starting.
4.3.1 Motors shall be capable of starting and accelerating the load with the applicable
method of starting, without winding temperatures reaching injurious levels, when the
supply voltage is in the range of 85% of the rated motor voltage to maximum
permissible voltage specified in design specification.
4.4 The locked rotor current of the motor shall not exceed 600% of full load current
(subject to tolerances as per the applicable standard) unless otherwise specified.
The locked rotor current of VFD controlled motor shall be within the limit of
IS12615 / IEC.
ISSUE
R0
FILE NAME: M420301R10.DOC TCE FORM 329 R5

4.5 Motors shall be capable of developing the rated full load torque even if the supply
voltage drops to 70% of the rated voltage. The pull out torque of the motor shall be
atleast 205% of full load torque.
4.6 Motors when started with the driven equipment coupled shall be capable of
withstanding at least two successive starts from cold conditions & one start from hot
condition without injurious heating of windings. The motors shall also be suitable for
three equally spread starts per hour under the above referred supply conditions.
4.7 All the motors having continuous rating shall be IE2 type efficiency.
4.8 All the motor shall be designed for bi-directional rotation.
4.9 All the motors shall be rated for S1 duty for continuous operation. Motors of crane
and hoist application shall be rated for S4 duty, 150 starts/hour.
4.10 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF VFD DRIVEN MOTORS
a) The motor shall be suitable for operation with a solid-state power supply
consisting of an adjustable frequency inverter for speed control.
b) The motor shall be suitable for the current waveforms produced by the power
supply including the harmonics generated by the drive.
c) The Motor shall be designed to operate continuously at any speed over the range
10-100 % of rated speed.
d) The permitted voltage variation should take into account the steady state voltage
drop across the AC drive and all other system components upstream of the
motor.
e) The motor shall be constructed to withstand torque pulsations resulting from

harmonics generated by the solid-state power supply.
f) The driven equipment manufacturer shall be solely responsible for proper

selection of the motor for the given load application and the output characteristics
of the driven equipment.
5.0 INSULATION
5.1 The insulation shall be given tropical and fungicidal treatment for successful
operation of the motor in hot, humid and tropical climate.
5.2 Motors which are VFD controlled shall be inverter grade and shall be suitably
derated to take care of reduced cooling at lower speeds.
ISSUE
R0

5.3 Insulation of VFD controlled Motors shall be designed to withstand a dv/dt of 0.1
micro sec rise from 10 % to 90 % of steady voltage and a maximum peak of 1600
volts as per NEMA standard MG1 Part 31.40.4.2 .
5.4 The insulation shall be of double coat winding wires which having superior electric
strength and thermal capability for VFD controlled motors.
5.5 Winding shall be insulated as VPI (Vacuum Pressure Impregnation) of winding with
suitable resin forces which eliminating voids for VFD controlled motors.
6.1 The temperature rises shall not exceed the values given in IS 12802. Under
extremes of supply condition mentioned in the design specification the temperature
rise shall not exceed the value indicated in IS by 10oC.
6.2 For motors specified for outdoor installation heating due to direct exposure to solar
radiation shall be considered.
7.1 All windings shall be of Copper. The winding insulation shall be Non-hygroscopic,
oil resistant and, flame resistant.
7.2 Motors weighing more than 25 kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other
means to facilitate safe lifting.
7.3 Noise level and vibration limit should not exceed as specified in relevant IS / IEC.
7.4 Motors shall have IP 55 protection.
8.0 BEARINGS
8.1 Motor bearings shall not be subjected to any external thrust load.
8.2 Unless otherwise specified, motor bearings shall have an estimated life of atleast
40,000 hrs.
8.3 The bearings shall permit running of the motor in either direction of rotation.
8.4 When forced oil lubrication or water cooling is required, prior approval from the
purchaser shall be obtained.
8.5 It shall be possible to lubricate the bearings without dismantling any part of the
motor.
8.6 VFD controlled Motors shall have their bearings insulated to prevent motor shaft
currents from entering the bearing race.
ISSUE
R0

9.0 TERMINAL BOX
9.1 Terminal boxes shall have a degree of protection of atleast IP 55 for out door
applicable.
9.2 Unless otherwise approved, the terminal box shall be capable of being turned
through 360o in steps of 90o.
9.3 Terminals shall be of stud type & the terminal box shall be complete with necessary
lugs, nuts, washers.
9.4 When single core cables are to be used the gland plates shall be of non magnetic
material.
9.5 Sizes of terminal boxes and lugs shall be as per the client approved cable sizing
calculations
10.0 PAINT AND FINISH
10.1 All motor parts exposed directly to atmosphere shall be finished and painted to
produce a neat and durable surface which would prevent rusting and corrosion. The
equipment shall be thoroughly degreased, all rust, sharp edges and scale removed
and treated with one coat of primer and finished with two coats of grey epoxy paint
and the paint film thickness shall not be less than 150 microns.
11.0 HEATING DURING IDLE PERIODS
11.1 Motors rated above 30 kW shall have space heaters suitable for 240V, single
phase, 50 Hz, AC supply. Space heaters shall have adequate capacity to maintain
motor internal temperature above dew point to prevent moisture condensation
during idle period. The space heaters shall be placed in easily accessible positions
in the lowest part of the motor frame.
12.0 ACCESSORIES
12.1 Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor,
for bolted connection of the main earthing conductors. These earthing points shall
be in addition to earthing stud provided in the terminal box.
12.2 Except when otherwise specified, the motors shall be provided with a bare shaft
extension having a key slot and a key at the driving end.
13.0 TESTS
13.1 Motor shall be subjected to all the routine tests as per applicable standard in the
presence of the client representative. Copies of test certificates of type and routine
ISSUE
R0

tests shall be furnished for the client approval. The VENDOR shall ensure to use
calibrated test equipment/instruments having valid calibration test certificates from
standard laboratories traceable to national/international standards.
13.2 If type tests have not been carried out on similar Motors, or if the type test reports
submitted are not found in order, then VENDOR shall carry out these tests without
any extra cost to the Purchaser.
SL.NO. BRIEF TITLE REFERENCE NUMBER OF STANDARDS
1. THREE PHASE INDUCTION  IS-325  BS-4999  IEC-34

MOTORS
2. ROTATING ELECTRICAL  IS-4722  BSEN60034-1  IEC-34-1

MACHINES
3. SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION  IS-996  BS  IEC

MOTORS
4. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR  IS  BS-6751  IEC

CLIMATE PROOFING
5. DESIGNATIONS FOR TYPES  IS-2253  BSEN60034-7  IEC-34-7

OF CONSTRUCTION AND
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
MACHINES
6. TERMINAL MARKING &  IS-4728  BS-4999-108  IEC-34-8

DIRECTION OF ROTATION
MACHINERY
7. DESIGNATION OF METHODS  IS-6362  BSEN 60034-  IEC-34-6

OF COOLING FOR ROTATING 6-1994
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
8. DEGREES OF PROTECTION  IS-4691  BS-EN60529  IEC-529

PROVIDED BY ENCLOSURE
MACHINERY
9. GUIDE FOR TESTING THREE  IS-4029  BSEN60034-2  IEC-34-2

PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
10. MEASUREMENT AND  IS-  BS-4999142  IEC-34-14

EVALUATION OF VIBRATION 12075
ISSUE
R0


MACHINES
11. CLASSIFICATION OF  IS-5572  BS  IEC-79

HAZARDOUS AREAS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
12. DIMENSIONS OF SLIDE RAILS IS-2968  BS-4999-141  IEC

FOR ELECTRIC MOTORS
13. PERMISSIBLE LIMITS OF  IS-  BSEN 60034-  IEC

NOISE LEVEL FOR ROTATING 12065 9-1994
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
14. GUIDE FOR TESTING  IS-7816  BS  IEC

INSULATION RESISTANCE OF
ROTATING MACHINES
15. INDUCTION MOTORS-  IS-  IEC-60034-

ENERGY EFFICIENT THREE 12615- 3
PHASE SQUIRREL CAGE- 2011
SPECIFICATION
16. FLAME PROOF A C MOTORS  IS- 3682

FOR USE IN MINES.
17. FLAME PROOF ENCLOSURES  IS-2148

OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS
18. STARTING PERFORMANCE IS-8789  BSEN-60034-  IEC-34-12

OF SINGLE SPEED THREE 12
PHASE CAGE INDUCTION
MOTORS FOR VOLTAGE UP
TO 600 V
19. CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS  IEC-34-17

WHEN FED FROM
CONVERTERS –
APPLICATION GUIDE
20. ADJUSTABLE SPEED  BS-EN-61800  IEC-61800

ELECTRICAL POWER DRIVE
SYSTEM- EMC
REQUIREMENTS AND
SPECIFIC TEST METHODS.
ISSUE
R0


21. DIMENSIONS AND OUTPUT  IS-1231  BS-4999-141  IEC- 72-1
SERIES FOR ROTATING
ELECTRICAL MACHINES.
22. ELECTRICAL APPARATUS  IS-5571  BSEn-60079  IEC-79-10

FOR EXPLOSIVE GAS
ATMOSPHERE –
CLASSIFICATION OF
HAZARDOUS AREA.
23. TEMPERATURE RISE  IS-  BS  IEC

MEASUREMENT OF 12802
ROTATING ELECTRICAL
MACHINES
24. TYPE OF DUTY AND IS 12824  BS  IEC

CLASSES OF RATING
ASSIGNED TO ROTATING
ELECTRICAL MACHINES
25. CBIP RECOMMENDATION

FOR MOTORS
ISSUE
R0

DATA SHEET-C
LOW VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE VENDOR

1.0 Technical particulars as per data sheet B of tender specification. (Based on motor
manufacturer)
2.0 Type and frame size:
3.0 Starting time (Secs)
3.2 With minimum voltage at terminals (at ____ % Rated voltage)
4.0 Safe stall time at 100/110% rated voltage under hot/cold condition.
5.0 Type and size of cable for which gland is provided in the terminal box :
6.0 Type of bearings and expected life.
7.0 Total weight of motor (kg)
7.1 Weight of Stator (kg)
7.2 Weight of Rotor (kg)
8.0 Motor GD2:
9.0 Efficiency (%)
9.1 Full Load Efficiency
10.0 Power Factor
10.1 Full Load Power Factor
ISSUE
P1

DATA SHEET-C
11.0 Torque (% FLT)
11.1 Starting
11.2 Maximum (Pullout torque)
11.3 Pull up torque
12.0 Type of Enclosure
13.0 Cooling designation
14.0 Space heaters
14.1 Rated voltage/number
14.2 Rating total
14.3 Separate terminal box provided
15.0 Motor reactances (Pu)
15.1 Sub transient reactance
15.2 Transient reactance
15.3 Steady state reactance
16.0 Guaranteed losses (kW)
16.1 Iron loss
16.2 Copper loss
16.3 Friction, Windage & Stray losses.
17.0 Motor outline dimension drawing

(Number of copies as per distribution schedule)
18.0 Type test certificates (Number of copies as per distribution schedule)
19.0 Speed torque curve at rated & minimum starting voltage with Speed/Torque curve
of the driven equipment superimposed.
ISSUE
P1

DATA SHEET-C
20.0 Current - speed curve.
21.0 Current - time curve.
22.0 Efficiency, power factor, slip, current against output curve.
23.0 Thermal withstand characteristic for motors of 100 kW & above - Hot & Cold.
24.0 Negative sequence current Vs time curve for motor of 100 kW & above.
25.0 Rotor voltage/Rotor current (for wound motors).
ISSUE
P1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 1 OF 15
211
FREQUENCY DRIVE(VFD)
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The rating of the VFD panel with Bypass-starter required is as per project
requirement.
1.2 The vendor shall be responsible for design, engineering and manufacturing of
the complete system to meet the intent and requirements of the specification.
Selection, sizing and suitability of all equipment and components used for VFD
stand alone panels shall be vendor’s responsibility.
2.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 The system shall be designed to operate at normal ambient temperature,

without any degradation of components throughout its lifetime and energy
efficient.
2.2 The designed VFD shall be standard product and shall provide very high
reliability, high power factor, low harmonic distortion and low vibration/ wear/
noise.
2.3 The system shall be designed to deliver the motor input current and torque for
the complete speed torque characteristics of the pump or fan, with input supply
variation of ±10% and frequency variation of ±5%. It shall be capable of
withstanding the thermal and dynamic stresses and the transient mechanical
torque, resulting from short circuit.
2.4 The drive system shall be designed to operate in one or more of the following
operating modes as to suit characteristics of the driven equipment.
a) Variable torque changing as a function of speed i.e. speed squared.
b) Constant torque over a specific speed range.
c) Constant power over a specific speed range where the torque decreases
when speed increases.
2.5 The drive controller shall be equipped with microprocessor based digital
regulator with programmable functions. The power control regulator logic shall
provide for an acceleration/deceleration current limit curve and shall be capable
of field be separately programmable from 0.1 to 20 seconds.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 2 OF 15
211
2.6 Each channel and motor rating shall be rated to meet pump or fan
requirements. The system shall be designed for linear continuous speed control
from 10% to 100% of equipment rated speed.
2.7 The Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of the voltage and current at inverter
output shall be as per IEC 61800-4 and it shall be considered in the design of
the motor.
2.8 Harmonics at the supply side of the drive system shall be restricted within the
maximum allowable levels of current and voltage distortion as per
recommendations in the latest edition of IEEE-519.
2.9 The overload capacity of the controller shall be 150% of rated current of motor
for one minute for constant torque applications, and 115% of rated current for
one minute for variable torque application at rated voltage. If the motor load
exceeds the limit, the drive shall automatically reduce the frequency and voltage
to the motor to guard against overload. If the load demand exceeds the current
limit for more than one (1) minute, the drive shall shut down to prevent
overheating of the motor and damage to the drive.
2.10 During operation, the system shall be capable of developing sufficient torque
under all load condition to respond to a 20% alteration in speed set point within a
time limit up to 60 seconds
2.11 The integrator action of the speed set point alteration shall be independently
adjustable for both an upward and downward alteration.
2.12 The drive shall trip incase the speed exceeds 105% of the maximum operational
speed or reduces to 45% of the minimum operational speed for more than 10
second.
2.13 Maximum noise level from the drive at 1meter distance, under rated load with all
normal cooling fans operating shall not exceed 85dBA.
2.14 Variable frequency drive shall be arranged so that it can be operated in a circuit
mode, isolated from the motor for start up adjustment and troubleshooting/
maintenance.
2.15 Voltage at motor neutral terminal shall be maintained at ground potential for the
total operating condition.
2.16 The drive system shall ensure following
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 3 OF 15
211
a) Harmful VFD induced harmonics which can create motor heating are
eliminated.
b) VFD induced torque pulsation are limited to maximum 1% (even at low

speed) so there is minimal stress to the equipment
c) Motor is protected from dv/dt stresses.
d) No appreciable increase in motor audible noise.
2.17 DESIGN REQUIREMENT
2.17.1 The system shall operate on constant V/f supply with required voltage boost
capability in low frequency mode of operation.
2.17.2 Short time voltage dip up to 20% of nominal voltage (e.g. in case of a large
motor start up connected to the same bus as VFD) shall not cause the control
system to stop functioning and shall not trip the drive system.
2.17.3 The system shall also be equipped with a facility which will restart the system in
case of voltage dip over 20% or power interrupter for less than 2 seconds, with
recovery of the voltage to its normal value. The drive shall have the facility to
block this feature, if required by operator. Upon restart the converter shall be
capable of synchronizing onto a rotating motor and develop full acceleration
torque within 10 seconds.
2.17.4 The power controller shall be controlled to always start and run the motor in the
forward direction only. Logic shall be provided to prevent the motor from being
started in the reverse direction.
2.17.5 The drive motor shall be speed controlled corresponding to 4-20mA or 0-10V
reference input signal. Upon complete loss of the users speed reference signal,
the drive shall automatically run at constant speed as at 8-100% of the last
speed reference available prior to the loss of signal.
2.17.6 It shall be possible to vary the speed of the drive in either manual or auto mode.
Local/Remote selection shall also be provided in the VFD panel.
2.17.7 With the selector switch in “Local” mode, the operator shall be able to set the
speed through keypad, mounted on front of the drive panel.
2.17.8 With selector switch in “Remote” mode, speed of the motor shall be controlled
from a 4-20mA signal, from owner’s PLC system. Speed control shall also be
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 4 OF 15
211
possible through communication with RJ45 port via MODBUS TCP/IP protocol.
In case, the offered system is not supportive, bidder shall provide necessary
interfacing unit or protocol converter in the drive panel to suit MODBUS TCP/IP
protocol as required for integrating with PLC shall also be provided in the drive
panel.
2.17.9 The required provision for the interface with remote PLC located at control room.
2.18 COOLING
2.18.1 The drive panel shall be naturally cooled type as per manufacturer’s standards.
If unavoidable, forced type cooling system shall be provided. Cooling system
shall include well-dimensioned panel, adequate cooling airflow path, module
cooling fan and if necessary, panel-cooling fan shall be considered. Vendor shall
ensure that the panel dimensions and the flowpaths have been designed for
continuous running at the specified ambient without overheating. For fan cooled
drives, redundant ventilating fans (N+1) shall be provided.
2.18.2 Necessary starters shall be provided within the VFD panels for the ventilation
fans, any other auxiliary motor etc. The system provided shall be interfaced with
drive starting and shut down such that safety interlocks such as start permit from
cooling system to drive and trip signal from cooling system to drive in case of
cooling system failure etc., shall be incorporated in the overall sequence logic.
2.18.3 MCB for motor space heater, auxiliary power supply if required for local panel,
drive panel space etc. shall be included and mounted in easy accessible
location.
3.0 EQUIPEMENT / COMPONENT SPECIFICATION
3.1 POWER CONVERTER
a) The static power shall consist of a line side power converter for operation
as a rectifier and a load side power converter for operation as a fully
controlled inverter. Power converter shall be fast switching, most efficient
and low loss type.
b) Adequate short circuit and over voltage protection shall be provided for
the converter and inverter system.
c) All power converter devices shall include protective devices, snubber

networks and dv/dt networks as required.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 5 OF 15
211
d) The current rating of the converter’s semi-conductor components shall not

be less than 120% of the nominal current flowing through the elements at
full load of the VFD through the whole speed range.
e) All power diodes shall be of silicon type with minimum VBO (Break over
Voltage) rating as 2.5 times the rated operating voltage.
f) The power converter circuit shall be designed so that motor can be

powered at its full nameplate rating continuously without exceeding its
rated temperature rise due to harmonic currents generated by the inverter
operation.
g) The conversion devices and associated heat sinks shall be assembled

such that individual devices can be replaced without requiring the use of
any special precautions/tools.
h) The cooling system of the electronic components, if provided, shall be

monitored and necessary alarms shall be provided to prevent any
consequential damage to the power control devices.
i) Offered system shall also take in account the distance between drive
panel and motor and system shall include all material and accessories to
make system suitable for a distance of 350m.
j) Power semiconductors of reputed make either in stud mounting form or

disc/flat pack type.
k) The converter shall be provided with adequate surge suppression circuitry

at the AC input, DC output and across the devices to limit the main
voltage surges, transformer switching surges, reverse recovery transients
to less than twice the peak value of line working voltage.
3.2 DC LINK
a) Voltage Source Inverter
i) The DC capacitor shall be shunt connected at the input to the

inverter. It shall be sized so that the reactive power requirements
of the motor during its total range of operation is met. Further, the
following aspects shall be observed:
ii) As per standards, the nominal value of capacitance referred to the

temperature of 250C shall be within tolerance range of 10%. At the
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 6 OF 15
211
design ambient temperature, the value of capacitance and the

tolerance range shall be such as to meet the normal
operation/performance requirements of the frequency converter.
iii) As per standards, the dissipation factor of each unit of the capacitor
shall be less than 1% at 250C. However, the design ambient shall
be such as to meet the normal operational/performance
requirements of the frequency converter.
iv) The impregnant used for the capacitor shall be non-inflammable,

non PCB dielectric liquid.
v) The voltage rating of each capacitor shall be selected based on

considerations of life expectancy, overvoltage during regeneration
of energy, design ambient temperature, ripple voltage etc.
3.3 INVERTER
i) The inverter system suitable for three phase output shall consist of the
following subsystems:
ii) The basic inverter circuit consisting of the switching device says
Thyristors/IGBT/MOSFET, connected so as to supply three phase power.
iii) The logic network to enable rapid transition of the main inverter switching
devices from on-state to off-state.
iv) Suitable feedback system to allow balance of reactive power flow during
load power factor fluctuation.
v) The filter system of the inverter output to supress 5th, 7th, 11th and 13th
harmonics at the output of the inverter to less than 5% of the
fundamental amplitude.
vi) The ripple control system to limit current ripple to 4% at the input
terminals of the inverter caused by distorted current output.
a) Voltage source Inverter
i) Constant Torque Operation
The DC voltage input to the inverter shall be accurately monitored

to maintain the ratio the terminal voltage of the motor to frequency
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 7 OF 15
211
at the rated/design as per system requirements. The DC voltage

input shall be maintained within + 1% of the required value. Should
this fall for any reason, necessary action for tripping the frequency
converter, and initiation of alarm and fault diagnostic shall be
provided.
ii) Constant Horsepower Operation
In this type of operation, the voltage at the terminals of the motor

shall be maintained within +1% of the rated value while the
frequency of the inverter is varied to meet the system requirements.
Necessary protective features for tripping the frequency converter,
initiation of alarm and fault diagnostic shall be provided.
3.4 OUTPUT FILTER
a) VFD output current waveform should be inherently sinusoidal at all

speeds, with harmonic limits as specified in this specification. Output filter
shall be provided if required. Output filter capacitors shall be provided with
discharge circuits to ensure that all residual stored charge is reduced to
less than 50 V DC within 300 seconds after a loss of AC voltage. All
capacitor shall be maintenance free and self-healing type.
b) The VFD system shall inherently protect motor from high voltage dv/dt
stress, independent of cable length to motor. Output filter shall be an
integral part of the VFD system and included within the VFD enclosure.
3.5 BYPASS FEATURE
a) Bypass breaker / contactor / MCCB / MPCB complete with protection, and

metering shall be provided.
b) All Variable frequency drives (VFD) having bypass feature shall have
thermal over load relay along with necessary control and metering etc.
Switching scheme shall be such that in case of drive mal-operation, the
motor could be taken on bypass control manually, while the drive could be
attended by opening its isolation devices.
c) Safety interlock for changeover between inverter and bypass

breaker/contactor shall be provided such that closing of healthy device is
inhibited in case of external fault.
d) The normal control philosophy for by-pass starters shall be DOL.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 8 OF 15
211
3.6 CT/PT/METERS
As required for the system offered and the minimum requirement is indicated in
SLD attached with this document and shall be suitable for variable frequency
operation.
3.7 PROTECTION, CONTROL, MONITORING, METERING, INDICATION AND

ANNUNCIATION
a) The system vendor shall provide all the necessary system control,
protection; alarm equipment and metering for the entire drive system and
its auxiliary equipment.
b) Automatic sequence control shall include start-up of cooling system,

auxiliary system of the motor, interlock checking, automatic start and run-
up of drive, planned and emergency shutdown. The same shall be
processed through microprocessor-based system.
3.8 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL
a) Each drive shall be equipped with a front mounted operator control panel
consisting of a backlit alphanumeric display and a keypad with keys for
parameterization and adjusting parameter which shall be limited to
Start/Stop, Local/Remote, Auto/Manual, Increase/Decrease, menu
navigation and protection and measurement parameter selection, etc.
b) All parameter names, fault messages, warnings and other information

shall be displayed in complete English words or standard English
abbreviations to allow the user to understand what is being displayed
without the use of a manual or cross-reference table. This shall also be
used for the modification of all electrical values, configuration parameters,
drive menu parameters, application and activity function access, faults,
local control, adjustment storage, self test and diagnostics. Keypad shall
be operable with password for changing the protection setting, safety
interlock etc. However the parameters such as measurements, setting,
and mode of drive etc. Shall be allowed to be viewed without any
password.
c) Operator console shall have facility / port to connect external hardware

such as Lap-Top etc. Console shall have facility for upload and download
of all parameter settings for start up and operation.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 9 OF 15
211
d) Drive system control also have facility to receive tripping signal from up
stream breaker for tripping and also provision for closing local breaker
after all required process parameters are achieved.
e) User-friendly software for operation and fault diagnostic shall be loaded in

the drive system panel before commissioning.
f) Digital display of the following parameters shall be as a part of the

Operator Control Panel, selected by the operator.
g) Input AC voltage, Input AC frequency, Input AC current ,Output voltage,

Output current VFD / Bypass, Output frequency, Motor thermal state,
Drive thermal state, Motor speed, Motor energy meter, DC Link voltage
and Hour Run.
h) Necessary transducer shall be provided with 4-20mA output for indicating

motor speed in remote control station.
i) The following controls shall be provided as a part of the operators control

Panel or through separate switches.
i) Start/Stop
ii) Speed Control (Raise/lower)
iii) Local/Remote
iv) Emergency Stop
v) Start/Stop for by pass starter (where specified)
vi) Trip-Remote Breaker
vii) Sequential switching of filters
3.9 PROTECTION
a) PROTECTION OF POWER SEMICONDUCTOR
i) Each power semiconductor shall be protected against short circuit.

2 2
The fuse shall be sized so that its I t does not exceed the I t
characteristic of the power semiconductor itself. The voltage and
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 10 OF 15
211
current rating of the fuse shall match the duty on the power
semiconductor. The arc voltage, due to melting of the fuse shall
not exceed the repetitive peak reverse voltage of the power
semiconductor.
ii) All fuses shall have a trip indicator to operate a suitable micro
switch with at least 1 NO + 1 NC potential free contacts for
annunciation and/or tripping.
iii) A fast tripping feeder circuit breaker shall be used for short circuit
protection of thyristors.
b) PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS FOR AC INVERTER DRIVE
i) Fuses shall be provided for all power semiconductors and/or other

devices like commutation chokes, capacitors etc. which are not
adequately protected against flow of abnormal currents.
ii) Under voltage, over voltage protection and Polarizing relay to

prevent reversal of polarity shall be provided on the input side and
Loss of input voltage to inverter shall entail tripping of the inverter.
iii) Protection shall be provided for all control cards, power supply
stabilisers, filter circuits etc and drive shall be provided such that
failure of a part does not cause damage elsewhere in the system.
iv) Polarising relay to prevent reversal of polarity on the input side of

the inverter.
v) Besides the above, the following protective systems shall be

offered by the vendor.
Current limit fuses at the output of the inverter.
Commutation circuit under voltage
Inverter over frequency
Programmable over current
Phase sequence/loss of phase protection
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 11 OF 15
211
Earth fault protection
DC link over voltage protection
Motor protection (Overload, short circuit, single phasing,

locked rotor condition, earthfault, under voltage).
Incoming line surge protection
Ventilation Loss
Over temperature
vi) Protection system / trip from VFD shall be coordinated with

upstream breaker.
3.10 INDICATORS
a) Vendor shall provide indications as required for normal operation and for
easy maintenance, which shall be limited to the following indications.
i. Motor running
ii. Motor stopped
iii. VFD System Fault
iv. System ready to start
v. AC mains ON
vi. Motor over speed
vii. Rectifier output ‘ON’
viii. Motor zero speed
ix. Rectifier breaker trip
x. Inverter overload
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 12 OF 15
211
xi. Cooling system failure
xii. Inverter high temperature
xiii. Communication and measurement system unhealthy
b) Above indications may be provided as a part of the operator control panel,

i.e., door mounted keypad or through hardwired indicating lamps/LEDS.
c) Potential free contacts of items i-iv shall be wired separately for remote
indications.
d) Common potential free contacts shall be provided for all the annunciations
signals and these shall be wired up to terminal block for owner’s use for
remote alarm and monitoring.
3.11 FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
a) Fault diagnostic shall be built into the system to supervise the operation
and failure of the system. The information regarding failure of any of the
system including shut down of the system shall be available for a period
of minimum 4 days (96 hours) after a shut down even though no supply
would be available to the system. The system may be totally de-energized
for maintenance or otherwise. It shall be possible to retrieve the record of
events prior to tripping of the system or de-energisation. Auxiliary supply
to the system components or to the electronics (firmware) for the
diagnostics / display shall be taken care by the manufacturer for this
purpose.
3.12 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY FOR AUXILIARY AND CONTROL CIRCUIT
a) Auxiliary power supply for devices external to VFD module, space heater
supply for Motor, VFD panel space heater, cubicle 11W CFL lamps etc.
and control power supply shall be internally derived through independent
isolation transformers by the vendor.
b) All control circuit shall operate at maximum voltage of 110V AC.
c) Vendor shall include supply of all control transformers, protective devices,

required accessories etc. and any other control supply voltage as required
for the system shall be internally derived from the power supply made
available by the purchaser.
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 13 OF 15
211
3.13 PAINTING
a) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the following
procedure and in accordance with IS: 6005 “Code of Practice for
Phosphating Iron and Steel”. Color of VFD cabinet shall be RAL 7032.
b) Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion

cleaning.
c) Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and
drying.
d) After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and even drying.
e) The phosphate coating shall be followed by the application of two coats of

ready mixed stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be
“flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.
f) After application of the two coats of primer finishing synthetic enamel

paint shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second
finishing coat shall be applied after completion of tests.
g) The final finished thickness of paint film on steel shall not be less than
100 microns and shall not be more than 150 microns.
h) Finished painted surface of panels shall present an aesthetically pleasing

appearance free from dents and uneven surface.
i) A small quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up

required at site after the installation of the panels.
3.14 HARMONICS LIMITATIONS
a) When specified in Data Sheet, the harmonics generated on source (Input)

side and output side shall be restricted to the following limits: (IEEE-519
for source side and IEC-61800 for load side)
i) Voltage Harmonics Source side Load side
Maximum 5% Maximum 5 %( THD)
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 14 OF 15
211
ii) Current Harmonics Source side
5th Maximum 30%
7th Maximum 20%
11th Maximum 10%
b) Vendor shall indicate clearly the method of achieving above requirement.
3.15 TESTING
a) The VFD and all associated equipment shall be tested in accordance

with relevant standards.All routine tests shall be carried out.
b) Type test certificates of all associated equipment shall be furnished

along with vendor drawings.
c) Copies of the test certificates for all bought out items and calibration
certificates for equipments used for testing shall be submitted for the
Purchaser’s approval before dispatch of the VFD.
Applicable standard
1 For Specification For Metal Clad Base Materials for printed IS:5921
circuits for use In Electronic and Telecommunication
Equipment
2 For Specification of Transformers and Inductors (Power, IS:6297
Audio, Pulse and Switching) for Electronic Equipment
3 For Semiconductor Rectifier equipment Safety code IS:6619
4 For Specification for Printed Wiring Board IS:7405
5 For semiconductor devices IS:3700
Essential rating & characteristics
6 For Basic Climate for mechanical Durability tests for IS:9000
Electronic Components
7 For Specification for Metal-Clad Base Materials for Printed IS:5921
Circuits for use In Electronic and Communication Equipment
8 For Specification for Printed Wiring Board IS: 7405
9 For Environmental Requirements of Semiconductor Devices IS:6553
and Integrated Circuits
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 15 OF 15
211
10 For Ambient Temp. Of electronic Equipment IS:9676

11 For Environmental Tests For Electronic Equipment IS:9000
12 Terminal for electronic equipment IS:4007
13 For Busbars and Busbar connections IS:5082
14 For Code of practice for earthing IS:3043
15 For Current transformers IS:2705
16 For Potential transformers IS:3156
17 For Indicating meters IS:1248
18 For Pulse transformer IS:6297
19 For Semiconductor Converters IEC:146
20 For Environmental tests for electronic and electrical IS:9000 Parts 1
equipment to 18
21 Low-voltage switchgear & control gear – General Rules IS:13947
22 IEC:61800 &
Harmonics limitation
IEEE 519
ISSUE
R0
.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 1 OF 8
212
CABLES
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the requirements of Power Cables upto 33kV,
Control, Instrumentation, Communication and Lighting Cables shall be
FRLS with general purpose insulation and sheaths. All the cables shall be
armoured type only. Power cables shall be XLPE insulated and control
cables shall be PVC/XPLE insulated.
2.1 The design, construction, manufacture and performance of cables shall

comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes in
the locality where cables will be installed. Nothing in this specification shall
be construed to relieve the VENDOR of this responsibility.
2.2 Unless otherwise specified equipment shall conform to the latest applicable
standards as on the date of tender submission unless otherwise indicated.
3.0 SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 The following aspects are applicable for all the types of cables covered in
this specification.
(a) Construction and Performance
Construction and Performance of the Cable shall conform to the

Standards indicated herein and the details furnished in Data Sheet.
(b) Conductor
i Aluminium conductor, stranded, grade H4, Class 2 as per IS 8130

(conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords).
ii. Annealed, stranded Copper Conductor, Class 2 as per IS 8130

and designated by alphabet 'C' in Data Sheet-A. Conductor shall
be tinned.
(c) Insulation
Insulation for cables shall be as per requirement indicated herein and

shall conform to the properties covered in the following applicable
standard.
i) IS 5831 - PVC insulation and sheath for electric cables
ii) IS7098 - XLPE insulation (method of curing of HT XLPE
insulation shall be gas/steam curing.)
(d) Core Identification
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 2 OF 8
212
CABLES
Colour coding shall be acceptable for all cables upto 5 cores. Cables
with more than 5 cores shall have printed numerals every 50mm on
each core.
(e) Inner Sheath
Inner sheath when specified shall be extruded type and shall be

compatible with the insulation provided for the cables.
(f) Armour
Armouring for the cables shall comprise galvanised steel or hard

drawn aluminium, in the form of round wires or strips. These are
designated as below
W - Galvanised single steel wire

F - Galvanised single steel strip
AW - Hard drawn single aluminium wire
AS - Hard drawn single aluminium strip
(g) Screening
I) The screening shall consist of one or more of the following, as

Specified (as per IS 7098 -2)
a) Non-metallic semi-conducting tape,

b) Non-metallic semi-conducting compound, and
c) Non-magnetic metallic tape wire, strip or sheath.
NOTE-The semi-conducting tape and semi-conducting

compound shall be suitable for the operating temperature of
the cable and compatible with the insulating material.
(h) Outer Sheath
The outer sheath shall be of an extruded layer of suitable synthetic

material compatible with the specified ambient and operating
temperature of the cables. The sheath shall be resistant to water, ultra
violet radiation, fungus, termite and rodent attacks. The colour of the
outer sheath shall be decided during the detailed engineering stage.
XLPE/PVC sheath shall meet the requirements of Standards covered
above.
(i) Tests and Test Equipment
Cables shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in

accordance with standards specified. Test methods shall conform to
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 3 OF 8
212
CABLES
IS 10810 (Methods of Test for Cables). Type tests and optional tests
according to applicable standards shall be conducted on cables.
BIDDER shall ensure use of calibrated test equipment having valid
calibration test certificates from standard laboratory traceable to
National Standards.
(i) Cable Drums
Cables shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drums. The wood

used for construction of the drum shall be properly seasoned and free
from defects and wood preservative shall be applied to the entire
drum. All ferrous parts shall be treated with a suitable rust preventive
coating to avoid rusting during transit or storage. Cable drums shall
conform to IS 10418 (Specification for drums of electric cables).
Before winding the cables on drums, VENDOR shall obtain client

approval for the drum lengths so as to minimise the number of joints
to the extent possible. Cable ends shall be sealed by non-hygroscopic
sealing caps.
Cable drums shall carry following details in printed form :
a) Manufacturere’s name and trade mark

b) Type of cable and voltage grade
c) Year of manufacture
d) Type of insulation
e) No. of cores and size of cables
f) Cable code
g) Length of cable on drum
h) Inner Diameter and Outer Diameter of Drum
Incremental cable lengths in meters shall be embossed on the outer

sheath of every 1 metre interval
i) Name of the PURCHASER: “TANGEDCO _UTPP”
k) BIS mark ISI Marking)
3.2 For 11 kV cables, screen of each core shall be sized to withstand 400
A for 1 sec.
For 33 kV cables, screen of each core shall be sized to withstand system
earth fault current for 0.16 sec.
3.3 For HT motors the voltage drop in the cable, during motor starting condition,
shall be limited to 10% and during full load running condition, shall be limited
to 2.5% of the rated voltage.
4.0 DATA TO BE FURNISHED
4.1 Data Sheet-B
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 4 OF 8
212
CABLES
BIDDER shall furnish the information called for in Data Sheet-B for each
type of cables. All BIDs shall be accompanied by descriptive technical
catalogues.
4.2 Data Sheet-C
The data called for in Data Sheet-C shall be furnished for all cables after
the placement of order.
5.0 REQUIREMENT OF SPECIAL SHEATH FOR FRLS CABLE
Outer sheath for FRLS cables shall meet the following test requirements
related to flame retardance, low smoke emission, low acid and toxic gas
emission. The BIDDERs shall have proper test apparatus to conduct all the
relevant tests as per the applicable Standards mentioned herein.
5.1 Test for Flame Retardance
(a) Oxygen Index
The critical oxygen index value shall be minimum 29 when tested at

27+2oC as per ASTM-D-2863 and the temperature index value shall
be minimum 250oC at oxygen index of 21 when tested as per ASTM-
D-2863/NES 715.
(b) Flammability
i. Cables shall pass test under fire conditions as per

IS-10810-Part-53.
ii. Cables shall also pass tests as per IS-10810 Part-61 & Part-
62.
iii. Fire survival cables in addition to tests (i) and (ii) above shall
pass tests as per IEC-331.
iv. For Cables which pass test as per IEC-332, IEEE-383,

and Swedish chimney test F3 as per SS 424-1475.
5.2 Test for Smoke Generation
The cables shall satisfy the tests conducted to evaluate the percentage
obscuration by smoke in an optical system placed in the path of the smoke.
The maximum smoke density rating shall not be more than 60% when
tested as per ASTM-D-2843.
5.3 Tests for Acid Gas Generation
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 5 OF 8
212
CABLES
The hydrochloric acid generation when tested as per IEC 754-1 shall be
less than 20% by weight.
5.4 Tests for Resistance to Ultra Violet Radiation
This test shall be carried out as per DIN 53387. The retention values of
tensile strength and ultimate elongation after the tests shall be minimum
60% of tensile strength and ultimate elongation before test.
5.5 Tests for Water Absorption
Outer sheathes shall be subjected to tests for water absorption as per IS

10810.
5.6 Anti-rodent and termite repulsion test.
6.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
The various types of cables covered in this specification shall meet the
following requirements :
6.1 1100 V Grade PVC Insulated Control Cables
The cables shall be insulated with extruded PVC compound type A,

provided with inner sheath and outer sheath of extruded black PVC
compound type ST-1.
Following abbreviations are used
C Copper conductor, stranded, class 2 as per IS 8130

W Galvanised single steel wire
F Galvanised single steel strip
The construction, performance and testing of the cable shall comply with
the following standards :
IS 1554 - Part 1 (PVC insulated heavy duty electric cables for working
voltages upto and including 1100 V).
6.2 XLPE Insulated HV Power Cables
The conductors shall be screened by extruded semi-conducting compound

and XLPE insulated. The cores shall be screened by extruded semi-
conducting compound in combination with non-magnetic metallic tape
(copper tape preferred).The inner sheath over laid up cores and outer
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 6 OF 8
212
CABLES
sheath over the armour shall be extruded black PVC compound type ST-2.
Core identification shall be by printed numerals.
The following abbreviations are used
A Aluminium conductor, stranded, grade H4, class 2 as per IS 8130

AW/AS Hard drawn aluminium single wire/strip
The construction, performance and testing of the cable shall comply with IS
7098-Part 2 (Cross Linked Polyethylene Insulated PVC Sheathed Cables.
For working voltages from 3.3kV upto and including 33kV).
6.3 1100 V Grade XLPE Insulated Power Cables
The cable shall be extruded XLPE insulated. The inner sheath over laid up
cores and outer sheath over the armour shall be extruded PVC compound
type ST-2. Core identification shall be by printed numerals.

AW/AS Hard drawn aluminium single wire/strip
7098-Part1 (Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables. For
working voltages upto and including 1100 V).
6.4 Not Used.
6.5 1100 V Grade Lighting/Misc./Light duty unarmoured cables
Cables shall be insulated with extruded PVC type-A. Outer sheath shall be
extruded PVC type ST-1. The sheathed cables shall be weather proof
suitable for indoor/outdoor use. Twin and multicore cables shall be laid up
and filled with thermoplastic material, bound by plastic tape and provided
with outer sheath.

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 7 OF 8
212
CABLES
694 (PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including 1100 V).
6.6 Trailing Cables (Power & Control)

Trailing cable, 1.1kV grade with highly flexible stranded tinned copper
conductor, insulation of EPR (Ethylene-propylene Rubber) each individual
core protected and covered and overall outer cover of poly-chloroprene
rubber cable will confirm to IS 9968 part-1.
7.0 TESTS
Cables offered shall be type tested and proven type. Routine tests shall be
carried out on 100% drums. Type tests, special tests and acceptance tests
shall be carried out on 1 drum selected on random basis, out of every 10 or
less number of drums of each type and size of cable of each lot.Size shall
mean area of cross section in sq.mm read in conjunction with the number of
cores. Type shall mean type of insulation, sheath, volt grade FRLS/FS etc.
7.1.0 Type Test
a) Tests on conductor
i) Annealing Test (for copper)
ii) Tensile test (for aluminium)
iii) Wrapping test (for aluminium)
iv) Resistance test
b) Tests for armour wires/strips
c) Tests for thickness of insulation and sheath
d) Physical tests for insulation
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break
ii) Ageing in air oven
iii) Shrinkage test
iv) Hot test
v) Water absorption (gravimetric)
e) Physical test for outer sheath
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break
ii) Ageing in air oven
iii) Shrinkage test
iv) Hot deformation
v) Heat shock test
vi) Loss of mass test in air oven
vii) Thermal heat stability test (as per IS : 5831)
viii) Bleeding and blooming test
f) Anti-termite and anti-rodent test (on outer sheath).
g) Partial discharge test
h) Bending test
i) Dielectric power factor test
i) As a function of voltage
ii) As a function of temperature
j) Insulation resistance (volume resistivity) test
k) Heating cycle test
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-
SHEET 8 OF 8
212
CABLES
l) Impulse withstand test

m) High voltage test
n) Flammability test
o) Cold impact test
7.2.0 Acceptance Test
a) Annealing test (for copper)
b) Tensile test (for aluminium)
c) Wrapping test (for aluminium)
d) Conductor resistance test
e) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath
f) Hot set test for insulation
g) Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and outer
sheath
h) Partial discharge test (for screened cables)
i) High voltage test
j) Insulation resistance (volume resistivity) test
7.3.0 Routine Test
a) Conductor resistance test
b) Partial discharge test
c) High voltage test
7.4.0 Special Test
a) Oxygen index test as per IS 10810 Part-58
b) Temperature index test as per IS 10810 Part-64
c) Acid gas generation test as per IS 10810 Part-59
d) Smoke generation test as per IS 10810 Part-63
e) Flammability tests as per IS 10810 Parts-53 and 62
f) Flame retardant test as per IS 10810 Part-61
7.5.0 Site Test
The following minimum tests/ checks shall be conducted at site. Any other
tests/ checks as per the manufacturer’s recommendation shall also be
carried out.
a) Insulation resistance test
b) High voltage test
8.0.0 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS
The following drawings and documents shall be submitted for approval during
detail engineering stage.
Design basis report
Cable sizing calculation
General arrangement drawings
Technical data sheet
Test reports
Catalogues
Sub-vendor list
Manufacturing quality plan
Field quality plan
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

ISSUE NO. : R8 SPECIFICATION NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED
1100V LIGHT DUTY CABLES
TCE.7347A-EL-212 DATA SHEET – A SHEET 1 OF 3
A) 1100V POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
1.0 SYSTEM DETAILS
1.1 Nominal Power System Voltage kV 0.415
1.2 Maximum System Voltage for

continuous operation kV 0.457
1.3 System Neutral Earthing UE/E _Earthed

o
1.4 Design ambient air temperature C 50_______
2.0 FRLS PVC outer sheath required  YES
3.0 Power cable:
Conductor : Stranded Cu / Al
Core : Single / Multi core
Voltage Grade : 1100 V
Insulation : XLPE
Inner sheath : Extruded PVC (ST-2)
Armour : Galvanised flat strip / wire
(Aluminium armoured for single core)
Outer Sheath : FRLS PVC (ST-2)
4.0 Control cable:
Conductor : Stranded Cu
Insulation : PVC (Type-A)
Inner sheath : PVC (ST-1)
Armour : Galvanised flat/wire
B) 11kV POWER CABLE
1.0 SYSTEM DETAILS
1.1 Nominal Power System Voltage kV 11kV

continuous operation kV 12kV
1.3 System Neutral Earthing UE/E UE

o
1.4 Design ambient air temperature C 50
REV. NO. PPD. BY JOB NO. CLIENT

DATE CKD. BY
REV. BY DATE PROJECT
TCE FORM 330 R1
1.5 FRLS PVC outer sheath required  YES
2.0 HV Power cable:
Conductor : Stranded Al/Cu

Voltage Grade : 11 kV
Insulation : Extruded XLPE(dry cured)
Screening : Required as per IS-7098-2
C) 33kV POWER CABLE
1.0 SYSTEM DETAILS
1.1 Nominal Power System Voltage kV 33kV

continuous operation kV 36kV
1.3 System Neutral Earthing UE/E E

o
1.4 Design ambient air temperature C 50
1.5 FRLS PVC outer sheath required  YES
2.0 HV Power cable:
Conductor : Stranded Al
Voltage Grade : 33 kV
Insulation : Extruded XLPE ( Gas/Steam cured)
Screening : Required as per IS-7098-2
D) TRAILING CABLE
Conductor : Highly flexible Stranded tinned Cu

DATE CKD. BY
TCE FORM 330 R1

Insulation : EPR (Ethylene Propylene Rubber)
Inner sheath : Poly-chloroprene rubber
Outer Sheath : Poly-chloroprene rubber

DATE CKD. BY
TCE FORM 330 R1
.
TCE.7347A-EL-212 CABLES SHEET 1 OF 2 OF
DATA SHEET - C
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR

AFTER THE AWARD OF CONTRACT
TECHNICAL DATA – Following additional data for Information
shall be furnished by the VENDOR for all cables, within two weeks from
placement of letter of intent or order.
1.0 Continuous current rating of the cable

o
a) In ground at soil temperature 30 C and soil
thermal resistivity of 150oC cm/watt and
depth of burial about a metre A
b) In air at 40oC A
c) Overload capacity and duration A, Hr
d) Derating Factors for :
i) Soil temperature and

thermal resistivity
ii) Ambient temperature
iii) Single core cables laid

in trefoil circuits
2.0 General Technical Data (Power cables)
2.1 Equivalent star impedance per km

of 3 Ph, circuit at power frequency
at maximum conductor temperature Ohm
2.2 Maximum electrostatic capacitance F

per core per km of cable
2.3 Maximum charging current per

conductor per km at nominalvoltage A
2.4 Loss tangent at normal

frequency and rated voltage
2.5 Maximum dielectric loss of

cable per km at normal voltage
and frequency Watts/km
2.6 Short circuit capacity for 1 Sec. KA (rms)
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TCE.7347A-EL-212 CABLES SHEET 2 OF 2 OF
DATA SHEET - C
2.7 Short Circuit current capacity of armour kA for 1 sec

2.8 Maximum dielectric stress
at core screen kV/cm
2.9 Maximum overall dia. of cable mm
3.0 Construction details including type of material used and thickness of each
material for each type of cable in a tabular form.
4.0 Instruction Manuals
4.1 When indicated in Section C specified number of copies of instruction

manuals, descriptive bulletins etc. as indicated in the distribution schedule
shall be furnished prior to despatch of cables. The manual shall include
amongst others, the following particulars :
4.1.1 General information.
4.1.2 Principal technical data.
4.1.3 Description of insulation, sheathing and screening. This should include data
on resistance to attack by chemicals, fungus, termites, rodents, water and
ultra-violent radiation.
4.1.4 Installation and termination instructions.
5.0 Test Certificates
5.1 Type/Routine test certificates for all types of cables included in the order
and special tests on FRLS/FS cables in line with applicable IS.
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
H. V. CABLE TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS SHEET 1 OF 1
TCE.7347A-EL- (3.3KV TO 33KV)
213
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification lays down the performance requirements of following

types of cable terminations and cable joints for use on electrical system
operating at voltages from 3.3kV to 33kV in indoor and outdoor
application.
1.1.1 Heat shrinkable type cable terminations and cable joints.
1.2 Heat Shrinkable Type System
1.2.1 The term shrinkable refers to extruded or moulded polymeric material

which are cross linked to develop elastic memory and supplied in an
expanded or otherwise deformed size and shape. Subsequent heating in
an unconstrained state to a temperature above the shrink temperature
results in the material recovering or shrinking to its original shape.
1.2.2 Stress control and stress grading wherever necessary in the terminations
and joints shall be by means of semi-conducting heat shrinkable tubing.
1.2.3 Environmental sealing between the heat shrinkable materials and cable
surfaces shall be achieved by using hot melted sealant or adhesives.
Where such sealant or adhesives are exposed to high electrical stress,
they must be track resistant.
2.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 External creepage distance between the high voltage conductors and
ground shall be accomplished by utilising heat shrinkable terminations
and joints. These shall be weather resistant.
2.2 The termination systems shall have been type tested for the tests listed in
the IS-13573:1992 and the type test certificates shall be submitted
before dispatch.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

ISSUE NO. R2
HV CABLE TERMINATION AND JOINTS
TCE.7347A-EL-213 (3.3KV TO 33KV) - SHEET 1 OF 1
1.1 Power Cables with extruded insulation  IS  BS  IEC

& their accessories for rated voltage 60502
from 1kV upto 30kV
1.2 Artificial pollution tests on high voltage  IS  BS  IEC

insulators to be used on A.C systems 60507
for salt-fog test SEC-3
1.4 High voltage test techniques  IS  BS

IEC60060-1
1.5 Joints and termination of polymeric  IS 13573  BS 

cables for working voltages from 6.6kV IEC
upto and including 33kV performance
requirements and type tests
1.6 (Partial discharge measurements) for  IS  BS  IEC

partial discharge tests 60270
1.7 Cross linked polyethylene insulated  IS 7098  BS 

PVC specified cables (For working IEC
voltage from 3.3kV upto and including (Part – 2)
33 kV)
1.9 Specification for PVC insulated (Heavy  IS 1554  BS 

duty) electric cable for working voltage IEC
from 3.3kV upto and including 11kV (Part – II)
2.0 NOTES :
Equipment, accessories, components /  IS  BS  IEC

parts, raw materials and tests shall in
general conform to

DATE CKD. BY
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
HV CABLE TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS SHEET 1 OF 1
TCE.7347A-EL- (3.3KV TO 33KV)
213
DATA SHEET-C
AFTER PLACEMENT OF ORDER, THE VENDOR SHALL SUBMIT:
1.0 Reproducible copies of final drawings for all the equipment ordered.
2.0 Six copies of instruction booklets on laying, jointing and testing of the
cables and accessories.
3.0 Six copies of descriptive manuals and principal technical data of all
equipment ordered.
4.0 Six copies of complete test reports.
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
CABLING ACCESSORIES,
CABLE TRAYS, CONDUITS & PIPES
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, material, construction features,

manufacture, inspection and testing at the VENDOR's/his SUB-VENDOR's
works and delivery to site of Cabling Accessories, Cable Trays, Conduits and
Pipes, Junction/Marshalling boxes, Power Receptacles, Motor terminal adaptor
boxes etc.
2.1 The design, construction, manufacture and performance of the

equipment/components shall conform to latest applicable standards as on date
of submission of the bid and comply with all currently applicable statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the equipment/components
will be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the
VENDOR of this responsibility.
2.2 The various accessories and conduits/pipes shall comply with the latest
applicable standards as specified in Data Sheet. Where no standards are
available the supply items shall be backed by test results, shall be of good
quality and workmanship and any supply items which are bought out by the
VENDOR shall be procured from approved manufacturers acceptable to the
client.
2.3 In case of conflict between the standards and this specification, this
specification shall govern.
3.0 EQUIPMENT COVERED UNDER THIS SPECIFICATION
Following equipments are to be supplied/fabricated by the CONTRACTOR.

Required types and quantities shall be as per the project requirement.
3.1 cable trays (ladder, perforated and solid types), cable tray covers and vertical
raceway covers.
3.2 Cable glands and lugs.
3.3 Trefoil clamps.
3.4 GI rigid and flexible conduits and pipes.
3.5 Junctions boxes (JB) and marshalling boxes (MB).
3.6 Power receptacles.
3.7 Motor terminal adaptor boxes.
3.8 Local Push Button Stations.

ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
4.0 CABLE TRAYS AND ACCESSORIES
4.1 Cable trays shall be of Fibre Reinforced Plastic/Glass Reinforced Plastic and of
ladder / perforated / solid type, complete with all necessary coupler plates,
elbows, tees, bends, reducers, stiffeners and other accessories and hardware
as detailed in the relevant drawings. All hardware (i.e. bolts, nuts, screws,
washers, etc.) shall be SS.
4.2 Each 2.5 metre section of all types of cable trays and all elbows, tees, crosses,
etc. shall be provided with two side coupler plates and associated bolts, nuts
and washers.
4.3 FRP Cable Ladders and perforated Cable Trays must meet the following
specifications :
a. Material of cable trays: Flame Retardant, Antistatic & ultra violet resistant FRP
(using premium grade Polyester Resin) and shall have a resin rich surface veil.
b. Manufacturing process :Pultrusion using automated pultrusion machines
c. Glass content in cable trays : > 55% by weight
d. Resin : Ultra violet resistant polyester resin
e. Side runner for the ladder type cable trays : Pultruded FRP channel of 100mm
height with minimum 4mm thickness 3.6 Site Support span : 2 metre
f. 3.7 Rungs and spacing of rungs : Pultruded section free of any sharp
projections to avoid damage to cable and joined to the web of side runner
channel with rigid mechanical locking (without any metal) and suitable to
withstand specified loading. Rung spacing shall be 300mm and shall be
provided with slots for clamping the cables.
g. Load Test Procedure : As per NEMA-FG1-1993. Loading must meet NEMA
Class 8C
h. Fire retardancy :should be very low flammability as per IS-6746 Appendix-K
i. Type Test must meet ASTM E-84, flame Spread <25 (Type Test) and meet
Class 1 as per BS 476 part 7
j. Routine Test : Flammability as per IS-6746-Appendix N-1994
k. Oxygen index test :Oxygen Index should be minimum 30 as per ASTM-D-
2863. Type test reports shall be submitted.
l. U.V. Resistance Test: Test Report for weathering as per IS14887 required for
500 Hours min, with testing of Mechanical strength. After test the mechanical
strength should not reduce by more than 5% after UV exposure. Type test
report shall be submitted.
m. Glow wire Test 960 deg C : As per IEC 60695-2-12-2000. Type Test report
n. shall be submitted.
o. Hardware for fixing cable tray : Shall be same as cable tray material / SS316.
All type of Couplers (Straight Couplers, Variable Angle Couplers and Horizontal
Hinged Couplers) should be of FRP material only.
p. Covers, Bends , Tees , Reducers : Must be made of Pultruded GRP material
only. Metal couplers shall not be used in fabricated bends.
ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
q. All straight lengths & accessories to be supplied with pre-drilled holes for
coupler plates connections , material of coupler plates Bends & accessories
should be same as that of cable ladders.
r. Permissible deflection under test :Shall not exceed L/200mm or 10mm
whichever (For Cantilever loading at mid point) is less.
s. Fiber glass cable trays and accessories shall be manufactured as per NEMA
FGI-198x and ASTM E-84 standards.
4.4 All cable trays and accessories shall be corrosion resistant and fire retardant to
class I fire rating.
4.5 The trays construction shall have high degree of finish and shall facilitate easy
laying of cables without causing damage to cables. The inside surface shall be
perfectly smooth and free from sharp edges, burrs or projections.
4.6 Mechanical properties of FRP Pultruded sections
i. Ultimate tensile strength : 4000-8000kg/cm²
ii. Tensile modulus :2.5-4.8x100000 kg/ cm²
iii. Flexural strength :2500-10000 kg/ cm²
iv. Flexural modulus :3-5x100000 kg/ cm²
v. Pod impact 130kg/cm/cm of notch
vi. Compressive strength :2500-5000 kg/ cm²
vii. Compressive modulus :2.5-4.5 kg/ cm²
viii. Bar col thickness : 50- 65
ix. Electrical properties of FRP Pultruded sections
x. Dielectric strength : Axial:30-45 kV/25mm
xi. Dielectric strength : Radial:10-15 kV/mm
xii. Arc resistance : >120 seconds
xiii. `Water absorption : < 0.1-0.25 %
4.7 Cable Tray Support System
a. Cable tray supports shall be of prefabricated preformed sections of sheet steel,

bolted type and shall be hot dip galvanized.
b. Cable tray support system shall be similar or equivalent to "Unistrut make”.
Support system for cable trays shall essentially comprise of the two
components i.e. main support channel and cantilever arms. The main support
channel shall be of following two types:
c. Single channel strut support for supporting cable trays on one side
d. Double channel strut support for supporting cable trays on both sides
e. Cable supporting steel work for cable racks/cables shall comprise of various
channel sections,cantilever arms, various brackets, clamps, floor plates, all
hardware such as lock washers,hexagon nuts, hexagon head bolt, support
hooks, stud nuts, hexagon head screw, channel nut,channel nut with springs,
fixing studs, etc.
f. The system shall be designed such that it allows easy assembly at site by
using bolting. All cable supporting steel work, hardware fittings and
accessories shall be prefabricated factory galvanised.
ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
g. The main support and cantilever arms shall be fixed at site using necessary
brackets, clamps, fittings, bolts, nuts and other hardware etc. of the
components shall not be allowed.
h. All steel components, accessories, fittings and hardware shall be hot dip
galvanised after completing welding, cutting, drilling and other machining
operation.
i. The typical arrangement of flexible support system shall comprise the
following:
j. The main support channel and cantilever arms shall be fabricated out of
minimum 2.5 thick rolled steel sheets conforming to IS.
5.0 CABLE GLANDS
5.1 The CONTRACTOR shall quote for supply of double compression type cable
glands. Cable glands shall be of robust construction, capable of clamping the
cable and armour rigidly without injury to insulation and provide dust/leak proof
termination. These cable glands shall be heavy duty brass casting, machine
finished and tinned to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components used
in cable glands shall be of neoprene and of tested quality. The maximum and
minimum overall diameter and diameter under armour of the cable shall be
furnished to the successful BIDDER. Cable sizes shall be marked on the cable
glands for easy identification. Each gland shall comprise the following:
(a) Gland body.
(b) Nipple with cone for clamping armour and neoprene compression ring.
Nipple shall have external threads.
(c) Check nut and 2.3 to 3 mm thick neoprene washer.
(d) Metallic compression ring having internal taper to match with armour
wire diameter and outside diameter of cone.
(e) Compression nut having internal threads to fix to the nipple body.
(f) Compression nut with neoprene compression ring for outer sheath of
cable. Such ring shall have a groove on the outer surface in order to
obtain a firm grip on the cable and shall have wide range compression
to suit varying sizes of cables.
6.0 CABLE LUGS
6.1 The current rating of the lugs shall be same as that of the respective cables.
Cable lugs shall be of tinned copper, solderless crimping type of reputed make
conforming to relevant standards suitable for aluminium or copper conductor
cable connections.
7.0 TREFOIL CLAMPS

ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
The CONTRACTOR shall supply trefoil clamps suitable for supporting the
single core power cables of 3-phase A.C. circuits in trefoil formation. The
trefoil clamps shall have a base and two cable clamping pieces hinged to the
base The sizes of trefoil clamps required shall be suitable for the type of cable
(Power, Control, Instrumentation) sizes as per the approved sizing calculations.
8.0 CONDUITS AND PIPES WITH ACCESSORIES
8.1 The CONTRACTOR shall supply galvanised steel conduits, galvanised mild
steel pipes and flexible conduits required for the cabling work. The sizes of
conduits and pipes required shall be as per the project requirement.
Galvanising thickness should be minimum 150 microns.
8.2 The conduits/pipes/flexible conduits and all the other accessories shall conform
to the following:
(a) Conduits shall be seamed by welding and shall be hot dip galvanised
both inside and outside. Conduits and fittings shall be as per relevant
standards.
(b) Pipes shall be of heavy duty type as per relevant standards and shall be
hot dip galvanised both inside and outside.
(c) Flexible conduits shall be made with bright, cold rolled, annealed and
galvanised mild steel strips. Flexible conduits and adaptors shall be as
per relevant standards.
9.0 POWER RECEPTACLE WITH INTERLOCKED SWITCH
9.1 The receptacle shall be industrial heavy duty type with switch suitable for 3-
phase A.C. supply with 3-pin and earth connections. The receptacle shall have
ratings of 32 amps and 63 amps. The socket and switch shall have suitable
interlock facility for safety.
9.2 The receptacle, switch and the galvanised box shall be suitable for saline
atmosphere fabricated from 16 SWG MS sheet housing for outdoor application
and fabricated from 16 SWG GI sheet for indoor application and shall conform
to relevant standards. The box shall be suitable for wall or column mounting.
9.3 The receptacle shall be provided with a matching plug. The receptacle and
switch shall be mounted flush with the front cover plate of the box and the unit
shall be complete with gasket, cable glands, cable lugs and earthing terminal
with washers and nuts suitable for 25 x 6 mm G.I. flat earthing conductor.
9.4 Cable glands and lugs provided shall be suitable for incoming and outgoing
armoured power cables of sizes as per the approved calculations
10.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS

ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
10.1 The CONTRACTOR shall supply terminal blocks wherever required as per teh
design specification. Terminal blocks shall be complete with all accessories like
mounting channels and plates, marking rags and clamps, protective covers,
etc.
10.2 The terminal blocks shall be of ELMEX or equivalent make. All the terminal
blocks shall be rated for 650V, 15A and shall be with disconnecting/shorting
link.
11.0 JUNCTION BOXES WITH TERMINALS (JB)
11.1 Junction Boxes shall be FRP, of outdoor/weather-proof construction (IP-55)

and provided with gasketed front door hinged at one end and fixed with captive
screws at the other end. The terminals shall be suitable for the cables sizes as
per the client approved sizing calculation All terminals blocks shall be rated for
1100V and 15A, unless otherwise specified in project drawings. These shall
be of clip on type. All the terminals shall be complete with insulated barriers,
terminal studs, washers, nuts, locknuts, identification strips, etc.
11.2 The terminal blocks shall be of ELMEX or equivalent make.
11.3 Minimum size (H x W x D) and number of 15 amps terminals and details of

knockouts for cable/conduit entry for each junction box shall be as per the
project requirement.
12.0 MOTOR TERMINAL ADAPTOR BOXES
12.1 The CONTRACTOR shall supply motor terminal adaptor box, wherever
required suitable for the number and size of the power cable(s). The adaptor
box will have to be mounted separately on the pedestal. When mounted on
the motor, the box shall be adequately sized with necessary lead extension
needed to properly terminate the cable(s) considering the obstruction of
foundation, etc. When mounted separately, the box shall be provided with
suitably sized busbars and supports to receive the required number/size of
cables.
12.2 The box shall be dust and vermin-proof not less than IP-55 (IP-65 or IP-66 in
case of Flame proof terminal box) made of 2.5 mm thick sheet steel, complete
with cable glands, cable lugs and fixing hardware. Necessary clearances shall
be maintained between live parts and earth. The colour of the paint shall have
the same colour shade as the motor.
13.0 LOCAL PUSH BUTTON STATIONS
13.1 The Local Push Button Stations shall be FRP enclosed, weather-proof, dust
and vermin-proof, suitable for mounting on wall or steel structures. The
enclosure shall be die-cast aluminium of 2 mm thickness and provide a degree
ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
of protection of not less than IP55 (IP-65 or IP-66 in case of Flame proof
terminal box). The enclosure shall be painted with one coat of epoxy primer
and two coats of light grey epoxy paint.
13.2 The Open/Close/Start push buttons shall be of momentary contact push to

actuate type and stop push buttons shall be stay-put type with mushroom knob.
All push buttons shall be fitted with two (2) normally open and two (2) normally
closed contacts rated for 415V, 10A.
13.3 The following types of push button stations shall be supplied.
Type-A: With three push buttons for control of reversible motors.
Type-B: With two push buttons for control of non-reversible motors.
Type-C: With one push button for "Stop" operation.
13.4 The push button stations shall be complete with inscription plates, earthing
terminals, gland plates and cable glands.
10.0 Fire proof sealing system (FPS)
10.1 Fire proof sealing system will consist of

(i) Fire-stops/fire-seals for sealing of cable/cable tray and conduit/pipe
penetrations, both horizontal and vertical, through brick or RCC
walls/floors, to prevent the spread of fire from one area, which is
separated from others by fire-resistant barriers.
(ii) Fire-breaks' provided on long runs of cable racks/trays to prevent the

propagation of fire along the cable rack, within a single fire-area or fire-
zone.
10.2 The FPS system will also include all the necessary accessories and
equipment required for supporting, holding in position, fixing and installation
of the fire-stop/fire-break.
10.3 The FPS system will comply in all respects with the requirements of the codes
and standards listed below
IEEE-634
ASTM-E-814
ANSI-IEEE-383
IEC-331
IEC-332
10.4 Fire Stop/Seal

ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
The FPS system adopted for cables or cable trays penetrating through walls
and floor openings, or cables passing through embedded conduits/pipes/
pipe-sleeves, constitutes a `fire stop/seal', which is meant to prevent
spreading of fire between areas separated by fire-resistant barriers.
10.5 Fire Break

The fire proofing system, other than fire-stops, adopted to retard flame
propagation along long runs of horizontal or vertical cable trays in the same
fire zone or area, in an event of a fire, will constitute a `fire-break' and will be
provided by applying a suitable fire-resistant coating on cables and cable
trays for the required length, with or without a fire resistant panel, at the point
of the fire break to obtain the fire-rating specified.
10.6 Performance Requirements
(i) Requirement of fire stops
The material, design and construction of the fire stops will be

such as to provide the fire-rating of 120 minutes for a fire on any
side and meet all requirements listed in this specification and the
relevant codes and standards.
The materials used in the fire stops will be non-hygroscopic,

compatible with the type of cables.
The fire stops will be suitable for retrofitting of cables through the
penetration seal without disturbing the sealing of the cables
already existing.
(ii) Requirements of fire breaks
Each firebreak will have a fire-rating of 30 minutes and will be

capable of withstanding for the duration specified, a fire on any
side of the fire break.
10.7 Application of fire proof sealing system
(i) Fire stops

Fire stops will be provided for cable penetration openings listed below
The passage of cables/cable trays pipe sleeves/embedded

conduits through walls / floors.
Vertical raceways, which carry cables between successive floors,

through openings provided in the RCC floor slab, will be sealed by
fire stops at each floor level.
ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
Cable entry through openings in floor slabs below HT/LT

switchgear, MCCs, various control and relay panels and other
bottom entry panels, will be effectively sealed by fire stops.
(ii) Location of fire breaks
Firebreaks will be provided on both cable rack and trenches at all

cable tray intersections and tee-offs.
On linear runs of cable trays between fire stops or fire breaks, fire
breaks will be provided at intervals of 15 metres on horizontal
cable runs and 5 m on vertical cable runs.
Fire breaks in linear runs of cable trenches between intersections
and tee-offs will be provided at intervals of 30 metres.
10.8 Contractor will furnish the test certificates for the fire stops and fire breaks
after award of contract for client / client Representative review. If the
certificates are not satisfactory all the tests will be conducted free of cost. The
offered system i.e. fire stops and fire breaks will be identical (or better) with
the system which is successfully type tested for the specified rating i.e. the
composition density of the material, thickness of coating in case of fire breaks
and any other properties of the material / system offered will be identical or
better than the tested system and will be subject to client / client
Representative approval.
10.9 Performance Tests: Tests on Fire Stops
(a) The fire stops will be subjected to the following type tests:
(i) Fire Rating Test

(ii) Hose Stream Test
(b) Type tests will be conducted on different fire stop test specimens
described above as per IEEE-634. The sizes of the fire stop test
specimens, will be similar to the largest of the sizes being used in the
plant.
(c) Preconditioning of fire stop test specimens
Before conducting the fire rating and hose stream tests, each test
specimen will be preconditioned for thermal ageing, water immersion
and vibration.
(d) Test on Fire Stops
During the fire rating test, the transmission of heat through the cable
penetration fire stop will not raise the temperature on its unexposed
ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
surface above the self ignition temperature of the outer cable covering,
the cable penetration fire stop material, or material in contact with the
cable penetration fire stop, with a maximum temperature limit on the
unexposed surface of 200oC.
(e) Tests on fire breaks

Firebreaks will undergo the following tests as per ANSI-IEEE-383:
(i) Ampacity test

(ii) Flame test
ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R3

.
SHEET 1 OF 1 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-214 CABLE TRAYS, CONDUITS & PIPES
DATA SHEET - C
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR

1.0 FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
1.1 The VENDOR shall furnish the following drawings within 4 weeks from the
date of placement of order for different types and sizes of cable glands,
lugs, junction/marshalling boxes and local push button stations.
1.1.1 Dimensioned drawings showing plan, elevations and adequate number of

sectional views to clarify the general arrangement of the equipment to be
supplied and its sub-items.
1.1.2 Views showing fixing centres and dimensions of fixing holes/bolts etc.
1.1.3 Type and routine test certificates for cable glands, lugs, conduits and
pipes and terminal blocks shall be furnished by the VENDOR. The type
test certificates shall be forwarded within 8 weeks from the receipt of order
and the routine test certificates shall be furnished for the client approval 2
weeks before the date of despatch. Where the equipment does not
conform to any standard, results of any tests carried out on the equipment
shall be furnished.
1.2 Information regarding weight, material of various parts,

painting/galvanising, reference to purchase order, quantity of each item,
the PURCHASER's name and project title shall also be indicated on all the
drawings.
2.0 FOR INFORMATION
2.1 Specified number of copies of the approved test certificates/results shall

be furnished to the client within 2 weeks from the date of despatch of the
equipment.
ISSUE
R0
FORM NO. 329 R5

TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED
ISSUE NO. R4
SPEC. NO.
CABLING ACCESSORIES, CABLE TRAYS AND SHEET 1 OF 2 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-214 CONDUITS / PIPES
1.1 HOT DIP GALVANISING  IS: 2629
2.1 BRASS GLANDS FOR  IS: 12943 • BS: • IEC •

PVC CABLES
2.2 FLAME-PROOF  IS: 2148 • BS:4683 • •
ENCLOSURES OF
ELECTRICAL
APPARATUS
3.1 COMPRESSION TYPE  IS:8309 • BS:4683 • IEC •

TUBULAR TERMINAL
ENDS
4.1 RIGID STEEL CONDUITS  IS:9537 • BS: •
4.2 RIGID NON-METALLIC  IS:9537 • BS: • •
CONDUITS
4.3 ACCESSORIES FOR  IS:3837 • BS: • •
RIGID STEEL CONDUITS
4.4 FITTINGS FOR RIGID  IS:2667 • BS: • •
STEEL CONDUITS
4.5 FITTINGS FOR RIGID  IS:3419 • BS: • •
NON-METALLIC
CONDUITS  IS:3480 • BS: • •
4.6
FLEXIBLE STEEL  IS:6946 • BS: • •
4.7
CONDUITS
FLEXIBLE NON-  IS:4649 • BS: • •
4.8
METALLIC CONDUITS
ADAPTORS FOR  IS:1239 • BS: • •
4.9
FLEXIBLE STEEL
CONDUITS
MILD STEEL TUBES
JOB NO. CLIENT

REV. NO. PPD. BY
DATE CKD. BY
PROJECT
REV. BY DATE
FORM NO. 330 R3
ISSUE NO. R4
SPEC. NO.
CABLING ACCESSORIES, CABLE TRAYS AND SHEET 2 OF 2 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-214 CONDUITS / PIPES
5.1 PLUGS AND SOCKETS  IS:1293 • BS: • IEC •

5.2 SWITCHES AND  IS:13947 • BS: • IEC •
DISCONNECTORS
5.3 BOXES FOR  IS:5133 • BS: • IEC •
ENCLOSURE OF
ELECTRICAL
ACCESSORIES
JOB NO. CLIENT

REV. NO. PPD. BY
DATE CKD. BY
PROJECT
REV. BY DATE
FORM NO. 330 R3
.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SHEET 1 OF 10
SHEET
1.0 SCOPE OF 7 OF 4
This specification covers the requirements of Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
with necessary battery backup to critical AC load systems, which have stringent
requirements, imposed on voltage and frequency regulation, harmonic content
and transient recovery.
2.1 The design, manufacture, performance testing and inspection of equipment shall
comply with all currently applicable statutory regulations and safety codes in the
locality, where the equipment will be installed, Nothing in this specification shall be
2.2 the equipment shall conform to the latest applicable IS, BS or IEC - 62040 (Part-
III) Standards as mentioned in Data Sheet.
3.0 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The UPS system shall be true on line static type and the components of UPS shall
isolate power line transients, frequency and voltage variations. The UPS shall
provide no-break power supply to the critical loads under normal conditions, during
outages in the input power and during failure / mal operation of the main
components of the UPS by switching the alternate supply.
3.2 UPS system shall be working in Parallel Redundant configuration having two sets
of 100% rectifiers, batteries and inverters and shall share the load. Under
normal conditions, when AC mains power is available, both the rectifiers shall
operate independently and supply DC power for float / boost charging the
batteries and simultaneously to inverters. In case of failure in any one
rectifier, the respective battery shall feed the load on the bus without any
interruption. Each rectifier shall be designed for feeding inverter load and float /
boost charging of the battery to its rated capacity within 10 hours. Each rectifier
shall be equipped with automatic 'On Line' as well as manual charging facility.
3.3 Normally both inverters will be synchronized with each other and with bypass (Solid
State Voltage Stabilizer) supply. The two inverters shall operate in parallel and
share the load equally. When a disturbance / fault occurs in any one of the
inverters, the faulty unit shall automatically get disconnected and the entire load
shall be fed from the other inverter. In case, both inverters develop a fault, the
complete load shall be transferred to stabilized bypass (Solid State Voltage
Stabilizer) supply through static switches and retransfer of load from bypass to
inverter supply shall be automatic.
3.4 Both the inverters shall be paralleled and redundant cable shall be provided to feed
the redundant ACDB.
3.5 A manually operated make before break changeover switch in a segregated

compartment shall be provided to bypass the UPS power circuits (inverters and
static switches) for maintenance and repair purposes.
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
4.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF 7 OF 4
4.1 All UPS components, ie., inverter, static by-pass switch, associated controls shall
be mounted in floor mounted, sheet steel panel. Required base frame for
mounting on floor shall be supplied. The panels shall be designed for continuous
operation for the ambient temperature of 500C. The battery shall be separately
installed in a battery room. In case fans are required for cooling, 100% stand-by
shall be provided to ensure rated output of the UPS.
UPS system supplied by the contractor shall be the latest state of the art
technology system fully digitalized using microprocessor controlled full wave
rectification and IGBT rectifier and IGBT inverter.
4.2 Rectifier
4.2.1 The static converter (rectifier) shall be a multi-functional converter providing

functions of power conversion, battery charging and shall have the additional
functions of input power factor improvement and current harmonics reduction.
The converter equipment shall include all necessary independent decentralized
control circuitry and device to conform requirements like voltage regulation,
current limiting, wave shaping, transient recovery, automatic synchronization etc.
as given below.
4.2.2 The converter shall be a solid state static PWM converter using Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) and shall include intelligent features like the drive
circuitry, over current protection, over temperature protection, control power failure
protection and short circuit protection. The rectifier shall be provided with soft start
feature in-order to avoid inrush current when the power supply voltage is restored.
4.2.3 The PWM converter shall be used to achieve unity power factor and reduce input
current harmonics at full load independent of the load and thus improve the overall
input power factor of the converter achieving input KVA savings .
4.2.4 The converter (rectifier) shall accept a wide range of input voltage and frequency
tolerances without using the batteries to supply the inverter. The rectifier shall be
capable of supplying the inverter full load, in addition to charging the fully
discharged batteries in 8 to 10 hours or as recommended by battery manufacturer
and then maintain the battery on trickle charge mode.
4.2.5 During any step inverter load change (0-100%) the converter shall only supply
100% current to the inverter. The battery shall not be cycled at any time during
this step load changes.
4.2.6 The battery recharge system shall include independent regulation and monitoring
devices.
4.2.7 The converter shall meet the specifications given in data sheets in addition to
other requirements stated above
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
4.3 Inverters OF 7 OF 4
4.3.1 The static inverter shall be of solid state IGBT type using proven Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) technique
4.3.2 The inverter shall utilize Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) which shall
provide intelligent features like the drive circuitry, over-current protection, over
temperature protection, control power failure protection and short circuit
protection.
4.3.3 The UPS shall utilize both Voltage and Current feedback control circuits so that
the inverter shall act not only as a constant voltage source but also as a load
required current source. This shall enable the inverter to quickly adapt to the
changing load current value and wave shape
4.3.4 The inverter output voltage and output frequency shall not deviate due to the
following conditions :
(a) From 0 to 100% loading

(b) Inverter DC input voltage & frequency varies from maximum to minimum.
(c) Environmental conditions variations within the limitations
4.3.5 The inverter output shall limit the amount of harmonic content to the values of 5
THD The use of excessive or additional filtering shall not be required to limit the
harmonic content thus maintaining a high level of efficiency, reliability and original
equipment footprint.
4.4 Not Used.
4.5 Static Bypass Switch
4.5.1 Individual UPS will have individual inbuilt static bypass switch shall be provided as
an alternate source of power other than the inverter.
4.5.2 The static switch shall be fully sized to conduct the full nominal current as well the
full overload capability of the UPS. The current rating of the static switch shall be
not less than the continuous full load rating of the UPS and short time rating of
1000% for 20 milliseconds.
4.5.3 Instantaneous transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power and back
shall take place without a break or disturbance in the supply of power to the load,
on the condition that the bypass source voltage and frequency are within the
specified tolerances and that the inverter is synchronised. A high speed switch
shall be used for automatic transfer to the bypass circuit under the following
conditions:
(a) System failure (eg. Logic fail, Two Inverter failures etc.)
(b) Loss of inverter AC output
(c) Inverter output under voltage or over voltage.
(d) Overload beyond the capability of the inverters
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
(e) DC circuit under voltage or over voltage OF 7 OF 4
Manually initiated transfer shall also be possible.
4.5.4 The UPS system logic shall employ sensing which shall cause the static switch to
energize within 150 microseconds thus providing an uninterrupted transfer to the
bypass source.
4.5.5 For maintenance of the UPS, manual bypass shall be provided.
4.6 Voltage Regulation and Frequency Control
The inverter output voltage shall not deviate by more than + 1% RMS. The inverter
output frequency shall be controlled by an oscillator internal to the UPS module
logic. It shall be capable of synchronizing to an external reference (e.g. the
bypass source or another UPS module) or operating asynchronously. The
oscillator shall maintain synchronization with the external reference within the
limitations set hereunder. The inverter shall operate on self run mode without
synchronism if the bypass frequency exceeds the set value. The oscillator, while
running asynchronously, shall maintain the frequency as 50 Hz + 0.01% (or +
0.005 Hz) at all loading conditions of the inverter. Automatic adjustment of phase
relationship between inverter output and standby bypass source shall be at the
rate of 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0 Hz / second.
4.7 Circuit Protection
4.7.1 The UPS shall have built-in protection against: surges, sags, over-current from the
AC rectifier input source, over-voltage and voltage surges from output terminals of
paralleled sources, and load switching and circuit breaker operation in the
distribution system.
4.7.2 Each UPS unit in the UPS system shall include protection against AC-source
overvoltages (as per standard IEC 60146), excessive external or internal
temperature rise and vibrations and impacts during transport.
4.7.3 Each inverter (and the corresponding rectifier and charger) shall shut down
automatically when the DC voltage reaches the minimum voltage specified by the
battery manufacturer.
4.7.4 A load short-circuit shall provoke the static shutdown of each inverter without
destruction of inverter and rectifier and any of the components.
4.7.5 The following devices shall be provided to protect the UPS system:
(a) AC input circuit breaker to Rectifier unit
(b) DC circuit breaker for battery output
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
(c) The AC maximum current shall be controlled by the ConverterOF 7 OF 4
input circuit breaker.
(d) Fast acting semiconductor fuses.
(e) The inverter shall meet the following specifications in addition to other
requirements stated in the enclosed data sheets.
a. Reverse Phase Sequence Protection

In the event of Phase sequence reversal at the input, UPS system shall
continue to work on the main power supply, or UPS systems shall go
into battery mode, and shall not trip the UPS system. Wrong phase
rotation on the input of the converter (rectifier) shall not stop the
inverter neither switching the UPS into battery mode.
4.7.6 All necessary components required for protecting UPS equipment and connected
inputs and outputs shall be furnished by the Contractor as an integral part of the
UPS system.
4.7.7 CABINET AND ENCLOSURES
(a) The entire UPS system, including all components like inverter, static switch,
maintenance bypass, shall be housed in free-standing steel type factory-
finished enclosures complying with the protection standards of IP20. The
enclosure shall be openable using a special tool for internal access. The color
shall be RAL 7035. All parts for maintenance requirement shall be front
accessible.
(b) Similarly, the backup battery system shall also be housed as described earlier
in an IP20 cabinet.
5.0 INDICATIONS & ANNUNCIATION
The UPS system shall be provided with necessary meters, mimic diagram, local
indication / alarm conditions.
5.1 Meters
5.1.1 Meters shall be suitable for semiflush mounting with flanges projecting in vertical
panels.
5.1.2 Digital meters having accuracy 0.5 class.
5.1.3 DC Metre is built in the main display which will indicated the charging and
discharging DC voltage and Currents.
5.1.4 It shall be possible to display the following measurements for eaxh of the UPS
system:
a. Inverter output phase-to-phase voltages
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
b. Inverter output currents OF 7 OF 4
c. Inverter output frequency
d. Voltage across battery terminals
e. Battery charge or discharge current
f. Rectifier/charger input phase-to-phase voltages
g. Rectifier/charger input currents
h. Crest factor
i. Active and apparent power
j. Power factor of the load
k. Static supply input and output voltage.
l. Battery temperature
m. Battery percent charge
n. Available backup time
o. The remaining battery service life
It shall be possible to graphically display the measurements mentioned above on

the screen over significant periods
5.2 Control & Monitoring
UPS system operation shall be facilitated by a user interface, on each of the UPS
units, comprising:
1. A graphic display (at least quarter VGA and high resolution are preferable);
2. ON and OFF control buttons (independent of the display);
3. Status indications with mimic panel.
The control logic power supply shall have redundant power supply AC input and the
system battery as power sources.
UPS shall be provided with ON/OFF push buttons for local control opérations. It
shall be possible to turn OFF the UPS externally via an isolated dry cont2act
Graphic display: The mimic diagram shall enable display of installation

parameters, configuration, operating status and alarms and indication of operator
instructions for switching operations (e.g. bypass). It shall be capable of
supervising a given UPS unit or a parallel system.
Alarm Indication
a. System fault
b. Rectifier charger failure
c. Inverter failure
d. Battery undervoltage
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
e. Over temperature OF 7 OF 4
f. Fuse failure
g. Over load
h. Static transfer to stand-by
i. Transfer inhibted
j. Over load shutdown
k. Emergency shutdown
l. Battery circuit breaker open
m. AC Main failure
n. Manual bypass ON
o. Fan failure
p. Asynchronous condition
q. Control power failure
r. DC ground fault.
Status Indication on Mimic
a. Mains on
b. Rectifier on
c. Battery on load
d. Inverter on
e. AC Stand-by source on
f. Inverter on –load
g. Manual by-pass on
h. Maintenance by pass on
i. Load on static by pass.
j. Inverter faulty
A buzzer shall warn the user of faults, malfunctions or operation on battery power.
Alarm reset button shall be provided to turn off the buzzer.
Remote monitoring and control shall be possible. Each UPS shall be provided with
RS485 compatible with MODBUS protocol for connecting to customer’s computer
system for data display, control and monitoring. Required software with licence to
be uploaded in customer’s PC for above mentioned remote operations shall be
provided by the Bidder.
Statistics on Number of overloads, number of transfers to battery power,

cumulative time on battery power, maximum power levels, demand power levels
shall be possible.
Log of time-stamped events: This function shall store in memory and make
available, for automatic or manually initiated recall, time-stamped logs of all
important status changes, faults and malfunctions, complete with an analysis and
display of troubleshooting procedures. It shall be possible to time stamp and store
at least 2 500 events
Shutdown and administration software shall also be furnished.
6.0 HARMONICS
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
The Rectifier and Inverter design shall be such that the total harmonics
OF 7 injected OF 4
back to the source and to the load shall be limited to 5% at even 50% of loading of
each UPS. The fault level of the system at the point of common coupling shall be
as specified
7.0 BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM
The Battery Monitoring System shall be provided for the automatic acquisition,
trending, alarming and storage of information from every cell in a battery bank
The Battery Monitoring System shall test the relative charge state and health of
each individual cell by injecting a DC current, recording the magnitude of this
current & comparing it to previous benchmark values. The system shall provide
estimated backup time remaining during an actual discharge.
The Battery Monitoring System shall monitor and maintain historical files for:
a) Individual cell
b) Total bank voltage
c) Discharge current
d) Ambient and pilot cell temperature
e) Relative current response value
Display shall be via local LCD display, with capability for viewing at a remote
terminal.
8.0 SYSTEM EARTHING
The VENDOR shall clearly bring out the earthing philosophy to be adopted for the
UPS electronics, protective earthing (PE) and neutral earthing. The requirement of
separate clean earth independent of the plant electrical system earth shall be
clearly brought out.
9.0 TESTS ON UPS
9.1 Type and routine tests certificates for all components made use in the UPS
system shall be furnished. Tests for components shall be as per relevant standard
specifications indicated in Data Sheet.
9.2 BIDDER shall furnish his quality assurance plan for the equipment offered. The
quality assurance plan shall include bought out components and assemblies used
in the UPS system.
9.3 Routine tests on the complete UPS system shall be carried out as per relevant
standards for each major sub-system in the UPS, viz., Rectifier, Inverters,
batteries, stand-by supply, battery monitoring system etc.
9.4 System tests shall be performed on the completely assembled UPS system.
System tests shall include frequency regulations. Voltage regulation, current
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
limiting feature and harmonic content tests in addition to the tests
OFto 7prove the OF 4
functional requirements such synchronisation with range of adjustments, transfer
of static switches for conditions of loss of square wave, overload and under
voltage conditions.
9.5 Type, routine and optional tests covered under clause 7.3 of IEC-60146-4 shall be
conducted on the UPS system in addition to the system tests.
9.6 Endurance test on static switches shall be performed for not less than 10 transfer /
retransfer cycles at full load.
9.7 Heat run test shall be carried out on each branch of UPS including bypass and on
overall UPS system at rated load under relevant ambient conditions for a period of
8 hours. This test shall be conducted as a routine test on all UPS being supplied.
9.8 The Bidder shall be responsible for all site/commissioning tests. All
necessary equipment required for testing and commissioning shall be
arranged by the Bidder. The following minimum tests shall be conducted
at site.
i) 100% load test on UPS

ii) Mains failure test
iii) Main return test
iv) Synchronization test
v) Load sharing test
vi) IR test
vii) Under shoot & over shoot of voltage of rectifier output and inrush
current
viii) Transfer – Retransfer test
ix) Harmonic measurement test
x) Over voltage test
xi) Under voltage test
xii) Over load test
xiii) Battery trip test on under voltage
xiv) Battery load test
xv) UPS auxiliary devices test
xvi) CT tests
xvii) Functional checks of various meters
xviii) Functional tests of earth fault detection module
9.9 BIDDER shall furnish detailed commissioning check lists along with procedures
and formats for recording of the test results for all equipment for client approval.
9.10 The BIDDER shall maintain all tests, calibration records in Purchaser’s approved
formats, and these shall be countersigned by authorized quality control personnel
of the BIDDER supervising these works.
9.11 All meters and other reference devices used for testing shall have valid Calibration
Certificate traceable to reputed national laboratories/institutes. Inspection by client
will not be carried out unless the BIDDER confirms that such calibrated equipment
are ready for proceeding with the tests.
9.12 The BIDDER shall completely assemble, mount & wire all the associated
TCE FORM 330 R1

.
TCE.7347A-EL-215
SHEET
equipment including bought out items and test each cubicle as
OFper7relevant OF 4
standards specified in Data Sheet.
9.13 The UPS proposed shall have the CE mark certification.
9.13 Copies of the test certificates for all bought out items shall be submitted for the
Purchaser’s approval before despatch of the equipment. Bound copies of
complete test results as specified in the distribution schedule shall be furnished
with the equipment. These shall include complete reports and results of the routine
tests as also certified copies of type tests carried out on equipment of identical
design.
TCE FORM 330 R1

ISSUE NO. : R0
TCE.7347A-EL-215 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM SHEET 1 OF 2
1. Basic climatic & mechanical durability

tests for components for electronic and
electrical equipment  IS 9000  BS  IEC
2. Environmental tests for electronic &

electrical equipment  IS 9000  BS  IEC
3. Transformer and inductors (Power,

Audio, Pulse & switching) for electronic  IS 6297  BS  IEC
equipment
4. Printed wiring boards  IS 7405  BS  IEC
5. Environmental requirements for

semiconductor devices and integrated  IS 6553  BS  IEC
circuits
6. Terminals for electronic equipment  IS 4007  BS  IEC
7. HRC Catridge fuses  IS 9224  BS 88  IEC

60269.1
8. Indicating Instruments  IS 1248  BS 89  IEC 60051
9. Degree of protection  IS 13947  BS  IEC60

947-1
10. Semiconductor converters  IS  BS  IEC 60146
11. Semiconductor rectifier equipment  IS 6619  BS  IEC

code
12. Tyristor converters  IS 5082  BS  IEC
13. Emergency std by power systems  IEEE 446  BS  IEC
14. Sealed lead acid cells   IEC

60896-2
15. Vented type Ni-Cd batteries BS : 10918   IEC 60623
16. Stationary cells of batteries lead acid

type
(a) Tabular plate  BS : 1651   IEC
60896-1
(b) Plante plate  BS : 1652   IEC
60896-1
REV. NO. PPD. BY JOB NO. CLIENT:

DATE CKD. BY
REV. BY DATE PROJECT:
TCE FORM 330 R1
ISSUE NO. : R0
TCE.7347A-EL-215 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM SHEET 2 OF 2
17. IEEE recommended practice for sizing

Ni-Cd batteries for stationary  IEEE 1115
application.
18. 1100V cables  IS 1554
19. Surge withstand capability test in

accordance with  IEC 60255-  ANSI C-37- 
5 90-1
20. Harmonic levels  IEEE-519
REV. NO. PPD. BY JOB NO. CLIENT:

DATE CKD. BY
REV. BY DATE PROJECT:
TCE FORM 330 R1
.
TCE.7347A-EL-215 DATA SHEET - C SHEET 1 OF 1
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY BIDDER AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
1.0 Drawing / Document for Approval:
1.1 Detailed schematic diagram of the UPS system showing all components
1.2. Bill of Material indicating rating & type designation of components.
1.3 General Arrangement drawing showing overall dimensions, foundation fixing

details, location of various devices, mimic diagram, list of protections,
annunciation and meters, cable openings, etc.
1.4 Battery sizing calculation
1.5 Battery GA
1.6 Battery air changes for AC requirement
2.0 Drawings / Documents for information
2.1 Type test reports on components chosen.
2.2 Quality assurance plan.
2.3 Instruction manuals.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3
.
STATIONARY LEAD ACID
STORAGE BATTERY
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers requirements of plante type lead acid storage
battery (type F- HDP as per IS 1652), complete with battery racks, inter-cell
and inter-tier connectors and all other accessories. This specification is
applicable for both single cell and multi cell block batteries.
2.1 The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall confirm to the
latest applicable electrical rules, all currently applicable standards codes of
practice indicated in data sheet, regulations and safety codes of the locality
where the equipment are to be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be
construed to relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility.
2.2 All codes and standards referred to in the specification shall be understood to
be the latest version on the date of offer made by the bidder.
2.3 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that instruments and gauges to be

used for testing and inspection of critical parameters as identified in
the specification have valid calibration and the accuracy can be
traced to National standards.
3.0 FEATURES OF CONSTRUCTION
3.1 GENERAL
The equipment offered shall be complete with all parts that are necessary
or usual for the efficient operation of the equipment, whether specifically
mentioned or not. Battery efficiency shall be not be less than 90%.
3.2 PLATES
3.2.1 Positive Plates
The Plante Positive Plate shall be cast solid in pure lead (99.99 % purity) in
one piece and shall have adequate mechanical strength. It shall be
electrochemically formed and shall be capable of operating under normal
working condition without buckling or cracking. Welding together of small size
lead castings or fully formed plates to form larger sizes will not be accepted.
3.2.2 Negative plates
The negative plates shall normally be of the box type. End negative plates, if of
box type may be of the half pasted type. Pasted plates shall have adequate
mechanical strength and shall be so designed that the active material is
maintained in intimate contact with the grid under normal working conditions.
3.3 TERMINAL POSTS
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
STORAGE BATTERY
Terminal posts shall be designed to accommodate external bolted connection

conveniently and positively. Each terminal post shall have two bolt holes of the
same diameter, preferably at right angles to each other. The bottom hole shall
be used to terminate the inter-cell connection. The top hole shall be left for
terminal connections. All the metal parts of the terminals shall be of lead or
lead coated type. Bolts, heads and nuts, except seal nuts, shall be hexagonal
and shall be lead covered. The junction between terminal posts and cover, and
between cover and container shall be so sealed as to prevent any seepage of
electrolyte. All terminals shall be provided with insulated covers/shrouds.
At the take off points for the cable connection a suitable arrangement shall be
made to suit termination of required size of required cable size. The termination
points shall be shrouded with transparent covers in order to avoid any
accidental contact.
3.4 The container material shall be Transparent Styrene Acrylonitrile (SAN)

Containers, cell lids, vent plugs, acid level indicators, separators, connectors,
electrolyte, water, shall conform to the relevant IS/IEC standards. The cell
containers and vent plugs, in addition, shall conform to the safety requirements
of UL 924 or equivalent safety standard. In case the batteries are proposed to
be housed in a sheet metal or polymeric enclosure, the same is deemed to be
included in the scope of the bidder. The enclosure for battery shall conform to
the safety provisions of UL 1778 or equivalent standard.
Container should have adequate Mechanical strength to prevent bulging,
cracking etc. during the life span of battery when operating under specified load
and expected temperature range and due to action of static and dynamic loads
and the action of electrolyte. Containers shall be of transparent material having
FRLS properties.
3.5 SEPARATORS:
The separators shall be acid resistant, chemically inert and should have
excellent oxidation resistance and high degree of porosity to ensure minimum
internal resistance. It should not exhibit any tendency to swell or shrink at
temperature encountered during operation.
3.6 Connectors shall be of lead plated copper. Connectors should be adequately

designed to carry maximum duty cycle as specified and shall offer minimum
resistance. Connectors shall be adequately designed to withstand various
stresses due to temperature changes, attack of acid and dynamic forces that
could occur during the operation of the battery.
All inter row, inter cell and inter row connectors shall be sleeved with FRLS
heat shrunk PVC.
3.7 ELECTROLYTE LEVEL INDICATOR:
The cells should be provided with electrolyte level indicator. The marking on
the electrolyte level indicator should be in red colour for the upper and lower
limits required for the level of the electrolyte. The material used should be acid
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
STORAGE BATTERY
and oxidation proof. For small capacities (upto 150 AH), a combined micro
porous- vent-plug-cum-electrolyte-level-indicator may be provided, while for the
higher sizes separate micro porous vent plugs and electrolyte level indicators
are to be provided.
4.0 ACCESSORIES
The battery shall be complete with accessories and devices, including but not
limited to the following:
i) Battery racks
ii) Cell and stand insulators,
iii) Set of inter-cell, inter-tier and inter-bank connectors as required for the
complete installation.
iv) Electrolyte for first filling + 10% extra.
v) Accessories for testing and maintenance.
(a) One - ± 3 Volts DC Voltmeter with built in

discharging resistor and suitable
leads for measuring cell voltage
(b) One - Hydrometer for measuring specific
gravity of electrolyte in steps of
0.005.
(c) One - Filler hole thermometer fitted with
plug and cap and having specific
gravity correction scale.
(d) Three - Pocket thermometers( For
measuring ambient air temperature )
- Acid resisting funnels
(e) Two - Acid resisting jugs of adequate
capacity.
(f) Two - Rubber aprons
(g) Four - Rubber gloves
(h) Two - Cell lifting straps
(i) One set - PVC spill trays under the battery
cells.
5.0 BATTERY LAYOUT
5.1 The bidder shall review the battery room dimensions/layout drawings included
with the tender specifications and suggest suitable battery layout, providing
dimensioned drawings.
5.2 BATTERY RACKS
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
STORAGE BATTERY
5.2.1 Battery racks shall be constructed from good quality teak wood and painted
with two coats of polyurethane which acts as a strong resistant to sulphuric
acid and fitted with cell number plates. Metallic stands designed to withstand
the seismic forces shall be provided Metallic stands shall be painted
with acid resistant paint after 2 coats of primer. The construction of the
racks, shall be suitable for fixing to a flat concrete floor. The racks shall be
rigid, mechanically strong, free standing type and free from warp and twist. The
completed racks shall be suitable for being bolted end to end to form
continuous row. Insulators shall be provided below the legs of the stands.
5.2.2 The racks shall be of single tier/ two tier construction depending on the final
layout based on space availability. The number of tiers shall be subject to
client approval.
5.3 VENTILATION
The BIDDERS shall provide the proper ventilation for the battery room.
6.0 BATTERY SIZING
The BIDDER shall guarantee the performance of the battery for the duty
requirements indicated over the entire range of temperature and also at the
minimum ambient temperature of 500C with the derating factors and ageing
factor and temperature correction factors as per the design specification. The
procedure for sizing the battery shall be as detailed in IEEE 485. Design
margin to be considered has been specified design specification.
For selecting the number of cells, bidder shall consider a voltage drop of 2 %
between the battery and the DC distribution board.
BIDDER shall demonstrate the performance of the battery at the specified duty
cycle, at the specified min. ambient temperature during pre-dispatch
inspection, by conducting test on a randomly selected cell, if requested.
7.0 CHARGING
7.1 2X100 Float cum boost charger shall be used for the charging the battery.
8.0 LIFE
The BIDDER shall quote in his offer the guaranteed life of the battery when
operating under the conditions specified.
9.0 TESTS
9.1 All tests shall be conducted as per relevant standards. Tests shall comprise of :
(i) Type Tests : Performed at

MANUFACTURER’S works
(ii) Acceptance Tests : Performed at site after
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
STORAGE BATTERY
installation and commissioning of

the battery
All tests shall be witnessed by the client/client representative.
Details of tests to be performed are given below.
9.2 TYPE TESTS
9.2.1 Type tests shall comprise of the following:
i) Verification of constructional requirements.

ii) Verification of marking
iii) Verification of dimensions. iii) Test for capacity
iv) Tests for loss of capacity on storage (Charge Retention test )
v) Ampere-hour and watthour efficiency tests
vi) Endurance test.
vii) Short circuit current and Internal resistance measurement test as per
IEC 60896-1
viii) Test for suitability for floating operation.
9.2.2 In addition, the bidder should have conducted “ test of suitability for floating
battery operation” in accordance with IEC 896-1 at a recognised independent
laboratory and shall furnish a copy of the test report along with the bid for client
review, if the battery specified is for floating operation.
9.2.3 In applications where the first momentary discharge stated is high and lasts for
several minutes a high discharge test shall be conducted, in addition to the
above tests.
9.2.4 Type test report for tests conducted on an identical type and capacity of the
battery shall be submitted for client review. If type tests reports are not
available then these Type tests shall be conducted on a minimum of one
sample cell typical and identical with the cells forming the complete battery
offered. However, the test cell shall not be one of the cells offered in the battery
being supplied.
9.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
9.3.1 Acceptance tests shall be conducted at site on completion of installation and

commissioning and immediately prior to putting the battery in service. These
tests shall comprise of:
i) Visual inspection and Verification of Marking

ii) Verification of dimensions.
iii) Test for Capacity.
iv) Test for voltage during discharge
9.3.2 Vendor shall carry out the capacity test for the following conditions:-
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
STORAGE BATTERY
a) For the load cycle specified.

b) For 10 Hr discharge as per IS-1651.
9.4 TEST REPORTS
A preliminary copy of type test results shall be submitted for approval before
the dispatch of batteries. Specified number of bound copies of complete test
results shall be furnished with the batteries.
10.0 Not Used
11.0 IDENTIFICATION
Each cell shall be marked in a permanent manner in accordance with relevant

standard. In addition, each cell shall be legibly numbered serially to identify the
cell during manufacture, testing, installation and operation of battery to identify
after having assembled into battery bank in battery racks. A set of loose
stickers shall be provided to mark the cells position in the assembled battery
bank.
Each cell shall be marked as per IS-1651 and IEC-486-1. Additionally the
polarity of the cells shall also be marked.
12.0 CO-ORDINATION WITH BATTERY CHARGER VENDOR (IF REQUIRED)

When battery charger is procured separately, the VENDOR shall co-ordinate
with battery charger VENDOR with regard to layout, connections, charging
voltage requirements etc.
13.0 TRANSPORT
The battery shall be transported without acid in preferably dry charged

condition. The acid shall be supplied separately in non- returnable containers.
The packing shall fully confirm to the prevalent safety and environment norms
at the place of use.
14.0 DISPOSAL OF ELECTROLYTE & USED BATTERY

The BIDDER shall furnish a write up on methods to be followed for disposing
the waste electrolyte and scrapped battery to meet the stipulations of the
prevalent environment norms at the place of use.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

SPEC. NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS
ISSUE NO. R8
LIMITED
TCE.7347A-EL-216 STATIONARY LEAD ACID STORAGE BATTERY SHEET 1 OF 1
APPLICABLE STANDARD
1. Stationary cells & batteries
Lead acid type :
a)With tubular positive plate □ IS: 1651 □ IEC: 60896-1
b)With plante positive plate □ IS: 1652 □ BS: 6290-2
2. Water for storage battery □ IS: 1069 □ BS: 4974

3. Sulphuric acid □ IS: 266 □ BS: 3031
4. Rubber and plastic containers for lead □ IS: 1146
acid storage battery
5. Sealing compound for lead acid □ IS: 3116
batteries ( Bitumen based )
6. Synthetic separator for lead acid □ IS: 6071
batteries
7. General requirements and methods of □ IS: 8320
test for lead acid storage batteries
8. Recommended practice for for sizing □ IEEE: 485

large lead acid storage batteries for
generating stations and substations
9. Containers & Vent Plugs □ UL : 924

10. Battery Enclosures □ UL : 1778
11. Recommended practice for design and
installation of Storage batteries. □ IEEE-484

DATE CKD. BY
REV. BY DATE: PROJECT
TCE FORM 330 R1
.
TCE.7347A-EL-216 DATA SHEET - C SHEET 1 OF 1 OF
STATIONARY LEAD ACID STORAGE BATTERY
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY VENDOR AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
1.0 FOR APPROVAL
1.1 Layout drawing showing the battery room dimensions (to be obtained from
OWNER), no. of rows, overall dimensions of each row, cable termination location
with dimension, no. of air changes recommended, cross sectional view etc.
1.2 Detailed calculations for sizing of the battery considering various derating factors
and the duty cycle specified.
1.3 Copies of Test Reports as specified in distribution schedule.
2.0 FOR INFORMATION
2.1 Drawing showing constructional details of cell.
2.2 Battery characteristics :
(a) Curve showing cell volts Vs. time of different discharge rates.
(b) Curve showing cell volts Vs. time at different charging currents.
(c) AH capacity Vs. years of service.
(d) Capacity retention characteristic
(e) Percentage capacity Vs Temperature
(f) Charge current( Amps ), Cell voltage( V) and charge quantity( % ) Vs

time.
2.3 Copies of instruction manuals as per distribution schedule to cover installation,

commissioning, operation and maintenance.
Note : The vendor shall plan his manufacturing schedule so as to allow atleast 3 weeks
time for approval of the drawings after their receipt by the client.
ISSUE
R0
.
SPEC NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LTD.
TCE.7347A-EL-217 BATTERY CHARGER SHEET 1 OF 10 OF
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers requirements of Battery Charger equipment,

comprising of 2X100% Float and Float cum Boost charger housed in sheet
steel control cabinets shall be provided.
2.1 The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall comply with
all currently applicable statutory regulations and safety codes in the locality
where the equipment will be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be
2.2 Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall conform to the latest applicable
standards as mentioned in Data Sheet as on the date of tender submission
unless otherwise indicated. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to
relieve the VENDOR of his responsibility.
Other National Standards are acceptable if same are established to be

equal to or superior to the listed ones. In all such cases however , copies of
English translation of such National Standards shall be enclosed with the
bid. Bids not complying with this requirements are liable to be rejected.
In the event of conflict between codes and standards referred to elsewhere

in the specification and the requirements of this specification, the
requirements of this specification shall govern.
3.0 TYPE
3.1 The float and boost battery charger shall be static type composed of silicon
controlled rectifiers (SCRs) and diodes connected in three phase full wave
bridge circuit along with electronic controllers.
3.2 The rectifier transformers for float and boost chargers shall be indoor dry
type, double wound with star-delta connections. The BIDDER shall ascertain
if taps are required and provide adequate number of primary and secondary
taps, if necessary.
4.0 RATING
4.1 The float charger shall be designed for supplying :
a) The D.C. loads specified in Data Sheet A1; i.e. continuous load .
b) The float charging current of the battery.
c) Largest D.C motor running current
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
d) 25% margin over the above loads
4.2 The boost charger shall be designed for supplying the boost charging
current of the battery.
4.3 The float and boost chargers shall be designed for 415V, 3 phase,3 wire, 50
Hz input.
4.4 If the battery and charger are to be supplied by separate Vendors, the EPC
contractor shall coordinate with the battery Vendor regarding the float/trickle
and boost charging current and voltages required by the battery.
5.0 PERFORMANCE
5.1 Float Charger
5.1.1 The D.C. output voltage during float charging shall be stabilised within + 1%
of the set DC bus voltage for AC input voltage variation of +10%, frequency
variation of + 5% and DC load variation from 0 - 100%. The voltage
regulation shall be achieved by a constant voltage regulator having fast
response SCR control. The ripple content shall be within 1% of D.C. output
nominal voltage with battery disconnected. Also in any mode of operation,
the maximum harmonics in the charger output shall not exceed 5%.
5.1.2 The setting of the output D.C. bus voltage shall be adjustable between +
10% of nominal rated voltage.
5.1.3 There shall be provision for manual control if automode fails.
5.1.4 The current limiting feature of the float charger should be designed to take
care of the loads indicated in clause 4.1/testing of lamps, etc.
5.1.5 Line surge suppressers shall be provided.
5.2 Boost Charger
5.2.1 For boost charging the discharged battery after a mains failure, the rectifier
shall charge the battery at high rate limited to the maximum boost charging
voltage. The boost charging shall come on only when selected for boost
mode manually.
a) In auto control, the DC output current shall be stabilised within +2% for
AC input voltage & frequency variation of + 10% and + 5%
respectively. There shall be provision for manual control if auto-mode
fails.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
5.2.2 The boost charge voltage and current settings shall be adjustable between
70 to 100% of maximum boost charge voltage and between 30 to 100% of
maximum boost charging current.
5.2.3 During boost charging following emergency measures shall be provided :
a) If the AC mains supply fails, an arrangement shall be made to

automatically connect the battery directly across the load in case of
charger with separate float & boost units and when 2x100% float cum
boost chargers are provided.
b) If the spare float charger supplying D.C. load fails, the load shall be
fed from the point of connection at the tapping of the battery via
adequately rated blocking diodes. Two blocking diodes in series shall
be provided to take care of short circuit of any one diode.
5.2.4 Line surge suppressers shall be provided.
6.0 CHARGER CUBICLE
6.1 Boost and float chargers when separate shall be compartmentalised.
6.2 Indications, controls and output voltage setting adjustments shall be on front
panel.
6.3 The components shall be liberally rated and housed in a well ventilated
sheet metal cubicle complete with input and output terminals. Louvers shall
be provided for ventilation backed up by fine wire mesh so that the degree of
protection shall be equal to or better than IP-42.
6.4 All printed circuit cards shall be plug-in type, interlocked to prevent insertion
in a wrong slot. Each card shall have LED indication on its front plate to
indicate normal condition and readily marked test pins.
6.5 All components shall be accessible to the maintenance technician for easy
disassembly and replacement. Access to parts of equipment shall be with
minimum danger from all hazards.
6.6 All components and modules shall be clearly and unambiguously marked
and all wiring colour coded and tagged.
6.7 All power & control wiring within the cubicle shall be done with stranded
copper wires. The power wiring shall be adequately sized for the required
rating. The minimum sizes for control wiring will be 1.5 mm 2 and for power
wiring shall be 4 mm2.
6.8 Ground terminals with isolating links shall be provided.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
6.9 Cable glands and tinned copper crimping type lugs shall be provided to suit
the approved cable sizes for incoming and outgoing cables.
7.0 COMPONENTS/ACCESSORIES
7.1 The VENDOR shall submit a scheme for alarm and trip indication, lamps on
the cabinet and for fault annunciation contacts paralleled for remote
annunciation. Instead of incoming ON/OFF switches, striker fuses and
contactors, the VENDOR may provide suitably rated 3 pole MCCBs with
over load and short circuit protection and auxiliary contacts.
7.3 Float Charging
Each float charger unit and float cum boost charger shall essentially
comprise of following :
7.3.1 One (1) set - Three phase full wave, bridge rectifier circuit comprising silicon
controlled rectifiers and silicon diodes complete with resistor/capacitor
network for surge protection. The diodes/SCRs Shall be individually
protected by fuses and fuse fail indication. The fuses shall be of fast acting
semiconductor type.
7.3.2 One (1) Double wound, dry type, three phase suitably rated mains
transformer with fuse protection and with one set of power factor correction
capacitors to maintain a power factor of 0.85 (lag).
7.3.3 One (1) set of suitably rated control transformers for electronic controller.
7.3.4 One (1) Electronic controller comprising of power supply card, soft start cum
current limit card, auto trickle mode card with facility for setting trickle charge
current and monitoring battery current, error amplifier cards and pulse
generating cards for achieving the DC output voltage stabilisation of +1%
and also for achieving current limiting feature. The electronic controller shall
have protection features with indications for under-voltage, over-voltage,
earth fault, set output voltage and phase failure or voltage unbalance.
7.3.5 Adequately sized necessary built-in accessories shall be provided such that
on failure of the controller in auto mode the voltage can be effectively
controlled manually.
7.3.6 One (1) Filter circuit comprising of smoothing choke and condensers
complete with HRC fuse with trip indication for filter condenser circuit.
7.3.7 One (1) Auto / Manual selector switch for selecting the mode of operation of
the controller.
7.3.8 One (1) front panel mounted potentiometer for set point adjustment of output
voltage in auto mode.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
7.3.9 One (1) front panel mounted potentiometer for manual adjustment of voltage
in manual mode.
7.3.10 One (1) TP or TPN AC ON/OFF switch for float charger incoming.
7.3.11 One (1) set of HRC fuses complete with fuse fittings for AC input with
suitable ratings and with trip indication.
7.3.12 One (1) set of clustered LED type lamps to indicate float charger AC Mains
'ON' condition.
7.3.13 One (1) AC contactor with suitably rated coil with three main contacts and 2
NO + 2 NC auxiliary contacts, suitably rated thermal overload relay and
ON/OFF control switch.
7.3.14 One (1) set of HRC fuses complete with fuse fittings for the DC output and
with trip indication.
7.3.15 One (1) moving coil DC ammeter, with shunt, of size 96 x 96mm with 240
deflection and accuracy Class –1 with suitable range to read the float
charger output current.
7.3.16 One (1) Double pole DC ON/OFF rotary switch for float charger output.
7.3.17 One (1) clustered LED type lamp to indicate float charger DC 'ON'
condition.
7.3.18 Two (2) nos. blocking diodes in series to block backfeed from battery to float
charger.
7.3.19 One no. make before break type selector switch for charging mode.
7.4 Combined Float-Cum-Boost Charger
In case of float-cum-boost charger, the following components shall be

provided for boost charging in addition to items of clause 7.3.
7.4.1 The electronic controller mentioned in item 7.3.4 shall also be suitable for
boost charging the battery in case of float-cum-boost charger. In addition,
the electronic controller shall be provided with following features.
a) Boost current stabilisation of + 2% with AC input voltage variation

and frequency variation of + 10% and + 5% respectively.
b) Boost charge current limiter with potentiometer to adjust the setting.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
7.4.2 The potentiometer for set point adjustment of output voltage specified in item
7.3 for auto and manual operation shall be sized to take care of maximum
boost voltage.
7.4.3 During boost charging the DC bus load shall be connected via two diodes in
series connected to the tap cell of the battery. This is to take care in case of
failure of standby charger supplying DC load. For this,items listed in 7.5.12
and 7.5.13 shall be provided.
7.5 Not used
7.6 Common Accessories
The chargers shall essentially comprise of following common items.
7.6.1 One (1) moving coil DC voltmeter of size 96 x 96mm and of suitable range
with a four (4) position selector switch to read the voltage of 'FLOAT
CHARGER', 'BOOST CHARGER', and 'BAT TAP' with ‘OFF' position for
separate float and boost charger and 'CHARGER - A' 'CHARGER - B' and
'BAT TAP' with OFF position for float-cum-boost charger.
7.6.2 One (1) moving coil ammeter, with shunt, size 96 x 96mm with 240
deflection and accuracy class –1 to read output current of float-cum-boost
charger.
7.6.3 One (1) moving coil centre zero ammeter, with shunt, size 96 x 96 mm with
240 deflection and accuracy class –1 to read discharge/charger currents of
the battery, with suitable range.
7.6.4 One (1) cubicle space heater suitable for 240 V AC 50 Hz, single phase.
7.6.5 One (1) 240 V AC lamp for cubicle internal lighting.
7.6.6 Two (2) - ON/OFF switches with fuses or MCB for space heater and internal
lighting.
7.6.7 One (1) clustered LED type lamps on DC load side to indicate DC "ON"
condition.
7.6.8 One (1) set of clustered LED type lamps on AC mains input to indicate
mains AC "ON" conditions.
7.6.9 Annunciation windows shall be provided on the charger cubicle and initiating
contacts shall be provided for remote alarm for each of the following faults :
a) Mains AC failure
b) Float charger AC input fuse blown/MCCB tripped
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
c) Boost charger AC input fuse blown/MCCB tripped
d) i) AVR Defective
ii) Float charger DC output fuse blown
iii) Float charger U/V and current limiter protection
iv) Boost charger over current protection
v) Float charger over voltage protection
e) Boost charger DC output DC fuse blown
f) Float or float-cum-boost charger filter condenser fuse blown.
g) Boost charger filter condenser fuse blown.
h) Float charger rectifier fuse blown
i) Boost charger rectifier fuse blown.
7.6.10 One pair of potential free contacts (changeover type) for each of the above
fault indications shall be wired to the terminal block for extension to the
Purchaser's control room if called for in Data sheet-A1. A changeover
contact of the relay which actuates for any of the above faults shall be wired
to terminal block for common alarm in control room additionally.
7.6.11 The alarm annunciator shall consist of flush mounted facia and shall have
following features:-
- Fault indication by steady lit window
- Audiable alarm on fault occurrence
- Acknowledgement, resetting and test
- Suitable for NC/NO initiating contacts
- Facility for separate audio visual alarm on control supply failure
The alarm annunciator scheme operation shall be as follows :

Visual Audible
alarm alarm
----------- ------------
Normal OFF OFF
On occurrence of fault -
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
First fault Flashing ON
Subsequent faults Flashing ON
Accept fault -
First faults Steady OFF
Subsequent faults Steady OFF
Reset - Faults cleared OFF OFF
Faults not cleared Steady OFF
Lamp test Steady OFF
8.0 POWER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
8.1 Diode and thyristors shall be of monocrystalline type silicon, capable of

providing continuous output at specified voltages. It shall have high power
efficiency.
8.2 If many diode or thyristor assemblies are connected in parallel, care shall be
taken to ensure that each rectifier or thyristor operates within its rating and
shares the load uniformly.
8.3 Each diode or thyristor built in a multi-built assembly shall be provided with a
short circuit protection to avoid complete shut-down of the equipment
because of a fault on single unit. Suitable fuses shall be provided for such
protection.
8.4 Necessary spare capacity shall be built in the equipment to continuously

supply full load even with one unit out of circuit.
8.5 The diodes or thyristor banks shall be natural air cooled.
8.6 The diodes or thyristors shall be protected against overvoltage due to

chopping surges with the aid of snubbers (i.e resistor-capacitor combination
and Metal oxide variator).
9.0 Not used.
10.0 The battery charger shall be derated for both temperature and altitude and
the ratings assigned shall be the rating after derating.
11.0 TESTS
11.1 The following routine tests shall be conducted at works at no extra cost.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
a) Visual checks for dimensions and general arrangement.
b) Wiring checks
c) Functional checks
d) Voltage regulation for rated input supply for loads from 0-100%.
e) Load test to show the charger can serve the rated duty without the
current limiter device operating.
f) Calibration of potentiometer vis-a-vis the DC output for float and boost

chargers.
g) Ripple and harmonics measurement by oscilloscope at different loads.
h) Demonstration of guaranteed efficiency and power factor.
i) Insulation test (with 500 V megger)
j) Hipot test, excluding electronic controller, at 2 kV AC for one min.
11.2 The following type tests shall be conducted at the factory.
a) Heat run test with both float and boost chargers on full load especially
for float and boost charger schemes/systems and if housed in
same/adjacent panel/ cubicle with or without dividing partitions.
11.3 Vendor shall ensure use of calibrated test equipment having valid calibration
test certificates from standard laboratories traceable to National Standards.
12.0 BID DRAWINGS
The BIDDER shall submit following :
a) Schematic drawings showing main components and basic schemes.
b) General arrangements showing dimensions and space requirements.
1. BASIC CLIMATIC AND IS 9000  BS  IEC
MECHANICAL
DURABILITY TESTS FOR
COMPONENTS FOR
ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
2. ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS FOR  IS 9000  BS  IEC

ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
3. METAL CLAD BASE MATERIAL  IS 5921  BS  IEC 60249
FOR PRINTED CIRCUITS FOR
USE IN ELECTRONIC AND
TELECOMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT
4. TRANSFORMERS AND  IS 6297  BS  IEC
INDUCTORS
(POWER,AUDIO,PULSE AND
SWITCHING) FOR ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT
5. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS  IS 7405  BS  IEC 60326
6. ENVIRONMENTAL  IS 6553  BS  IEC
REQUIREMENTS FOR
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
AND INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
7. TERMINALS FOR ELECTRONIC  IS 4007  BS  IEC
EQUIPMENT
8. FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES  IS 8623  BS 5486  IEC 60439
OF SWITCHGEAR AND
CONTROLGEAR FOR VOLTAGES
UPTO AND INCLUDING 1000V
A.C. AND 1200VD.C.
9. AIR BREAK SWITCHES  IS 13947  BS EN  IEC 60947
60947-3
10. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS  IS 8828  BS 3871  IEC 60898
11. HRC CARTRIDGE FUSES  IS 13703  BS 88  IEC 60269

12. CONTACTORS  IS 13947  BS 775  IEC 60 947
13. CONTROL SWITCHES /PUSH  IS 6875  BS  IEC
BUTTONS
14. INDICATING INSTRUMENTS  IS 1248  BS 89  IEC 60051
15. DEGREE OF PROTECTION  IS 2147  BS  IEC 60947
16. CLIMATE PROOFING OF  IS  BS  IEC
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
17. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR  IS 6005  BS 3189  IEC
PHOSPHATING IRON AND
STEEL
18. SEMI-CONDUCTORS  IS  BS  IEC 60146
CONVERTERS
19. SEMICONDUCTOR RECTIFIER  IS 6619  BS  IEC
EQUIPMENT SAFETY CODE
20. THYRISTOR CONVERTERS  IS 3700  BS  IEC 60747
IS 3715
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
DATA SHEET-C
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY VENDOR AFTER

AWARD OF CONTRACT
1. Detailed schematic diagram of charger scheme including voltage / current

regulator electronic controller, undervoltage / overvoltage / overload /
earthfault relays, annunciation scheme, etc.
2. Bill of materials
3. General arrangement drawing showing main dimensions, type of mounting,

location of various devices, weight, mounting arrangement and floor
openings,
etc.
4. Instruction manuals
5. Test reports
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELEVATOR SYSTEM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of Passenger lifts for Buildings

and Passenger cum goods lifts for junction towers.
2.1 The design, manufacture and installation of lifts and associated equipment
shall comply with all currently applicable Statutes, Regulations and safety
codes prevailing in the locality where the equipment will be installed.
Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the VENDOR of
this responsibility.
2.2 Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall conform to the latest applicable
standards as specified in Data Sheet.
3.0 EXTENT OF WORK
The extent of work covered by this specification is as follows :
3.1 Design, fabrication and supply of lift complete with all devices as are
necessary to complete the installation in accordance with this specification.
3.2 Installation and commissioning of the lift equipment shall be complete with
the accessories and auxiliary equipment.
3.3 With each lift the Vendor shall supply a maintenance tool kit.
4.0 DESIGN FEATURES
4.1 Provision shall be made for carrying additional load of 250 kgs towards
interior finishes etc.
4.2 In skirting level louver shall be provided all around and also in ceiling.
4.3 25 mm recessed flooring for elevator car for marble \ granite flooring for
passengers lift and for passenger cum goods lift shall be of stainless steel
sheet.
4.4 All the lifts in every group shall be operated exclusively as fire rescue lift.
Provision for Fireman drive to be made to bring the car to the main floor
immediately after the fire switch is operated. Thereafter the car is for
operation by the rescue person. All landing calls are ignored. Lift answers
one car call at a time. The rescue person controls opening and closing of
doors at a floor. Returns to normal when fire switch is opened. Fire fighter
switch Drive to be provided for all the lifts.
ISSUE
P1
.
4.5 Short duration emergency lights in each cabin supported by local dry cell
rechargeable battery with 30 min backup. In addition car light shall be
backed up by UPS supply from Emergency lighting UPS system
4.6 Automatic self-levelling feature to bring the elevator car level within ± 3 mm
of the landing floor regardless of load or direction of travel.
4.7 An electric door operator to simultaneously open the car and the hoist way
door when the car is at a landing, and also close both the doors
simultaneously before the car leaves landing after a predetermined time
interval has lapsed.
4.8 Photo electric device (3D infrared safety curtain) for the full length of the door
to monitor traffic across the threshold of the door and initiate door closing
two seconds after last beam interruption thus overriding door open period.
4.9 Load weighing feature to illuminate “Over Load” fixture and defeat car’s
operating circuits when car load reaches 110% or more than the rated load.
Facility to be provided for bypassing registered landings call by a car loaded
more than 80%.
4.10 SS doors & enclosures of elevators shall be fire rated for not less than 2
hours.
4.11 AC variable voltage and variable frequency control system
4.12 Battery operated automatic rescue device (ARD) to bring the elevator to
nearest landing in case of power interruption.
4.13 Alarm bell, intercom, and hall buttons.
4.14 Elevator motors shall be of energy efficient.
4.15 Ventilation fans with “cut off” feature for energy saving shall be provided
within the lift car.
4.16 Variable car door opening time according to the requirement.
4.17 For integration with PA System, additional cabling shall be provided from lift
car to the control room.
4.18 Hands free 3 way intercom facility inside the car with niche and wiring to be
provided.
5.0 TESTING & INSPECTION:

The load test shall be conducted at site for all elevators. The operating license
shall be handedover to the Owner.
ISSUE
P1
.
All components shall be tested as per IS: 14665. Test reports shall be
furnished for approval.
All materials used in manufacture of various components shall be of tested
quality and shall conform to relevant standards/specification.
Inspection and tests shall be performed in the field in accordance with the
requirements and recommendations of respective standards and the local
regulation. Testing shall include a comprehensive demonstration of all safety
devices, interlocks and controls.
ISSUE
P1
TCE.7347A- EL-218 TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS
GOODS/SERVICE LIFTS SHEET 1 OF 1
1. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION,

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRIC
IS 1860
PASSENGER AND GOODS LIFTS
2. OUTLINE DIMENSIONS FOR ELECTRIC LIFTS.

IS 3534
3. SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC PASSENGER AND

GOODS LIFTS
IS 4666
4. LIFT CABLES
IS 4289
5. SPECIFICATION FOR LIFT DOOR LOCKING DEVICES
AND CONTACTS IS 7759
6. SPECIFICATION FOR BUFFERS FOR ELECTRICAL

LIFTS IS-9803
7. BRAKES FOR ELECTRICAL PASSENGER AND

GOODS LIFTS IS 10913
1. THE EQUIPMENT, ASSOCIATED ACCESSORIES, COMPONENT PARTS,

NOTES
RAW MATERIALS AND TESTS SHALL IN GENERAL CONFORM TO :

IS BS IEC
REV. NO. PPD. BY: JOB NO. CLIENT

DATE CKD. BY: 7132A PROJECT:
REV. BY DATE:
DATA SHEET - C
PASSENGER LIFTS
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY VENDOR AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT
1. Final dimensions of the lift car.
1.1 Any modification required.
2. Largest Package for Transport and storage at site.
Dimensions :
Weight :
3. DRAWINGS
VENDOR shall furnish the following drawings. The schedule of submission of

drawings shall be furnished :
3.1 Dimensioned Drawings of Lift and accessories.
3.2 General arrangement drawing of control panels.
3.3 Wiring diagram and schematic diagrams of control panels.
3.4 Braking load on guides.
3.5 Fixing detail of side guides.
3.6 Reaction of buffers or lift pit.
ISSUE
R0
.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, material, specification, manufacture,

testing, inspection and delivery to site of lighting fixtures (luminaires) and
their associated accessories.
2.1 The items of supply shall confirm to the latest applicable electrical rules,
all currently applicable standards codes of practice indicated in data
sheet, regulations and safety codes of the locality where the equipment
are to be installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to
relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility. Where no standards are
available, the supply items shall be backed by test results, shall be of
good quality and workmanship and any supply items which are bought out
by the VENDOR shall be procured from approved manufacturers
acceptable to the client.
2.2 All codes and standards referred to in the specification shall be

bidder unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that instruments and gauges to be used
for testing and inspection of critical parameters as identified in the
specification have valid calibration and the accuracy can be traced to
National standards.
3.0 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES) – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Luminaires shall be designed for continuous trouble-free operation under

saline atmospheric conditions without reduction in lamp life or without
deterioration of materials and internal wiring. Outdoor fittings shall be
weather-proof and water-proof type.
3.2 For each type of luminaire the VENDOR shall furnish the utilisation factor
tables to indicate the proportion of the light emitted by the bare lamps
which falls on the working plane.
3.3 All luminaires shall be supplied complete with lamps suitable for
operation on a supply voltage and the variation in supply voltage and
frequency indicated design specification.
3.4 Sodium vapour , metal halide (MH), LED and LEP type luminaires shall
be complete with accessories like lamps, ballasts, power factor
improvement capacitors, starters, drivers etc. These shall be mounted as
far as possible in the luminaire housing only. If these cannot be
accommodated integral with the luminaire then a separate metal
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
enclosed control gear box shall be included to accommodate the control

accessories together with a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out
connections. Outdoor type fixtures shall be provided with outdoor type
weather-proof box with IP 55 or better.
3.5 Each luminaire shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out
and T-off connection by 1100 V, 1 core, PVC insulated copper conductor
wires upto 4 sq.mm in size. In outdoor, corrosive and hazardous areas
the termination at the luminaire shall be suitable for 1100 V, PVC
insulated, copper conductor, armoured cables of sizes upto 6 sq.mm
conductor. In case of non-integral fixtures the control gear shall be
suitable for loop in-loop out termination suitable for atleast 6 sqmm Cu
conductor. Terminals shall be of stud or clamp type. The internal wiring
should be completed by the MANUFACTURER by means of stranded
copper wire of minimum 1 sq.mm size and terminated on the terminal
block. Terminal blocks shall be mounted with minimum two fixing
screws.
3.6 LED type luminaires shall be housed with suitable aluminium / metal
enclosures designed for better dissipation of heat generated by LEDs
and drivers. The design of the enclosures / heat sinks shall conform to
suitable standards and relevant test certifications shall be provided. The
LEDs shall be mounted on Metal Core Printed Circuit Boards (MCPCB)
pasted on aluminium back lifted frame.
3.7 The LED luminaire’s driver shall have ENEC and CE identification and
shall comply with suitable standards as indicated in data sheet for safety,
performance, EMC immunity, Radio disturbance and harmonics current
emission.
3.8 Since LED luminaire (including LED light , driver, Heat sink) is evolving
technology in recent days, necessary care to be taken. Its User-safety,
Life time, Radio frequency disturbance/EMC/Harmonic current Emission
level, Thermal management and Test requirement shall meet the
applicable standards as specified in Datasheet. Vendor shall submit the
following details for LED luminaire.
a) Luminious flux output of luminaire
b) Individual LED wattage, No. of LED in a luminaire, Total power

consumption of LED luminaire
c) Life-time for both LED light and driver
d) Inter changeability (if any)
e) Radio frequency disturbance/EMC/Harmonics current Emission

level
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
f) Colour rendering index
g) Power factor
h) Make of LED and Driver
3.9 Mounting facility and conduit knock-outs for the luminaires shall be
provided.
3.10 All hardware used in the luminaire shall be suitably plated or anodised
and passivated for use in chemical, industrial and power plants.
3.11 Earthing
3.11.1 Each luminaire shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for
connection to the earthing conductor of 12 SWG GI wire
3.11.2 Where separate control gear box is provided for housing the accessories
the same shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for
connecting earthing conductor of 12 SWG GI wire.
3.11.3 All metal or metal enclosed parts of the luminaire / control gear box shall
be bonded and connected to the earthing terminal so as to ensure
satisfactory earthing continuity.
3.12 Painting / Finish
3.12.1 All surfaces of the luminaire / control gear box housing accessories shall
be thoroughly cleaned and degreased. It shall be free from scale, rust,
sharp edges and burrs.
3.12.2 When enamel finish is specified, it shall have a minimum thickness of 2

mils for outside surface and 1.5 mils for inside surfaces. The finish shall
be non-porous and free from blemishes, blisters and fading.
3.12.3 The luminaire housing shall be powder coated as indicated under various
types of fittings. Aluminium paint on flame proof fittings is prohibited.
3.12.4 The surface shall be scratch resistant and shall show no sign of cracking
or flaking when bent through 90 deg. over 12.5 mm dia mandrel.
3.12.5 The finish of the luminaire shall be such that no bright spots are
produced either by direct light source or by reflection.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
3.12.6 External control gear box provided for housing accessories shall be hot
dip galvanised.
3.12.7 The reflectors shall be smooth, free from dents etc.
4.0 INDUSTRIAL LUMINAIRES
LED bay fixtures shall be made of CRCA sheet with powder coated finish.
The beam angles shall be decided based on the application.The fixture
shall be designed with proper thermal management system using die cast
aluminum. The lens shall be selected based on the ceiling height
requirement.
5.0 STREET LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
5.1 Well glass luminaire
5.1.1 Well glass luminaire shall be robust construction, die cast aluminium alloy
housing with Epoxy grey powder coated finish /, clear heat and shock
resistant glass cover fixed with /rubber gaskets for sealing. For
mechanical protection to the glass cover, round steel wire – guard with
MS zinc plated finish shall be provided. . The luminaires shall be suitable
for Sodium Vapour/Metal halide for wattage as per the requirement for
suspension mounting by conduit pipe, hook or strap. Luminaire shall be
with degree of protection IP 55
5.1.2 When used in coal dust areas the luminaire shall be increased safety,
intrinsically safe, dust proof, dust tight and vapour proof with degree of
protection IP 55 and HPSV/MH lamps.
a) The housing shall be Epoxy finish (LM6) aluminium alloy with

porcelain lamp holder, stove enamel reflector, heat resistant
toughened glass cover complete with wire guard, /rubber gaskets,
suspension hook or strap, side 2 way cable entry, earthing terminal
etc.
5.2 Sodium vapour/MH luminaires.
5.2.1 Street light sodium vapour luminaires/MH shall be outdoor weather proof
type for illumination of main roads, traffic islands etc.
5.2.2 The luminaire shall be of Epoxy grey powder coated single piece die-cast
aluminium housing, electrochemically brightened polished and anodised
finish pot optice aluminium reflector with heat resistant toughned clear,
complete with integral mounted control gear, /rubber gaskets and with
rear pipe entry.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
6.0 LUMINAIRES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATION
6.1 High Mast Flood Light
6.1.1 High mast towers shall be outdoor weather proof type for illumination of
main roads, traffic islands and area lighting.
6.1.2 The high mast shall be continually tapered, polygon cross section,
telescopically jointed steel fabricated construction. The mast shall be hot
dip galvanised internally and externally. Weather proof door shall be
provided near the base to permit access to winch, cables, plug, socket
etc. The mast shall be designed for wind speeds depending upon wind
pressure and direction as per relevant Indian Standards. Foundation bolts
and all other accessories shall be included in the scope of supply.
6.1.3 The moving platform shall be of steel construction hot dip galvanised and
designed to hold the number of flood light luminaires specified. The
control gear boxes shall be cast aluminium weather proof type mounted
on the moving platform. The moving platform shall be raised or lowered
with the help of winch, pulley system and stainless steel wire ropes. The
winch shall be suitable for hand operation or alternately by electric power.
6.1.4 The mast shall be suitable for mounting numbers of luminaires as

required. The standard mast heights are generally from 20 to 40 metres.
6.2 Aviation warning system luminaires
6.2.1 Low Intensity type luminaires
a) Low intensity luminaires shall be outdoor, weather proof type,

suitable for mounting on structures / buildings upto 45 metres
height.
b) This luminaire shall be with cast aluminium housing, LED lamp,

suitable transformer for low voltage integrally mounted, shock
resistant clear glass cover, /rubber gaskets, bottom conduit entry.
c) The means for attaching the luminaire shall be designed to suit the
weight of the luminaire and strength to withstand wind speeds as
applicable to particular area as per relevant IS.
6.2.2 Medium Intensity type luminaires
a) Medium intensity luminaires shall be outdoor, weather proof type,

suitable for mounting on structures / buildings upto 200 metres
height.
b) This luminaire shall be with cast aluminium base, LED lamp, red
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
prismatic glass/acrylic cover, /rubber gaskets and bottom conduit /

pipe entry.
c) The means for attaching the luminaire shall be designed to suit the
weight of the luminaire and strength to withstand wind speeds as
applicable to particular area as per relevant IS.
6.3 Portable/Fixed Emergency Light Luminaire
6.3.1 Emergency light or Installite luminaire shall be indoor type for providing
emergency light during failure of normal AC supply. This emergency light
shall be suitable of Maintained lights. It shall be able to portable with
suitable handle arrangement and be able to fix to the wall for quick
access if it is portable emergency light.
a) The luminaire shall be with CRCA sheet steel enclosure, complete
with metallised mirror reflector, leak proof re-chargeable battery,
rated for minimum two hour back-up battery until or otherwise
specified, charger, charger-on lamp, push button switches,
automatic changeover switch / relay, two metre length cord with
plug, mounting pads and other accessories required for satisfactory
operation of the luminaire.
b) The luminaire shall be suitable for connection to 240 V, 50 Hz single

phase supply. On failure of normal AC supply the luminaire shall
pick-up automatically and on restoration of AC supply the luminaire
shall switch off automatically.
c) The luminaire shall be suitable for LED lamp and its wattage as
per the requirement.
7.0 ACCESSORIES FOR LUMINAIRES
7.1 Reflectors
7.1.1 The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel / aluminium / silvered
glass/ chromium plated sheet copper as indicated for above mentioned
luminaires.
7.1.2 The thickness of steel / aluminium shall comply with relevant standards
specified in Data Sheet. Reflectors made of steel shall have stove
enamelled / vitreous enamelled / epoxy coating finish. Aluminium used for
reflectors shall be anodized / epoxy stove enamelled / mirror polished.
The finish for the reflector shall be as indicated for above mentioned
fittings.
7.1.3 Aluminium paint on the reflectors of flame proof lighting fittings is

prohibited.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
7.1.4 Reflectors shall be free from scratches or blisters and shall have a
smooth and glossy surface having an optimum light reflecting coefficient
such as to ensure the overall light output specified by the
MANUFACTURER.
7.1.5 Reflectors shall be readily removable from the housing for cleaning and
maintenance without disturbing the lamps and without the use of tools.
They shall be securely fixed to the housing by means of positive fastening
device of captive type.
7.2 Lamp / Starter Holders/Drivers
7.2.1 Lamp holders shall comply with relevant standards specified in Data
Sheet. They shall have low contact resistance, shall be resistant to wear
and shall be suitable for operation at the specified temperature without
deterioration in insulation value. They shall hold the lamps in position
under normal condition of shock and vibration met with under normal
installation and use.
7.2.2 Lamp holders for, metal halide, and sodium vapour lamps shall be of
Edison Screw (E.S.) type.
7.2.3 The starter holders shall be so designed that they are mechanically
robust and free from any operational difficulties. They shall be capable of
withstanding the shocks met within normal transit, installation and use.
7.3 Starters
7.3.1 Starters shall have bimetal electrodes and high mechanical strength.
Starters shall be replaceable without disturbing the reflector or lamps
and without the use of any tool. Starters shall have brass contacts and
radio interference capacitors.
7.3.2 The starters shall generally conform to the relevant standards specified
in Data Sheet.
7.4 Capacitors
7.4.1 The capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be
connected across the supply of individual lamp circuits.
7.4.2 The capacitors shall be suitable for operation at supply voltage as

specified in the design specification. shall have a value of capacitance so
as to correct the power factor of its corresponding lamp circuit to the
extent of 0.95 lag or better.
7.4.3 The capacitors shall be hermetically sealed preferably in a metal
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
enclosure to prevent seepage of impregnant and ingress of moisture.
7.5 Lamps
Lamps shall be capable of withstanding small vibrations and the

connections at lead in wires and filaments / electrodes shall not break
under such circumstances.
Lamps / tubes shall conform to relevant standards specified in Data Sheet

and shall be suitable for supply voltage and frequency specified in the
design specification.
7.6 LED Lamps
LED lamp shall have the single colour output. The lamp shall have Low
power consumption, High reliability and long life.LED should have
minimum of 50000 burning hours.LED lamps shall be of standard makes
such as CREE, OSRAM, NICHIA, LUMILITE. LED lamps shall have LM80
certification.
7.7 LEP Lamps
The LEP emitter shall be constructed of a small electrode-less quartz

lamp encased by a ceramic resonator and it should have 50000 burning
hours.
7.8 High Intensity Discharge Lamps
These lamps include the the high pressure sodium vapour lamp/MH.
a) High pressure sodium vapour lamps shall be with polycrystalline

translucent, coated discharge tube, coated shell, quick restrike time
(of within 5 minutes) and with burning life (about 10,000 hours) in
standard ratings upto 400/1000 watts.
b) Metal halide lamps shall be single ended or double ended as

required. The lamps shall be with quartz discharge tube and
transparent / internal coated shell, quick restrike time (of within 5
minutes) with burning life (upto 5000 hours) in standard ratings upto
2000 W. The colour rendering index of these lamps shall be very
high. These lamps shall be used only in enclosed luminaires (lamps
without protective coating) and can be used only in open luminaires
in lamps with Teflon or other coating to hold the shell in case of
non-passive end of lamp life.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
8.1 Type tests, acceptance tests and routine tests for the lighting fixtures and
accessories covered by this specification shall be carried out as per the
relevant standard for the respective fixtures and their accessories.
8.2 The MANUFACTURER’s type and routine test certificates shall be

submitted for tests conducted as per relevant standards for the fixtures
and accessories. The BIDDER shall submit with his proposal copies of
available test certificates of the luminaires offered.
9.0 DRAWINGS AND DATA
9.1 As part of proposal, the BIDDER shall furnish relevant descriptive and
illustrative literature on lighting fixtures and accessories and the following
drawings / data for the respective lighting fixtures.
9.2 Dimensioned drawings with manufacturer’s catalogue numbers.
9.3 Information called for in Data Sheet for each group of luminaires.

1.1 Electric Lighting Fittings General and IS:1913 BS:4533 IEC:605
Safety 98
Requirements
1.2 Code OF Practice for Industrial Lighting IS:6665 BS: IEC:
1.3 Calculation of Co-efficient of Utilisation IS:3646 BS: IEC:
(Part-III)
1.4 Industrial Lighting Fittings with Metal IS:1777 BS: IEC:605
Reflectors
98
1.5 Decorative Lighting Outfits IS:5077 BS: IEC:
1.6 Dust Proof Electric Lighting Fittings IS:4012 BS: IEC:605
98
1.7 Dust Tight Electric Lighting Fittings IS:4013 BS: IEC:
1.8 Electric Lighting Fittings for Division IS:8224 BS:4533 IEC:
2 Areas as per IS:5572 (P1) Part II SECT
2
1.9 Flame Proof Lighting Fittings IS:4013 BS: IEC:
Part (I&II)
1.10 Flame Proof Enclosure IS:2148 BS: IEC:
1.11 Flood Lights IS:10322 BS:4533 IEC:
Pt-V SECT-5
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
1.12 Luminaires for Street Lighting IS:10322 BS: IEC:

Pt-V SECT-3
1.13 Waterproof Electric Lighting Fittings IS:3528 BS:4533 IEC:
BS:5225 (1)
1.14 Watertight Electric Lighting Fittings IS:3553 BS:4533 IEC:
BS:5225 (1)
1.15 Bayonet Lamp Holders IS:1258 BSEN: IEC:600
61184 61
1.16 Edison Screw Lamp Holders IS:10276 BSEN: IEC:
60238
1.17 Bi-Pin Lamp Holders for Tubular IS:3323 BS: IEC:
Fluorescent Lamps
1.18 Starters for Fluorescent Lamp IS:2215 BSEN: IEC:
60155
1.19 Holders for Starters for Tubular IS:3324 BSEN : IEC:
Fluorescent Lamps 60400
1.20 Ballast for Use in Fluorescent IS:1534 BSEN: IEC:604
Lighting Fittings (Part 1) 60920
00
1.21 Transistorised Ballast for IS:7027 BS: IEC:
Fluorescent Lamps
1.23 Capacitors for Use in Fluorescent, IS:1569 BSEN:61 IEC:
HPMV & LP Sodium Vapour
048
Discharge Lamp Circuits
1.24 Vitreous Enamel Reflector for IS:8017 BS: IEC:
Tungsten Filament Lamp
1.25 Tubular Fluorescent Lamps IS:2418 BSEN: IEC:600
(Part 1) 60081
81
1.27 Tungsten Filament General Electric IS:418 BS:6179 IEC:604
Lamps 32
1.28 Cast Acrylic Sheets for Use in IS:7569 BS: IEC:
Luminaires
1.29 Screwless Terminal and Electrical IS:10322 BS: IEC:
Connections for Lighting Fittings Pt-III
1.30 High Pressure Sodium Vapour IS:9974 BS: IEC:

Lamps
1.31 Emergency Lighting Units IS:9583 BS: IEC:
1.32 Ignition Proof Enclosures, Dust- IS:11005 BS: IEC:
Tight for Electrical Equipment
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
1.33 Luminaires (Part 1 to V) IS:10322 BS: IEC:

1. All Lighting fittings and IS: BS: IEC:
accessories shall conform to
1.34 Self ballasted LED lamps for IS:16102- BS: IEC:
general lighting services
part1/2
1.35 LED modules for general lighting IS:16103- BS: IEC:

part1/2
1.36 DC or A.C supplied electronic IS:16104 BS: IEC:

control gear for LED modules-
performance requirements
1.37 LED light Ballast EMC.I IS: BS: EN:
(Equipment For General Lighting
61547
Purposes - Emc Immunity
Requirements)
1.38 LED light Ballast (Limits And IS: BS: EN:
Methods Of Measurement Of
55015
Radio Disturbance Characteristics
Of Electrical Lighting And Similar
Equipment)
1.39 LED light Ballast harmonics IS: BS: EN:
Emission (Electromagnetic
61000-3-
Compatibility (Emc) - Part 3-2:
Limits - Limits For Harmonic 2
Current Emissions (Equipment
Input Current <= 16 A Per Phase) )
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
DATA SHEET – C
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR

1.0 LITERATURE / DRAWINGS
1.1 Descriptive and illustrative literature on the lighting fixtures.
1.2 Performance data of each fixture giving utilization factor, light distribution
curves and technical data of fixtures accessories.
1.3 General arrangement drawings of fixtures showing outline dimensions,

fixing details, size and locations of cable entries and earthing terminal.
1.4 Diagrams showing wiring inter connection between all the accessories of
the fixtures.
Type and routine test certificates of all standard component parts, e.g.
ballast, capacitors, Driver, lamps and for completely assembled fixtures.
3.0 MAINTENANCE / INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3.1 The manual shall furnish catalogue numbers of all components liable to
be replaced during the life of the fixtures.
3.2 Any special instructions regarding assembling and handling of the

fixtures.
3.3 Maintenance instructions for Instalite type lighting fixtures.
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SPEC NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED SECTION:
TCE.7347A-EL- SHEET 1 OF 10 OF
220
LIGHTING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, material, manufacture, testing,

inspection and delivery to site the Indoor and Outdoor lighting system
equipment.The indoor equipments include lighting distribution boards panels
(Single phase/Three phase), switches, power receptacle units, lighting wires,
junction box, conduits and its accessories, etc,. The outdoor equipments
include outdoor lighting distribution boards/panels, lighting poles (Street
light/Flood light/High mast), LT power cables etc,.
2.1 The items of supply shall confirm to the latest applicable electrical rules, all
currently applicable standards codes of practice indicated in data sheet,
regulations and safety codes of the locality where the equipment are to be
installed. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the
CONTRACTOR of his responsibility. Where no standards are available, the
supply items shall be backed by test results, shall be of good quality and
workmanship and any supply items which are bought out by the VENDOR
shall be procured from approved manufacturers acceptable to the client.
2.2 All codes and standards referred to in the specification shall be understood to
be the latest version on the date of offer made by the bidder
2.3 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that instruments and gauges to be used for
testing and inspection of critical parameters as identified in the specification
have valid calibration and the accuracy can be traced to National standards.
3.0 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD (LDB) AND LIGHTING PANELS
3.1.1 LDB and panels shall be of sheet steel enclosed and shall be fully dust and
vermin proof, providing a degree of protection of IP 52 for busbars, incoming
and outgoing feeding compartment and IP 42 for enclosure for transformer.
Outdoor panels shall in addition be completely weather-proof with a sloping
canopy for protection against rain and providing a degree of protection of IP
55. The sheet steel used shall be cold rolled and 2 mm thick.
3.1.2 All boards and panels shall be provided with hinged doors for access to
equipment. Doors shall be gasketted all round with neoprene gaskets. The
floor mounted lighting distribution boards shall be provided with MCCB for
incomer and MCBs for outgoing feeders arranged in tier formation.The
hinged door of incomer shall be interlocked so as to prevent opening of the
door when the switch is ON and to prevent closing of the switch with the door
not fully closed. However, a device for bypassing the door interlock shall be
provided to enable the operation of the switch with the door open, when
necessary, for examination/maintenance. For wall mounting lighting panels
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
when provided with ELCBs and MCBs a hinged, latched front door shall be
provided with key-locking facility and a slotted bakelite sheet inside. Only the
ELCBs/MCBs operating knobs shall project out of the bakelite sheet slots for
safe operation and neat appearance.
3.1.3 Outdoor LDBs for street lighting/area lighting shall have ON/OFF operation
through real time based timer control in addition to manual control. In this
case incomer to LDB shall have suitably rated contactor in addition to MCCB
and same shall be controlled by timer contacts. The outgoing feeders of
indoor LDB used for street lighting/area lighting shall have timer controlled
contactors in addition to MCB
3.1.4 All accessible live connection/metals shall be shrouded and it shall be

possible to change individual fuses, switches,MCCB / MCBs from the front of
the LDB without danger of contact with live parts.
3.1.5 For floor mounting type LDB, adequately sized mounting channels shall be
supplied and for wall/column/structure mounting type panels suitable
mounting straps shall be provided.
3.1.6 Adequate interior cabling space and suitable removable cable entry plates
shall be provided for top/bottom entry of cables through glands and or
conduits as per the requirement. Necessary number of glands to suit the
specified cable sizes shall be provided. Cable glands shall be double
compression screwed on type and made of chrome plated brass.
3.1.7 Aluminium earth bus shall be provided throughout the panel length. Earthing
terminal shall be provided at either side of the panel to suit the Purchaser’s
earthing conductor.
3.1.8 All sheet steel parts shall undergo rust-proofing process which should include
degreassing, de-scaling and a recognised phosphating process. The steel
works shall then be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two
coats of final stove enamelled finish paint. Epoxy paint shall be used to avoid
corrosion.
3.2 BUSBARS
3.2.1 Busbars shall be of aluminium alloy of E91E grade.
3.2.2 Busbars shall be provided with minimum clearances in air as indicated in

data sheet.
3.2.3 Busbars shall be adequately sized for the continuous current rating such that
the maximum temperature of the busbars, busbar risers/droppers and
contacts does not exceed 85 C under site reference temperature. Busbar
shall be covered with heat shrinkable coloured PVC sleeves.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
3.2.4 The busbars, busbar connections and busbar supports shall have sufficient
strength to withstand thermal and electro-mechanical stresses of the fuse/
MCBs let through / cut-off current associated with the specified short-circuit
level of the system.
3.2.5 Busbar supports shall be made from suitable insulating material such as
Hylam sheets, glass reinforced moulded plastic materials, or cast resin.
Separate supports shall be provided for each phase of the busbars. If a
common support is provided for all three phases, anti-tracking barriers shall
be incorporated.
3.2.6 The neutral bus of the main 3 phase, 4 wire distribution board shall be rated
for full short circuit rating of main busbar. The neutral bus should have
sufficient terminals and detachable links for full number of single phase / 3
phase 4 wire outgoing lighting circuits.
3.3 BOARD MOUNTED COMPONENTS
3.3.1 SFU/MCCB/MCBs/ELCBs shall be hand operated, air break, quick make,

quick break type conforming to applicable standards mentioned in Data
Sheet.
3.3.2 The feeders shall be provided with MCB/MCCB for overload/short circuit
protection. ELCBs of suitable rating shall be provided for earth leakage
protection.
3.3.3 Switch shall have provision for locking in both fully open and closed positions.
MCBs/ELCBs shall be provided with locking facility.
3.4 FUSES
3.4.1 Fuses generally shall be of the HRC cartridge fuse link type having a certified
rupturing capacity for 80 kA at 440V. Fuses upto 63A for distribution systems
of medium short circuit levels may be of HRC cartridge screw cap, having a
certified rupturing capacity of not less than 50 kA at 440 V and 16 kA at 250 V
DC.
3.4.2 Fuses shall be provided with visible indication to show that they have
operated.
3.4.3 Cartridge fuses shall preferably be mounted in moulded plastic carriers. If

fuse carriers are not provided, insulated fuse pulling handle shall be provided
for each size of fuse for each switchboard.
3.5 Indicating Instruments and Meters
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
3.5.1 Whenever required, instruments and meters shall be of the flush mounting
type. They shall be suitably mounted so as to provide for easy access to CTs
and associated wiring.
3.5.2 Instruments shall be of minimum 96 mm square size, shall have provision for
zero adjustment outside the cover and black numerals on white dial.
3.5.3 Watthour meters shall be of direct reading electro-dynamometer type

complete with cyclometer type dials and reverse running stops.
3.5.4 Ammeter/voltmeter selector switches having 3 positions and off, with stay put
contacts rated 10 A shall be provided when specified.
3.5.5 Potential fuses shall be provided at the tap off point from the busbars for the
voltmeters.
3.6 Instrument Transformers
3.6.1 Current and voltage transformers shall be of the dry type, of metering
accuracy class 1.0. Unless otherwise specified, it shall be the responsibility of
the VENDOR to ensure that the VA burden of the instrument transformer is
adequate for the meters connected to it.
3.6.2 Test links shall be provided in both secondary leads of the CTs to easily carry
out current and phase angle measurement tests. Facilities shall be provided
for short circuiting and grounding the CTs at the terminal blocks.
3.6.3 Voltage transformers shall be provided with suitably rated primary and
secondary fuses.
3.7 Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be of the clustered LED type and low watt
consumption. Lamps shall be provided with series resistors.
3.8 Internal Wiring
3.8.1 LDB and panels shall be supplied completely wired, ready for the external
connections at the terminal blocks. Wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V
grade, PVC insulated, stranded copper conductors. Conductors of adequate
sizes shall be used to suit the rated circuit current.
3.8.2 Engraved identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring

diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire.
3.8.3 All wiring shall be terminated on terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be one
piece moulded, 650 V, of reputed make, preferably stud type for higher
current ratings such that wires are connected by cable lugs and complete
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
with nuts and washers. Terminals shall be adequately rated for the circuit
current, the minimum rating shall be 20 A.
3.8.4 Terminals for circuits with voltage exceeding 125 V shall be shrouded.
3.8.5 Terminals shall be numbered and provided with identification strip for
identification of the circuit and additional 20% spares shall be provided.
3.9 Labels & Diagram Plate
3.9.1 All door mounted equipment as well as equipment mounted inside the
boards/panels shall be provided with individual labels with equipment
designation/rating. Also the boards/panels shall be provided on the front with
a label engraved with the designation of the board/panel as furnished by the
client.
3.9.2 Labels shall be made of non rusting metal, 3 ply lamicoid or engraved PVC.
3.9.3 Inside the door of lighting panels a circuit diagram/description shall be fixed
for reference and identification
4.0 LIGHTING TRANSFORMER
4.1 The lighting transformer housed in LDB shall be Vacuum pressure

impregnated dry type, 415/415V, Z=4%, OCTC with +/-5% tap.
4.2 The VPI process shall effectively impregnate the entire core and coil
assembly which results in a unit which is virtually impermeable to moisture,
dust, dirt, salt air and other industrial contaminants
4.3 Transformers shall be designed for 110% continuous overfluxing withstand

capability.
4.4 Insulation of HV and LV winding shall be Class ‘F‘ with temperature rise
limited to Class ‘ F’.
4.5 The transformer shall be capable of operation at its rated KVA on any tap
provided the voltage does not vary by more than ±10% of the rated voltage
corresponding to the tap as well as in accordance with IEC-354.
4.6 Transformer shall be self-extinguishing in the event of fire or arcing and no

toxic or corrosive gases shall be released.
4.7 WTI with alarm and trip contact shall be provided for winding.
4.8 The noise level shall be limited to the value specified by NEMA Standard
Publication No. TR-1-1993 when measured in accordance with conditions
outlines in ANSI/IEEE C57.12.90-1999/IS13964/CBIP publication.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
4.9 Each lighting transformer shall be routine tested after housing it in cubicle
and type test certificates shall be submitted which shall not be more than 5
years. The transformer shall be liable for rejection if the losses, impedance,
temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values quoted by Bidder with
applicable tolerance as per IS
5.0 POWER PANEL/DC LIGHTING PANEL/SWITCHES
5.1 Power Panel
This panel feeds to single phase Receptacles. The panel construction shall
be similar to lighting panels(LPs).
5.2 DC Lighting Panel
DC lighting panel shall have one (1) incomer controlled by double pole DC
switch, fuses and a DC contactor and shall have number of outgoing circuits
controlled by MCB. Upon failure of the normal-cum-emergency AC supply
connected to this panel, the under voltage relay provided inside this panel
drops off. Its normally closed auxiliary contact shall energise the contactor to
switch on the emergency DC supply. The system shall not switch off or reset
automatically upon restoration of normal AC supply but only after manually
reset. The panel construction shall be similar to normal lighting panel.
5.3 LIGHT CONTROL SWITCHES
Light control switches of ratings and types, i.e. /industrial shall be supplied as
perthe project requirement. The switches shall be suitable for use on 240 V, 1
phase, 50 Hz supply.
Switches shall be of flush type for mounting behind an insulated plate or

incorporated with a switch or switch box/suitable enclosure. The switch box/
enclosure may be recessed into or mounted on wall as per the requirements
of project layouts.
The size of enclosure boxes shall be chosen to accommodate the number of

switches to be installed at the particular location. The enclosures shall be
made of 1.2 mm thick CRCA sheet steel, stove enamelled/galvanised. The
enclosure box shall be covered with perspex/insulating cover. An enclosure
intended for surface mounting shall not have holes or gaps in its sides other
than those expressly provided for cable entry.
The switches shall conform to the relevant standards specified in Data Sheet.
6.0 RECEPTACLE UNITS
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
6.1 Receptacle units shall consist of socket outlet with associated switch, neon
indicating lamp and plug. The socket outlet and MCB shall be flush mounted
within a FRP enclosure. The box may be recessed into or mounted on a wall
as per requirements of project layouts.
6.2 The outdoor type receptacles shall be housed in FRP boxes with gasketed,
hinged door having locking arrangement. The enclosure shall be with rain
canopy and removable gland plate entry from bottom. Composite receptacle
with switch modules housed in a box shall be with degree of protection IP 66.
6.3 The receptacle units shall be suitable for 240 V, 1 phase, 50Hz/415V,3
phase, 50 Hz supply as indicated in project layout drawings/price schedule.
6.4 Single phase receptacles shall be associated with a MCB of same current
rating and the receptacle shall become live only when the associated MCB is
in “ON” position.
6.5 Three phase receptacles shall be associated with a TPN switch housed in the
same enclosure. The receptacle shall become live only when the associated
switch is in “ON” position and it shall not be possible to withdraw the plug with
the switch in “ON” position.
6.6 The plugs shall be provided with cord grips to prevent strain and damage to
conductors/wires at connection and entry points.
6.7 The types and current ratings of receptacle units shall be as per the design
specification and as per the project requirement and they shall conform to the
applicable standards indicated in Data Sheet.
7.0 Not used
8.0 CEILING FANS / WALL MOUNTED FANS
8.1 Ceiling/Wall mounted fans shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 phase,
50 Hz supply and shall be complete with standard mounting accessories such
as suspension rods, top and bottom caps etc for ceiling fnas and easy
accessibility for wall mounted fans. The fans shall be supplied with
appropriate speed regulators.
8.2 The fans shall generally conform to the applicable standards indicated in
Data Sheet-A2. Details regarding blade sweep and suspension requirements
shall be as per Project layout drawing/price schedule.
9.0 LIGHTING WIRES
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
9.1 The wires for wiring in lighting system shall be 1100 V, 1 core, PVC insulated,
unarmoured with stranded copper conductors. The wires shall conform to the
applicable standards specified in Data Sheet.
9.2 The minimum area of conductors shall be 2.5 sq.mm for light fittings and 5A
receptacles and 4 sq.mm for receptacles rated 15 A.
9.3 The wires shall be coded white for phase/positive of DC and black for neutral/
negative of DC.
10.0 CONDUITS FOR LIGHTING
10.1 Rigid steel/non metallic conduits and their associated fittings shall conform to
applicable standards in Data Sheet. The minimum size of conduit shall be 20
mm for surface installation and 25 mm diameter for concealed installation.
10.2 Steel conduits shall be seamed by welding and hot dip galvanised. They shall
be supplied in standard lengths of 5 m.
10.3 Supply of conduits shall include all associated fittings like couplers, bends and
tees as required for lighting installation work.
11.0 JUNCTION BOXES FOR LIGHTING
11.1 Junction boxes with terminals shall be supplied for branching and terminating
lighting cables when required for outdoor areas, 3 phase receptacles etc.
11.2 The junction boxes shall be dust and vermin proof and shall be fabricated
from 1.2 mm to 2 mm CRCA sheet steel depending on the size of the junction
box and shall be complete with removable cover plate with gaskets, two
earthing terminals each with nut, bolt and washer. Boxes shall be additionally
weather proof when specified.
11.3 The boxes shall have provision for wall, column, pole or structure mounting
and shall be provided with cable/conduit entry knock outs, terminal blocks,
HRC fuses, as indicated in the Project drawing.
11.4 The terminal blocks, with specified number of terminals, shall be mounted
securely on brackets welded to the back sheet of the box. The terminals shall
be 650 V grade, one piece construction complete with terminals, insulation
barriers, galvanised nuts, bolts and washers and provided with identification
strips of PVC. The terminals shall be made of copper alloy and shall be of
box clamp type.
11.5 The boxes shall be hot dip galvanised/painted with one shop coat of red
oxide zinc chromate primer followed by a finishing coat of paint as specified.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
12.0 LIGHTING POLES &TOWERS AND HIGH MAST POLES
12.1 Lighting poles for flood lights shall be of octagonal/stepped tubular/swaged

type steel poles. Octagonal poles shall conform to BS EN 40-3:2000 and it
shall be designed to withstand the maximum wind speed as per IS 875. Poles
shall be hot dip galvanised internally and externally after fabrication as per IS
2629 / IS 2633 / IS 4759 standards. The steel sheet used to manufacture
steel poles shall be of minimum thickness of 3 mm and shall conform to
BSEN 10025. Junction boxes shall be camouflaged and shall be provided
with weather proof flush doors and locking facility. Bidder shall design and
furnish the foundation drawings for the poles to withstand basic wind speed of
minimum 50 meter/sec.
12.2 The supply of poles shall be complete with fixing bracket/necessary pipe
reducer for fixing the fitting and also include the necessary associated pole
mounted junction boxes. The required sizes of poles and the junction box
shall be as indicated in the attached drawings.
12.3 Towers for mounting flood lights shall be supplied as per typical attached
drawing. Unless otherwise specified, towers, shall be painted with red lead
oxide primer and two coats of aluminium paint. A steel ladder and platform at
the top shall be provided. The length of each step of the ladder shall be at
least 300 mm and spacing between two adjacent steps not more than 300
mm. The structure shall be suitable for mounting the required number of flood
lights, weights of maintenance crew and specified wind pressure. The factor
of safety shall be 2 for each part and section. The CONTRACTOR’s structural
design drawings shall be approved by the client before fabrication.
12.4 High mast shall be continuously tapered, polygonal cross section of at least
20 sides, presenting a good and pleasing appearance which is based on
proven intension design conforming to International/National standard. The
structure is suitable for loading as per IS 875 (part 3) 1987. High mast shall
be fabricated from steel plates and weld joints of different sections
conforming to National or international standard.An adequate door opening
shall be provided at the base of the mast. The opening shall permit clear
access to equipments like winch, cable, wire rope, plug & socket etc. and
also facilitates easy removal of the winch for servicing.High mast structure
shall be designed to sustain an assumed maximum reaction arising from
wind speed as per IS 875 (Part 3) 1987. General requirements of Raising
and Lowering system (R & L), trailing cable, power tool, feeder pillar for
automatic switching operation of luminaires, lighting finial
and aviation obstruction warning light shall also be included.
13.0 Street lighting poles
13.1 Street light poles shall be GRP poles.GRP poles shall be shock proof. GRP
poles should have high bending strength and should be designed in
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220
conformance with BS EN 40-7:2002. Poles shall be designed to withstand the

wind load as per the site condition. GRP top braket arm shall be designed as
per the BS EN 40-7:2002 table 3 & 9.Junction box shall be the integral part of
the pole.JB shall be fitted with 4 wayconnector and the cable size shall be as
per the project requirement.
13.2 GRP poles shall have the mounting arrangement of Flange base type.Cast iron
metallic base frame integrated with GRP pole by In-situ bonding & its covered
with GRP coating.
14.1 Type tests, acceptance tests and routine tests for all supply equipments/
component parts covered by this specification shall be carried out as per the
relevant standards for the respective equipment and their accessories.
14.2 The certified copies of test certificates/reports of the above mentioned tests
shall be submitted to the client before dispatch of equipment. BIDDER shall
submit with his proposal copies of available type test certificates of the
equipments/component parts offered.
As part of the proposal the BIDDER shall furnish relevant technical/

descriptive literature of all quoted items and the general arrangement drawing
showing dimensioned views for Lighting Distribution boards and lighting
panels and junction boxes
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

TCE.7347A-EL-220 LIGHTING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SHEET 1 OF 3
SR.NO. ITEM BIDDER

1.1 Marking & Identification of Conductors. IS 5578
IS 11353 BS 159
1.2 Enclosed Distribution Fuse Boards and IS 2675 BS 5486

Cut-outs for Voltages not exceeding 1000
V
1.3 General Requirements for Switchgear IS 4237 BS 162

and Control gear for Voltages not
exceeding 1000V
1.4 Code of Practice – Selection, Installation IS 10118 BS 5405

and Maintenance of Switchgear
1.5 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control IS 8623 BS 5486 IEC 60439
gear.
1.6 Degree of Protection of enclosed IS 13947

equipment for Low Voltage Switchgear
and Control gear
1.7 Switches, Disconnectors, Switch IS 13947 BS 5419 IEC 60405

Disconnectors and Fuse Combination Part-3
Units for Low Voltage Switchgear and
Control gear
1.8 Circuit Breakers for over current IS 8828 BS 387-1

protection for House hold & similar
Installations (MCBs)
1.9 Low Voltage fuses IS 9224 BS 88 IEC 60269
1.10 Current Transformers IS 2705 BS 3938 IEC 60185
1.11 Voltage Transformers IS 3156 BS 3941 IEC 60186
1.12 Direct Acting Indicating analogue IS 1248 BS 89 IEC 6051

Electrical Indicating Instruments
1.13 AC Electricity Meters IS 722 BS 37
TCE FORM 329 R3

SR.NO. ITEM BIDDER
1.14 Electrical Relays for Power System IS 3231 BS 142 IEC 60255
Protection
1.15 Flameproof Enclosures of Electrical IS 2148 BS 229 IEC 6079-1

Apparatus
1.16 Guide for Selection of Electrical IS 5571

Equipment for Hazardous Areas
1.17 Switches for Domestic and Similar IS 3854 BS 3676

Purposes
1.18 Plugs and Socket Outlets of 250V & rated IS 1293 BS 546
current upto 1A.
1.19 Boxes for Enclosure for Electrical IS 5133

Accessories Part-1
1.20 Fans and Regulators, Ceiling Type, IS 374

Electric
1.21 Rigid Steel Conduits for Electrical IS 9537 BS 31

Installation.
1.22 Accessories for Rigid Steel Conduits for IS 3837 BS 31

Electrical Wiring
1.23 Flexible Steel Conduits for Electrical IS 3480

Wiring
1.24 Rigid Steel Conduits for Electrical IS 9537 BS 4607

Installations Part-2
1.25 Fittings for Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits IS 3419 BS 4607

Part-2
1.26 PVC Insulated Cables for Working IS 694

Voltages upto and including 1100 V
1.27 Tubular Steel Poles for Overhead IS 2713

Powerlines
TCE FORM 329 R3

SR.NO. ITEM BIDDER
1.28 Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium IS 5082 BS 2898

Alloys, Bars, Rods, Tubes and Sections
for Electrical Purposes
1.29 Code of Practice for Phosphating Iron and IS 6005 BS 3189

Steel
1.30 Fittings for Rigid Steel Conduits for IS 2667

Electrical Wiring
1.31 Prestressed Concrete Circular Spun IS 13158

Poles for Overhead Power, Traction and
Telecommunication Lines
1.32 Methods of Test for Concrete Poles for IS 2905

Overhead Power and Telecommunication
Lines
1.33 Recommended practice for Hot - Dip IS 2629

galvanizing of Iron and steel
1.34 Codes of practice for design loads( other IS 875(3)

than earth quake) for building and
structure
2.0 NOTES
Equipment, Accessories, Component As per relavant IS & IEC codes

Parts, Raw Materials & Tests shall
conform to
LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION
BOARDS/PANELS
REMOTE LIGHTING PANELS
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220 LIGHTING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
DATA SHEET
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR

1.0 FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
1.1 Distribution board/Panel general arrangement dimensioned drawings showing

plan elevation and side view, outline dimensions, floor openings, floor/wall/
structure fixing arrangements, earthing terminals and weights etc.
1.2 Bill of material listing component/equipment designation, make, type, ratings,

quantity of the various components mounted on the boards/ panels.
1.3 Schematic wiring diagram of the distribution boards/ panels, showing

the terminal numbers and the terminals for the external
connections.
1.4 Dimensional drawing of flood lights tower giving all design particulars,
GA drawing of High Mast.
1.5 Similar relevant drawings as mentioned in above clauses 1.1, 1.2 & 1.3
for flameproof enclosures.
2.0 FOR INFORMATION
2.1 Inside view of distribution boards/panels showing mounting and wiring

arrangement of various component equipments.
2.2 Descriptive/technical catalogues of air break switches, MCCB, miniature

circuit breakers, earth leakage circuit breakers, metering instruments, light
control switches, receptacle units, flameproof enclosures, conduits, junction
boxes and ceiling/wall mounted fans.
2.3 Dimensioned drawing of flood lights tower/High mast giving all design
particulars shall be submitted for approval before fabrication of the tower/High
mast.
NOTE:The VENDOR shall plan his manufacturing schedule so as to allow at

least 3 weeks time for approval of the drawings after their receipt by the client.
3.1 Type and routine test certificates for the factory built assembly of
boards/panels, flameproof enclosures and for all component parts/other
equipments e.g. switches, MCCBs, MCBs, ELCBs, fuses, conduits, lighting
wires, light switches, receptacles, fans, etc. shall be furnished by the
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
220 LIGHTING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
DATA SHEET
CONTRACTOR. For flameproof enclosures approval certificates from relevant

statutory authorities shall be furnished.
The type test certificates shall be forwarded within 3 months from the
receipt of order and the routine test certificates shall be furnished for
the client approval at least 2 weeks before the date of despatch.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R3

.
SHEET 1 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
-221 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORK
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of installation, testing and

commissioning of the following systems:
(a) Electrical Equipment Installation Work,
(b) Cabling System Installation, including supply of Cable Trays &

Accessories.
(c) Installation of Earthing and Lightning Protection System.
(d) Lighting System Supply (except supply of light fittings) and Installation
Work.
2.1 The electrical installation work shall comply with the latest applicable Standards,
Regulations, Electricity Rules and Safety Codes of the locality where the
installation is carried out. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve
the CONTRACTOR of this responsibility.
2.2 Applicable codes and standards are indicated in Data Sheet. This list is not
intended to be comprehensive. In case of conflict between the standards and this
specification, this specification shall govern.
2.3 All equipment installation in jetty area shall be as per IEC 61892.
3.0 GENERAL SCOPE
3.1 The CONTRACTOR shall take over the equipment to be erected from the
CONTRACTOR’s storage yard/stores/sheds/railway siding, transport the
equipments where required in actual position, erect, assemble all parts of the
equipments, test and commission the same
3.2 The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, welding equipment, rigging materials,
scaffolding, platforms, ladders, testing equipment, test connections, and kits etc.
required for complete installation, testing and commissioning of the items
included in the contract work.
3.3 Commissioning shall be done only with the supervision of the equipment
MANUFACTURERS. The CONTRACTOR shall extend full cooperation to these
engineers and carry out the works as per their instructions.
3.5 It will be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to obtain approval/clearance from

local statutory authorities including Electrical Inspector, wherever applicable for
conducting of any work or for installation carried out which comes under the
purview of such authorities.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 2 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
3.6 The work shall be carried out strictly as per the instructions of client/ manufacturer
and approved layout drawings. In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to
correct interpretation of the drawings or instructions, necessary clarifications shall
be obtained from the client. The CONTRACTOR shall be held responsible for any
damage to the equipment consequent to not following the MANUFACTURER's
instructions correctly. All necessary drawings, MANUFACTURER's equipment
manuals will be furnished to the CONTRACTOR who shall return the same after
completion of work.
3.7 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible if any installation materials are lost or
damaged during installation. All damages and thefts of equipment/component
parts, till the installation is taken over by PURCHASER shall be made good by
the CONTRACTOR.
3.8 The CONTRACTOR shall have a separate cleaning gang to clean all equipment
under erection and as well as the work area and the project site at regular
intervals to the satisfaction of the client. In case the cleaning is not to the client
satisfaction, he will have the right to carry out the cleaning operations and any
expenditure incurred by the client in this regard will be to the CONTRACTOR's
account.
3.9 In order to avoid hazards to personnel moving around the equipment such as
switch gear etc., which is kept charged after installation, before commissioning,
such equipment shall be suitably cordoned off to avoid accidental operation of the
equipment.
3.10 The CONTRACTOR shall carry out touch-up painting on any equipment indicated
by the client, if the finish paint on the equipment is soiled or marred during
installation handling. The paint will be supplied by the CONTRACTOR
3.11 The CONTRACTOR shall include the following in his scope whenever applicable.
3.11.1 Supply and installation of danger warning plates, labels, rubber insulation mats,
fire extinguishers, first aid chart, etc.
3.11.2 Site fabrication of items to meet specific situations e.g. cable trays, junction
boxes, wire mesh enclosures etc.
3.11.3 Chipping and punching holes/openings in concrete floors/walls and brick walls
and finishing them good and providing channels and embedments wherever
required. Provision of chequered plates to close floor openings left around switch
gears/panels etc. together with supply of materials.
3.12 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure workmanship of good quality and shall assign
qualified supervisors/engineers and competent labour who is skilled, careful and
experienced in carrying out similar works. The client shall reserve the right to
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 3 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
reject non-competent persons employed by the CONTRACTOR, if the

workmanship is not of good order.
3.13 It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain necessary

Licence/Authorisation/Permit for work from the Licensing Boards of the
Locality/State where the work is to be carried out. The persons deputed by the
CONTRACTOR's firm should also hold valid permits issued or recognised by the
Licensing Board of the Locality/State where the work is to be carried out.
4.0 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION WORK
4.1 Equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner with proper care
during handling to avoid any distortion or damages to delicate instruments.
4.2 Foundation work for all transformers, switchgears, motors, control panels/desks,
neutral grounding equipment, cable trenches etc. will be carried out by the
CONTRACTOR. Base frames for switchgear/control panel shall be fabricated by
the CONTRACTOR
4.3 Installation, testing and commissioning of all equipment shall be in accordance

with the specified codes of practice and Manufacturer's instructions and
respective commissioning check lists enclosed with this specification.
4.4 All the installation works shall be done in consultation with the client and as per
teh client approved drawings.
4.5 Transformers (Oil type)
4.5.1 Site inspection, storage, installation, testing and commissioning of transformers

shall be in accordance with the specified code of practices, MANUFACTURER’s
instructions and the commissioning check list. Normally transformers will be
delivered without oil, filled with inert gas and without bushings and externally
mounted accessories as applicable. The CONTRACTOR shall (a) assemble the
transformers with all fittings such as bushings, cooler banks, radiators,
conservators, valves, pipings, cable boxes, marshalling boxes, OLTC, cooling
fans/pumps etc. (b) arrange for oil filtration before filling, (c) Provide
wedges/clamps to rigidly station all transformers on rails, (d) connect up the
transformer’s terminals and (e) lay and terminate the cables/conduits between all
the accessories mounted on the transformer tank/cooler and the transformer
marshalling kiosk. Care shall be taken during handling of insulating oil to prevent
ingress of moisture or foreign matter. In the testing, circulating, filtering or
otherwise handling of oil, rubber hoses shall not be used. Circulation and filtering
of oil, heating of oil by regulated short-circuit current during drying runs and
sampling and testing of oil shall be in accordance with the MANUFACTURER’s
instructions/specified Code of Practice.
4.5.2 Due care shall be taken by CONTRACTOR to avoid any ingress of moisture or
foreign matter during handling of insulation oil.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 4 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
4.6 SWITCHGEAR (HT,LT SWITCHGEAR, ACDB,DCDB,MLDB,VFD PANELS &

UPS)
a) All HT, LT Switchgear, ACDB, DCDB, MLDB, VFD Panels & UPS shall be
installed in accordance with specified Code of Practice, drawings furnished and
the MANUFACTURER’s instructions and respective commissioning check lists
enclosed with the specification. The Switchgear/panels shall be installed on
finished surfaces or concrete or steel sills. These panels may be bolted on to the
foundation pockets or welded to base frame members. Proper aligning, joining of
various vertical shipping sections, busbar connections, inter panel wiring etc. will
be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. In joining shipping sections of the
switchgear/panels together, adjacent housing or panel sections provided shall be
bolted together after alignment has been completed. Power bus enclosures,
ground and control splices of conventional nature shall be cleaned and bolted
together, being drawn up with torque wrench of proper size or by other approved
means.
b) The CONTRACTOR shall take utmost care in handling instruments, relays and
other delicate mechanisms. Wherever the instruments and relays are supplied
separately, they shall be mounted only after the associated panels have been
erected and aligned. The blocking materials/mechanism employed for the safe
transit of the instruments and relays shall be removed after ensuring that the
panels have been completely installed and no further movement of the same
would be necessary. Any damage to relays and instruments during transportation
/ handling shall be immediately replaced by the contractor without any time/price
implication and the same shall be reported to the client.
c) The switchboard panels shall be handled with care, avoiding any impact to the
equipment. Dragging of the panels directly on floor shall be avoided. Roller bars
may be used for shifting of panels.
d) The switchboard panels shall be properly supported on the truck or trailer by

means of ropes to avoid any chance of tilting. The switchboards shall be lifted
after ensuring that panel supports, nuts and bolts are all intact and tightened.
e) While lifting the panels in packed conditions, utmost care must be taken to avoid
any damage to insulators, bushings, metering and protective equipment. The
panels shall be preferably kept inside the packing cases till foundations are ready.
f) The switchboard panels shall be installed on prepared foundations or floor

cut-outs or floor EPs. Steel base channels shall be welded to inserts provided on
floor slab.
g) The switchboard panels should be taken out from the packed cases and moved
one by one to the proper place. All the panels should be assembled aligned
levelled. Alignment of panels shall be checked in both horizontal and lateral
directions. It should be ensured that panel to panel coupling bolts, bus bars links
fit properly without any strain on any part. It should also be checked up that
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 5 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
lowering, lifting, racking in and out operation of the breaker and all other motions
are free from any obstruction. No new holes for jointing of the panels other than
those recommended by the vendor shall be drilled. No gaps shall be left between
the panels.
h) After erection of switchboard panels, all uncovered portions of floor cut-outs shall
be covered with 6 mm thick removable chequered plates finished with floor level.
The design of the chequered plates shall be such that the maximum allowable
deflection is L/200(where L is the span of the chequered plates in meters)for a live
load of 500 kg./sq.meters.
i) Suitable lifting arrangements shall be provided for chequered plates. The

chequered plates shall be painted with a coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer
after proper surface preparation as per specifications.
j) Rubber mats suitable for 11KV and 457V grade shall be supplied by the
Contractor at front and rear of the HT & LT switchgear as per IS 15652-2006.
k) After completion of the panel erection, all the cubicles switches, starters, C.T. and
P.T. chambers, bus bars chamber should be cleaned and checked for tightness of
all the components. Vacuum circuit breakers shall be checked for integrity of
bottle seals. All loosely supplied items shall be fitted up. Interconnection wiring
between shipping sections shall be made by contractor. All the wiring connections
should also be checked with drawings and tightened. Metering and protective
C.Ts., alarm, indications and protective relays should be fitted up. Phase
sequence & polarity of PTs and CTs should be checked. Contact resistance of all
busbar joints and contactors should be checked up. Every part or insulator should
be checked for any possible damage. All the starters, switches, contacts should
be cleaned with C.T.C. Silver tipped contacts should be checked for easy and free
movement. Hinges of panel doors should be lightly lubricated to give free and
noiseless movement. All unused openings shall be kept completely closed to
avoid ingress of any foreign particles inside the panel.
l) Individual feeder functional scheme verification should be carried out and minor
wiring modifications in the panel wirings, as per requirement at site, should be
done as per the directions of client. Special attention is to be paid to CT circuits
polarity, wiring continuity and correctness in the protection as well as
measurement circuits.
m) All moving parts, of closing/tripping mechanism, racking in and racking out

mechanism, spouts and shutter closing mechanism shall be checked for proper
operation. All the auxiliary contacts of breaker shall be checked-up, cleaned and
contact pressure measured.
n) Should the switchgear be wet or having a low IR value due to bad weather,
insulators, bushings or any other insulated parts, the entire switchgear should be
dried-up according to the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge and the IR value
should improve to a safe level for commissioning the same. Care should be taken
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 6 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
to protect the surrounding insulation from direct local heating during the drying up
process.
o) All the metering instruments, protective relays and other relays and contactors
shall be tested as per manufacturer’s recommendations and according to the
instructions of the client. Protection relays shall be inserted and connected and
settings adjusted as required by the Engineer-in-charge.
p) All the control wiring, PTs, bushings, busbars, other live parts of switchgear shall
be meggered.
q) Electrical simulation tests should be carried out for all the protective, alarm and
annunciation relays and external interfaces to ascertain proper functioning along
with the manual operation of the circuit breaker.
r) Panels must be cleaned with vacuum cleaner. The commissioning of any

switchgear / panel / equipment shall also include necessary parameter settings of
all equipment.
s) In addition to the procedure laid above, any other instruction given by the VFD
manufacturer shall also be followed.
4.7 DISTRIBUTION AND LIGHTING TRANSFORMERS
a) Dry type Lighting transformers will be shipped lose along with fittings, sheet steel,
cable and box channels will be shipped separately.
b) The Contractor shall transport the transformers from store/railway siding to site
and place them on their foundations, assemble different parts and accessories.
c) Handling: When lifting a transformer by the lifting lugs or shackles provided for the
purpose, simultaneous use should be made of all such lugs and shackles in order
to avoid any unbalance while lifting. The lifting chain should never interfere, with
any part of the transformer. Before lifting complete transformer, it should be
ensured that all cover bolts are tightened fully. In case where it is necessary to
use jacks for lifting, protections provided for the purpose of jacking should be
used. It may be necessary under certain circumstances to place jacks under
stiffening curbs on the tank base. For transporting transformers from stores to
site, the transformers shall be loaded on a suitable capacity truck or trailer. The
transformers shall be properly supported by steel ropes and stoppers on the
trailer to avoid tilting of the transformers in transit due to jerks and vibrations. At
no instance a transformer shall be kept on bare ground. Where it is not possible to
unload the transformer directly on a foundation, these shall be unloaded on a
properly built wooden sleeper platform. A transformer shall never be left without
putting stoppers to the wheels.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 7 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
d) The storage and installation of transformer with all its accessories shall be carried
out in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Extreme care shall be
taken to avoid ingress of moisture and foreign particles into the transformer tank.
e) Transformers are liable to get damaged during transit and therefore they should
be examined, for any sign of damage in transit, particular attention being paid to
the following,
i) Tank sides or cooling tubes dented.
ii) Protruding tubes damaged.
iii) Bolts loosened due to vibration in transit.
iv) Bushing cracked or broken.
f) Except large power transformers, all the lighting and small distribution
transformers shall be placed on the prepared concrete bed. But all the high rating
transformers shall be placed after grouting channels or rails, over concrete
foundations. The transformers shall be levelled, aligned and checked for free
movement on the rails. Stoppers shall be clamped to the transformers
immediately to prevent any movement. All the accessories bi-directional wheels,
jacking pads, marshalling box, bushings and other devices should be cleaned
tested before fixing on the transformer. All the connections for C.T.s, bushings
and other wiring shall be checked for tightness and correctness before replacing
the lid or tightening all the bolts.
g) Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section/package, Contractor

shall make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections. All insulators
and bushings shall be protected against any damage due to negligence or
carelessness of Contractor during installation. Insulators/Bushings,
chipped/cracked due to negligence or carelessness of the Contractor shall be
replaced by him at his own expense.
h) The following work on transformers if required shall be performed by the

contractor.
i) Before finally putting the transformer to commissioning, if required, it may be

desired to run it for a few hours on short-circuit, applying a low voltage
approximately equal to the impedance voltage, of the transformer for releasing air
bubbles. During this process, regular readings of the insulation resistance of the
winding to earth and winding to winding and temperature against time should be
recorded. The above operation may be required to be performed if found
necessary by the client. Otherwise a vacuum pressure, up to 635 mm of Hg shall
be applied depending upon manufacturer’s recommendation for the purpose.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 8 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
4.8 Motors
4.8.1 Unless otherwise specified, the motors will be installed by the driven equipment
VENDOR. However, the CONTRACTOR under this specification shall undertake
precommissioning checks and testing of the motors. The
installation/commissioning shall be as per the applicable code of practice,
MANUFACTURER’s instructions and commissioning check list for motors
4.9 BATTERY,BATTERY CHARGER & UPS
a) Installation and testing of UPS, battery, battery chargers shall be carried out in
strict compliance with the MANUFACTURER’s instructions. Each cell shall be
inspected for breakage and condition of cover seals as soon as it is received at
site. Each cell shall be filled with electrolyte in accordance with the
MANUFACTURER’s instructions.
b) Battery shall be erected on MS rack or frame stands and insulators supplied by

the manufacturer of the batteries. The cells shall not be lifted by the terminals.
Contact surfaces of battery terminals and inter-cell connectors shall be cleaned,
coated with acid resistant grease and assembled. Each connection shall be
properly tightened.
c) Electrolyte shall be filled as per manufacturer’s instructions. Inter row connections

shall be made with the leads supplied by the manufacturer Supervision for
preparation and filling of electrolyte, terminal connections etc. will be carried out
by the manufacture of the batteries wherever specifically mentioned. Each cell
shall be tested with hydrometer and thermometer and results logged. Freshening
charge, if required, shall be added. Charging, discharging and recharging shall
also be carried out under the supervision of the manufacturer.
d) Lamp bank for discharging shall be provided by the contractor under this contract.
e) When handed over to the Purchaser, the battery shall be fully charged and
electrolyte shall be at full level and of specified specific gravity.
f) The Contractor shall also carryout tests on the complete Battery, Charger.
4.10 LOCAL PUSH BUTTON STATIONS
a) The push button stations shall be installed near the motors to be controlled.
Individual channel supports shall be used for each of the push button stations.
These shall be installed as per approved erection detail drawing. Control station
for hazardous areas shall be CMRS certified and CCE approved.
b) All push button/control stations shall have necessary canopies. Wiring of push
button control station shall be checked before giving control supply.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 9 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
4.11 Miscellaneous Items
a) Communication equipment, space heater and ventilation distribution boards, neutral

grounding equipment, local starters, capacitors, local push button stations and any
other electrical equipment within the plant premises shall be installed, tested and
commissioned as per respective manufacturer’s instructions and the drawings
furnished by client.
b) Suitable brackets, angle/channel section for support of wall mounted equipment shall
be provided by the CONTRACTOR
5.1 CABLING SYSTEM INSTALLATION WORK
5.2 Cable Trays and Accessories
a) The cable trays shall be complete with all necessary coupler plates, elbows, tees,
bends, reducers, stiffeners and other accessories and hardware. All hardware (i.e.
bolts, nuts, screws. washers, etc.) shall be Hot dip galvanised.
b) Cable trays shall conform to the requirements specified in "Cable Trays-General

Notes".
5.3 Cable laying and installation
(a) The CONTRACTOR shall install test and commission power and control
cables. The quantities, sizes and types of cables shall be as per the
project requirement.
(b) The cables shall be laid in built-up trenches, directly buried in ground , on
cable trays, vertical raceways, clamped on structures/walls/ceiling, pulled
through pipes and conduits etc. as shown per the approved typical/project
drawings. The scope of cable installation shall include laying, pulling of
cables, and proper dressing of cables on cable trays, racks, vertical
raceways and supply and installation of saddles, spacers and nylon chord
for tying as required.
(c) The installation of buried cables shall conform in all respects to the
standard details and drawings approved by client. The cost of excavation
& back filling and supplying brick covers for medium and low voltage
cables and pre cast concrete covers for high voltage cables, route/joint
markers, supply of sand shall be included in the rate of directly buried
cables on cubic metre basis.
5.4 Cable Termination
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 10 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
(a) All cables shall be connected at both ends. The scope of work shall
include making the requisite holes in the gland plate, fixing the glands,
terminating the cables in the glands, mounting of core balance CT if
required, earthing the cable armour, crimping the cable lugs on each core,
neatly clamping the cables in cable alleys/wiring troughs and connecting
to the terminals. The cable and core identification tags shall be supplied
and installed by the CONTRACTOR.
(b) Cable termination for HT cables shall be generally as described in a)

above and shall include heat shrinkable tubing system of cable
termination.
5.5 Cable Tray and Tray Covers Installation
(a) Installation details for cable trays shall be as shown in 'Cabling Notes and
Details". All cable racks, vertical raceways and supporting steel shall be
installed at the locations shown in the various layout drawings. The sizes
of ladder/perforated cable trays to be supplied and installed shall be 150,
300, 450, 600mm wide.
(b) The CONTRACTOR shall also provide earthing of the cable trays at
distance not exceeding 10Mtrs. length by means of G.S. Flat whose
minimum size shall be 25 x 3 mm.
(c) All vertical raceways/trays and outdoor trays shall be covered by 16 gauge
painted/galvanised MS sheet covers. The estimated lengths and widths
of these covers shall be as per the project requirement. The scope of work
shall include the installation of these covers including necessary screws
when required for fixing to vertical raceways/trays.
5.6 Cable Trays/Vertical Raceways Mounting Arrangements and Cable Carrier

Structures
(a) The CONTRACTOR shall fabricate, install and paint the following as per
relevant enclosed drawings/general notes:
(i) Mounting arrangements for cable trays. Any cable trays junction
bends which are non-standard shall be fabricated as racks to suit
installation drawings.
(ii) Vertical cable raceways and steel accessories (angles and plates)
required to seal the floor openings in the case of indoor raceways.
(iii) Cable carrier structures (racks) for cable trenches and tunnels.
(iv) Supporting steel for junction/marshalling boxes, push-button

stations, vertical structures for clamping trefoil cables, etc., as
required.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 11 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
(b) The steel members shall be welded to the floor beams, columns, plates
embedded in R.C. floors or grouted in brick walls as the case may be to
obtain the required supporting arrangements as detailed in relevant
drawings. The cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation
with one coat of red lead primer, one coat of oil primer followed by two
coats of aluminium paint.
5.7 Conduits/Pipes Installation
(a) The CONTRACTOR shall install all conduits/pipes required for the cabling
work as per the project requirement.
(b) Conduits/pipes shall be laid buried in ground, laid along the

walls/structural members, along floors and ceilings. Conduit and pipe
sleeves which are required to be embedded in walls, roof slabs, floors,
trench and tunnel walls, under roads and tracks etc. will in general be
furnished However, in places where such pipe sleeves have not been
provided by the PURCHASER, the CONTRACTOR shall install
conduit/pipe sleeves in place wherever necessary by breaking walls/floors
as required by the SITE ENGINEER to PURCHASER's satisfaction. All
conduits/pipes shall have their ends closed by caps until cables are
pulled.
(c) Water-proof sealing shall be done for all outdoor to indoor conduit/pipe
inserts by means of bell mouth termination pieces and bitumen based cold
set water-proof compound. Fire-proof sealing shall be done for pipe
inserts in floor slabs, in walls of pressurised rooms and hazardous area,
wherever indicated in project drawings. The water-proof/fire-proof sealing
of pipe inserts shall be as per the typical drawings enclosed.
(d) The scope of installation of conduits/pipes shall include supply and

installation of all accessories like tees, elbows, pull-boxes, conduit end
plugs, bell-mouths, GI wire for cable pulling, GI saddles, spacers, screws,
nuts and bolts. The scope for directly buried pipes/conduits shall include
excavation and back filling as per varying depths/widths mentioned in
project drawings.
5.8 Cable Joints
(a) Jointing of cables shall be made in accordance with relevant codes of

practice and MANUFACTURER's special instructions. Cables shall be
firmly clamped and supported within 300 mm from the joint to avoid
mechanical stresses on the joint.
(b) Joints shall not be permitted in control cables. However, in long runs of
power cables, joints shall be permitted at an accessible location which
shall be chosen in consultation with client before work is taken up. A
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 12 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
record of all joints giving cable number, type of cable, type of joint, location
and date of jointing shall be kept by the CONTRACTOR.
(c) Jointing kits shall be suitable for the type of cable and for underground
buried installation. The CONTRACTOR shall offer Heat shrinkable jointing
kits/cast resin type or tapex type jointing kits, complete with insulating
materials, stress grading/relieving materials, plastic mould, resin, tinned
copper lugs, plumbing materials and all other accessories to make the
joint complete in all respects. Unit rate quoted for outdoor straight through
Joints/Jointing kits shall include erection of temporary shelter and
safeguarding against ingress of moisture.
5.9 Miscellaneous items like Junction/Marshalling Boxes/ Push Button Stations, etc.
The CONTRACTOR shall install, junction/marshalling boxes/push button stations

wherever indicated in the project drawings. The quantities of marshalling/junction
boxes and push button stations shall be as per the project requirement. The
scope of installation shall be mounting on walls, columns, structures, including
necessary bolts, nuts, screws and welding work as necessary.
5.10 Cable Trays and Markers

(a) Each cable shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cable
schedule. The tag shall be of aluminium with the number punched on it
and securely attached to the cable/conduit by not less than two turns of 20
SWG GI wire. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power cables
and of circular shape for control cables. Cable tags shall be provided on all
cables at each end, on both sides of wall/floor crossings, on each
duct/conduit entry and at every ten (10) metres in cable trench/tray racks.
(b) Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with
cable marker made of galvanised iron plate. Location of underground
cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an additional
inscription "Cable joint". The marker shall project 150 mm above ground
and shall be spaced at an interval of 30 meters, and at every change in
direction. They shall be located on both sides of road and drain crossings.
(c) The price of cable tags and markers shall be included in the installation
rates for cables/conduits.
5.11 Sealing of Floor Openings
All floor openings for vertical cable trays/raceways shall be sealed by fire-proof
compound. The scope of work shall include preparing and laying of the
compound. The supply and installation rate for the compound shall be indicated
separately by the CONTRACTOR.
6.0 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 13 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
6.1 Scope of Installation Work
6.2.1 The installation work shall include unloading, storing, laying, fixing,
jointing/terminations, testing and commissioning of the safety earthing system of
the plant and lightning protection system for buildings and allied structures. All
welding/brazing equipment, necessary tools and testing equipment shall be
furnished by the CONTRACTOR. Installation work shall also meet the
requirements stipulated in Earthing and Lightning protection System Installation
6.2.2 The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the lightning protection and earthing of all
equipment/panels/structures as indicated in the approved drawings. Whether
specifically shown in drawings or not, building columns, hand rails, miscellaneous
items such as junction/marshalling boxes, field switches, cable boxes etc., shall
be earthed.
6.2.3 The CONTRACTOR shall install bare/insulated, copper/aluminium/steel

conductors, braids, etc., required for system and individual equipment earthing.
All work such as cutting, bending, supporting, painting/coating, drilling,
brazing/soldering/welding, clamping, bolting and connection onto structures,
equipment frames, terminals, rails or other devices shall be in the
CONTRACTOR's scope of work. All incidental hardware and consumables such
as fixing cleats/clamps, anchor fasteners, lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, bitumastic
compound, anti-corrosive paint as required for the complete work shall be
deemed to be included by the CONTRACTOR as part of the installation work.
6.2.4 The work of embedment of earthing conductor in RCC floors/walls along with
provision of earth plate inserts/pads/earth risers shall normally be done by the
civil contractor when the floors/walls are cast. However, when required to do so in
these areas where flooring is to be done after the electrical works is at site, the
electrical works shall co-ordinate with civil works and shall install the earthing
conductors before the commencement of concrete work. In such cases, the
CONTRACTOR's has to lay the conductors in position (before 50 mm concrete
finish flooring) making welded/brazed/cad weld joints as required including the
requisite plate inserts/pads/risers above the floor near the equipments. The
embedded conductors shall be connected to reinforcing rods wherever
necessary.
6.2.6 The tap connections (earthing leads) from the floor embedded main earthing grid
to the equipment of more than 500 mm long shall be embedded in floor by the
CONTRACTOR where required, together with associated civil work such as
excavation/chasing, concreting and surfacing, if not already done by the civil
contractor. The concrete cover over the conductor shall not be less than 50 mm.
6.2.7 The installation of earth conductors in outdoor areas, buried in ground shall
include excavation of trenches in earth (600 mm deep and 450 mm wide), laying
of conductor at 600 mm depth , brazing/welding/cad welding as required, of main
grid conductor joints as well as risers above ground at required locations and
backfilling of trenches. Backfilling material to be placed over buried conductor
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 14 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
shall be free from stones and other harmful mixtures. Backfill shall be placed in
layers of 150 mm, uniformly spread along the ditch, and tampered utilising
pneumatic tampers or other approved means. If the excavated soil is found
unsuitable for backfilling, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange for suitable soil from
outside.
6.2.8 The installation of earth connection leads to equipment and risers on steel
structures/walls shall include laying the conductors, welding/cleating at specified
intervals, welding/brazing to the main earth grid's risers, bolting at equipment
terminals and coating welded/brazed joints by bitumastic paint. Galvanized
conductors shall be touched up with zinc rich paint where holes are drilled at site
for bolting to equipment/structure.
6.2.9 The scope of installation of electrodes shall include installation of electrodes (a)
directly in earth, (b) in constructed earth pits and connecting to main buried earth
grid, as per enclosed drawings/relevant standards. The scope of work shall
include excavation, construction of the earth pits including all materials required
for construction of the earth pits, placing the rod, providing and fixing test links on
those electrodes in test pits and connecting to main earth grid conductors.
6.2.10 The scope of installation of lightning conductors on the roofs of buildings shall
include providing concrete upstands on roof, laying, fastening and cleating of
horizontal conductors, grouting of vertical rods where necessary, laying
fastening/cleating/welding of the down comers onto the walls/columns of the
building and connection to the test links above ground level.
6.2.11 The installation of the test links shall include mounting of the same at specified
height on wall/column by suitable brackets and connections of the test link to the
earth electrode.
7.0 LIGHTING SYSTEM INSTALLATION WORK
7.1 The lighting system installation work shall cover the supply and installation of
lighting system equipment such as Main lighting distribution boards (MLDBs),
lighting distribution boards (LDBs), receptacles, light control switches, ceiling
fans, lighting wires, conduits, junction boxes, lighting poles, towers, etc. The
lighting system installation work shall also meet the requirements stipulated in
Lighting Installation
7.2 The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the installation of various lighting equipment
as indicated in the approved drawings. The work shall include unloading, storing,
unpacking, fixing of all equipment, routing and laying of conduits/cables, wiring,
termination, testing and commissioning of all the equipment of lighting system.
7.3 The supply of all mounting accessories, earthing wires and incidental hardware
and consumable like fixing saddles, spacer plates, junction boxes and conduits
required for the fitting fixing/suspension points, joint boxes and connectors,
jointing, ferrules, all fixing brackets, screws and studs, shall be deemed to be
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 15 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
included as part of installation work. Mounting accessories like saddles, spacer

plates, joint boxes, junction boxes and fixing hardware shall be of galvanised mild
steel/black enamelled steel.
7.4 Holes in wall made by the CONTRACTOR shall necessarily be patched-up by him
in a good and approved manner, using the same kind of masonry as in the uncut
surfaces. The CONTRACTOR shall touch-up painting on lighting
panels/boards if the same is damaged during installation handling.
7.5 Light Fixtures

a. Fixtures shall be firmly supported from the structures. Support clamps etc., may
be bolted or welded to the existing steel works or metal inserts. In case of
concrete structures where metal inserts are not available, fixtures having a weight
upto 2.5 kg shall be supported by minimum two numbers nylon sleeve approved
made. Flameproof or other heavier fixtures shall be supported by using metallic
anchor fasteners of approved size. All supports shall be thoroughly cleaned and
painted in an appropriate colour to suit the fixture.
b. Fixtures shall be firmly supported from the structures. Support clamps etc., may
be bolted or welded to the existing steel works or metal inserts. In case of
concrete structures where metal inserts are not available, fixtures having a weight
upto 2.5 Kg shall be supported by minimum two numbers nylon sleeve anchor of
approved by using metallic anchor fasteners of approved size. All supports shall
be thoroughly cleaned and painted in an appropriate colour to suit the fixture.
c. In case of false ceiling employing minimum tee grid system, fixtures shall be
supported from true ceiling. Exact locations of fixtures shall be finalized in
consultation with air-conditioning contractor and as indicated on Architectural
drawings. Wiring above false ceilings shall not left loose and shall be supported
along the structures/ceiling. Wiring above false ceiling shall be on surface and
below false ceiling it shall be concealed. To facilitate easy maintenance "Looping
back system" of wiring shall be followed throughout. Accordingly supply tapping
and other interconnections are made only at fixture connector blocks or at
switchboards. Intermediate junction boxes shall be used for wire pulling as
inspection boxes.
7.6 Conduit Installation
a. Surface or concealed conduit system of wiring shall be adopted. Indoor building
wiring shall be concealed conduit system Suitable pull boxes or inspection type
fittings will be used to facilitate drawing of wires.
b. Only threaded type conduit fittings shall be used. Pin Grip type or clamp type
fittings are not acceptable. Conduit ends shall be free from sharp edges or burrs.
The ends of all conduits shall be reamed and neatly bushed with Bakelite
bushings. All screwed connection shall ensure that at least five threads are
engaged and the electrical continuity of conduit is maintained. Threading of
conduit shall be done to close tolerance.
c. In order to minimize condensation of sweating inside the conduit system, all
outlets shall be properly drained and ventilated in such a manner so as to prevent
entry of insects. The outer surface of the conduit pipes, including all accessories
forming part of the conduit system, shall be adequately protected against rust,
particularly when such system is exposed to weather.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 16 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
d. In all cases, bare threaded portion of conduit pipe shall not be allowed unless
such bare threaded portion is treated with anticorrosive preservative or covered
with approved plastic compound. Conduit connection to outlet boxes shall be by
means of screwed hubs or check nuts on either side.
e. Conduit pipes shall be fixed by 16 gauge G.I. Saddles on 25x6 mm G. I. Saddles
bars in an approved manner at intervals of not more than 250mm. Saddles shall
be fixed on either side of couplers, bends or similar fittings, at a distance of 300
mm from the centre of such fittings. The cost of saddle bore, saddles, clamps etc.
shall be deemed to have been included in the installation of conduits.
f. Wherever surface conduit is specified, Inspection bends, Elbows or Tees shall not
be used unless shown on the drawings or specifically approved. Bends shall be
avoided as far as possible. Joints and use of conduit nipples shall be kept to a
minimum.
g. Where concealed wiring is to be adopted, conduit or capping casing shall be laid
with the civil works in such a way. Vertical conduit runs shall be made either
through columns or encases prepared in the walls. Contractor shall fill these
encases or any other openings made by him after completing the work and neatly
finish the surface. During installation, care shall be taken to see that adequate
covers are provided to prevent rusting of conduits. If required, conduit runs may
be concealed in the floor for low level receptacles and exhaust fans. As built
conduit contractor shall submit layout drawing.
h. Wiring for exhaust fans shall be terminated in ceiling/roses/receptacles and the
connection from ceiling/rose/receptacle to the exhaust fan shall be by means of a
flexible cord equivalent in size to the main run of wires.
7.7 Street Lighting & General Plant Lighting
a. Lighting poles shall be installed as per relevant approved drawing. Fixture wire
from marshalling box upto fixture shall be 2.5 mm2, PVC insulated copper
Conductor. Main feeder upto the marshalling box shall be as per the respective
drawings.
b. Each pole shall be grounded by connecting it to the plant ground grid with suitable
size of earth conductor.
8.0 SCOPE OF THE CONSTRUCTION POWER SUPPLY
8.1 Construction power including power for testing and temporary lighting will be made
available at one point near to the proposed site & suitable number of outlets to
cater to all the requirements shall be derived by the CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR will be charged for the power consumed as per the rates
commercial tariff rates. Construction power equipment is deemed to be included in
the scope of the CONTRACTOR.
The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall be in accordance

with the applicable section of the latest version of the applicable Indian
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 17 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
Standards of latest edition including amendments, except where modified and/ or

supplemented by this specification.
8.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
a. TANGEDCO will provide power supply for construction power at one location, near
proposed site, on chargeable basis at commercial tariff rate. HT tariff VI
commercial as per TNERC norms will be levied as per the usage. Further caution
deposit and statuatory levis as per TNERC/TANGEDCO will be applicable.
b. The power at 11 kV level shall be terminated at pole. The contractor shall receive
the same and establish 11KV Construction Power Substation and distribute 11
kV supply to various distribution substations in the plant and further step down to
415 V supply to provide construction power for various locations.
c. The Owner may not be able to guarantee on the reliability of the power supply and
it is the responsibility of the contractor to make alternative arrangement during not
availability of power supply. The Owner shall not be responsible for the delay in the
project execution due to non-availability of power supply.
d. After commissioning the permanent power supply, the same shall not be used for
construction power supply requirements.
e. The scope of work shall include supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
the following items.
11 kV overhead line/Cable
Required 11/0.433 kV distribution transformers distributed at various
locations
415 V power distribution boards as required
11 kV double pole structure complete with switch, fuse, lighning
arrester, insulators and hardware, clamps & connectors, ACSR
conductors, spacers, shield wires, etc.
Metering kiosk
Capacitor banks
11kV cables and terminations
LT power cables and control cables.
Illumination system including lighting panes, poles, masts, lighting
fixtures & accessories.
Below ground earth mat, equipment earthing & lightning protection
Cable glands and lugs for all the cables.
Miscellaneous items danger boards, caution, rubber mats, fire
buckets, etc.
Any other equipment/item as required for completion of the job
f. The substaion equipment shall be suitable for outdoor application having saline
atmosphere and shall have tropical and fungicidal treatment. Electrical equipment
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 18 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
selection and derating shall be based on ambient temperature of 50 deg.C and

relative humidity of 95% maximum.
g. 11 kV system shall be designed considering the following design parameters
Nominal system voltage : 11 kV (rms), 50 Hz

Highest system voltage : 12 kV (rms), 50 Hz
Basic impulse level : 75 kV peak
Power frequency withstand voltage : 28 kV
Short time current and duration : 50 kA for 3 sec
Dynamic rating : 125 kAp
Creepage distance : 31 mm /kV
h. For the overhead 11 kV connections, ACSR conductor shall be provided. Insulator

shall be made of hard porcelain. For tension locations where the line is
sectionalized, disc type of insulators shall be used, while on tangent locations pin
type insulators are used. The insulators shall be glazed and finished in brown
colour.
i. 11kV load break switches shall be provided confirming to relevant IS. The Switch
shall have triple pole construction suitable for assembling with light weight
insulators made of high alumina body and for vertical mounting.
j. Lightning arrester shall be 30 kV class, heavy rating, gapless, metal (zinc) oxide
surge arrestors complete along with clamps, complete fitting and accessories for
installation on outdoor type 11 kV transmission lines & transformers.
k. A separate metering kiosk shall be provided to locate tariff meters of TANGEDCO.
l. Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation in a hot, saline, humid and
tropical climate. The transformers shall be capable of operating continuously at its
rated output without exceeding the specified temperature limits.
m. 415 V switchgear shall be indoor, single front, metal-clad floor mounted, fully
draw-out with ACB breaker as incomer fed from distribution tansformer and MCCB
breaker as outgoing feeders. All required protections shall be provided in the
switchgear as per the standard practice.
n. At all road crossings overhead lines shall be avoided and cables shall be provided.
o. Earthing system of substation shall conform to IS: 3043 Neutral of each LT

transformer shall be solidly grounded through 2 nos. treated earth pits.
p. Lightning protection shall be provided by shield wires including connections, earth

pits etc. as per IS : 2309
q. Capacitor bank shall be provided improve power factor.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 19 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
9.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
9.1 Electrical Equipment
All checks and tests shall be conducted as per the MANUFACTURER's

drawings/manuals, relevant codes of installation and enclosed commissioning
check lists.
The CONTRACTOR shall also carry out additional tests if called for in section-C
of the specification.
The CONTRACTOR shall carry out insulation resistance tests by meggers of

following rating.
(a) Control circuits up to 220 V - 500 V megger
(b) Power circuits upto 11 KV - 1000 V megger
(c) Power circuits above 11 KV to 33 KV- 2500 V megger
(d) Power circuits above 33 KV - 5000 V megger
9.2 Cabling System
The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the tests as specified in Cable Installation
Notes which forms part of this specification.
9.3 Earthing and Lightning Protection System
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure the continuity of all conductors and joints. Earth
continuity and earth resistance measurement tests shall be performed by the
CONTRACTOR at places indicated by the client, at no additional cost.
9.4 Lighting System
Tests on the lighting system shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR as

specified in Lighting Installation Notes.
9.5 Test Records
The client authorised representative shall be present during every test as called
for by the client. The CONTRACTOR shall record all test values and furnish the
required copies of the test data to the client. Electrical circuits and equipment
shall be energised or used at nominal operating voltage after such reports are
accepted as satisfactory by the client.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 20 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
9.6 The CONTRACTOR shall make available the following Testing and
Commissioning equipment for testing and commissioning of various equipment in
the plant :
500V and 1000V hand operated meggers.
5000V/2500V motor operated meggers.
Earth resistivity testing equipment.
Phase sequence indicators.
Frequency meters.
Micrometers
High potential testing sets suitable for testing cables upto 33 kV grade
complete with transformer, rectifier stack, instruments and control.
Miscellaneous instruments/accessories like clip-on ammeters, voltmeters,

watt meters, multi-meters, power factor-meters, time-interval meters,
single-phase and three-phase variacs, portable transformers, switches etc.
Continuity testers.
Primary injection equipment.
Secondary injection testing kit.
Insulating oil breakdown test set with accessories.
Equipment for measuring the thermal resistivity of the soil.
Transformer oil filtration equipment.
Relay test kits.
Breaker timing device for Circuit breaker opening/closing time measurement.
CT & VT testing apparatus.

Low resistance measuring instrument.
Partial discharge measuring equipment.
10.0 PRECOMMISIONING CHECKLIST

a. SWITCHGEARS
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 21 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
Before commissioning any switchgear panel, circuit breaker, motor starters, etc.,
the following points must be checked and ensured for safe energising of the
switchboard :
Check that the erection of equipment to be commissioned is complete in all
respect with its auxiliaries and all other mountings including earthing.
Openings in floor within and outside panels have been sealed off. All cover
and door gaskets are intact to make enclosure vermin proof. Check also the
wiring of the switchgear panel as per approved final vendor drawing.
Check that all the metering instruments have been checked and calibrated.
Indicating lamps are healthy and are in position. All power and control
fuses,MCBs are of proper rating and operational.
Panel is supplied from correct level of voltage source.
Check termination of power cable and its size and type.
Check if unusual stress coming on cable glands and terminations due to
improper bending and support of cable at the PCC/MCC entry.
Check all mechanical operations - like racking in/out of breaker, drawing in/out
of MCC modules, operation of all position indicating limit switches for
breakers, manual spring charging of breaker, mechanical on/off of breaker,
spring charging limit switch, etc.
Check all safety interlocks.
Check lubrication of operating/moving parts of breakers/MCC modules.
Check scrapping earth connection for breaker.
Check spring charging by motor and spring charging time.
Check that the polarity test and ratio test of all the P.Ts and C.Ts is done and
phase sequence test of C.Ts conforms to the correct vector group
connections. Wiring continuity and correctness are ensured in the protection
and measurement circuits. Polarity of D.C. battery supply for all the panels
shall be checked.
Also check that the high voltage test of circuit breaker, bus bars etc., have
been conducted and certificates approved by site incharge.
Check that all the protective relays including thermal overload relays have
been tested for secondary injection tests and operation of all the current and
voltage operated relays has been tested. (Primary injection tests are to be
carried out for Cable differential protection, Restricted Earth fault protection,
etc., at full/reduced current to ensure total wiring correctness.). Simulation
tests to check all protection, alarm and annunciation systems are functioning
as per required settings. Check that all protections of breakers & MCC (of
each module) are as per approved final vendor drawing. Check all interlocks.
Check that I.R. values have been recorded for bus bars, circuit breaker,
control wiring and potential transformers. Joint resistance of bus bars have
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 22 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
been recorded and found to be satisfactory.All the surroundings and panels

have been cleaned and temporary earth leads have been removed.
Check all covers closed properly before energising the panels.
Check control supply voltage is proper.
Check space heater operation.
Check for chattering of any relay or contactor.
Check antipumping feature of breaker.
Check operation of mechanical counter of the breaker if provided.
b. TRANSFORMER
Before commissioning any transformer the following points must be checked and
ensured for safe energisation of the transformer :
Check that all the accessories have been fixed properly. The transformer
dehydration is over and results are satisfactory and approved by the Client.
Check grounding of marshalling box, tap changer gear. Check earth bus
inside the bus duct & grounding of the bus duct enclosure. Check system
grounding on the H.V. & L.V. side.
Check that the operations of off-load tap changer on all the tap positions is
satisfactory. The mechanical parts of the off load tap changer are lubricated.
Break shoes are O.K. Check for Motor IR values and check the tap position
mechanical indicator on the transformer. Tap changer limit switch are
operating alright on the maximum and minimum tap position & Off-load tap
changer contact pressure and resistance is as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Check that all the metering equipment has been tested. Polarity test of P.Ts
and transformer winding is alright. Phase sequence and connections have
been checked for proper vector group. Check Neutral C.T. connections.
Check that the ratio test and winding resistance on all the tap positions is
alright.
Check that gaps of arcing horns for the bushings are alright and earth
connections for the surge diverters have been checked.
Check that the winding temperature thermometer pockets. That winding
settings on dial gauges are O.K.
Check that the simulation test for all the alarm, annunciation and trip circuits
have been checked and are alright. Check the stability of restricted earth fault
for out of zone fault.
Check that the insulation resistance of all the control circuits and IR value of
the transformer windings and all the incoming and outgoing cables have been
checked with 1000V megger.
Check that the setting of all the protective relays is at the desired valve and
D.C. Trip supply is available.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 23 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
c. Motor
Check motor mounting.
Check motor is rotating freely by manual effort.
Check motor cooling fan installed properly.
Check motor body is grounded at two points. Check terminal box grounding.
Check all components installed as per approved final vendor drawing.
Check motor power supply cable connected to proper level of voltage.
Check termination of motor cable at motor end as well as at MCC/ SWGR
end.
Check terminal box cover closed properly and unused entries plugged.
Check terminations at auxiliary terminal box and unused entries plugged.
Check continuity of motor cable.
Check 'Megger' value of motor and power supply cable.
Check alignment of motor with the driven equipment. To ensure no undue
force is imposed on bearings.
Check greasing of bearings at both ends.
Check endplay in bearings.
Check oil level in gearbox.
Check bimetallic relay setting at MCC module.
For breaker fed motor check all relay settings and CT polarity.
Check Local Control Station is properly wired and complete with all necessary
control and indication. Check enclosure of local control station for hazardous
atmosphere.
Check wiring of all the interlocks for proper wiring.
d. Battery and Battery charger
Check mounting or battery bank and battery charger.

Check power cable termination/glands.
Check control cable termination, interlock, wiring, loose connections.
Check earthing of battery charger panel.
Check specific gravity of electrolyte in battery bank.
Check battery voltage in charged condition.
Check rating and type of all power and control circuit fuses.
Check the `Megger’ value of power and control circuit.
Check supply voltage of battery charger.
Check operation of battery charger and load on the charger. Check all
annunciations under stimulated condition.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 24 OF 24 OF
TCE.7347A-EL
Check changeover from mains supply to battery and vice versa.

Check DC distribution board mounting, earthing.
Check feeder schedule of DC distribution board and their correct description.
Check all cable terminations/glands.
Check 'Megger' value.
Check incoming supply to DC distribution board.
Check all fuse ratings in DC distribution.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

SPEC. NO. TATA CONSULTING ENGINEERS LIMITED
TCE.7347A-EL-221
DATA SHEET - A SHEET 1 OF 4
SL. NO. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORK UNIT
1. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR FIRE SAFETY OF IS: 1646

BLDGS.
2. GUIDE FOR SAFETY PROCEDURES AND IS:5216
PRACTICES IN ELECTRICAL WORK
3. ACCESSORIES FOR RIGID STEEL IS:3837
CONDUITS
4. IS:2667
FITTINGS FOR RIGID STEEL CONDUITS
5. IS:3419
FITTINGS FOR RIGID NON-METALLIC
6. IS:4649
CONDUITS ADAPTORS FOR FLEXIBLE
STEEL CONDUITS
IS:800
7.
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR STRUCTURAL
STEEL
REV. NO. JOB NO. CLIENT:

PPD. BY TCE.
CHD. BY PROJECT: ISSUE

DATE P1
FILE NAME: F330R3.DOC TCE FORM NO. 330 R3

TCE.7347A-EL-221
1. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR ELECTRICAL IS:732

WIRING INSTALLATION
2. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR INTERIOR IS:3646

ILLUMINATION
3. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR STREET IS:1944

LIGHTING INSTALLATION
4. GUIDE FOR SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL IS:5571

EQUIPMENT FOR HAZARDOUS AREAS
5. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR INDUSTRIAL IS:6665

LIGHTING
6. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR FIRE SAFETY OF IS:1646

BLDGS.
7. BOXES FOR ENCLOSURES OF

IS:5133
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
PART-1
8. FLAME-PROOF ENCLOSURES OF
IS:2148
ELECTRICAL APPARATUS
9. GUIDE FOR SAFETY PROCEDURES AND

PRACTICES IN ELECTRICAL WORK IS:5216
10. CEILING ROSES IS:371
11. ACCESSORIES FOR RIGID STEEL IS:3837

CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING
12. FITTINGS FOR RIGID STEEL CONDUITS IS:2667
FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING
13. PVC INSULATED CABLES CABLE IS:694
VOLTAGES UPTO AND INCLUDING 1100V
14. PVC INSULATED HEAVY DUTY ELECTRIC IS:1554
CABLES

PPD. BY TCE.

DATE P1

TCE.7347A-EL-221
1. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR EARTHING IS:3043 BS:
2. PROTECTION OF BUILDING AND ALLIED IS:2309 BS:6651

STRUCTURES AGAINST LIGHTING
3. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR ELECTRICAL IS:732

INSTALLATIONS
4. HOT DIP GALVANISING ON IRON AND IS:2629 BS:729

STEEL
IS:816
5. CODES FOR WELDING
IS:3975
6. GALVANISED ROUND STEEL WIRE
IS:12444 BS:6360
7. COPPER CONDUCTORS
IS:2633
8. METHODS OF TESTING UNIFORMITY OF
COATING OF ZINC COATED ARTICLES

PPD. BY TCE.

DATE P1

TCE.7347A-EL-221
1. INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE OF IS:10028

TRANSFORMERS
IS:1866 BS:5730 IEC:422
2. CODE OF PRACTICE FOR MAINTENANCE
AND SUPERVISION OF MINERAL
INSULATING OIL IN EQUIPMENT IS:10118

SWITCHGEAR

INDUCTION MOTORS
5. GUIDE FOR SAFETY PROCEDURES AND IS:2629

PRACTICES IN ELECTRICAL WORK
IS:816
6. HOT DIP GALVANISING
IS:732
7. CODES FOR WELDING
8. ELECTRICAL WIRING INSTALLATIONS IS:1646

VOLTAGES >650V
9. FIRE SAFETY OF BUILDINGS (GENERAL) -

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IS:2551
10. DANGER PLATES IS:335
11. NEW INSULATING OILS
12. INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT 1910, (AS

AMENDED)
5.1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORK SHALL IS: BS: IEC:

CONFORM TO

PPD. BY TCE.

DATE P1

.
SHEET 1 OF 1 OF
TCE.7347A-EL- CABLE TRAY MOUNTINGS - GENERAL NOTES
222
1.1 Assembly of cable tray mounting structure shall be fabricated, supplied, erected and
painted by the electrical contractor.
1.2 Plate inserts for cable tray mounting structure in floor slabs at 1000 mm spacing.
1.3 Cable tray mounting structure shall be welded to the plate inserts or to steel structural
beams/members. Welding of cable tray mounting structure to steel structural
beams/members shall be done with prior approval of client.
1.4 Wherever embedded plates or steel structural beams/members are not available for
welding the cable tray mounting structure, contractor shall supply the M.S. plate and fix
it to floor slab by four anchor fasteners of minimum 16 mm dia. with holding power of at
least 5000 kg.
1.5 Spacing between cable tray mounting structures shall be 1000 mm for horizontal straight
run of cable trays unless otherwise noted.
1.6 Loading on a horizontal support arm shall not exceed 120kg / metre run of cable/ tray.
1.7 Width of the horizontal arms of the mounting structures shall be same as the tray widths
required in the cable layout drawings plus length required for welding to the vertical
supports ( maximum tray width will be 750 mm )
1.8 The length of the vertical supporting members for horizontal cable tray runs shall be to
suit the number of cable tray tiers indicated in the cable tray layout drawings.
1.9 Spacing between horizontal support arms of vertical cable tray runs shall be 600 mm
unless otherwise noted.
1.10 Cable trays shall be welded to tray mounting supports.
1.11 All welds for cable tray mounting steel structure shall be as indicated in cable tray
mounting arrangement drawings.
1.12 Minimum clearance between top most tray tier and structural member/ceiling shall be
300 mm.
1.13 Minimum vertical clearance below the bottom of the lowest cable tray tier & any
structural member shall be 200 mm and 300 mm in case of steam or process pipe lines.
1.14 Where any cuts or holes are made or painted surfaces are damaged or welding is done
on finished steel work, these shall be touched up with paints
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
TCE.7347A-EL- Earthing General Notes
223
GENERAL
1.1 Neutral points of systems of different voltages, metallic enclosures and frame works
associated with all current carrying equipment and extraneous metal works associated
with electric system shall be connected to a single earthing system unless stipulated
otherwise.
1.2 Earthing and lightning protection system installation shall be in strict accordance with the
latest editions of Indian Electricity Rules, relevant Indian Standards and Codes of
Practice, and Regulations existing in the locality where the system is installed.
i) Code of practice for Earthing : IS: 3043
ii) Code of practice for the protection of Buildings & : IS: 2309
Allied Structures against lightning
iii) Guide for safety in AC substation grounding : IEEE: 80
iv) Indian Electricity Rules 1956.
v) CBIP:302
vi) Guide for Generating Stations Grounding : IEEE 665
v) Mobile and fixed offshore units-Electrical installations : IEC 61892
1.3 For earthing installation work outside India, the services provided by the Contractor shall
comply with all laws, regulations and codes of practices applicable to that country.
2.0 EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT
2.1 Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried 600mm (min) below finished grade
level unless stated otherwise.
2.2 The spacing between adjacent rod/pipe electrodes shall be twice the length of the
electrode. The spacing between adjacent plate electrodes shall be 8000mm minimum.
2.3 Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum distance of
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
223
1500mm from the outer boundary of the building. In case high temperature is
encountered at some location, the earthing conductor shall be laid minimum 1500mm
away from such location.
2.4 Earthing conductors embedded in the concrete floor of the building shall have at least
50mm concrete cover.
2.5 Earthing conductors along their run on columns, walls, etc. shall be fixed by suitable
welding or cleating at intervals of 1000mm and 750mm respectively.
2.6 Tap connections from the floor earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed
shall be terminated on the earthing terminals of the equipment, if the equipment is
available at the time of laying the grid. Otherwise, “earth insert” with temporary wooden
cover or “earth riser” or “earthing pads” shall be provided near the equipment
foundation/pedestal for future connections to the equipment earthing terminals.
2.7 In outdoor areas, buried conductors shall be brought 500 mm above ground level for
making tap connections to equipment (above ground level).
2.8 Earthing conductors crossing the road shall be either installed in Hume pipes or laid at
greater depth to suit the site conditions.
2.9 Wherever earthing conductor cross underground service ducts, pipes, trenches, tunnels,
railway tracks, etc., it shall be laid in Hume pipes at minimum 300 mm below them. The
earthing conductor shall be re-routed in case it fouls with equipment foundations.
2.10 Wherever earthing conductor passes through walls, floors, etc. galvanized conduit /
HDPE pipe sleeves shall be provided for the passage of the conductor. Both ends of the
sleeve shall be sealed to prevent the passage of water through the sleeves. The seals,
in addition, shall be fire proof.
2.11 Water stops shall be provided wherever earthing conductor enters the building from
outside, below grade level.
2.12 Separate / isolated earthing system, if required, shall be provided for instrumentation
and control systems in the plant, including dedicated earth pits.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
223
3.0 EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE EARTHING
3.1 The connection between earthing pads/terminals and the earthing grids shall be made
by short and direct earthing leads free from kinks and splices.
3.2 Steel/RCC columns, metallic stairs, hand-rails, etc. of the building housing electrical
equipment shall be connected to the nearest earthing grid conductor by at least one
earthing lead. Electrical continuity shall be ensured by bonding the different sections of
hand rails and metallic stairs.
3.3 Electrical conduits, pipes and cable tray sections shall be bonded to ensure electrical
continuity and connected to earthing conductors at regular intervals. Apart from
intermediate connections, end and beginning points shall also be connected to earthing
system. These details are covered separately under cabling installation notes and
details, which shall apply.
3.4 Steel/RCC columns, metallic stairs, handrails, cable trays, metallic conduits and pipes
shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.
3.5 A separate earthing conductor shall be provided for earthing lighting fixtures,
receptacles, switches, junction boxes, lighting conduits, poles, etc. This conductor in
turn shall be connected to the main earth.
3.6 Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs at less than 300 mm distance along
metallic structures such as gas, water and steam, conduits/pipes, etc., and steel
reinforcement in concrete, it shall be bonded to the same. In case earthing connection
to pipe line, conduit etc. at a distance higher than 300 mm is required, the same will be
marked on the drawing.
3.7 Miscellaneous items such as junction boxes,fence, field switches, cable end
boxes/glands, fittings and fixtures shall be earthed whether specifically shown or not.
3.8 In general, minimum two (2) earth leads shall be used for earthing each
equipment/structure enclosing the power conductor operating at more than 250 Volts
and one (1) earth lead if voltage level is 250V or less.
3.9 Steel pipe racks in the process units and off-site areas should be earthed at every 25M
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
223
and at min. 2 points.
3.10 The enclosures of generator, exciter and turbine shall be earthed by two leads each.
Generator circuit breaker enclosure shall not be earthed as it forms part of the Isolated
Phase Busduct, which shall be earthed only at generator end.
3.11 Neutral grounding resistor body should not be earthed.
4.0 JOINTING
4.1 Earthing connections to equipment earthing pads/terminals shall be bolted type with GI
bolts and nuts. Contact surfaces shall be free from scale, paint, enamel, grease, rust or
dirt. Two bolts (min.) shall be provided for making each connection. Equipment bolted
connections, after being checked and tested, shall be painted with anti-corrosive
paint/compound.
4.2 Connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and
between main earthing conductors shall be welded/brazed type. For rust protection, the
welds should be treated with red lead and afterwards thickly coated with bitumen
compound to prevent corrosion.
4.3 Steel to copper and copper to copper connections shall be brazed type. Welding shall
be adopted in case of steel. Welding shall be done as per IS 816.
4.4 The jointing, whether bolted, welded or brazed shall be such that the resistance of the
joint is not more than the resistance of the equivalent length of the conductor.
4.5 Welding/brazing surfaces shall be cleaned and made free of all oxide films, grease, oil or
any foreign material. However, the jointing surfaces should not be made too
smooth/highly polished, to prevent the jointing metal from flowing away.
4.6 The items to be welded/brazed shall not be clamped/tied tightly, (at the same time
clearance should not be excessive), to allow the flux/alloy to run freely through the joint
and alloy itself with the surfaces to be joined together.
4.7 All brazing shall be done by oxy-acetylene torch flame.
4.8 All welded connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints shall be
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
223
allowed to cool down gradually to atmospheric temperature before putting any load on it.
Artificial cooling shall not be allowed.
4.9 Bending of large diameter rod/thick conductors shall be done preferably by gas heating.
4.10 All arc welding with large diameter conductors shall be done with low hydrogen content
electrodes.
4.11 For brazing, alloys of silicon bronze/phosphor or copper/phosphor-silver-copper shall be

used.
4.12 Conductor joints of GI flats shall be done by electric arc welding with resistance of the
joint not more than that of the conductor. For rust protection, the welds shall be treated
with zinc chromate primer and and coated with zinc rich paint.
5.0 CABLE EARTHING
5.1 Shields
The shields or armour of three core power cables shall be earthed at both ends whereas
the same for single core cables will be done at supply end only.
5.2 Three Core Cables - The shields of solid type cables are earthed at terminations provided
cable sheaths are bonded at joints.
5.3 Single core cables - The sheaths of single core cables shall be earthed at the
trifurcating box. In case of single core mains, earthing shall be done at the end of trefoil
formation and the cable glands at sealing ends.
6.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EARTHING SYSTEM
6.1 Two separate earthing leads shall be provided for each of the Transformer(indoor and
outdoor) / Generator neutrals. Each of the earthing leads shall be directly connected to
a separate rod/pipe electrode treated earth pit which in turn, shall be connected to two
different runs of the main earthing grid.
6.2 Earthing leads from the body,marshalling box etc shall be connected to the main
earthing grid.
6.3 Earthing terminal of each lightning arrestor, coupling capacitor and lightning down
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
223
conductors shall be directly connected to rod/pipe electrodes which, in turn, shall be

connected to main earthing grid.
6.4 Earthing mat comprising of closely spaced (150 mm approximately) conductors shall be
provided below the operating handles of H.V. isolator and breaker operating kiosk.
Operating handles shall be properly bonded to the supports with flexible conductors and
connected to the above mat. The local earth mat in turn shall be connected to main
earthing grid.
6.5 Flexible earthing leads shall be provided for earthing the equipment on moving
platforms. Flexible earthing leads shall be provided for earthing the stationary
equipment as well using stranded GI/copper/aluminium in case of difficulty in achieving
good contact with GI wires/flats at equipment end.
6.6 Earth connections using stranded copper/aluminium conductor shall be provided with
lugs (crimped type).
6.7 In all plants, system neutrals (transformers, generators, neutral grounding transformer /
resistor and outdoor substation LAs) shall be earthed through treated earth pits only.
6.8 The shield wires earthing, PT/CVT earth points inside the switchyard and lightning
protection down comers of the buildings shall be connected to the individual driven
untreated earth electrode.
6.9 Test pits between grids of different areas shall be treated earth pits.
6.10 Additional earth electrodes used in small plants when buried grid does not provide
required earth grid resistance, shall be treated earth pits.
7.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
7.1 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the conductors
of the safety earthing system above ground level.
7.2 Down conductors shall be cleated on outer side of the building wall at 750 mm interval or
welded to outside building columns at 1000 mm interval.
7.3 Connection between each down conductor and rod/pipe electrode shall be made via test
link located approximately 1000 mm above ground level.
7.4 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
223
7.5 All metallic structures within a vicinity of 2000 mm in air shall be bonded to the
conductors of lightning protection system.
7.8 Lightning conductor on concrete roof will not be directly cleated on surface of the roof.
Concrete upstands shall be used for conductor fixing at an interval of 1500 mm.
7.9 Joint in the down conductors if unavoidable shall be of welded type. However number of
joints in the lightning conductor shall be kept minimum
7.10 Down conductor shall follow a straight path to earth. There shall not be any sharp bends,
turns and kinks in the down conductors.
7.11 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic
service ducts, cables, conduits, and metal enclosure of electrical equipment. However all
metal projections, railings, vents, tanks etc. above the roof shall be bonded together to
form a part of roof grid.
8.0 ALTERNATE PRACTICES OF CONNECTIONS - THERMOWELD

CONNECTIONS AND CLAMPS
8.1 Wherever thermoweld type of connections/joints are specified, the thermoweld

connections shall be made using high temperature reaction of powdered copper oxide
and aluminium which is a self contained method of forming high quality electrical
connections without external power or heat source.
8.2 Wherever exothermic welding is not appropriate, where periodic disconnection for
testing is a required, mechanical clamp and compression connectors shall be used.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 1 OF 6 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
LIGHTING INSTALLATION NOTES
224
GENERAL
1. Electrical installation work shall comply with all currently applicable standards, statutes,
regulations and safety codes in the locality where the installation is to be carried out.
2. Lighting panels, distribution boards, fixtures, fans, switches, receptacles, Lighting poles
etc. shall be located as per the Client approved layout drawings. Any changes, if
necessary, after obtaining prior approval of the client, shall be carried out at site by the
CONTRACTOR and shall be clearly marked by him on the drawings and forwarded to
client for finalisation.
3. The required conduits for lighting wiring shall be suitably routed at site by the
CONTRACTOR with due considerations to a neat layout and ease of maintenance.
4. Except as specifically approved by the site office, installation of exposed conduits,

mounting of lighting fixtures etc. shall be taken up only after all other services such as
piping, air ducting, cable tray/bus duct hangers, structural bracings etc. in a particular
area have been installed.
5. In case of concealed wiring system the CONTRACTOR shall submit the routing
drawings showing the locations of the embedded conduits/junction boxes/inspection
boxes for final record and reference.
6. Lighting panels, light control switches and receptacles shall be installed at the following
mounting heights from finished floor/ground levels
a) Lighting panels - 1200 mm to bottom of the panel.
b) Light control switches - 1200 mm.
c) Receptacle units - 500 mm for indoor and 1000 mm for outdoor
LIGHTING PANELS/LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
1. All lighting panels located indoor/outdoor shall be installed by the CONTRACTOR on

walls/columns by fastening to suitably grouted studs of not less than 12 mm diameter. If
the floor mounted lighting distribution boards are in the CONTRACTOR’s scope of
supply these shall also be installed by him.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
1. Lighting fixtures of appropriate types as per approved drawings shall be installed by the
CONTRACTOR as per the approved drawing
2. In case of installation of a recessed mounting lighting fixture , the false ceiling has to be
marked as per the lighting fitting and the marked portion has to be cut in order to
accommodate the lighting fixture. The lighting fixture shall be suspended till the required
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 2 OF 6 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
224
height (Till the grove created for the lighting fixture) by using two steel wires which are
anchored and fastened to the ceiling .
3. Lighting fixtures installed on/under platforms/pedestals which are subject to vibrations

(such as TG pedestal) shall be provided with rubber cushions to minimise vibrations
reaching the fixtures.
4. Suspensions in the form of conduits/chains/steel structural members etc., clamps for

installation of fixtures above false ceiling, fixing brackets or similar items required for
mounting of fixtures as per typical drawings shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR.
Shades or reflectors of light points shall not be in contact with structural members, pipe
work etc.
5. Fixtures shall not be suspended/attached with the help of supports/embedments

provided for other services unless permission is obtained from the Client.
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
1. For accommodating switch boxes and receptacles wall chipping shall be done , as per
the approved layout drawings.
2. Switches/receptacles which are to be wired on the same phase and to be located close
by each other shall be accommodated/housed in the same box.
3. Switches/receptacles wired on different phases shall be separated by a minimum

distance of 1.8 m wherever possible. if not possible switches and receptacles shall be
mounted on separate boxes which can be placed side by side.
CONDUITS AND JUNCTION BOXES
1. Minimum size of rigid conduits used for wiring shall be 20 mm diameter in case of
exposed systems and 25 mm diameter in case of concealed/ embedded systems. The
conduits shall be supported by means of saddles as follows :
Rigid Metallic Conduits Spacing between saddles not to

exceed 1 m. In addition saddles shall
be located on either ends of
couplers/bends or similar fittings/
accessories. In such cases the
saddles shall be located at a
distance not exceeding 300 mm from
the fitting/ accessory.
Rigid Non-metallic Conduits Spacing between saddles not to
exceed 750 mm. Additionally
saddles shall be provided as stated
in (a) above.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 3 OF 6 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
224
2. Separate conduits shall be used for wiring lighting circuits of different lighting distribution
systems such as normal AC/DC emergency etc. Also wires for lighting and power
receptacles will be run in separate conduits.
3. Wires belonging to different phases shall not be run in the same conduit. However, more
than one circuit, consisting of phase and neutral wires, of the same phase can be run in
the same conduit. For every phase wire a separate neutral wire shall be run.
4. When conduits enter from non-air-conditioned area into air conditioned area or from
pressurised rooms into non-pressurised ones, a junction box of adequate size shall be
installed to break the continuity of such conduits and the conduit openings in the boxes
shall be sealed.
5. Conduit junction boxes shall be provided for every section of conduit, at every tap off, at
every bend where bending the conduits is not possible.
6. Suitable pipe/conduit sleeves shall be used when wires are passed through walls/floors
and the open ends of such sleeves shall be sealed.
7. The internal area of conduit shall be 2.5 times the total area of cables to be pulled
through it. A table is given herewith as a guideline.
Nominal Maximum No. of 1100 V Grade, Single core PVC

size of Insulated Flexible Wires
conduit mm 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2
20 5 3 2 -
25 8 6 5 3
32 - - 8 5
40 - - - 6
8. All necessary bends in the system including diversions shall be done by bending the
conduit or by inserting suitable solid/inspection type bends/ elbows etc. or by fixing GI
inspection boxes.
9. Non-metallic conduits shall be used only if specifically approved by the client. Heat shall
be used to soften non metallic conduits for bending and to form joints. Caution shall be
excercised in the use of such conduits in locations where the ambient temperature is
around 50°C. Expansion joints shall be provided where required to compensate for
thermal expansion and contraction. In locations where ambient temperature is 60°C or
above and in outdoor installations exposed to sunlight these conduits shall not be used.
10. In order to minimize condensation or sweating inside the tube, all outlets of conduit
system shall be properly drained and ventilated, but in such a manner as to prevent the
entry of insects as far as possible.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 4 OF 6 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
224
WIRING/CABLING
1. Unless otherwise stated, the mode of wiring will be as follows :
a) 1100 V grade PVC insulated flexible single core wires used for indoor lighting
wiring shall be laid in rigid steel conduits.
b) Wiring for buildings classified as hazardous, buildings where chemically corrosive

atmosphere prevails and for outdoor, lighting installation will be carried out with
1100 V PVC insulated, armoured, PVC overall sheathed cables. Armoured
cables shall be cleated at not more than 500 mm intervals. If unarmoured cables
are used in hazardous areas, they shall be laid in screwed, rigid, heavy gauge,
galvanised conduits.
c) Outdoor lighting cables shall be directly buried in ground at a minimum depth of

600 mm or routed in the available cable trenches/Cables crossing road/rail shall
be laid in hume or steel pipes.
2. Where span of more than 1 m occurs between beams and supports, suitable size
galvanised steel sections shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for attachment of
conduits or cabling or fittings.
3. Conductors used for all wiring shall be multi strand and shall be terminated with crimped
terminal lugs.
4. Wherever looping back system of wiring is used, the wiring shall be done without any
junction or connector boxes on the line. Where joint box system is used, all joints in
conductors shall be made by means of approved mechanical connectors in suitable and
approved joint boxes. No bars or twist joints shall be made at intermediate points in the
through run of cables.
5. In hazardous areas, cable terminations in joint/junction boxes or cable glands shall be of

flameproof design. Unused cable entries of fixtures and accessories shall be plugged off
by flame-proof stoppers.
6. Size of wire shall be chosen to limit voltage drop to within 5%. Minimum area of
conductor shall be 2.5 sq.mm copper or 4 sq.mm aluminium, for lighting fixtures and 4
sq.mm. copper or 6 sq.mm aluminium for receptacles unless otherwise stated.
Generally not more than 8 to 10 points shall be wired in one circuit. For the purpose of
calculating connected loads of various circuits a multiplying factor of 1.25 will be
assumed to the rated lamp wattage for mercury vapour, sodium vapour, metal halide
and fluorescent lamp fixtures to take into account losses in the control gear. A loading of
100 watts and 500 watts will be assumed for single-phase 6 Amp and 16 Amps
receptacles respectively.
ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

.
SHEET 5 OF 6 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-
224
CEILING FANS
1. Unless otherwise specified, all ceiling fans shall be installed not less than 2.75 m above
the floor level.
EARTHING
1. Lighting fixtures & receptacles shall be properly earthed using copper wire of green
colour of 2.5 / 4 sq.mm/circuit OR 12 SWG GI wire run along the entire length of the
conduit between fixture & corresponding lighting panel where it will be connected to the
station earth. Switches, conduits and junction boxes shall be properly earthed using 12
SWG GI wire (unless otherwise specified) run along the entire length of the conduit
between the fixture and the corresponding lighting panel where it will be connected to
the station earth.
2. In case wiring is carried out in PVC conduits, a separate copper wire shall run in the
PVC conduit for earthing of fixtures, JBs, switchboards etc. This shall be connected to
the earth bus in lighting panel which in turn shall be connected to the station earth grid.
3. The earth wire for each conduit length shall be efficiently fastened to the conduit at
regular intervals of not more than 750 mm.
4. For fixtures in hazardous areas, the third core of each single-phase armoured cable
circuit shall be used as earthing conductor.
5. For outdoor earthing of lighting poles and junction boxes on the poles, two (2) nos. 25 x
3 mm GS flat shall be tapped off from 25 x 3 mm MS flat burried in ground at a depth of
600 mm. The earth conductor shall be connected to the nearby main earthing grid at the
first and last poles of each feeder circuit and at some intermediate poles. In case of
lighting poles where the main earth grid is far away from the pole, local earth pits shall
be provided for pole earthing.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1. Before a completed installation or an extension to an existing installation is put into

service it shall be tested as per the relevant standards/codes of practices of the country
where the installation is carried out. In India installation shall be tested in accordance
with IS-732. The following tests shall be specifically carried out for all lighting
installations :
a) Insulation resistance
b) Testing of earth continuity path
c) Testing of polarity of single pole switches.
2. Lighting circuits shall be tested in the following manner :

ISSUE
R0
TCE FORM 329 R5

TCE.7347A-EL-225 DATA SHEETS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SHEET 1 OF 135
TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

DATASHEET-A (HT SWITCHGEAR)
Sl.No. DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL PARAMETER
1.0 SWITCHGEAR DESIGNATION 33kV & 11kV SWITCHGEAR

1.1 NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE,PHASES & 33kV & 11kV ,3 PH & 50 Hz
FREQUENCY
1.2 SYSTEM NEUTRAL EARTHING 33kV-SOLIDLY,11kV-
RESISTIVELY EARTHED
1.0 SWITCHGEAR RATINGS
1.3 MAXIMUM SYSTEM VOLTAGE 36kV & 12kV

1.4 POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND VOLTAGE 70kV (rms) & 28 kV (rms), 1min
1.5 1.2/50 µ SEC. IMPULSE WITHSTAND VOLTAGE 170kV(peak) & 75 kV (peak)
1.6 SHORT CIRCUIT WITHSTAND
a) SHORT TIME AT RATED VOLTAGE AS PER SCOPE/DESIGN
b) DYNAMIC RATING DOCUMENT
1.7 REFERENCE SITE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 500C

1.8 CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATING OF BUS BARS
UNDER REFERENCE SITE AMBIENT TEMP. AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
1.9 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE OF BUS BARS AND 90 DEG FOR BUSBARS HAVING
DROPPERS/CONNECTORS UNDER CONDITIONS NON-SILVER PLATED JOINTS &
SPECIFIED – SR. NOS. 1.7 and 1.8 ABOVE 105 DEG FOR SILVER PLATED
JOINTS
1.10 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS PER DATA SHEET
2.0 SWITCHGEAR RATINGS
SR. DESIGNATI BUS BARS CABLE ENTRY TOTAL NO. OF REMARKS

NO. ON CUBICLES PER (DIMENSION-
SWITCHGEAR AL LIMITS IF
ANY)
AMPS TOP BOTT
2.1 AS PER THE REQUIREMENT O
M
3.1 CLEARANCE IN AIR PHA 33kV- 33kV-

SE 350mm 320mm
TO
11kV- 11kV-
PHA
SE & 280mm 140mm
PHA
SE
TO
EAR
TH
3.2 BUS BAR INSULATION FLAME RETARDANT HEAT
4.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS3.0 SWITCHGEAR CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
SHRINKABLE PVC SLEEVE

3.3 DEGREE OF PROTECTION COMPARTMENTS –IP 2X
ENCLOSURE – IP 4X
3.4 BUS DUCT CONNECTION NOT REQUIRED
3.5 EARTHING BUS MATERICOPPER
A
L
SIZE 50 x 6 sq mm
3.6 COLOUR FINISHED SHADE INTERIORAL 7032 POWDER COATING
R
&
EXTERI
O
R
4.1 1.0 BREAKER PARTICULARS
4.1.1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS PER DATA

4.1.2 CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE VCB
4.1.3 VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY, 33kV & 11kV ,3 PH
& NO.OF PHASES & 50 Hz
4.1.4 RATED OPERATING DUTY O 3 MIN CO 3 MIN CO
4.1.5 RATED CURRENT AT REFERENCE SITE AS PER THE REQUIREMENT

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
4.1.6 RATED BREAKING CURRENT AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
4.1.7 RATED MAKING CURRENT AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
4.1.8 SHORT TIME CURRENT WITHSTAND AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
4.1.9 ASYMMETRICAL BREAKING CURRENT A.C. As per IEC-56
CO
MP
ONE
NT
D.C. As per IEC-56
COM
PONE
NT
4.1.10 TOTAL OPENING TIME CYC < 3 cycles
LES
/
mS
EC
4.1.11 TOTAL CLOSING TIME CYC < 5 cycles
LES
/
mS
EC
4.1.12 OPERATING MECHANISM, TYPE MOTOR SPRING CHARGED,
4.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS (COND.)
MANUAL TRIP &

CLOSE FACILITY
ALSO TO BE
PROVIDED
4.1.13 MINIMUM NO. OF AUXILIARY CONTACTS 6 NCs. 6 NOs. FOR CLIENT
USE
4.1.14 POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND ONE 70kV (rms) & 28 kV (rms)
TEST VOLTAGE
MINUTE
4.1.15 AUXILIARY CONTROL VOLTAGE
a) FOR CLOSING/TRIPPING COIL DC 110 VOLTS
b) FOR SPRING CHARGING MOTORS AC 110 VOLTS
c) FOR SPACE HEATERS & LIGHTING AC 240

1 VOLTS
P
H
4.1.16 BREAKER APPLICATION
a) TRANSFORMER CONTROL/ YES

INCOMER/TIE
5.1 APPLICABLE STANDARD(S) AS PER
DATA SHEET
5.2 TYPE CAST RESIN (COMPLETELY
5.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
ENCAPSULATED)
5.3 SYSTEM VOLTAGE & FREQUENCY 33kV & 11kV ,3 PH
& 50 Hz
5.4 CLASS OF INSULATION CLASS-B OR BETTER
5.5 RATED PRIMARY CURRENT & RATIO AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
5.6 ACCURACY CLASS & BURDEN METERI
AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
N
G
PROTN.
5.7 SHORT TIME CURRENT RATING & - AS PER SCOPE/DESIGN
DYNAMIC RATING DOCUMENT
TRANSFORMERS
6.1 APPLICABLE STANDARD (S) AS PER DATA SHEET

6.0 VOLTAGE
6.2 TYPE CAST RESIN

(COMPLETELY
ENCAPSULATED)
6.3 RATED VOLTAGE PRIMARY P1 33kV/ 3 Volts &
11kV/ 3 Volts
SECONDARY S1 110/ 3 Volts

6.4 METHOD OF CONNECTION PRIMARY V STAR
SECONDARY S1 STAR
SECONDARY S2 STAR
6.5 RATED VOLTAGE FACTOR 1.2 (Continuous)
1.9 FOR 8 HOURS
6.6 CLASS OF INSULATION CLASS – B OR
BETTER
6.7 POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND ONE MIN. 70kV (rms) & 28 kV
TEST VOLTAGE (rms)
6.8 IMPULSE WITHSTAND VOLTAGE 1.2/50 S 170kV(peak) & 75 kV

(peak)
8. METERS 7.0 HV. FUSES
DATA SHEET
7.2 RATED CURRENT A 3A
7.3 VOLTAGE CLASS kV 33kV &11kV
8.1 ACCURACY CLASS AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
8.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS PER DATA

SHEET
9.1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS PER DATA
SHEET
9.0 RELAYS
9.2 TYPE : PROTECTION RELAYS NUMERICAL RELAYS

AUXILIARY RELAYS - ELECTROMECHANICAL
/STATIC TYPE
9.3 OTHER SPECIFICATION
DATASHEET B-HT SWITCHGEAR

SR.NO. ITEM UNIT BIDDER
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 MANUFACTURER’S NAME
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARD (S)
1.3 TYPE OF CIRCUIT BREAKER  VACUUM
1.4 NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE kV
1.5 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE kV
1.6 POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND (ONE MINUTE) kV

VOLTAGE
1.7 A) SHORT CIRCUIT WITHSTAND kV (rms)
B) MOMENTARY WITHSTAND kV (peak)
1.8 IMPULSE 1.2/50 SEC kV (peak)

WITHSTAND VOLTAGE
1.9 TYPE TEST REPORT  ENCLOSED

 NOT ENCLOSED
2.0 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION  YES  NO, DEVIATIONS

ATTACHED
3.1 DIMENSIONS
a) SWITCHGEAR CUBICLE Lx Wx
Dmm
b) ADAPTER PANEL Lx Wx
Dmm
c) OVERALL BASED ON (a) & (b) Lx Wx
Dmm
3.2 MINIMUM CLEAR. REQUIRED Mm Front : mm, Rear :

mm
3.3.1 CUBICLE WEIGHT WITH CIRCUIT BREAKER Kg.
3.3.2 TOTAL SWITCHGEAR WEIGHT Kg.
3.4 DYNAMIC LOADING PER CUBICLE Kg.
3.5 PAINTING SPECIFICATION  ENAMEL  EPOXY

 POWDER COATED
4.0 BUSBARS
4.1 MATERIAL  AL-ALLOY COPPER
4.2 APPLICABLE STANDARD
4.3 BUSBAR INSULATION
4.4 STANDARD TO WHICH THE BUSBAR

ARRANGEMENT CONFORMS
4.5 MINIMUM CLEARANCE :
A) PHASE TO PHASE Mm
B) PHASE TO EARTH Mm
5.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS COMPLIANCE WITH SPEC.

 YES
 NO, DEVIATIONS
ATTACHED
5.1 FEEDER RATINGS Amps AS PER SPEC.  YES
 NO , DETAILS
ATTACHED
5.2 SWITCHING OVERVOLTAGE
a) SWITCHING OFF MOTOR RUNNING AT NO P.U./ms

LOAD
b) SWITCHING OFF MOTOR WITH ITS ROTOR -----DO-----
LOCKED
c) SWITCHING OFF MOTOR RUNNING AT FULL -----DO-----
LOAD
d) SWITCHING OFF UNLOADED TRANSFORMER -----DO----- Amps
5.2.1 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CHOPPING CURRENT
5.3 EXTERNAL SWITCHING OVERVOLTAGE LIMITING  YES 

DEVICES REQUIRED NO
5.3.1 DETAILS OF VOLTAGE LIMITING DEVICE :
a) TYPE
b) RATED VOLTAGE Volts
c) CONTINUOUS WITHSTAND VOLTAGE BETWEEN Volts

LINE AND EARTH
d) RESIDUAL VOLTAGE AT DISCHARGE
CURRENT OF
- 100 A Volts
- 500 A Volts
- 1000 A Volts
5.4 MAIN CONTACTS :
a) TYPE
b) MATERIAL
c) SILVER FACING PROCESS –

d) THICKNESS OF THE FACING MICRON
e) DESIGN CONTACT PRESSURE KG./Sq.cm.
5.5 ARCING CONTACTS :
A) TYPE –
B) MATERIAL –
C) SILVER FACING PROVIDED –
D) THICKNESS OF THE FACING Microns
E) DESIGN CONTACT PRESSURE Kg./Sq.Cm.
5.6 TRIP COIL CONSUMPTION AT RATED VOLTAGE Watts
5.7 SATISFACTORY OPERATION OF CLOSING BETWEEN –  YES  NO

85% - 110% OF RATED CONTROL VOLTAGE
5.8 VACUUM BREAKERS
a) PRESSURE INSIDE THE INTERRUPTER mm.Hg.
b) CONTACT WEAR INDICATION PROVIDED –  YES  NO, REASON

GIVEN
c) MECHANICAL FACILITY FOR CHECKING LOSS –  YES  NO, REASON
OF VACUUM PROVIDED GIVEN
d) VACUUM MONITORING RELAY PROVIDED –  YES  NO, REASON
GIVEN
e) ADEQUATE SHIELDING AGAINST X-RAY –  YES  NO, REASON
RADIATIONS PROVIDED GIVEN
5.9  ENCLOSED
TYPE TEST REPORT
 NOT ENCLOSED
SHEET 10 OF
TCE.7347A-EL-225 DATA SHEETS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 135
6.1 TYPE OF CLOSING MECHANISM
6.2 SPRING CHARGING MECHANISM
a) SPRING CHARGING MOTOR :
i) RATED VOLTAGE Volts
ii) RATING Watts
iii) SPEED RPM
iv) CLASS OF INSULATION –
v) SATISFACTORY OPERATION OF SPRING –  YES  NO,

CHARGING MOTOR BETWEEN 85% - 110% DEVIATION
OF RATED VOLTAGE GIVEN
vi) TIME REQUIRED TO CHARGE THE SPRING SEC.
FROM FULLY DISCHARGED CONDITION
vii) OVERLOAD AND SHORT CIRCUIT
PROTECTION PARTICULARS
IS PROVISION MADE FOR IMMEDIATE CHARGING –  YES  NO,REASON
b)
OF CLOSING SPRING AFTER A CLOSURE GIVEN
ADEQUATE SPRING RESERVE FOR ONE O-C-O –  YES  NO, REASON
c)
OPERATION WITHOUT INTENTIONAL TIME DELAY GIVEN
MECHANICAL INDICATION FOR SPRING –  YES  NO, REASON
d) CHARGED CONDITION PROVIDED GIVEN
WHETHER SLOW CLOSING/OPENING IS FEASIBLE –  YES  NO, REASON
e)
FOR MAINTENANCE TESTING GIVEN
6.3 METHOD OF CLOSING DURING POWER SUPPLY –
FAILURE
7.0 VACUUM CONTACTORS NOT APPLICABLE
7.1 MAKERS NAME AND COUNTRY OF –

MANUFACTURE
SHEET 11 OF
7.2 MANUFACTURER’S TYPE DESIGNATION –
7.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS –
7.4 TYPE TEST REPORT –  ENCLOSED

 NOT ENCLOSED
7.5 CLEARANCES –
a) BETWEEN PHASES mm
b) BETWEEN LIVE PARTS AND EARTH mm
c) CENTRE TO CENTRE DISTANCE mm

BETWEEN PHASES
7.6 WHETHER THE VACUUM CONTACTOR IS  YES
MECHANICALLY LATCHED OR ELECTRICALLY HELD  NO, REASONS ATTACHED
7.7 a) TYPE OF OPERATING MECHANISM
b) POWER FOR OPERATING STATION Battery or

MECHANISM control
transformer
7.8 METHOD OF CLOSING –
a) NORMAL VOLTAGE OF COIL Volts
b) POWER FOR CLOSING MECHANISM Watts
7.9 NUMBER OF OPERATIONS THE VACUUM CONTACTORNos.

IS CAPABLE OF PERFORMING WITHOUT INSPECTION
7.10 Per unit
SWITCHING OVER VOLTAGES
BY THE VACUUM CONTACTOR
peak line to
earth
FAILURE
7.12 WHETHER INSTRUCTION MANUAL IS YES / NO
ENCLOSED
SHEET 12 OF

8.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS –
8.1 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS - METERING AND – COMPLIANCE WITH

PROTECTION SPECIFICATION &
PROJECT DWGS
 YES  NO, DEVIATIONS
ATTACHED
8.1.1 MAKE –
8.1.2 TYPE (BAR / WOUND / ANY OTHER) –
8.1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARD –
8.1.4 CLASS OF INSULATION –
8.1.5 CORE BALANCE CTs. (FOR EACH CT)
a) RATIO –
b) RATED VA BURDEN VA
c) ACCURACY CLASS  CL, PS
d) MINIMUM KNEE-POINT VOLTAGE Volts
e) MAXIMUM MAGNETISATION CURRENT AT Ma

PROPOSED SETTING
f) CT SECONDARY RESISTANCE Ohms
g) MAGNETISATION CHARACTERISTIC –  YES  NO

CURVE ATTACHED
h) DIMENSIONED DRAWING ATTACHED YES / NO
i) APPLICABLE STANDARD
8.1.6 TYPE TEST REPORT FOR ALL CT DESIGNS –  ENCLOSED

 NOT ENCLOSED
SHEET 13 OF

COMPLIANCE WITH
8.2 –
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SPEC.
PROJECT DWGS
 YES  NO,
DEVIATIONS
ATTACHED
8.2.1 MAKE –
8.2.2 TYPE –
8.2.4 TYPE OF INSULATION –

 NOT ENCLOSED
COMPLIANCE WITH
9.0 INDICATING METERS –
SPEC. /DWGS
 YES  NO,
DEVIATIONS ATTACHED
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 MAKE –
9.1.3 TYPE OF MOVEMENT –
9.1.4 SIZE – X mm
9.1.5 SCALE SIZE (IN DEGREES) –
9.1.6 MOUNTING, FLUSH TYPE OTHER –
9.1.7 ACCURACY –
9.1.8 RANGE AS PER SPECIFICATION –  YES  NO,

DEVIATIONS ATTACHED
SHEET 14 OF
9.1.9 VA BURDEN FOR EACH TYPE –
9.2 –
KILO WATT HOUR METER
9.2.1 MAKE –
9.2.2 TYPE –
9.2.3 STANDARD TO WHICH IT CONFORMS –
9.2.4 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS –
9.2.5 VOLTAGE COIL RATING Volts
9.2.6 CURRENT RATING Amps.
9.2.7 VA BURDEN VA
9.2.8 ACCURACY –
9.2.9 RANGE AS PER SPECIFICATION –  YES  NO, DEVIATION

ATTACHED
9.2.10 DRAW OUT / NON – DRAWOUT TYPE –
9.2.11 MOUNTING, FLUSH TYPE /OTHER –
9.2.12 TEST PLUG/TEST BLOCKS TESTING TERMINALS WITH –  ELECTROMECHANICAL

LINKS  SOLID STATE  P
BASE
10.0 PROTECTION RELAYS – MAKE TYPE
10.1 INVERSE TIME OVER-CURRENT RELAY –
10.2 INSTANTANEOUS OVER-CURRENT RELAY –
10.3 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION RELAY –
10.4 LOCKED ROTOR PROTECTION RELAY –

SHEET 15 OF
10.5 THERMAL OVERLOAD ALARM RELAY –
10.6 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE OPERATED RELAY –
10.7 EARTH LEAKAGE RELAY FOR USE WITH CORE –

BALANCE CT
10.8 EARTH FAULT RELAY FOR USE IN THE
RESIDUAL CIRCUIT OF MAIN CTS.
10.9 DIFFERENTIAL RELAY (HIGH STABILITY
CIRCULATING CURRENT TYPE)
10.10 DIFFERENTIAL RELAY FOR USE WITH
THROUGH-TYPE CTS.
10.11 VOLTAGE OPERATED EARTH FAULT RELAY
(NEUTRAL DISPLACEMENT RELAY)
10.12 CABLE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
10.13 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY
10.14 BUS BAR PROTECTION RELAY
10.15 TRANSFOREMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
11.0 TERMINATION / WIRING – COMPLIANCE WITH SPEC.

ATTACHED
11.1 COLOUR CODING FOR WIRES FOR : –
a) D.C. CONTROL CIRCUITS –
b) A.C. AUXILIARY POWER CIRCUIT LIKE PANEL –

SPACE HEATER, PANEL ILLUMINATION ETC.
c) A.C. METERING CIRCUIT –
d) EARTHING –
11.2 NUMBERED FERRULES AT BOTH ENDS –  YES  NO, REASON

SHEET 16 OF

GIVEN
11.3 INSULATED SLEEVES PROVIDED AT WIRE –  YES  NO, REASON

TERMINATIONS GIVEN
11.4 TERMINALS :
a) MAKE –
b) CURRENT RATING Amps
c) CLAMP TYPE / BOLT TYPE –
d) MOULDED INTER-TERMINAL BARRIERS –  YES 

PROVIDED NO
e) MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZE AND NUMBER sq.mm
OF CONDUCTORS WHICH IT CAN RECEIVE
f) DISCONNECTING TYPE FOR CT CIRCUITS –  YES  NO
g) TERMINAL MARKING FACILITY PROVIDED –  YES  NO
h) CRIMP TYPE CONNECTORS PROVIDED AT THE –  YES  NO

TERMINALS
i) 20% SPARE TERMINAL PROVIDED –  YES  NO
11.5 TYPE TEST REPORT FOR WIRING MATERIALS –  ENCLOSED

 NOT ENCLOSED
12.0 –
CABLE BOXES / POTHEADS
12.1 INCLUDED IN SCOPE OF SUPPLY –
12.2 RATED VOLTAGE kV
12.3 APPLICABLE STANDARD –
12.4 COMPOUND FILLED/EPOXY –

RESIN / SHRINKABLE TYPE
SHEET 17 OF
12. 5 ALL FURNISHING MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES –  YES  NO

INCLUDING COMPOUND, TAPES, BINDINGS,
WIRES, FILTERS, ARMOUR CLAMPS, BRASS GLAND,
ETC. INCLUDED
13.0 SPARES –
13.1 LIST OF RECOMMENDED SPARES FOR NORMAL –  YES  NO

MAINTENANCE FOR A PERIOD OF 2 YEARS
FURNISHED
14.0 TESTS
14.1 ALL TEST CERTIFICATES ON BOUGHT ITEMS BE –  YES  NO

FURNISHED
14.2 LIST OF ROUTINE TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT –  YES  NO
ATTACHED
15.1 DRAWINGS SUBMITTED ALONG WITH BID –  YES  NO
DATASHEET A: T SWITCHGEAR

1.0 SWITCHGEAR DESIGNATION AS PER THE
REQUIREMENT
SWITCHGEAR
1.1 NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE PHASES & FREQUENCY 415V & 3 PH & 50 Hz
RATINGS
1.2 SYSTEM NEUTRAL EARTHING EFFECTIVELY EARTHED
1.3 MAXIMUM SYSTEM VOLTAGE 457V

1.4 ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY VOLTAGE
1.0
A) POWER CIRCUITS 2500V

B) CONTROL CIRCUITS 1500V
C) AUX. CIRCUITS CONNECTED TO 2000V
SEC. OF CTS
SHEET 18 OF

1.5 SHORT CIRCUIT WITHSTAND
c) SHORT TIME (1 SEC.) AT RATED VOLTAGE 50 kA (rms)
d) DYNAMIC RATING 105kA (peak)
1.6 REFERENCE SITE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 500C
1.7 CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATING OF BUS BARS AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
UNDER REFERENCE SITE AMBIENT TEMP.
1.8 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE OF BUS BARS AND FOR BUSBARS HAVING
DROPPERS/CONNECTORS UNDER NON-SILVER/SILVER
CONDITIONS SPECIFIED – SR. NOS. 1.6 and 1.7 ABOVE PLATED JOINTS –AS PER
RELEVANT IEC / IS.
1.9 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS PER DATA SHEET
SR. DESIGNATIOBUS BARS CABLE ENTRYPANEL TOTAL NO. OF REMAR
NO N ACCESS CUBICLES PER KS
2.0 SWITCHGEAR
. SWITCHGEAR (DIMEN
RATINGS
SION-AL
LIMITS
IF ANY)
AMPS TOP / SINGLE /
BOTTOM DOUBLE
3.1 CLEARANCE IN AIR PHASE TO 25.4 mm
PHASE
3.0 SWITCHGEAR CONSTRUCTIONAL
19.4 mm
PHASE TO
EARTH
REQUIREMENTS
3.2 BUS BAR INSULATION HEAT SHRUNK – PVC

SLEEVED
3.3 DEGREE OF PROTECTION REFER SPECIFICATION
3.4 BUS DUCT CONNECTION NOT REQUIRED
3.5 EARTHING BUS MATERIAL COPPER
SIZE 50 x 10 sqmm
3.6 COLOUR FINISHED SHADE INTERIOR RAL 7032
POWDER COATING
SHEET 19 OF

EXTERIOR RAL 7032
POWDER COATING
3.7 THICKNESS OF SHEET STEEL COLD FRAME – 2.0,
ROLLED DOORS -1.6,
COVERS-1.6
HOT ROLLED FRAME – 2.5,
DOORS -2.0,
COVERS-2.0
3.8 BASE FRAME REQUIRED FLOOR
FIXING:INTEGRAL BASE
FRAME & TACK
WELDING TO THE
FLOOR CHANNEL
3.9 MINIMUM MODULE DIMENSION HEIGHT 240mm
3.10 CABLE GLANDS FOR ALL FEEDERS - REQUIRED
4.1 BREAKER PARTICULARS
4.1.1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS PER DATA A2

4.1.2 CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE MCCB
4.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4.1.3 VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY, 415V,50Hz & 3Ph

& NO.OF PHASES
4.1.4 RATED CURRENT AT REFERENCE SITE AS PER SLD
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
4.1.5 RATED BREAKING CURRENT 50kA(rms)
4.1.6 RATED MAKING CURRENT 105 kA (peak)
4.1.7 SHORT TIME CURRENT WITHSTAND FOR 1 50kA (rms)
SEC. DURATION.
4.1.8 STANDARDS APPLICABLE AS PER DATA SHEET-A2
4.1.9 MINIMUM NO. OF AUXILIARY CONTACTS 6 NCs. 6 NOs. FOR
S (COND.)
BREAKER
CLIENT USE
4.0 CIRCUIT
4.1.10 POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND ONE 2.5 kV (rms)

TEST VOLTAGE
MINUTE
4.1.11 BREAKER APPLICATION
SHEET 20 OF

a) INCOMER & OUTGOING YES
b) BUSCOUPLER - YES
5.1 TYPE AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
CONTACTOR RATED DUTY AS PER IS:2959 &
5.0 STARTERS
5.2 - CONTINUOUS &

8544 INTERMITTENT
5.3 UTILISATION CATEGORY AS PER IS:2959 & - AC3 & AC4
8544
5.4 CONTROL SCHEME & BILL OF MATERIAL AS PER THE
ENCLOSED REQUIREMENT
5.5 STANDARD APPLICABLE - AS PER DATA SHEET
6.2 TYPE CAST RESIN
(COMPLETELY
6.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
ENCAPSULATED)
6.3 SYSTEM VOLTAGE & FREQUENCY 415V , 50Hz
6.4 CLASS OF INSULATION CLASS-B OR BETTER
6.5 RATED PRIMARY CURRENT & RATIO AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
6.6 ACCURACY CLASS & BURDEN METERING AS PER THE SPECIFICATION
PROTN.
6.7 SHORT TIME 1 SEC. CURRENT - 50 kA (rms)
RATING & DYNAMIC RATING 105 kA (peak)
TRANSFORMERS

7.0 VOLTAGE
7.2 TYPE CAST RESIN

(COMPLETELY
ENCAPSULATED)
7.3 RATED VOLTAGE PRIMARY P1 415/ 3 Volts
SHEET 21 OF

7.4 METHOD OF CONNECTION PRIMARY V STAR
SECONDARY S1 STAR
SECONDARY S2 STAR
7.5 RATED VOLTAGE FACTOR 1.2 (Continuous)

1.9 FOR 8 HOURS
7.6 CLASS OF INSULATION CLASS – B OR
BETTER
7.7 POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND ONE MIN. 2.5 kV (rms)
TEST VOLTAGE

DATA SHEET
8.2 RATED CURRENT A AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
8.3 VOLTAGE CLASS kV 415V
9.0 10.1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AS PER DATA SHEET

RELAYS
10.2 TYPE : PROTECTION RELAYS NUMERICAL RELAYS
AUXILIARY RELAYS ELECTROMECHANICAL
-
/STATIC TYPE
10.3 OTHER SPECIFICATION
DATASHEET –B : LT SWITCHGEAR
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 MANUFACTURER’S NAME
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARD (S)
1.3 TYPE OF CIRCUIT BREAKER

SHEET 22 OF
1.4 NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE V
1.5 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS VOLTAGE V
1.6 POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND (ONE MINUTE) V

VOLTAGE
1.7 A) SHORT CIRCUIT WITHSTAND V (rms)
B) MOMENTARY WITHSTAND V (peak)
1.8 TYPE TEST REPORT  ENCLOSED

 NOT ENCLOSED
2.0 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION  YES  NO, DEVIATIONS

ATTACHED
3.1 DIMENSIONS
a) ----------- Lx Wx
Dmm
b) -------------------- Lx Wx
Dmm
c) ------------------ Lx Wx
Dmm
3.2 MINIMUM CLEAR. REQUIRED Mm Front : mm, Rear :
mmSide :
mm
3.3 EACH SWITCHGEAR WEIGHT Kg.
3.4 DYNAMIC LOADING PER CUBICLE Kg.
3.5 PAINTING SPECIFICATION  ENAMEL  EPOXY

SHEET 23 OF

 POWDER COATED
3.6 MAX SIZE/NO OF PVC INSULATED CABLE THAT CAN - (I) WITH REAR EXTENSION:
BE TERMINATED INSIDE THE PANEL ….. (II)WITHOUT REAR
EXTENSION: ….
(III) SIZE OF REAR
EXTENSION PANEL: ….
4.0 BUSBARS
4.1 MATERIAL  AL-ALLOY COPPER
4.3 BUSBAR INSULATION
4.4 STANDARD TO WHICH THE BUSBAR

ARRANGEMENT CONFORMS
4.5 MINIMUM CLEARANCE :
A) PHASE TO PHASE Mm
B) PHASE TO EARTH Mm
4.6 BUSBAR SECTION

A) HORIZONTAL BUSBAR
FOR ---------------- Sq.mm PH : N:
FOR ---------------- Sq.mm PH : N:
FOR ---------------- Sq.mm PH : N:
B) VERTICAL BUSBAR
FOR ---------------- Sq.mm PH : N:

PH : N:
FOR ---------------- Sq.mm PH : N:
SHEET 24 OF

PH : N:
FOR ---------------- Sq.mm PH : N:

PH : N:
4.7 TEMPERATURE RISE OVER THE REFERENCE AMBIENT °C

WHEN CARRYING RATED CURRENT
SHORT TIME RATING (ONE SEC.)
HORIZONTAL BUSBAR kA
VERTICAL BUSBAR kA
MOMENTORY RATING (PEAK)
HORIZONTAL BUSBAR kA
VERTICAL BUSBAR kA
4.8 EARTH BUSBAR  AL-ALLOY COPPER
BUSBAR SECTION Sq.mm
5.0 CIRCUIT BREAKERS COMPLIANCE WITH SPEC.

 YES
 NO, DEVIATIONS
ATTACHED
5.1 FEEDER RATINGS Amps AS PER SPEC.  YES
 NO
DETAILS ATTACHED
5.2 DERATING FACTOR FOR OPERATION UNDER SITE Amps
CONDITIONS
5.3 RATED OPERATING DUTY
5.4 MAIN CONTACTS :
a) TYPE
b) MATERIAL
SHEET 25 OF
c) SILVER FACING PROCESS –
d) THICKNESS OF THE FACING MICRON
e) DESIGN CONTACT PRESSURE KG./Sq.cm.
5.5 ARCING CONTACTS :
A) TYPE –
B) MATERIAL –
C) SILVER FACING PROVIDED –
D) THICKNESS OF THE FACING Microns
E) DESIGN CONTACT PRESSURE Kg./Sq.Cm.
5.6 TRIP COIL CONSUMPTION AT RATED VOLTAGE Watts
5.7 SATISFACTORY OPERATION OF CLOSING –  YES  NO

BETWEEN 85% - 110% OF RATED CONTROL
VOLTAGE
5.8  ENCLOSED
TYPE TEST REPORT
 NOT ENCLOSED
6.1 TYPE OF CLOSING MECHANISM
6.2 SPRING CHARGING MECHANISM :
a) SPRING CHARGING MOTOR :
i) RATED VOLTAGE Volts
ii) RATING Watts
iii) SPEED RPM

SHEET 26 OF
iv) CLASS OF INSULATION –
v) SATISFACTORY OPERATION OF SPRING –  YES  NO,

CHARGING MOTOR BETWEEN 85% - 110% DEVIATION GIVEN
OF RATED VOLTAGE
vi) TIME REQUIRED TO CHARGE THE SPRING SEC.
FROM FULLY DISCHARGED CONDITION
vii) OVERLOAD AND SHORT CIRCUIT
PROTECTION PARTICULARS
IS PROVISION MADE FOR IMMEDIATE CHARGING –  YES  NO,
b)
OF CLOSING SPRING AFTER A CLOSURE REASON GIVEN
ADEQUATE SPRING RESERVE FOR ONE O-C-O –  YES  NO,
c) OPERATION WITHOUT INTENTIONAL TIME REASON GIVEN
DELAY
MECHANICAL INDICATION FOR SPRING –  YES  NO,
d)
CHARGED CONDITION PROVIDED REASON GIVEN
WHETHER SLOW CLOSING/OPENING IS FEASIBLE –  YES  NO,
e)
FOR MAINTENANCE TESTING REASON GIVEN
FAILURE
7.0 POWER CONTACTORS APPLICABLE
7.1 MAKERS NAME AND COUNTRY OF –

MANUFACTURE
7.2 MANUFACTURER’S TYPE DESIGNATION –
7.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS –
RATED DUTY
RATED UTILIZATION CATEGORY

 NOT ENCLOSED
SHEET 27 OF
7.5 METHOD OF CLOSING –
a) NORMAL VOLTAGE OF COIL Volts
b) POWER FOR CLOSING MECHANISM Watts
7.6 NUMBER OF OPERATIONS THE POWER CONTACTOR Nos.

IS CAPABLE OF
PERFORMING WITHOUT INSPECTION
8.0 INSTRUMENT / CONTROL TRANSFORMERS –
8.1 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS - METERING AND – COMPLIANCE WITH

PROTECTION SPECIFICATION &
PROJECT DWGS
ATTACHED
8.1.1 MAKE –
8.1.2 TYPE (BAR / WOUND / ANY OTHER) –
8.1.4 CLASS OF INSULATION –
8.1.5 TYPE TEST REPORT FOR ALL CT DESIGNS –  ENCLOSED

 NOT ENCLOSED
8.2 – COMPLIANCE WITH
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SPEC. PROJECT DWGS
 YES
 NO, DEVIATIONS
ATTACHED
8.2.1 MAKE –
8.2.2 TYPE –

SHEET 28 OF
8.2.4 RATING, RATIO & ACCURACY CLASS VA, V/V
8.2.5 TYPE OF INSULATION –
8.2.6 OVER VOLTAGE FACTOR -
8.2.7 TYPE TEST REPORT –  ENCLOSED

 NOT ENCLOSED
8.3 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
8.3.1 MAKE -
8.3.2 TYPE -
8.3.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS -
8.3.4 RATIO V/V
8.3.5 CLASS OF INSULATION -
8.3.6 RATED OUTPUT VA
9.0 INDICATING METERS – COMPLIANCE WITH
SPEC./ DWGS.
 YES  NO,
DEVIATIONS ATTACHED
9.1 GENERAL VOLTMETER / AMMETER
9.1.1 MAKE –
9.1.3 TYPE OF MOVEMENT –
9.1.4 SIZE – X mm
9.1.5 SCALE SIZE (IN DEGREES) –
9.1.7 ACCURACY –
SHEET 29 OF
9.1.8 RANGE AS PER SPECIFICATION –  YES  NO,

DEVIATIONS ATTACHED
9.1.9 VA BURDEN FOR EACH TYPE –
9.2 –
KILOWATT HOUR METER
9.2.1 MAKE –
9.2.2 TYPE –
9.2.3 STANDARD TO WHICH IT CONFORMS –
9.2.4 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS –
9.2.5 VOLTAGE COIL RATING Volts
9.2.6 CURRENT RATING Amps.
9.2.7 VA BURDEN VA
9.2.8 ACCURACY –
9.2.9 RANGE AS PER SPECIFICATION –  YES  NO, DEVIATION

ATTACHED
9.2.10 DRAW OUT / NON – DRAWOUT TYPE –
9.2.12 TEST PLUG/TEST BLOCKS TESTING TERMINALS WITH –  ELECTROMECHANICAL

LINKS  SOLID STATE  PBASE
9.3 INDICATION LAMPS
9.3.1 MAKE
9.3.2 TYPE
9.3.3 VOLTAGE V
9.3.4 SERIES RESISTOR OHM
SHEET 30 OF
9.3.5 WATTAGE OF LAMP WATT

10.0 PROTECTION RELAYS – MAKE TYPE
10.1 INVERSE TIME OVER-CURRENT RELAY –
10.2 INSTANTANEOUS OVER-CURRENT RELAY –
10.3 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION RELAY –
10.4 LOCKED ROTOR PROTECTION RELAY –
10.5 THERMAL OVERLOAD ALARM RELAY –
10.7 EARTH LEAKAGE RELAY FOR USE WITH CORE –

BALANCE CT
10.8 EARTH FAULT RELAY FOR USE IN THE
RESIDUAL CIRCUIT OF MAIN CTS.
10.9 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY -
10.10 CATALOGUES OF RELAYS  ENCLOSED

(Note: The enclosed catalogue should explain all  NOT ENCLOSED
the Technical details as indicated in the RFQ
document)
11.0 TERMINATION / WIRING – COMPLIANCE WITH SPEC.
ATTACHED
11.1 COLOUR CODING FOR WIRES FOR : –
a) D.C. CONTROL CIRCUITS –
b) A.C. AUXILIARY POWER CIRCUIT LIKE PANEL –

SPACE HEATER, PANEL ILLUMINATION ETC.
c) A.C. METERING CIRCUIT –
d) EARTHING –
SHEET 31 OF
11.2 NUMBERED FERRULES AT BOTH ENDS –  YES  NO, REASON

GIVEN
11.3 INSULATED SLEEVES PROVIDED AT WIRE –  YES  NO, REASON
TERMINATIONS GIVEN
11.4 VOLTAGE GRADE FOR WIRES V
11.5 TERMINALS :
a) MAKE –
b) CURRENT RATING Amps
c) VOLTAGE GRADE V
d) CLAMP TYPE / BOLT TYPE –
e) MOULDED INTER-TERMINAL BARRIERS –  YES 

PROVIDED NO
f) MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZE AND sq.mm
NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS WHICH IT CAN
RECEIVE
g) DISCONNECTING TYPE FOR CT CIRCUITS –  YES  NO
h) TERMINAL MARKING FACILITY PROVIDED –  YES  NO
i) CRIMP TYPE CONNECTORS PROVIDED AT –  YES  NO

THE TERMINALS
j) 10% SPARE TERMINAL PROVIDED –  YES  NO
11.6 –  ENCLOSED
TYPE TEST REPORT FOR WIRING
MATERIALS  NOT ENCLOSED
12.0 –
CABLE BOXES / POTHEADS
12.1 INCLUDED IN SCOPE OF SUPPLY –
12.2 RATED VOLTAGE kV

SHEET 32 OF
12.3 APPLICABLE STANDARD –
12.4 COMPOUND FILLED/EPOXY –

RESIN / SHRINKABLE TYPE
12. 5 ALL FURNISHING MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES –  YES  NO
INCLUDING COMPOUND, TAPES, BINDINGS,
WIRES, FILTERS, ARMOUR CLAMPS, BRASS
GLAND, ETC. INCLUDED
13.0 SPARES –
13.1 LIST OF RECOMMENDED SPARES FOR NORMAL –  YES  NO
MAINTENANCE FOR A PERIOD OF 3 YEARS
FURNISHED
14.0 TESTS
14.1 ALL TEST CERTIFICATES ON BOUGHT ITEMS BE –  YES  NO

FURNISHED
14.2 LIST OF ROUTINE TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT –  YES  NO
ATTACHED
15.1 DRAWINGS SUBMITTED ALONG WITH BID –  YES  NO
DATASHEET B: ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL
Sl.No Item Unit Bidder
1.0 PANELS
1.1 Panel Designations
1.2 Make and country of manufacture

SHEET 33 OF
1.3 Weight of each panel section Kg
1.4 Dimensions of each panel section (Width x mm

Depth x Height)
1.5 Space required for installation of all panels m2
1.6 General arrangement drawing attached of (a) Yes / No

individual panel section (b) Overall
arrangement of complete panels showing
floor space
1.7 Changeover facility for power supply provided Auto /

Manual
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Special tools & devices for maintenance Yes / No

included. (Attach list)
2.2 Spares
2.2.1 List of recommended spares for normal Yes / No

maintenance for a period of 5 years furnished
(Attach List)
2.3 Drawings / Literature
Following are submitted :
2.3.1 Component’s list of each panel. Yes / No
2.3.2 Typical Block / Circuit diagrams of control Yes / No

interlock schemes
2.3.3 Technical and descriptive literature of all the Yes / No

components
2.4 Tests
SHEET 34 OF
2.4.1 Type & Routine test certificates for all the Yes / No
components furnished
2.5 Deviations
2.5.1 All the deviations from the specifications Yes / No

submitted separately. Compliance will be
taken for granted if the deviation is not
specifically mentioned.
3.0 AUXILIARY / INTERFACE RELAY
3.1 Make
3.2 Type designations
3.3 Contacts, Hand Reset / Self reset
3.4 No. of pairs of contacts
(a) Make contacts
(b) Break contacts
3.5 Burden of Relay VA
3.6 Contact Rating:
(a) Continuous current A
(b) Voltages Volts
(c) Making Current & duration A,AC/DC
(d) Breaking current :
(i) Resistive. A
(ii) Inductive, 0.3 P.F A, AC
(iii) Inductive, L/R = 10m.sec / 40 A, DC

SHEET 35 OF

m.sec
4.0 TIMERS
4.1 Make
4.2 Type designation
4.3 Range of time delay
(a) On energisation m sec.
(b) On de-generation m sec.
4.4 Accuracy class as per IS
4.5 Contact Rating :
(b) Voltages Volts
(i) Resistive. A
(iii) Inductive, L/R = 10m. sec/ A, DC
40 m Sec.
4.6 No. of pairs of contacts
(a) Make contact
(b) Break contact
5.0 CONTROL SWITCHES
5.1 Make & Front Dimensions
5.2 Type of switch (Stay put / Spring return /

Spring return with sequence / discrepancy)
5.3 Contact development type No. as per data

sheet A3
SHEET 36 OF
5.4 Contact Rating
(b) Voltages Volts.
(i) Resistive. A

40 m Sec.
6.0 PUSH BUTTONS
6.1 Make
6.2 Actuator type :
(a) Momentary / Maintained
(b) Shrouded to prevent inadvertent Yes / No

operation
6.3 Whether integral engraved inscription plates Yes / No

provided
6.4 Type and No. of NO / NC contacts
6.5 Contact Rating
(b) Voltages Volts

SHEET 37 OF
(i) Resistive. A

40 m Sec.
6.6 Elec. life expectancy based on 300 switching No. of

operation cycles per hour operation
s
7.0 ILLUMINATED PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES
7.1 Make & Front dimensions
7.2 Actuator type :
(a) Momentary / Maintained / Self-holding
7.3 Switching action by actuation of Front-plate /

button / knob
7.4 Legend plate & illumination coloured screens Yes / No

provided
7.5 (a) Lamp type
(b) Wattage & Voltage W, V
(c) Series resistor provided Yes / No
7.6 Material of housing containing illumination

portion and switch contacts.
7.7 Type and No. of NO / NC contacts
7.8 Contact Rating A

(a) Continuous current
SHEET 38 OF
(b) Voltages Volts

(i) Resistive. A
40 m Sec.
7.9 Elec. life expectancy based on 300 switching No. of

operation cycles per hour operation
s
8.0 INDICATING LAMPS
8.1 Type
8.2 Ratings
(a) Voltage V
(b) Wattage W
8.3 Series resistors are provided Yes / No
8.4 Series resistors - Ohms

- Watts
8.5 Life of lamp in burning hours Hours
9.0 ANNUNCIATORS
9.1 Make & Type
9.2 Dimensions of each window (L x W x H) mm
9.3 No. of lamps per window
9.4 Lamps - Volts

SHEET 39 OF
- Watts
9.5 Is the sequence of operation as per Yes / No

specification
9.6 Initiating contact requirements
(a) Making current A
(b) Impulse duration m-sec.
10.0 INDICATING METERS
10.1 Make
10.2 Type of movement
10.3 Type designation
10.4 CT / VT Sec. current / Volt A, V
10.5 Burden :
(a) Current coil VA
(b) Voltage coil VA
10.6 Details of shunt, if any
(a) Rated current A
(b) Rated voltage drop Volts
10.7 Accuracy class & standard.
10.8 Total deflection angle Degrees
10.9 Total scale length mm
10.10 Suitable for specified reference operating Yes / No

conditions
SHEET 40 OF
11.0 ENERGY METERS
11.1 Make
11.2 Type of measurement (3 phase, 3 wire

unbalanced power / 3 phase, 4 wire
unbalanced power)
11.3 Measuring range in primary watts.
11.3.1 CT ratio A/A
11.3.2 VT ratio V/V
11.4 Accuracy and standard to which meter

conforms :
11.5 Burden
(a) Current coil VA
(b) Voltage coil VA
11.6 No. of digits in the meter
11.7 Impulse contact for remote summation or

printing provided or connectivity with the
plant computer provided
11.8 Details of impulse contacts
(a) Impulse frequency No. per

sec.
(b) Duration m-sec.
(c) Contact rating W,V
11.9 Mounting details and testing facilities
11.10 Literature with connection diagram furnished Yes / No

SHEET 41 OF
12.0 RECORDING METERS
12.1 Make
12.2 Type, Designation
12.3 Range of parameter to be recorded
12.4 Range of basic movement (In case of
transducer operated relays)
12.5 Accuracy & Standard to which the meter
conforms
12.6 Range of speed available
12.7 No. of hours of spring reserve in case of Hrs.

auxiliary supply failure
12.8 Burden
(a) Current coil VA

(b) Voltage coil VA
13.0 STATIC CONTROLLERS
13.1 Enclosures
(a) Type
(b) Size (W x D x H) mm
(c) Drawing enclosed. Yes / No
13.2 Environmental suitability

0
(a) Temperature C
(b) Humidity
13.3 Nature of controller
(a) Pre-wired solid-state modules Yes / No

(b) Programmable Yes / No
SHEET 42 OF
(i) Programmed at works to logic Yes / No

diagrams. furnished
(ii) To be programmed at site Yes / No
(c) Programming kit furnished Yes / No
13.4 Details of electronic sub-assemblies
(a) Interface & memory

(b) Controller / processor
(c) Input / Output modules
(d) Contact details
(i) Input V&A
(ii) Output V&A
13.5 Details of audio-visual lamps/LEDs indications:
(a) Continuous monitoring
(b) Alarm status (logic operation)
13.6 Details of in-built testing facilities:
(a) For sequence logic
(b) For individual module testing
13.7 Terminations/Wiring
(a) Type
(b) If special cables required, furnished by Yes/No
vendor,(attach details)
13.8 Any other features
DATASHEET A: POWER TRANSFORMER

SHEET 43 OF
Sl.No Description Unit Bidder
1.0 GENERAL UNITS
1.1 Application/Designation
1.2 Quantity *
1.3 Installation Indoor / outdoor

Outdoor
1.4 Type Auto / 2- 2 Wdg

Wdg /
3-Wdg /
Other
1.5 3 Phase / Single Phase Un 3-phase
1.6 Rating of each unit MVA *
1.7 Cooling - ONAN/O

ONAN/ONAF
NAF/
OFAF/OF
WF/
ODAF/O
DWF
1.8 Rating for corresponding to each method of

*
cooling
1.8.1
ONAN
1.8.2 ONAF
1.8.3 OFAF
OFWF
1.8.4
1.8 Number of coolers and % rating of each cooler
*
required
2.0 RATINGS
2.1 No load voltage

SHEET 44 OF
2.1.1 HV Winding kV *
2.1.2 MV Winding kV *
2.1.3 LV Winding kV *
2.2 Frequency Hz 50
2.3 Rating for each type of cooling
2.3.1 HV Winding (….../……/……) MVA *
2.3.2 MV Winding (….../……/……) MVA *
2.3.3 LV Winding (….../……/……) MVA *
2.4 Percentage impedance
2.4.1 HV - MV % / MVA As per standard

base
2.4.2 HV - LV % / MVA As per standard

Base
2.4.3 MV - LV %/ MVA As per standard

Base
3.0
CORE
Whether over fluxing as per clause 4.6 and 4.7 Yes / No *

of Section - D required
4.0
WINDING CONNECTIONS
4.1 Winding Connection (Vector Group)
4.1.1 HV Winding Delta
4.1.2 MV Winding
SHEET 45 OF
4.1.3 LV Winding Star
4.2 Application / Direction of Power Flow

Unidirectional
5.0
SYSTEM DATA
5.1 System Voltage
5.1.1 HV – Nominal / Highest kV / kV *
5.1.2 MV – Nominal / Highest kV / kV *
5.1.3 LV – Nominal / Highest kV / kV *
5.2 Fault Level
5.2.1 HV system kA Refer scope of work
5.2.2 MV system kA Refer scope of work
5.2.3 LV system kA Refer scope of work
5.3 System Neutral Earthing :
A) Effectively B) Resonant HV Refer scope of work

C) Non-effectively D) Isolated
MV
Refer scope of work
LV
Refer scope of work
6.0
WINDING INSULATION
HV
A) Uniformly insulated
B) Non-uniformly insulated MV
LV
7.0
TRANSFORMER NEUTRAL
SHEET 46 OF
Type of earthing
A) Directly B) Non- HV *
effectively C) Isolated
MV *
LV *
8.0 WINDING INSULATION TEST VOLTAGES
8.1 Impulse voltage withstand +ve/-ve (1.2 / 50 s

Wave)
8.1.1 HV kV (Peak) As per CBIP
8.1.2 MV kV (Peak) As per CBIP
8.1.3 LV kV (Peak) As per CBIP
8.2 Power frequency voltage withstand (Separate

source / induced voltage)
8.2.1 HV kV As per CBIP
8.2.2 MV kV As per CBIP
8.2.3 LV kV As per CBIP
8.2.4 HV Neutral kV As per CBIP
9.0
TEMPERATURE RISE
9.1 Maximum ambient air Refer Project data
9.2 Maximum daily average air Refer Project data
9.3 Maximum yearly average air Refer Project data
9.4 Cooling water (Maximum) Refer Project data

0
9.2 Temperature rise of top oil by thermometer C As per CBIP
SHEET 47 OF

0
9.3 Maximum temperature rise of windings by C As per CBIP
resistance
9.4 Loading combination for which above

temperature rises are applicable (for each
cooling type specified in Sl.No. 1.7)
10.0
TAPPING
10.1 Tapping on winding HV/MV/L LV

V
10.2 Whether on load / off-circuit Onload
10.3 Tapping range % -10% to +10%
10.4 Tapping step % 2.5%
10.5 Category of voltage variation (Clauses 3.2, 3.3,

3.4 of IS:2026 Part IV)
10.6 Capacity Full / Full

Reduced
11.0 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER (OLTC)
11.1 Control Manual / Manual / Automatic / Local

Automati / Remote
c / Local
/ Remote
11.2 Control cubicle By

By Vendor
Vendor
11.3 Voltage class of OLTC kV
11.4 Current rating of OLTC A
12.0 TRANSFORMER WITH WHICH PARALLEL Not applicable

OPERATION IS REQUIRED
SHEET 48 OF
12.1 Manufactured by
12.2 Output MVA
12.3 No load voltages at principal tapping
12.3.1 HV kV
12.3.2 MV kV
12.3.3 LV kV
12.4 Turns ratio for each tapping
12.5 Percentage impedance
12.6 Vector group
12.6.1 HV
12.6.2 MV
12.6.3 LV
12.7 Diagram for connections – Ref. Drawing No.
12.8 Additional data, if any.
13.0 TERMINAL BUSHINGS
Particulars (For each application viz., HV;HVN;

MV; MVN: LV; LVN)
13.1 Rated Voltage class – kV *
13.2 Rated current class – A *
13.3 Impulse(1.2/ 50 sec. Wave withstand) – kV(Peak) As per CBIP
13.4 One minute power frequency withstand (Dry kV(rms) As per CBIP
& Wet)
SHEET 49 OF
13.5 Minimum clearance in air (ph-ph/ph-gnd) mm As per IS
13.6 Minimum creepage distance (Total) mm As per IS
13.7 Protected creepage distance mm As per IS
13.8 Reqd./No
Voltage tap for use with potential device
t Reqd.
13.9 Yes/No As per the project

Bushing CT – required
requirement
14.0 BUSHING CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (BCT)
BCT Particulars (for each application viz., *

HV;HVN; MV; MVN: LV; LVN)
14.1 BCT Core No. *
14.2 CT Ratio *
14.3 Class *
14.7 VA burden VA *
14.4 Knee Point Voltage (VK) V *
14.5 Magnetizing current (Ie ) mA at (Vk /2) V *
14.6 Secondary Resistance (Rct) Ohms
15.0 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
15.1 Terminal connections – A/B/C/D (See below)
15.1.1 HV Winding Line end *
15.1.2 HV Winding Neutral end *
15.1.3 MV Winding Line end *

SHEET 50 OF
15.1.4 MV Winding Neutral end *
15.1.5 LV Winding Line end *
15.1.6 LV Winding Neutral end
A Bare terminals on bushing stem for

connection to rigid bus bars / over head
conductors
B Cable box with air insulated / disconnecting

chamber
C Matching flange for connecting to phase

bus duct.
D Neutral point connected to mm earth flat

supported on insulators on tank body from
bushing to ground level.
15.2 Earthing Conductor Refer scope of work
15.2.1 Material Refer scope of work
15.2.2 Size Refer scope of work
16.0
MISCELLANEOUS
16.1 Impulse test As per IS/CBIP
16.1.1 Full wave Required

/ Not
Required
16.1.2 Chopped wave Required

/ Not
Required
16.2 Heat run test Required

/ Not
Required
SHEET 51 OF
16.3 Any other special test (As per Section D,

Clause No. 22.2).
16.4 Buchholz Relay Required Required

/ Not
required
16.5 Winding temperature indicator
16.5.1 Local Required Required

/ Not
required
16.5.2 Remote Required Required

/ Not
Required
16.5.3 Windings for which winding temperature is

required
16.6 Oil Temperature indicator Required Required

/not
required
16.7 Oil level gauge Required
16.7.1 Type Magnetic Both

/
Prismatic
16.7.2 Dial size
a) Transducer for Top oil temp. Required Required

/Not
required
b) Transducer for winding temperature Required Required

/Not
required
c) Windings for which temperature transducer Required

SHEET 52 OF

is required
16.8 Other optional accessories as per Section – D,

Clause No. 21.
16.9 Colour shade of final painting as per IS-5 Shade Refer Scope of work
Number
16.10 Bolted joint near base of tank Required Required

/ Not
Required
16.11 Skids Required Required

/ Not
Required
16.12 Wheel Required
16.12. Plain / Flanged Flanged

1
16.12. Unidirectional / Bi-directional Bi-directional

2
16.12. Additional wheels for stability required Yes / No

3
16.13 Vacuum withstand capability
16.13. Main tank with bushings, fittings and Full vacuum

1 accessories
16.13. Radiators Full vacuum

2
16.14 Transformer to be transported: a)Filled

with oil
b)Withou
t oil with
inert gas,
gas
SHEET 53 OF

cylinder,
reducer
connecti
on,
pressure
gauge
16.15 Additional drain valve to be located away from Required Required

the transformer to operate if there is fire in / Not
transformer. Required
17.0 EVALUATION
17.1 Formula for evaluation of bids Evaluated Price +

(A*guarantee Max no load
loss in kW)+(B*
Guaranteed max load loss
in kW)
A=5,33,730
B=2,17,762
17.2
Loading combination for which load loss
guarantee is required (In case of trf with
more than two windings)
Notes:
1. Quantity of spares to be indicated against each of items above
2. Also, recommended quantities other than specified above with unit prices to be
indicated by Bidder in his quotation.
3. Bidder shall quote separate price for each of the test specified as per items
16.1 to 16.3
* Bidder to indicate
SHEET 54 OF
DATASHEET B: POWER TRANSFORMER
Sl.No. Description Unit Bidder
1.0
Transformer application /
designation
2.0
Applicable standards
3.0
Quantity required
4.0 MVA
Full load rating
5.0
3 Phase unit / bank of three (3) 1
phase units
6.0
Auto wound / two winding
transformers / three winding
transformers
7.0
Rated no-load voltages:
7.1 kV
HV
7.2 kV
MV
7.3 kV
LV
8.0
Cooling (ONAN / ONAF / OFAF /
OFWF)
9.0
Number of coolers offered and %
rating of each cooler.
10.0
Ratings
10.1
Ratings of windings
10.1.1 MVA
HV
SHEET 55 OF
10.1.2 MVA
MV
10.1.3 MVA
LV
10.2
Ratings corresponding to cooling
methods for each winding
HV/MV/LV
10.2.1 MVA
ONAN
10.2.2 MVA
ONAF
10.2.3 MVA
OFAF
10.2.4 MVA
OFWF
10.2.5 MVA
10.2.6 ODAF MVA
ODWF
11.0
Guaranteed (Subject to
tolerance) impedance voltage at
rated MVA base for the principal
tapping
11.1 %
HV – LV
11.2 %
HV – MV
11.3 %
MV – LV
12.0
Efficiency at 750C at unity p.f.
12.1 %
At full load
12.2 %
At ¾ full load
SHEET 56 OF
12.3 %
At ½ full load
13.0 %
Regulation at full load, 0.8 P.F at
750C winding temperature
14.0 Hz.
Rated frequency
15.0 MVA
External short circuit withstand
capacity
16.0
Core:
16.1
Material of core lamination
16.2
Thickness of core plates
16.3
Insulation of core lamination
16.4
Insulation of core bolts
16.5
Insulation of core bolt washers
16.6
Insulation of core clamping plates
17.0
Winding connections:
17.1
HV
17.2
MV
17.3
LV
17.4
Vector group
18.0
Tappings on winding
18.1
On-load / off taps
SHEET 57 OF
18.2
On HV / MV / LV winding
18.3 %
Full power tapping range +
18.4
For CbVV rating:
18.4.1
Maximum voltage tapping and
corresponding voltage
18.4.2
Maximum current tapping and
corresponding current
19.0
If On load taps, indicate details of
OLTC gear.
19.1
Manual / automatic control
19.2
Remote / local control
19.3
If remote control, whether the
remote control cubicle included in
Bidder’s scope of supply
19.4
Voltage class of the OLTC
19.5 A
Current rating of the OLTC
20.0 Yes / No
Terminals of tertiary (stabilising)
winding brought out to bushings
21.0
Winding insulation category:
21.1
HV uniform / non-uniform
21.2
MV uniform / non-uniform
21.3
LV uniform / non-uniform
SHEET 58 OF
22.0
Type of axial coil supports
22.1
HV
22.2
MV
22.3
LV
23.0
Type of radial coil supports
23.1
HV
23.2
MV
23.3
LV
24.0
Impulse voltage withstand 1.2 /
50 s wave
24.1 kV/Peak
HV
24.2 kV/Peak
MV
24.3 kV/Peak
LV
25.0
Power frequency withstand
voltage (dry and wet)
25.1 kV(rms)
HV; HV neutral
25.2 kV(rms)
MV
25.3 kV(rms)
LV
26.0
Guaranteed maximum
temperature rise
26.1
Oil by thermometers
SHEET 59 OF

0
26.1.1 C
At full ONAN rating
0
26.1.2 C
At full ONAF rating
0
26.1.3 C
At full OFAF/OFWF rating
26.2
Winding by resistance for:
0
26.2.1 C
At full ONAN rating
0
26.2.2 C
At full ONAF rating
0
26.2.3 C
26.3
The loading combination of
windings for which above oil and
winding temperature rises are
applicable.
26.3.1
At full ONAN rating
26.3.2
At full ONAF rating
26.3.3
27.0
Switching impulse withstand
voltage as applicable
28.0
Tank cover conventional / bell
shaped
29.0 mm
Minimum clearance height for
lifting core and windings from
tank
30.0
Bushings
30.1 kV
Rated voltage class
SHEET 60 OF
30.2 A
Rated current
30.3 kV(rms)
1.2 / 50 s impulse withstand
30.4 kV(rms)
One minute power frequency
withstand dry and wet
30.5 mm
Minimum clearance in air
30.6 mm/kV
Minimum creepage distance
30.6.1 mm
Total
30.6.2 mm
Protected
30.7 Litres
Quantity of oil in oil filled
bushings
30.8 mm
Free space required at top for
removal
31.0
Load loss at rated current at 750C
winding temperature (guaranteed
inclusive of tolerance as per
applicable standard and
excluding cooler losses)
31.1
Loading combination for specified
guaranteed load losses
MVA
HV
MVA
MV
MVA
LV
32.0 kW
Estimated maximum cooler
losses at full load
SHEET 61 OF
33.0 kW
No load losses (core loss and di-
electric loss) at 100% rated
voltage and frequency,
guaranteed inclusive of tolerance
as per applicable standard
34.0
Guaranteed no-load current:
34.1 A
When excited from LV side at
100% rated voltage
34.2 A
When excited from LV side at
110% rated voltage
35.0
Maximum flux density
35.1 Wb/m2
At rated voltage
35.2 Wb/m2
At 110% rated voltage
35.3
Overfluxing capability
36.0
Current density
36.1 A/cm2
HV
36.2 A/cm2
MV
36.3 A/cm2
LV
37.0
Wheels
37.1
Plain / flanged
37.2
Unidirectional / bi-directional
37.3
Quantity
SHEET 62 OF
37.4
Gauge (s)
38.0
Vacuum withstand capability:
38.1 mm of Hg.
Main tank along with conservator
38.2 mm of Hg
Radiators and accessories
39.0 Yes / No
All accessories supplied as
specified
40.0 Yes / No
Cooler control scheme conforms
to specification
41.0
OLTC control scheme conforms
to specification
42.0
Weights
42.1 Yes / No
Net weight of the core
42.2
Net weight of copper
42.2.1 Kg
HV
42.2.2 Kg
MV
42.2.3 Kg
LV
42.2.4 Kg
Tertiary
42.2.5 Kg
Total
42.3 Kg
Oil
42.4 Kg
Tank, coolers and fittings
42.5 Kg
Total
SHEET 63 OF
42.6 Kg
Untanking weight
43.0
Sheet metal thickness
43.1 mm
Outdoor cooler control cabinet
43.2
Indoor OLTC control cabinet
44.0
Cooling fans:
44.1
Type
44.2 No.
Quantity
44.3 kW
Rating
45.0
Cooling oil pumps
45.1
Type
45.2 No.
Quantity
45.3 kW
Rating
46.0
Cooling water pumps
46.1
Type
46.2 No.
Quantity
46.3 kW
Rating
47.0
Capability of transformer to
remain in operation from hot
condition after failure of forced
cooling
47.1 Minutes
Full load
SHEET 64 OF
47.2 Minutes
Without load current (for
transformers without ONAN
rating)
48.0
On-load tap changer
48.1
Make
48.2
Type designation
48.3
Suitable for auto / manual
operation
48.4 kV
Rated voltage
48.5 Amp
Rated current
48.6
Number of steps
48.7 Volts
Step voltage
48.8 V
Rated voltage of drive motor
48.9 V
Rated voltage of control circuit
48.10
Time to complete tap changing
operation from any one step to
next higher or lower step
48.10.1 Sec.
On ‘auto’ operation
48.10.2 Sec.
On ‘Manual’ operation i.e.,
through push button
49.0
List of routine tests to be carried
out
50.0
List of other tests which will be
SHEET 65 OF
carried out against extra price

quoted elsewhere
51.0
Drawing number of general
outline drawing enclosed with the
Bid showing the transformer with
all its fittings and accessories in
plan, front and side elevations
and other details
52.0
Shipping section
52.1 mm
Size of largest package (LxBxH)
52.2 Tonnes
Weight of the largest package
53.0
Manufacturer’s maintenance
procedure and schedule for spare
uncharged transformer
54.0
Hydraulic jack
54.1
Make
54.2
Type
54.3
Number
54.4
Capacity
56.0
Overload capacity of transformer
for both 100% OFAF coolers
working simultaneously.
57.0
Bushings CTs, if offered
57.1
Quantity
57.2
Ratio
SHEET 66 OF
57.3
VA burden
57.4
Accuracy class
57.5 Volts
Knee point voltage
57.6 Amps
Magnetising current at knee-point
voltage
57.7 Ohms
Secondary resistance
58.0
Values of transfer surge voltage
withstand for:
58.1
Lightning surges
58.1.1 kV
Amplitude
58.1.2 kV/sec.
Rate
58.2
Switching surges
58.2.1 kV
Amplitude
58.2.2 kV/sec.
Rate
59.0
Tertiary winding, if any, if kept
isolated then the Bidder to state
whether one terminal to be
earthed or not.
60.0 Kg-m
Torque for coil clamping bolts
61.0
Whether neutral end surge
diverter recommended by the
Bidder
62.0
If yes, details of surge diverter
SHEET 67 OF
62.1
Make
62.2
Type
62.3
kV class
62.4
kV rating
63.0
If unit cooler arrangement offered
for cooling, advise?
63.1
Total no. of unit coolers provided.
63.2
No. of unit coolers which would
be in service for full load
operation of transformer.
63.3
No. of ‘spare’ unit coolers
63.4
No. of fans in each unit cooler
63.5
No. of pumps in each unit cooler
63.6
Rating of each fan motor
63.7
Rating of each oil pump motor
64.0 Yes / No
Provision for installation of on-line
DGA monitoring device on
transformer
DATASHEETA: ONLOAD TAP CHANGING GEAR FOR TRANSFORMER
SR.NO. ITEM UNIT Technical parameters

1.0 Rated Voltage kV *
SHEET 68 OF

2.0 Maximum rated through current kA *
a) Current flow: Unidirecti

onal/Bidir Unidirectional
ectional,
3.0 Range and number of steps and step *
value
4.0 Auxiliary supply provided and their *

details
5.0 Manual/automatic control requirement Automatic & Manual
6.0 Remote/local control Requirement Remote & local
7.0 Parallel operation is envisaged – Yes / No No
If yes, technical particulars of other

transformers:
(a) Manufactured by
(b) Output MVA *
(c) Voltage ratios corresponding to tapping

other than principal tapping
(d) Vector group
(e) Impedance voltage at rated current (on % *

the principal tapping)
(f) Short circuit impedances atleast on the % *

extreme tappings if the tapping range
of the tapped winding exceeds + 5%
(g) Diagram for connection (ref. Drg.no.)
(h) Additional data if any?

SHEET 69 OF

8.1 If the transformers are non-identical
type, method of control envisaged for
parallel operation :
8.1.1 Circulating current method or reverse
reactance method, specify
9.0 Whether automatic control of OLTC as

per clause no. 3.8.1 provided, if YES/NO
specified?
10.0 Whether Remote indoor Control Yes/No *
Cabinet envisaged
10.1 (If no, list of items to be supplied loose *
to be mounted in, control panel)
10.2 Preferred dimensions and other *

particulars for RTCC to match with
other panels in Control Room.
10.2.1 Length x Breadth x Height mm x mm *

x mm
10.2.2 Thickness of sheet metal mm *
10.2.3 Colour of finish paint : *
(a) External
(b) Internal
10.3 Whether remote control of transformer YES/NO

cooler equipment is to be provided,
details
10.4 Details of Indications to be provided *
10.5 Details of Alarms to be provided *
11.0 List of Routine tests to be carried out As per clause no 3.9.1
12.0 List of type tests to be carried out
12.1 List of type tests for which test

SHEET 70 OF

certificates to be submitted for review
(tests not to be carried on this
particular unit)
DATASHEETB: ONLOAD TAP CHANGING GEAR FOR TRANSFORMER
1 Make
2 Type/Designation
3. Rated Voltage kV
4. Maximum rated through current Amps
5 Step voltage Volts
6. Range and No. of steps
7. Location of the taps with respect to the

terminals of the tapped winding
8. Time to complete tap changing

operation from one step to another :
(a) on auto operation Sec.

(b) on manual operation Sec.
9. Whether technical and descriptive YES/NO

particulars of the OLTC, enclosed.
10. Separate conservator and Oil surge YES/NO

relay provided
11. Remote indoor control cabinet (RICC) YES/NO

general arrangement drawing
SHEET 71 OF
enclosed.
12. Control and monitoring of cooler YES/NO
control equipment provided, if
specified?
13. Type test certificates are enclosed? YES/NO
DATASHEET A: NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR
SL.N DESCRIPTION UNIT TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

O.
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 APPLICATION/DESIGNATION POWER TRANSFORMER
1.2 QUANTITY NOS. AS PER THE REQUIREMENT
1.3 TYPE MATERIAL
a) WIRE WOUND (Stainless Steel) NOS.
b) STRIP TYPE ELEMENT
1.4 INSTALLATION OUTDOOR
1.5 ENCLOSURE TOTALLY ENCLOSED DUST AND

VERMIN PROOF.
a) SHEET STEEL THICKNESS 2 MM
b) TANK TYPE WEATHER PROOF WITH YES/NO Yes
ALUMINIUM COVERS
c) TANK TYPE WITH GALVANISED YES/NO Yes
SCREEN COVERS
d) SAFETY SCREENED ENCLOSURE YES/NO Yes
FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION
IP 55
e) DEGREE OF PROTECTION
Shade 7032
f) COLOUR SHADE
1.6 COOLING NATURALLY AIR COOLED

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
a) AREA CLASSIFICATION
SHEET 72 OF

O.
b) GAS GROUP
c) TEMPERATURE CLASS
2.0 RATINGS
2.1 RATING kW *
2.2 OHMIC VALUE OHMS *
2.3 TAPS % *
2.4 RATED CURRENT A *
2.5 DURATION OF RATING
CONTINUOUS / 60 SECS.
2.6 LINE TO NEUTRAL VOLTAGE V *
2.7 INSULATION CLASS V *
2.8 VOLTAGE CLASS OF STAND INSULATORS kV *
3.0 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
a) REQUIRED AND PART OF YES/NO
SUPPLY
b) RATIO A
c) RATING VA
d) CLASS
4.0 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS *
4.1 INCOMING TO TERMINAL BOX
a) CABLE TYPE
b) SIZE mm2
c) OVERALL DIAMETER mm
d) GLAND OR ENTRY TYPE & SIZE
4.2 OUTGOING FROM RESISTOR ALL TAPS OF RESISTORS SHALL BE
BROUGHT TO TERMINAL BOX
4.3 OUTGOING FROM TERMINAL BOX *
a) CABLE TYPE
b) SIZE mm2
c) OVERALL DIAMETER mm
SHEET 73 OF

O.
d) GLAND OR ENTRY TYPE & SIZE
4.4 RESISTOR EARTHING BUSHING TERMINAL
SUITABLE FOR CONDUCTOR OF
a) MATERIAL
b) SIZE
a) NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR IEEE 32
b) CURRENT TRANSFORMER IEC 185
c) DEGREE OF PROTECTION PROVIDED IS 2147
BY ENCLOSURES
DATASHEET B: NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR
SL.N DESCRIPTION UNIT BIDDER

O
1.0 NAME OF MANUFACTURER
2.0 MAXIMUM CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY Amps

FOR 60 SECONDS
3.0 TEMPERATURE RISE (NOT EXCEEDING SAFE

TEMPERATURE OF INSULATION), WHEN
CARRYING:-
0
A) MAXIMUM CURRENT FOR 60 SECONDS C
0
B) CONTINUOUS RATED CURRENT C
4.0 CHANGE IN RESISTANCE WITH %

TEMPERATURE increase
5.0 LIST OF TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT Yes/No

ENCLOSED
SHEET 74 OF
SL.N DESCRIPTION UNIT BIDDER

O
7.0 TOTAL WEIGHT OF EACH RESISTOR Kg.
8.0 GENERAL OUTLINE DIMENSIONED Yes/No

DRAWING ENCLOSED WITH THE BID,
SHOWING THE RESISTOR WITH ALL ITS Dwg.No.
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES IN PLAN,
FRONT AND SIDE ELEVATIONS AND OTHER
RELEVANT DETAILS.
9.0 NEUTRAL EARTHING RESISTOR ELEMENT

MATERIAL GRADE, AS PER APPLICABLE
STANDARDS.
DATA SHEET A: CAST RESIN DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
SR.N DESCRIPTION UNIT TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

O.
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Application/Designation Distribution
1.2 Quantity required As per the project requirement
1.3 Installation (Indoor/Outdoor) Indoor
1.4 Degree of protection of Enclosure IP – 54 or better
2.0 RATINGS
2.1 Rating KVA *
2.2 Number of phases & Frequency 3 Phase & 50 HZ
2.3 Type of cooling AN

SHEET 75 OF

O.
2.4 No load voltage HV V 11000
LV V 433
2.5 Vector Group Dyn11
2.6 Percentage Impedance % *
3.0 WINDING
3.1 Material of conductor Refer Cl. 5.0
3.2 Class of insulation (LV/HV) Refer Cl. 5.0
3.3 Method of connection- HV Delta
3.4 Method of connection- LV Star
4.0 SYSTEM VOLTAGE
4.1 Nominal system voltage HV V 11000
LV V 433
4.2 Highest system voltage HV V 12000
LV V 457
4.3 Fault Level on HV side KA 50
4.4 Fault Level on LV side KA 50
5.0 NEUTRAL EARTHING
5.1 System Neutral (A – Effectively earthed; B –

Resonant; C – Non effectively earthed; D -
Isolated
a) HV NA
SHEET 76 OF

O.
b) LV A
5.2 Transformer Neutral (A – Effectively earthed;

B – Resonant; C – Non effectively earthed; D
– Isolated)
a) HV NA
b) LV A
6.0 INSULATION WITHSTAND
6.1 Impulse (1.2/50 microsec/wave) HV 75
6.2 Power Frequency HV kV 28
(Dry & Wet) LV kV 3
6.3 Noise at distance of 1.0 meter db 60 dBA

0
7.1 Reference Ambient C Refer project data
0
7.2 Winding temp rise C *
8.0 TAP CHANGING LINKS
8.1 Taps required Yes/No *
8.2 Tappings on windings HV/LV *
8.3 Total tapping range + 5 % to -5% in step of 2.5%
8.4 Steps % *
9.0 EARTHING TERMINAL
9.1 Material of Conductor As per the standard

SHEET 77 OF

O.
9.2 Size of conductor As per the standard
9.3 Whether cable box to be provided for Yes/ No

connecting the cables between neutral and
No
external earth pits
10.0 PAINTING
10.1 Paint Type
10.2 Paint Shade:
External
Internal
11.0 HV Cable Box- Cable Entry (Top/Bottom) Bottom
12.0 LV termination arrangement(cable box) Cable
12.1 If cable box - cable entry (Top/ bottom) Bottom
12.2 If Bus duct- entry type (Top/side) Bottom
13.0 Neutral CTs *
13.1 Quantity
13.2 Ratio
13.3 VA Burden
13.4 Accuracy Class
13.5 Knee point voltage
13.6 Magnetizing current at knee-point voltage
14.0 Losses
SHEET 78 OF

O.
14.1 Total Losses (Inclusive of Tolerance) kW *
15.0 Over fluxing capabilities provided as per Yes/ No Yes

clause -11.3
*Bidder To Indicate
DATA SHEET B: CAST RESIN DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
Bidder
Sl.No Description Unit
.
1.0 Manufacturer
Type
Reference standard
2.0 Full load rating kVA
3.0 Number of Phases One/

Three
4.0 Rated no-load voltage
a) HV kV
b) LV kV
5.0 Type of Cooling
6.0 Rated percentage impedance %
7.0 Winding connections
a) HV
b) LV
SHEET 79 OF
Bidder
.
c) Vector group
8.0 Tapping on winding
a) On load/off load tap links
b) Total tapping range %
c) Tapping steps
d) On HV/LV windings
9.0 Windings
Winding conductor material (HV/LV)
Current density 9HV/LV A/mm2
Type of insulation
Insulation class
Insulation material
10.0 1.2/50 µ sec. Impulse voltage withstand
HV
LV
11.0 One minute Power frequency withstand

voltage
HV
LV
0
12.0 Maximum temperature rise of windings C
13.0 Maximum guaranteed Load loss at rated kW

SHEET 80 OF
Bidder
.
current at max winding temperature , )
AN cooling
AF cooling
14.0 No-load losses (core loss and dielectric kW

loss) at 100% rated voltage and
frequency, inclusive of tolerance as per
applicable standard
15.0 Cooling equipment power loss
16.0 Magnetization current at rated voltage

and frequency in percent of full load %
current
17.0 Noise db
18.0 Weight
Windings Kg
Core Kg
Total Kg
Efficiency at max winding temperature
19.0 %
At full load, at UPF and 0.8PF Lag
At 75% load, at UPF and 0.8PF Lag
At 50% load, at UPF and 0.8PF Lag
20.0 Maximum Flux Density
At rated voltage Wb/m2
At 110% of rated voltage Wb/m2
21.0 is transformer suitable for overfluxing Yes/No

conditions specified in clause 11.3)
22.0 Acoustic power level dB (A)

SHEET 81 OF
Bidder
.
Enclosure
Thickness of sheet metal
Degree of Protection
Terminations
a)HV Terminal arrangement
b)LV Terminal arrangement
LV Neutral earthing arrangement
23.0 Withstand capability for high inductive

loads((high current, short time,
unbalance loads)
24.0 whether special care is to be taken for Yes/No

electro-magnetic interference caused by
the distribution transformers.
26.0 Drawing number of the GA enclosed with
the bid, showing the transformer with all
its fittings and accessories in plan, front
and side elevations and other relevant
details including transformer enclosure
specs & dwgs.
DATASHEET A: HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 APPLICATION AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
1.2 NUMBERS REQUIRED AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
1.3 TYPE OF MOTOR SQUIRREL CAGE
SHEET 82 OF
1.4 SUPPLY SYSTEM FAULT LEVEL kA REFER DESIGN DATA
1.5 TYPE OF EARTHING OF SUPPLY REFER DESIGN DATA

SYSTEM NEUTRAL
2.0 RATING
2.1 RATED OUTPUT : kW AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT

2.2 RATED VOLTAGE : V 11KV
2.3 NUMBER OF PHASES & 3 PHASES & 50HZ

FREQUENCY
2.4 SUPPLY CONDITION Refer design specification
2.5 SYNCHRONOUS SPEED RPM AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT

3.0 DUTY AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
3.1 TYPE OF DUTY (CLAUSE 9.2 AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
OF IS:325 OR EQUIVALENT)
3.2 AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
POWER REQUIRED BY LOAD
kW
4.0 METHOD OF STARTING AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
5.0 INSULATION AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT

5.1 CLASS OF INSULATION F
5.2 REF. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg.C 50
5.3 TEMPERATURE RISE OF WINDING deg.C CORRESPONDING TO CLASS – B

INSULATION
BY WDG RESISTANCE METHOD
6.0 INSTALLATION
6.1 LOCATION AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
6.2 HAZARDOUS AREA DIVISION AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT

(IS:5572 OR EQUIVALENT)
6.3 ATMOSPHERE SALT LADEN
7.0 ENCLOSURE
7.1 TYPE OF COOLING (IS 6362) AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
SHEET 83 OF
7.2 DESIGNATION FOR DEGREE OF AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT

PROTECTION (IS 4691)
8.0 MAIN TERMINAL BOX
8.1 LOCATION AS SEEN FROM NON- RIGHT/LEFT*
DRIVE END:
8.2 PHASE SEGGREGATED YES/NO *

8.4 RATINGS
(a) SHORT TIME kA(RMS) *
i. CURRENT :
ii. DURATION :
SEC
(b) DYNAMIC :
kA(PEAK) *
8.5 EXTERNAL CABLE DETAILS
8.5.1 TYPE *
8.5.2 SIZE & NO OF CORES *
8.6 EARTHING CONDUCTORS *
8.6.1 MATERIAL *
8.6.2 SIZE *
TO BE FILLED IF MOTORS ARE BOUGHT

9.0 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
SEPERATELY
HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL/
9.1 SHAFT ORIENTATION
HOLLOW VERTICAL*
MOUNTING SYMBOL (IS:2253 *
9.2
OR EQUIVALENT)
ROTATION AS SEEN FROM CLOCKWISE/ANTI-CLOCKWISE*
9.3
NON-DRIVE END
9.4 TYPE OF BEARING
9.4.1 DRIVE END *
SHEET 84 OF
9.4.2 NON DRIVE END *

9.5 WHETHER BED PLATE REQUIRED YES
9.6 MOTOR SHALL MATCH THE
FOLLOWING TORQUE
REQUIREMENTS OF THE DRIVEN
EQUIPMENT:
a) *
STARTING TORUE
b) FULL LOAD (RATED) TORQUE *

c) PULL OUT TORQUE *
d) PULL UP TORQUE *
9.7 COUPLING BY MOTOR SUPPLIER *
9.8 IF YES, TYPE OF COUPLING *
10.0 COLOUR SHADES OF PAINT *
11 WHETHER CTs FOR DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION REQUIRED
FOR MOTORS >1000 kW YES
11.1 C.T. PARTICULARS :
a) 3 CTs, ONE IN THE *
NEUTRAL LEAD OF EACH
PHASE
b) RATIO *
c) CLASS PS *
d) KNEE POINT VOLTAGE KPV *
e) MAX. R.C.T. SECONDARY OHMS *
WINDING RESISTANCE
f) MAX. EXCITING CURRENT *
AT 1/2 KPV
g) CLASS OF INSULATION *
12 a) WHETHER VIBRATION PADS YES
SHEET 85 OF

REQUIRED
13 TEMPERATURE
DETECTORS/INDICATOR
13.1 EMBEDDED TEMPERATURE Nos *
DETECTORS FOR WINDING
REQUIRED
13.2 EMBEDDED TEMPERATURE Nos *
DETECTORS FOR BEARINGS
REQUIRED
13.3 BEARING THERMOMETERS Nos *
FOR DRIVING END & NON
DRIVING ENDS REQUIRED
13.4 EMBEDDED TEMPERATURE *
DETECTORS FOR HEAT Nos
EXCHANGERS
14 SPACE HEATERS FOR YES/NO
MOTORS REQUIRED YES
DATASHEET B: HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SL.NO DESCRIPTION UNIT BIDDER

.
1.0 Application
2.0 Manufacturer
3.0 Applicable Standards
4.0 Rated
(a) Output kW
(b) Speed RPM
(c) Type
(d) Frame size
5.0 Type of Duty (IS 325 or equivalent)
SHEET 86 OF

.
6.0(a) Supply Conditions
i) Rated Voltage V
ii) No. of Phases
iii) Frequency Hz
(b) Allowable Variations in
i) Voltage %
ii) Frequency %
iii) Combined %
7.0 Current
(a) Full Load Amps
(b) Starting % FL
8.0 Method of Starting
9.0 Class of Insulation
10.0(a Ref. Ambient Temp. deg.C
)
(b) Temp. rise of windings by Res. Method
i) Stator deg.C
ii) Rotor deg.C
(c) Temp. rise of bearings deg.C
11.0 Degree of Protection
(IS 4691 or equivalent)
12.0 Suitable for Outdoor Operation Yes/No
13.0 Normal winding connection Star/Delt
a
(i) Stator
(ii) Rotor
14.0 Space Heating Yes/No
SHEET 87 OF

.
Space heater Rating 1 No.
15.0 Terminal box
(i) Type & No. of Terminals brought Out
(ii) Fault withstand capacity at rated voltage &
duration
Whether separate Terminal boxes provided
(iii) Yes/No
for RTD,BTD, Space Heater
16.0 Dimensional Dwg. Enclosed Yes/No
Permissible No. of equally spread starts per
(a) No.
hour under normal service conditions
Permissible No. of starts in quick succession
(b) No.
with cold machine at room temp.
(c) Permissible No. of hot restarts No.
(d) Starts per 8 hour period No.
24 hour period
CTs for differential protection (when
18.0
specified in Data Sheet-A)
a) Type & Make
b) Ratio, accuracy class & burden
c) Class of insulation F/H
d) Rated voltage and frequency kV,Hz
e) Applicable standard
f) Dimensions of CTs
g) Separate terminal box for CTs provided Yes/No
h) If provided, dimensions of terminal box
19.0 Motor bearings
a) Permissible temperature rise for bearings deg.C
b) Design ambient temp assumed for above deg.C
c) Bearing Make/No.
20.0 Maximum vibration mm/ sec
SHEET 88 OF

.
21.0 Max. value of induced shaft voltage. mv
22.0 Maximum Noise level dB
DATASHEET A: LOW VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 APPLICATION AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
1.2 NUMBERS REQUIRED AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
1.3 TYPE OF MOTOR SQUIRREL CAGE
1.4 SUPPLY SYSTEM FAULT LEVEL KA 50
1.5 TYPE OF EARTHING OF SUPPLY

SOLIDLY EARTHED
SYSTEM NEUTRAL
2.0 RATING
2.1 RATED OUTPUT : kW AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT

2.2 RATED VOLTAGE : V 415
2.3 NUMBER OF PHASES &

3PHASE,50Hz
FREQUENCY
2.4 SUPPLY CONDITION REFER DESIGN SPECIFICATION
2.5 SYNCHRONOUS SPEED RPM AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
3.0 DUTY
3.1 TYPE OF DUTY (CLAUSE 9.2 OF
AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
IS:325 OR EQUIVALENT)
3.2 POWER REQUIRED BY LOAD kW AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
3.3 ENERGY EFFICIENCY CLASS AS PER IE1/IE2

IS-12615-2011 IE1(only for VFD driven motors), IE2(for
other motors)
4.0 METHOD OF STARTING D.O.L./STAR DELTA/ SOFT
START/OTHER
5.0 INSULATION
SHEET 89 OF
5.1 CLASS OF INSULATION CLASS F
5.2 REF. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg.C 50
5.3 TEMPERATURE RISE OF WINDINGBY Corresponding to Class B Insulation

deg.C
WDG RESISTANCE METHOD
6.0 INSTALLATION
6.1 LOCATION Indoor/Outdoor
6.2 HAZARDOUS AREA DIVISION

NA
(IS:5572 OR EQUIVALENT)
6.3 ATMOSPHERE DUSTY & SALT LADEN
7.0 ENCLOSURE BY BIDDER

7.1 TYPE OF COOLING (IS 6362)
7.2 DESIGNATION FOR DEGREE OF
PROTECTION (IS 4691)
8.0 MAIN TERMINAL BOX
8.1 LOCATION AS SEEN FROM NON-
TOP/RIGHT/LEFT
DRIVE END:
RATINGS
8.2 (a) SHORT TIME
i. CURRENT : kA(RMS) 50
ii. DURATION : SECS. 1

kA
(b) DYNAMIC : 105
(PEAK)
8.3 EXTERNAL CABLE DETAILS
8.3.1 TYPE AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
8.3.2 SIZE & NO OF CORES AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
8.4 EARTHING CONDUCTORS AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
8.4.1 MATERIAL AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
8.4.2 SIZE AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT

SHEET 90 OF
9.0 TO BE FILLED IF MOTORS ARE BOUGHT

MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
SEPERATELY
9.1 HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL/HOLLOW
SHAFT ORIENTATION
VERTICAL
9.2 MOUNTING SYMBOL (IS:2253OR
BY BIDDER
EQUIVALENT)
9.3 ROTATION AS SEEN FROM NON-
BI-DIRECTIONAL
DRIVE END
9.4 TYPE OF BEARING BY BIDDER
9.4.1 DRIVE END
9.4.2 NON DRIVE END
9.5 WHETHER BED PLATE REQUIRED YES
9.6 MOTOR SHALL MATCH THE
FOLLOWING TORQUE
BY BIDDER
REQUIREMENTS OF THE DRIVEN
EQUIPMENT:
a) STARTING TORUE
b) FULL LOAD (RATED) TORQUE
c) PULL OUT TORQUE
d) PULL UP TORQUE
9.7 COUPLING BY MOTOR SUPPLIER AS PER PROJECT RQUIREMENT
9.8 IF YES, TYPE OF COUPLING
10.0 COLOUR SHADES OF PAINT AS PER APPLICABLE STANDARD
11 WHETHER VIBRATION PADS
YES/NO
REQUIRED
12 TEMPERATURE
DETECTORS/INDICATORS
12.1 EMBEDDED TEMPERATURE
DETECTORS FOR WINDING YES/NO
REQUIRED
SHEET 91 OF
12.2 EMBEDDED TEMPERATURE

DETECTORS FOR BEARINGS YES/NO
REQUIRED
12.3 BEARING THERMOMETERS FOR
DRIVING END & NON DRIVING YES/NO
ENDS REQUIRED
13 SPACE HEATERS FOR MOTORS
REQUIRED (FOR MOTORS GREATER YES
THAN 30KW )
DATASHEET B: LOW VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
1.0 Application
2.0 Manufacturer
3.0 Country of Origin
4.0 Applicable Standards
5.0 Efficiency Category( For Energy Efficient
Motors only)
6.0 Rated
(a) Output kW
(b) Speed RPM
(c) Frame size
7.0 Type of Duty (IS 325 or equivalent)
8.0 (a) Supply Conditions
i) Rated Voltage V
ii) No. of Phases No(s).
iii) Frequency Hz
(b) Allowable Variations in
i) Voltage %
ii) Frequency %
iii) Combined %
9.0 Current
(a) Full Load Amps
SHEET 92 OF
(b) Starting % FL
10.0 Method of Starting
11.0 Insulation
11.1 Class of Insulation
11.2 Whether Tropicalised Yes/No
12.0 (a) Ref. Ambient Temp. deg.C
(b) Temp. rise of windings by Res. Method
i) Stator deg.C
ii) Rotor deg.C
(c) Temp. rise of bearings deg.C
13.0 Degree of Protection (IS 4691 or equivalent)
14.0 Suitable for Outdoor Operation Yes/No
15.0 Normal winding connection Star/Delt
a
(i) Stator
(ii) Rotor
16.0 Space heater Rating Terminal box Watts
(i) Type & No. of Terminals brought Out
(ii) Fault withstand capacity at rated
voltage & duration
(iii) Maximum size of Aluminium cores X
armoured cable that can be Sq mm
Terminated
17.0 Dimensional Dwg. Enclosed Yes/No
18.0 Torque
a) Full load torque kg-m
b) Starting torque % FLT
c) Pull out Torque % FLT
d) Pull up Torque % FLT
19.0 9 Efficiency (%)
a) Full Load Efficiency
b) 75% Load Efficiency
c) 50% Load Efficiency
d) 25% Load Efficiency
SHEET 93 OF
20 LUBRICATION ARRANGEMENT
DATASHEET A: VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE(VFD)
S.NO DESCRIPTION VFD
1.0 Type of drive Inverter controlled AC drives.

1.1 Rating of the drive (V) As per the requirement
1.2 Quantity As per project requirement
1.3 Quadrants of operation Single Quadrant, Quadrant-I
2.0 Quantity As per the project requirement
3.0 Power supply As per the project requirement
4.0 Voltage tolerance As per the design specification
5.0 Frequency tolerance As per the design specification
6.0 Combined voltage and As per the design specification
Frequency variation
7.0 Environmental conditions
8.0 Location Indoor
A) Whether in air conditioned room No
B) If no:
0
Average ambient temperature c 50
Relative humidity % Max. RH = 75%
Vibration
9.0 Type of cooling for drive panel Natural cooling/forced cooling with fan
10.0 Cable
A) Size and type Will be furnished later
B) Entry As per the requirement
11.0 Motor protection
11.1 Instantaneous over current Yes
11.2 Motor overload protection Yes

11.3 Over voltage / under voltage Yes
11.4 Momentary power loss Yes
11.5 Stall prevention Yes
12.0 Control characteristics for
AC drives
A) Control method As per the project requirement
B) Freq. Control range Widest range possible shall be mentioned
SHEET 94 OF
by the bidder.
C) Accelerate/decelerate time Widest range possible shall be mentioned
by the bidder.
D) Over Torque / Overload capability - 150% rated current of motor for one
Constant torque operation minute
E) Over Torque / Overload capability - 115% rated current of motor for one
Variable torque minute
13.0 Harmonics limitations
THD Within 5%
14.0 Controls on drive panel / through pushbutton
A) Start / stop Yes
B) Speed raiser / lower Yes
C) Auto / manual Yes
D) Local / remote Yes
E) Drive by-pass Yes
F) Emergency stop Yes
G) Annunciation Yes
15.0 Speed control
A) Speed Range 10- 100%
C) Constant torque/constant power Both required and shall be of
Programmable type
D) Speed accuracy Better than + 0.5%
E) Closed loop/open loop Both required and shall be of
Programmable type
f) If tachogenerator used (for As per the project requirement
closed loop)
G) Accel./deccel. Time Widest range shall be mentioned by
bidder
H) Type of tacho-generator Digital (pulse type) / analogue (shaft
mounted)
J) Is remote operation required Yes
- If yes, is it through PLC
16.0 Miscellaneous
Soft-start Yes
Flying restart Yes
Auto restart Yes
Kinetic buffering Yes
17.0 Indication on drive panel (minimum)
A) Motor running Yes
SHEET 95 OF
B) Motor stopped / trip Yes

C) AC mains ‘ON’ Yes
D) System ready to start Yes
18.0 Metering
Digital display of the following
Minimum parameters on the drive
Panels:-
A) Input AC voltage Yes
B) Input AC frequency Yes
C) Input AC current Yes
D) Output voltage Yes
E) Output current vsd/bypass Yes
F) Output frequency Yes
G) Motor speed Yes
H)Necessary transducers shall be provided Yes
with 4-20mA output for
indicating motor speed & current
in PLC
DATASHEET B: VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE(VFD)
S.N DESCRIPTION VFD

O
1.0 General
1.1 Maximum Temperature
1.2 Design Maximum Ambient Temperature
1.3 Design Minimum Ambient Temperature
1.4 System Conditions
1.4.1 Rated Voltage
1.4.2 Rated Frequency
1.4.3 Combined V & F Variation
1.4.4 Fault Level
1.4.5 System Earthing
SHEET 96 OF
S.N DESCRIPTION VFD

O
2.0 General
2.1 Manufacturer
2.2 Application
2.3 Model
2.4 Quantity
3.0 Type and Rating
3.1 Inverter type Voltage/current fed
3.2 Mode of operation
(i) Voltage fed (a) PWM
(b) Any other, specify
(ii) Current fed Forced/Load commutated
3.3 Control System
(a) Type Open/closed loop
(b) Feed back system
3.4 Rated input power supply
3.5 Fault level (KA)
3.6 Applicable motor rating
(a) Constant torque
(b) Variable torque
3.7 Configuration
(a) Rectifier
(b) Inverter
3.8 IGBT
(a) Break down voltage (V)
(b) Rated current (A)
(c) Switching frequency (Hz)
(d) Switching losses (%)
(e) Over-current capability as multiple of rated
current
(f) Maximum junction temperature (°C)
SHEET 97 OF
S.N DESCRIPTION VFD

O
(g) Turn ON delay
(h) Turn OFF time
3.9 Rectifier
(a) Pulse number
(b) Harmonic content
(c) Output power factor
(d) Displacement factor
3.10 Choke
(a) Value of inductance
(b) Time constant
(c) Voltage rating
(d) Current rating
(e) Insulation class
(f) Cooling
(g) Material
3.11 Capacitor
(a) Value
(b) Voltage rating
(c) Cooling
(d) Type
4.0 Performance
4.1 Rated output voltage (V)
(a) Range
(b) Tolerance
4.2 Continuous output (KVA)
(a) Constant torque
(b) Variable torque
4.3 Rated output current (A)
(a) Constant torque
(b) Variable torque
SHEET 98 OF
S.N DESCRIPTION VFD

O
4.4 Rated output frequency (Hz)
(a) Range
(b) Tolerance
(c) Resolution
4.5 Rated efficiency (%)
4.6 Motor de-rating applicable for continuous use
at
(a) Full load
(b) Low speed
4.7 Over load capacity
4.8 Time for (sec)
(a) Acceleration
(b) Deceleration
(c) Auto re-start delay
4.9 Voltage/frequency characteristic
4.10 Starting torque
4.11 Starts per hour by switching
(a) Supply
(b) Drive
4.12 Distortion factor of output voltage
(a) Harmonic supression filters used. Yes/No
(b) Maximum and minimum values :
4.13 Electro magnetic compatibility
4.14 Vibration
4.15 Modulation index
4.16 Full load power factor
4.17 Frequency setting signal
5.0 Controls
5.1 System start
5.2 System stop
SHEET 99 OF
S.N DESCRIPTION VFD

O
5.3 Speed Raise
5.4 Speed lower
5.5 Drive frequency setting
5.6 Auto Manual operation
a) At panel
b) At remote control
5.7 Local/remote operation for controls
a) At panel
b) At remote
5.8 Remote breaker trip
6.0 Construction
6.1 VFD panel
(a) Material
(b) Enclosure IP
(c) Paint
(d) Max. temp. rise allowed
(e) Cooling fan provided Yes/No
(f) Space heater provided Yes/No
(g) Components as specified provided Yes/No
6.2 Dimensions (All panels )
(a) Length
(b) Height
(c) Depth
(d) Weight of cubicle
6.3 Local operator panel
(a) Material
(b) Enclosure IP
(c) Type Flame proof/increased safety/ Industrial
(d) Paint
(e) Components as specified provided. Yes/No
SHEET 100 OF
S.N DESCRIPTION VFD

O
7.0 Motor Details
7.1 Drive system
7.2 Type of motor
7.3 KW rating
7.4 No. of motors
7.5 Starting condition
7.6 Frequency range
7.7 Voltage range
7.8 Full load current
7.9 Full load PF
a) At Lowest KW
b) At Highest KW
7.10 Starting current
8.0 General
8.1 Control supply voltage & Aux. power
requirement
8.2 Requirement of earthing cable between motor
& drive
8.3 Speed/torque characteristic furnished Yes/No
8.4 Standard functions provided (Specify)
8.5 Optional functions provided
(a) Micro processor based (Digital) control Yes/No
system:
(b) Auto voltage boost Yes/No
(c) Auto slip compensation
(d) Extended speed range
(e) Energy saving option
(f) Braking
(g) Four quadrant operation Yes/No
(h) Trip history monitor Yes/No
SHEET 101 OF
S.N DESCRIPTION VFD

O
(i) By-pass arrangement to inverter Yes/No
(j) Auto torque boost Yes/No
(k) Specify other functions/features :
8.6 Protective functions provided (Specify
TRIP/ALARM separately)
8.7 Acceleration/deceleration control Automatic/manual
8.8 Max. cable cross section (mm²)
8.9 Max. motor cable length (m)
8.10 List of setting constants furnished Yes / No
DATA SHEET B: CABLES
Sl. Unit Bidder

No. Description
1.0 Name of the Manufacturer
2.0 Conductor (stranded/solid)
2.1 Form-circular/segmented
2.2 Nominal diameter in mm
2.3 Effective cross sectional area sq.mm.
2.4 Rated current at 90%, 100%, 110% at final temp
of 75 deg C for Al and at 90 deg C for Cu cable
3.0 Whether cores identified by Numerals for
cables with 5 cores and above
4.0 Whether incremental running lengths are
marked on cable at every 1m interval
5.0 Finished cable
5.1 Diameter under armour in mm
5.2 Diameter over armour in mm
5.3 Overall diameter in mm
6.0 Whether cables will carry ISI stamp
6.1 If not explain reasons
7.0 Cable drums
7.1 Length of cables in cable drum and tolerance
7.2 Weight of cable drum without cables
SHEET 102 OF
Sl. Unit Bidder

No. Description
7.3 Weight of cable drum with cables
7.4 Drum Diameter (inner and outer as per IS)
8.0 Type of end sealing
9.0 Any other details the VENDOR would like to
furnish?
9.1 List of deviations if any from specification, data
sheet-A and applicable standard furnished?
9.2 Conductor screen
9.3 Insulation
9.4 Insulation screen
9.5 Sheath
9.6 Armour
DATA SHEET B: HV CABLE TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS
1.0 MANUFACTURER
3.0 GUARANTEED PARTICULARS
For the nominal (Phase to phase) System kV
Voltages
3.1 (a) A.C withstand voltage (Ph / Ground) kV
for dry
Time duration Mins
(b) A.C withstand voltage (Ph / Ground) kV
for wet
Time duration Mins
3.2 Partial discharge at 2 Uo pC
3.3 Impulse withstand, 1.2 / 50 s kV
3.4 Load cycle test
(a) Each cycle – heating - duration Hrs
0
Temperature C
Cooling duration Hrs.
(b) Number of cycles
(c) Continuous phase to ground voltage kV
withstand
3.5 Thermal withstand short circuit current 1 kA
SHEET 103 OF
sec.
3.6 (a)Dynamic short circuit withstand kA/peak
(b) DC voltage withstand kA/peak
3.7 Type test report for all the tests enclosed Yes / No.
3.8 Water Tightness conducted Yes / No.
4.0 KIT PARTICULARS
4.1 Material of the tubing / moulded parts
4.2 Method of stress control
4.3 Method of environmental seal
4.4 List of items included in the kit
(a) For terminations
(b) For joints
(c) Whether heating device included Yes / No.

(i) How many such device Qty.
included
0
(d) Allowable kit storage temperature C
(e) Kit shelf life Years
5.0 CABLE TERMINATIONS / JOINTS Yes / No
INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENCLOSED
DATA SHEET B: CABLING ACCESSORIES, CABLE TRAYS, CONDUITS & PIPES
Sl.N Description Unit Bidder

o.
1.0 CABLE GLANDS
1.1 COMPRESSION GLANDS
(a) Manufacturer’s Name
(b) Material
(c) Type
(d) Dimensioned drawings, catalogues, YES/NO
SHEET 104 OF

o.
literature enclosed
1.2 FLAME-PROOF GLANDS
(b) Material
(c) Type
(d) Standard to which conforms
(e) Dimensioned drawings, catalogues, YES/NO
literature enclosed
(f) Approval certificate of relevant YES/NO
authority enclosed
2.0 CABLE LUGS
2.1 Manufacturer’s Name
2.2 Material
2.3 Current Rating
2.4 Dimensioned drawings, literature enclosed YES/NO
2.5 Applicable standard
3.0 SINGLE CORE CABLE CLAMPS
(b) Material
(c) Whether all bolts, nuts and washers
supplied
4.0 CONDUITS/PIPES Metallic
Non-Metallic
Rigid/Flexible
(b) Material
(c) Applicable standards
(d) Range of sizes and wall thicknesses
(e) Standard length in metres
(f) Couplings included YES/NO
(g) Dimensioned drawings catalogues, YES/NO
literature enclosed
5.0 JUNCTION/MARSHALLING BOXES
(b) Material and gauge
(c) Overall dimensions
(d) Dimensioned drawings and views YES/NO
showing internal arrangement, cover
details and mounting arrangement
SHEET 105 OF

o.
enclosed
(e) Name, type and current rating of
terminal blocks
6.0 PUSH BUTTON STATIONS
(b) Metal Enclosure
i) Die-cast aluminium/sheet metal
of 2mm thickness
ii) Degree of Protection
iii) Painting, inscription label, YES/NO
earthing terminals as specified
(c) Gland Plate and Cable Glands provided YES/NO
(d) Facility for fixing on wall/structure YES/NO
provided
(e) No. of contacts
i) Normally Open
ii) Normally Closed
(f) Contact Rating
i) At 415V AC A
ii) At 110V AC A
iii) At 220V DC A
(g) Terminal blocks with identification YES/NO
nos. provided for external
connections.
7.0 CABLE TRAYS
(b) Thickness of sheet steel used for tray mm
fabrication
(c) Trays are Galvanised YES/NO
(d) Other requirements as per YES/NO
Specification
8.0 POWER RECEPTACLES
(b) Catalogue Enclosed YES/NO
9.0 MOTOR TERMINAL / ADOPTER BOXES

(b) Material & Gauge
(c) Overall dimensions
SHEET 106 OF

o.
(d) Dimensional drawings & views showing YES/NO
internal arrangement, cover details and
mounting arrangements enclosed
(e) Current rating of terminals
(f) Clearances:
Phase to Phase
Phase to Earth
(g) Partitions provided between phases YES/NO
(for HT Motors only)
DATA SHEET A: UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Sl.No Description Technical parameter
1.1 Application As per the project requirement

1.2 Power rating at load PF 0.8 lagging To be decided by bidder
1.3 Make -
1.4 Quantity (nos.) To be decided by bidder
1.5 Method of energy storage Lead-Acid plante type Battery back -up
1.6 Type IGBT Transformer less UPS
1.7 Installation Indoor, Natural ventilated
1.8 Ambient Temperature (0C) Ref Project data
1.9 Relative Humidity Ref Project data

2.0
ENCLOSURE
2.1 Sheet steel thickness 2mm, CRCA for doors and 1.6mm CRCA
for side covers
2.2 Degree of protection as per IS-13947 IP – 31
2.3 Painting
- Exterior RAL-7035
- Interior Glossy white
2.4 Cable Entry Bottom/Top
2.5 Acoustic Noise level 60 –70 dBA Measured at a distance of 1m
2.6 Space heater, 240V, 1 Ph Required
3.0 UPS SYSTEM
SHEET 107 OF
3.1 Input
3.1.1 Supply voltage 415 V, 3 PH, 4 W, 50 Hz AC Effectively
earthed
3.1.2 Allowable Variation
(a) Voltage Refer design specification
(b) Frequency Refer design specification
(c) Combined voltage + frequency Refer design specification
3.2 Output
3.2.1 Output voltage To be decided by bidder
3.2.2 AC voltage accuracy (steady state) over + 1% for balanced load
entire load, load PF & DC voltage range.
3.2.3 Transient voltage regulation + 3% at 100% load step
3.2.4 Transient recovery Return to steady state condition within 20
ms after disturbance.
3.2.5 Voltage wave form Sinusoidal
3.2.6 Range of adjustment of AC output voltage + 5% at rated load
3.2.7 AC Harmonic content(THD-Voltage) <3% for 100% load
<4.5% for 75% load
<5% for 50% load
<8% for 25% load
3.2.8 Phase displacement for three phase 1200 + 10 for balance load 1200 + 30 for
output 20% unbalanced load.
3.2.9 Nominal frequency 50 Hz
3.2.10 Frequency regulation (Without static by- + 0.1 Hz
pass source)
3.2.11 Frequency regulation (With static by-pass 2 Hz
source)
3.4 Static by pass switch Required
4.0 BATTERY
4.1 No. of 100% capacity batteries 2 sets per UPS
4.2 Type of battery cell Plante type batteries
4.3 DC link voltage To be chosen by Bidder
4.5 Battery backup time 2 Hours
4.6 Mounting Arrangement Open Type & Multi Tier
5.0 RECTIFIER
5.1 Rectifier unit IGBT
SHEET 108 OF
5.2 Parallel Operation Required

5.3 Recharge time on battery boost charge As per Battery manufacturers
recommendation
6.0 INVERTER
6.1 Overload Capacity Provided by bidder
6.2 Synchronising
- Between inverters Required
- Between inverters and standby supply Required
6.3 Parallel Operation Required
6.4 Synchronising Range 50 2 Hz(adjustable)
7.0 STATIC SWITCH

7.1 Maximum transfer time To be provided by bidder
7.2 Short time current rating 1000% for 20 milli seconds
8.0 CIRCUIT BREAKER & LOAD BREAK

SWITCHES
8.1 Battery Isolation DC Breaker MCCB with under voltage
protection
8.2 UPS input,output, Static bypass switch and ACB/MCCB/Load break Isolators with
Maintenance bypass switch inbuilt OC and SC
DATA SHEET B: UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
Unit Bidder
Sl.No. Description
1.0 GENERAL PARTICULARS

1.1 Name / Manufacturer
1.2 Quantity Offered Nos.
1.3 Type of UPS
1.4 Output Rating at 0C Ambient kVA
1.5 Mains Input . kVA
1.6 Mains Tolerance Range
Voltage %
Frequency %
SHEET 109 OF
Unit Bidder
Sl.No. Description
Combined %
1.7 Environment
1.7.1 Design Ambient Temperature Range
0
For Operation C
0
For Storage C
1.7.2 Relative Humidity %
1.7.3 Installation Altitude range without derating m
1.8 Noise level dB at 1M
1.9 Data communication interface with PC To be
provided
1.10 BMS Compatibility - Type of Protocol To be
given by
bidder
1.11 Clearance required at rear and on both sides To be
given by
bidder
1.12 Overall dimensions To be
given by
bidder
1.13 Total weight in kgs. To be
given by
bidder
1.14 Paralleling kit To be
provided
1.15 UPS Model CE
Marked
or not
2.0 ENCLOSURE
2.1 Sheet Thickness / Material mm
2.2 Degree of protection as per IS 13947
2.3 Mode of Cooling
2.4 Earth Bus material & size

2.5 Cable Entry
From Top / Bottom
2.6 Dimensions of UPS as per configuration LxDxH
drawing (mm)
2.7 Mimic Diagram a) Graphic LCD display
SHEET 110 OF
Unit Bidder
Sl.No. Description
b) Mimic diagram with
event indication LED
2.8 Accoustic Noise Level dBA
2.9 Colour of Paint
Exterior
Interior
2.10 Weight of each Panel kg
3.0 RECTIFIER
3.1 Rated input current w/o battery charging
Rated input current with battery charging
3.2 Harmonics at the point of connection to
source
a) THD ( Current)
At 100% Loading
At 75% loading
At 50% loading
At 25% loading
3.3 Whether Soft Start Feature Incorporated Yes / No
3.4 Type of Rectifier
3.5 Rectifier Efficiency %
(a) At 25% Load of the System
(b) At 50% Load of the System
(c) At 75% Load of the System
(d) At Full Rated Load of the System
3.6 Input Power factor range

(a) At 25% Load of the System
(b) At 50% Load of the System
(c) At 75% Load of the System
(d) At Full Rated Load of the System
4.0 INVERTER SYSTEM
4.1 PWM / any other
4.2 Type of Power Switching Devices
4.3 Output Rating at 0.8 Pf Lag at 0C kVA
4.4 Input Nominal DC Voltage and Range V DC
4.5 Output
4.5.1 Voltage V
SHEET 111 OF
Unit Bidder
Sl.No. Description
4.5.2 Voltage adjustment range +%
4.5.3 Steady state output voltage regulation from +%
no-load to full load for input line variations
(a) For balanced loads
(b) For 20% unbalanced loads in 3-PH
system
4.5.4 Voltage regulation for
a. 100% load application +%
b. Inverter DC input voltage vary from +%
maximum to minimum
c. Environmental conditions given below +%
4.5.5 Transient voltage regulation for
a. 100% load application +%
b. At loss or return of AC input +%
c. At load transfer from bypass to inverter +%
4.5.6 Transient recovery time to regulating band ms
4.6 Frequency
4.6.1 Nominal frequency Hz
4.6.2 Frequency deviation range +%
4.6.3 Synchronising adjustable range + Hz
4.6.4 Slew rate of synchronising adjustable range Hz/Sec.
4.7 Overload Capability
- for 10 min. % full load
- for 10 secs. % full load
4.8 Output Voltage THD in case of linear loads To be
provided
Output Voltage THD in case of non linear To be
loads provided
5.0 BATTERY
5.1 No. of 100% capacity batteries Nos.
5.2 Battery backup time Min.
5.3 Type of battery cells
5.4 No. of battery cells Nos.
5.5 Battery cell / Rack dimensions LXWXH
5.6 Weight of each battery bank (including kgs
Batteries & rack weight).
5.7 Voltage per battery block. V
5.8 No. of battery blocks offered per UPS. Nos.
SHEET 112 OF
Unit Bidder
Sl.No. Description
5.9 Nominal voltage per cell. V
5.10 Permissible end call voltage as per 1.7V
manufacturer.
5.11 End cell voltage considered for Battery sizing.
1.7V
5.12 AH capacity of battery To be
furnished
by
BIDDER
5.13 Have battery sizing calculations & discharge To be
curves been enclosed? furnished
by
BIDDER
5.14 Proposed Product should be working in Indian Mandator
Conditon minimum from past 4 Years y
5.15 Propsoed product should have installed base Mandator
in India minimum 500 nos y
5.16 Individual Battery Monitoring System Please
quote
Optional
Prices
5.17 Mandator
Energy Booster Mode for Parallel UPS
y
5.18 Mandator
Life Cycle Monitoring of DC Capacitors
y
6.0 STATIC BYPASS SWITCH

6.1 Rating of basic SCR used A
6.2 Load Transfer Bidder to furnish a detailed
write up on load transfer /.
Switching arrangement
6.2 Manual bypass Provided /
not
provided
6.3 Output Fault Clearing :
Current 1000%
Duration 10-250
ms
7.0 Metering Parameters on Control panel
7.1 Input AC voltage line –to -line and line -to-
SHEET 113 OF
Unit Bidder
Sl.No. Description
neutral for each phase
7.2 Input AC current for each phase
7.3 Input frequency
7.4 Battery voltage
7.5 Battery charge/discharge current
7.6 Output AC voltage line –to -line and line -to-
neutral for each phase
7.7 Output AC current for each phase
7.8 Output frequency
7.9 Percent of rated load being supplied by the
UPS
7.10 Battery time left during battery operation
7.11 Bypass power available
8.0 Alarms / Indications on Control panel
8.1 Input power out of tolerance To be
provided
8.2 Input phase rotation incorrect To be
provided
8.3 Incorrect input frequency To be
provided
8.4 Charger in reduced current mode To be
provided
8.5 Battery Charger Problem To be
provided
8.6 Battery failed To be
provided
8.7 Low battery warning (adjustable 1 to 99 To be
minutes) provided
8.8 Low battery shutdown To be
provided
8.9 DC bus overvoltage To be
provided
8.10 Bypass frequency out of range To be
provided
8.11 Load transferred to bypass To be
provided
8.12 Static switch failure To be
provided
SHEET 114 OF
Unit Bidder
Sl.No. Description
8.13 UPS output not synchronized to input power To be
provided
8.14 Input power single phased To be
provided
8.15 Input voltage sensor failed To be
provided
8.16 Inverter leg over current in X- phase To be
provided
8.17 Output under voltage To be
provided
8.18 Output overvoltage To be
provided
8.19 Output over current To be
provided
8.20 System output overloaded To be
provided
8.21 Load transferred to bypass due to overload To be
provided
8.22 Overload shutdown To be
provided
8.23 Control Error To be
provided
8.24 Critical power supply failure To be
provided
8.25 Load transferred due to internal protection To be
provided
8.26 External shutdown (remote EPO activated) To be
provided
8.27 Fan failure To be
provided
8.28 Over temperature shutdown impending To be
provided
8.29 Over temperature shutdown To be
provided
SHEET 115 OF
DATA SHEET A: STATIONARY LEAD ACID STORAGE BATTERY

GENERAL
1. Application
2. Number of battery banks required By bidder
3. Number of cells in each bank in series By bidder
(approximate)
4. Ambient conditions Min. temp. Ref project data
Max..temp.
Avg. temp.
RATING
5. Margin /factors to be considered
Design margin 20%
Temperature correction factor Plante - As per IS – 1652 ( K= 0.9)
Ageing factor Plante- 1.0
6. DC System Voltage at DC bus of the By bidder
Switchboard. Normal :
Maximum
Minimum
DISCHARGE DUTY
7. Ampere Hour Capacity of Battery at 27o C. 10 By bidder. Bidder to furnish supporting
hour rate to give final cell voltage of 1.85 calculations.
Volts/cell & type
(HDP-I/II, NDP)
8 Duty cycle and requirement
8.1 Total Momentary Load/Duration/Voltage at Amp :bidder to specify
the end of this duration Cycle time : bidder to specify
Volts : bidder to specify
8.2 Total Emergency Load/Duration/ Voltage at Amp :
the end of this duration Cycle time :
Volts :
8.3 Continuous Load/Duration/ Voltage at the Amp :
end of this duration Cycle time :
Volts :
9 Sketch no. (if any) showing discharge
Duty/Load cycle on battery (Load Cycle
Diagram)
10. Minimum ambient temperature for which
SHEET 116 OF

load cycle is applicable
11 Tentative size of cables to connect battery to Type
external circuit
Size mm2
12 Available area in battery room L x B mm x mm
13 Layout drg. No. (if any)
14. Mounting arrangement Open type single tier/multi tier/sheet
metal enclosed
15 High discharge test required Yes/ no if yes,
Amps Time End Cell Voltage
16 Charging method proposed Constant voltage with current limit for
float / trickle and constant current for
Boost. The first charge shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's
17 Tapped Cell arrangement for float cum boost Required
instructions as per IS -1652.
charging arrangement.
18 Type of battery cell container Transparent Styrene Acrylonitrile

(SAN).
DATA SHEET B: STATIONARY LEAD ACID STORAGE BATTERY
1.0 Manufacturer’s name/Model Number

2.0 Standards to which battery is manufactured
3.0 Rated capacity
3.1 At 270C and 10 hr discharge rate Ah
3.2 Capacity at minimum ambient temperature
and the formulae used for calculations
3.3
a) Capacity calculated by Bidder based on the
duty cycle, duration, voltage at the end of
each duty, ageing factor, margin and
applicable derating factors. ( Pl furnish
calculation and capacity rating factor curves)
SHEET 117 OF
b) Capacity at 270C at different end cell voltages

(Enclose capacity rating factor curves)
3.3.1 15 minutes Ah / V
3.3.2 30 minutes Ah/ V
3.3.3 45 minutes Ah /V
3.3.4 1 hour Ah / V
3.3.5 2 hour Ah /V
3.3.6 3 hour Ah/V
3.3.7 4 hour Ah/V
3.3.8 5 hour Ah/V
3.3.9 6 hour Ah/V
3.3.10 7 hour Ah/V
3.3.11 8 hour Ah/V
3.3.12 9 hour Ah/V
3.4 Maximum Momentary current 1 minute and Amps
voltage at the end of the duty
3.5 Expected life of battery Years
4.0 Recommended charging rate
4.1 Float charging voltage / current V/A
4.2 Trickle charging voltage / current V/A
4.3 Normal Boost charging voltage / current and V/A
duration (from fully discharged to fully
charged state)
4.4 Rapid Boost charging voltage / current (in 8 V/A
hours duration)
4.5 Equalising charge
(a) Voltage / current V/A
(b) Duration Hrs
(c) Interval between successive equalising days
charges and criteria to initiate the same
5.0 Expected fault level at bus due to battery kA

6.1 Internal resistance of each battery cell (fully Ohms
charged)
6.2 Total Resistance of battery including Ohms
resistance of inter-cell / inter row connectors
7.1 Ah efficiency at rated load %
7.2 Watt hour efficiency %
8.1 Type of positive plate
SHEET 118 OF
8.2 No. of positive plates / cell

8.3 No. of cells per battery, with recommended
float voltage
8.4 Whether the battery can meet the duty cycle
requirements with design margin,
temperature correction factor , ageing factor
etc., as specified (enclose battery sizing
calculations)
8.5 Inter – cell / Inter – row connectors

(a) Type (lead, lead coated copper or lead
coated aluminium)
(b) Thickness of lead coating (shall be not
less than 0.025 mm as measured in
accordance with IS : 6848).
(c) Suitable terminal provided for tapped
cell cable connection.
8.6 Whether acid level indicators, included
(applicable for opaque containers)
8.7 Type of containers
8.8 Type of cell
9.0 Overall dimensions
9.1 Each cell LxWxH
9.2 Whether battery room size adequate
(enclose dimensioned drawing indicating
battery layout)
10.0 Weight of each cell
10.1 With electrolyte kg
10.2 Without electrolyte kg
11.0 Are the vent plugs explosion proof Yes / No
12.0 Ventilation requirements No. of air changes Changes/
required Hr
13.0 Whether copy of the Type test reports (for a
similar type & rating battery) enclosed.
(clause 9.2 of write-up)
14.0 List of spares / accessories enclosed (Ref. CL. Yes / No
4 and CL. 10 of wirte-up)
15.0 List of deviation enclosed Yes / No
SHEET 119 OF
DATA SHEET A: BATTERY CHARGER
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

1 GENERAL
1.1 Number required As per project requirement
Type (Float and Boost charger or Float-cum Float, Float-cum boost
1.2 Boost charger) charger
1.3 DC System Voltage (Nominal) V As per project requirement
1.4 DC System Earthing Unearthed
1.5 Ambient Design Temperature Deg.C As per project data
2 DC BUS LOAD
2.1 Total continuous DC load A As per project requirement
Short time loads (Additional to continuous
2.2 loads)
A/
a) Testing of DC lights / Facia lamps Secs As per project requirement
b) Starting/ Running current of A/A
Largestconnected DC Motor Secs As per project requirement
3 BATTERY DETAILS
3.1 Float/Trickle chargingcurrent of battery mA Bidder to indicate
a) Boost Charging Current ofBattery
3.2 (Maximum) A Bidder to indicate
b) Boost Charging Voltage ofBattery
(Maximum) V Bidder to indicate
3.3 Maximum time for Boost charging of Battery Hr 8 Hr.
3.4 Battery capacity & no. of cells AH As per project requirement
3.5 Battery type (Lead acid orNi-Cd). Plante Lead Acid
4 AC SYSTEM DATA
4.1 Supply 415V, 3ph, 3wire, 50 Hz
Volts V
Phase
Hz Hz
4.2 (a) Variation in supply % 10%
Voltage
(b) Variation in supply % 5%
frequency
4.3 Short Circuit level kA 10kA
SHEET 120 OF
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

4.4 Type of earthing Effectively earthed
5 PERFORMANCE
5.1 DC voltage setting adjustment for float charger % +10% of nominal voltage
Voltage stabilisation for constant voltage +1% of set D.C voltage, with
5.2 regulator. % AC input variation as in 4.2
Maximum permissible variation in DC voltage
5.3 (no load to full load) % 1%
D.C.voltage setting adjustment for boost 70% to 100% of maxm. Boost
5.4 charging % charging voltage
30% to 100% of max. boost
5.5 D.C. current adjustment for boost charging % charging current
Current stabilisation for constant current
5.6 regulator for boost charger % 2%
Minimum permissible power factor at rated
5.7 continuous load 0.85
Permissible ripple content at rated continuous
5.8 load % 1% (maximum)
Maximum permissible harmonics with or
5.9 without battery % 5%
6 MISCELLANEOUS
6.1 Cable entry BOTTOM
6.2 Cable Sizes
Battery sq.mm As per project requirement
DC output sq.mm
AC input sq.mm
Potential free contacts as per cl.7.6.10 to be
6.3 provided. YES
6.4 Degree of protection of charger cubicle IP 42
6.5 Overall efficiency of charger >80%
DATA SHEET A: ELEVATOR
DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL
PARAMETERS
GENERAL 1. LIFT CATEGORY a) GOODS Passenger & Goods
b) PASSENGER Cum Passenger
c) GOODS CUM PASSENGER
SHEET 121 OF
PARAMETERS
2. QUANTITY Refer the design
specification.
3. INSTALLATION I INDOOR Indoor
O OUTDOOR
4. HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATION As per project
(IS 5572) requirement
5. CORROSIVE LOCATION Yes
6. SEISMIC ACCELERATION FACTOR As per IS
7. POWER SUPPLY Vendor to specify
1. RATED LOAD a) SINGLE POINT LOAD(Kg.) As per project
b) UNIFORMLY DISTRI- requirement
BUTED LOAD (Kg.)
2. RATED SPEED m/sec As per project
requirement
3. TOTAL RISE m As per project
requirement
4. NO. OF FLOORS SERVED As per project
requirement
5. LIFT WELL DRAWING NO (ENCLOSED) Not enclosed
LIFT PARTICULARS
6. LIFT WELL DIMENSIONS (L x W x H) mm x mm x As per project

mm requirement
7. LEVELLING ZONE Vendor to furnish
8. NO. OF DOORS IN THE CAR One end

a) SINGLE SPEED AC VVVF
b) TWO SPEED AC
c) VARIABLE VOLTAGE
1.CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL OPERATION
MOTOR CONTROL
TYPE d) VARIABLE VOLTAGE
VARIABLE FREQENCY
(VVVF)
a) NON AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC WITHOUT
b) AUTOMATIC WITH ATTENDANT
ATTENDANT (WITH OR
2. OPERATION WITHOUT KEY)
c) AUTOMATIC WITHOUT
ATTENDANT
3. AUTOMATIC a) NON SELECTIVE Operation from floor
OPERATION COLLECTIVE (Single automatic)
SHEET 122 OF
PARAMETERS
TYPE b) SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE
c) SINGLE AUTOMATIC
d) GROUP AUTOMATIC
e) CAR SWITCH OPERATION
f) SIGNAL OPERATION
g) SINGLE/DOUBLE
BUTTON OPERATION
a) LIFT CAR Lift car
b) ONE WAY AUTOMATIC
4. LEVELLING c ) TWO WAY AUTOMATIC
DEVICE MAINTAINING
d) TWO WAY AUTOMATIC
NON
MAINTAINING
a) LIGHT SWITCH Yes
1. IN THE CAR
b) LIMIT SWITCHES Yes
a) UP PUSH BUTTON Yes
2. IN THE b) DOWN PUSH BUTTON Yes
LANDING c) LIFT PUSH BUTTON Yes
(YES/NO) d) BELL PUSH BUTTON Yes
e) UP DIRECTION OF TRAVEL Yes
f) DOWN DIRECTION OF Yes
TRAVEL
OPERATING DEVICES
g) FLOOR POSITION Yes

INDICATOR (ILLUMINATED
NUMERAL FOR EACH
LANDING)
a) UP PUSH BUTTON NA
b) DOWN PUSH BUTTON NA
3. IN THE c) HAND CRANKING DEVICE NA
MACHINE d) STOP PUSH BUTTON NA
ROOM e) SLOW SPEED OPERATION NA
(YES/NO) SELECTOR
a) UP PUSH BUTTON Yes
4. ON THE TOP b) DOWN PUSH BUTTON Yes
OF THE CAR c) STOP PUSH BUTTON Yes
(YES/NO)
d) 240 V 1 RECEPTACLE Yes
SHEET 123 OF
PARAMETERS
1. IN THE CAR a) LANDING CALL Yes
(YES/NO) REGISTERING UNIT (WITH
BUZZER & REGISTRATION
CANCELLING UNIT & LAMP
TEST PUSH BUTTON)
b) BUILDING NAME DISPLAY No
c) CAPACITY INDICATOR Yes
d) DIGITAL TEMPERATURE No
INDICATOR
a) UP DIRECTION OF TRAVEL Yes
b) DOWN DIRECTION OF Yes
OPERATING DEVICES
2. IN THE TRAVEL
LANDING c) LOCATION OF DIRECTION Yes
(YES/NO) INDICATOR
d) CAR POSITION INDICATOR Yes
(ILLUMINATED NUM-ERALS
FOR EACH LANDING)
e) LOCATION OF THE Yes
POSITION INDICATOR
f) CALL REGISTERED Yes
INDICATOR
g) LIFT ENGAGED INDICATOR Yes
h) CALL REGISTERED UP Yes
INDICATOR
i) CALL REGISTERED DOWN Yes
INDICATOR
j) LIFT OUT OF ORDER Yes
k) OVERLOAD WARNING Yes
INDICATOR
CAR AND LANDING a) CENTRE OPENING CENTRE OPENING
DOORS SLIDING SLIDING
b) MID BAR
1.TYPE OF DOORS COLLAPSIBLE
c) SINGLE SLIDE
d) SWING
e) VERTICAL
BIPARTING
f) TWO SPEED
SLIDING
g) VERTICAL LIFTING
SHEET 124 OF
PARAMETERS
2. DOOR OPERATOR Yes
3. VISION PANELS IN DOORS Fully open type
4. COLOUR SHADE FOR OUTSIDE LANDING DOORS As per IS
5. COLOUR SHADE FOR CAR DOOR As per IS
6. MATERIAL OF THE DOOR As per IS
7. SIZE OF THE DOOR As per IS
8. INFRA RED DOOR PROTECTION DEVICE
a) INCANDESCENT LAMP FITTINGS LED
MISCELLANEOUS b) FLUORESCENT TUBE FITTINGS
DETAILS 1. CAR LIGHTING c) INDIRECT LIGHTING
2. CAR VENTILATION FAN WITH SWITCH Yes
(YES/NO)
3. DÉCOR INSIDE THE CAR No
4. ENCLOSURE a) DUST TIGHT Corrosion proof
FOR ELECT.
EQUIP. b) WATER TIGHT
LOCA-TED
OUTSIDE THE c) CORROSION PROOF
M/C ROOM
5. EMERGENCY EXIT (YES / NO) Yes
6. PROVISION FOR OPENING THE LANDING DOOR IN Yes

CASE OF EMERGENCY
SPECIAL 1. CAR a) OPERATING DEVICE & Yes

REQUIREMENTS ACCESSORIES INDICATION
AND NOTES b) PANEL ON TWO SIDES Yes
c) FLOORING DETAILS Vendor to specify
d) BLOW OUT PANELS Vendor to specify
e) FACILITY FOR RECEIVING Yes
FIRE ALARM SIGNAL
f) PROVISION OF RS 232 / RS 485 Yes

FOR CONNECTING TO BUILDING
AUTOMATION SYSTEM.
2. INCHING CONTROL Vendor to specify
3. STOP BLOCKED IN FLOORS Yes
4. FIRE EXTINGUISHER NO
SHEET 125 OF
PARAMETERS
5. FACIA PLATES Yes
6. CABLE Vendor to specify
7. MATERIAL OF THE LIFT ROPE : STEEL/ STAINLESS Vendor to specify
STEEL
8. AUTOMATIC RESCUE DEVICE INCLUDED Yes
YES/NO
FLOOR FLOOR ELEVATION
DESIGNATION
DATASHEET B: ELEVATORS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT BIDDER
1. Make
2. Type - Standards
3. Capacity Kg
4. Rated speed M/sec.
5. Contract speed M/sec
6. Car dimensions (L X B X H) mm
7. Overall weight Kg.
8. Total Rise M
9. No. of Landings & Locations
10. Lift control type
11. Operation
12. Levelling device
13. Type of car and landing doors

SHEET 126 OF
14. Size of doors mm x mm
15. Door Operator
16. Vision panel in doors
17. Operating devices in car
18. Operating devices in landings
19. Indicating devices in car
20. Indicating devices in landings
21. Details of car lighting
22. Details of car ventilation
23. Details of Painting
24. Pit height from bottom landing mm
25. Clearance between top landing and Machine mm

Room NA
26. Machine Room Dimensions (L X B X H) mm NA
27. Machine
27.1 Type Generator Motor
27.2 Enclosure & Ventilation
27.3 Rated voltage V
27.4 Winding insulation class
27.5 Output
27.6 Torque/speed characteristics enclosed Yes/No.

SHEET 127 OF
27.7 Temperature rise at full load C
28.0 Rope
28.1 Material
28.2 No. & diameter of strands
28.3 Cross sectional area mm2
28.4 Outside diameter mm
28.5 Ultimate strength Kg
28.6 Working stress Kg/cm2
29. Enclosure for electrical equipment
30. Sheaves and Pulleys
30.1 Material for construction
30.2 Dia and grooves
31. Type of brake
32. Hand cranking device
33. Safety type
34. Governor type
35. Counterweight Kg.
36.0 Cables
36.1 Standard
36.2 Size mm2

SHEET 128 OF
36.3 Cores
36.4 No. of cables
36.5 No. of cable groups
DATASHEET A: LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
Sl.No. Unit Technical Parameters

Description
1.0
GENERAL
1.1 Normal Supply Voltage, Phase and AC
Frequency DC
1.2 Variation in Supply
a) Voltage % Refer design data
b) Frequency % Refer design data
c) Combined voltage & frequency % Refer design data
1.3 Design Ambient Air Temperature ºC Refer Project data
1.4 Luminaire Terminal Suitable for Saline environment
1.4.1 Indoor non hazardous area
a) Conductor material
b) Wire size Cores x As per the requirement
sq.mm
1.4.2 Indoor hazardous / Outdoor area
b) Cable size Cores x As per the requirement
sq.mm
1.5 Luminaire Earthing Terminal Suitable for
b) Conductor size SWG As per the requirement
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Name of Manufacturer and Country
1.1.1 Luminaires
a) Fluorescent
c) HPSV
d) Metal Halide
e) Incandescent
SHEET 129 OF

Description
f) Flame proof
g) LED
1.1.2 Accessories
1.2 Applicable Standards for
a) Luminaires
b) Accessories
1.3 Manufacturer’s type and Catalogue No.
a) Luminaires
b) Accessories
2.0 TECHNICAL DETAILS
2.1 Lamps
2.1.1 Maximum permissible supply voltage ±%
variation
2.1.2 Luminous output
a) After 100 burning hours Lumens
b) After 1000 burning hours Lumens
2.1.3 Average burning hour life Hours
2.2 Ballasts & Starters
2.2.1 Maximum permissible supply voltage ±%
variation
2.2.2 Power loss at nominal working voltage
2.2.3 Maximum hot spot temperature of ballast
2.2.4 Conductor material of ballast
2.2.5 Insulation class of ballast winding
2.2.6 Average life of
a) Ballast Hrs.
b) Starters Hrs.
2.3 Capacitors
2.3.1 Power factor
2.4 Luminaires
2.4.1 Weight of luminaires Kgs
2.4.2 Earthing terminal
a) Material
b) Suitable upto conductor size
2.4.3 Internal wiring size Sq.mm
2.4.4 Terminal block suitable for conductor size Sq.mm
2.4.5 Sheet steel thickness of
a) Housing SWG
SHEET 130 OF

Description
b) Reflector SWG
2.4.6 Wire guard thickness mm
2.4.7 Descriptive catalogues enclosed Yes/No
* BIDDER shall fill up relevant sheets of Data Sheet- against information called for therein and furnish
the same.
DATA SHEET A: LIGHTING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
SL.NO DESCRIPTION UNIT TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

SYSTEM PARTICULARS
1.1 Voltage
a)3 Phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz system
Rated Voltage V 230 V
Maximum Voltage V 253 V
b)DC system As per project requirement
Rated Voltage V
Maximum Voltage V
1.2 One Minute Withstand Voltage V 2000
1.3 System Short-Circuit Level
a) AC kA (rms) 10
b) DC kA (DC)
1.4 Reference Ambient Temperature ºC 50
2.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS/ PANELS – *
PARTICULARS
2.1 Floor Mounted Lighting Distribution Busbars Cable Entry Location No.of
Boards Designation Cu/Al outgoing
Amps (Top / (Indoor /
Feeders
Bottom) Outdoor)
a) AS PER SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
2.2 Single Phase/3 Phase Ways, Wall/ Busbars Cable Entry Location No.of
SHEET 131 OF

Structure Mounting Panels Designation Cu/Al Outgoing
Amps (Top / (Indoor /
Feeders
Bottom) Outdoor)
a) AS PER SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
2.3 For Feeder Designations, AS PER SYSTEM REQUIREMENT

Ratings :
MCCB/ MCCB
2.4 Incomer of LDB : SFU
2.5 Paint Finish
a)Colour Shade RAL 7032
b)Epoxy paint required No
Phase to phase – 25mm
2.6 Busbar clearance of LDB Phase to neutral/earth – 19mm
Neutral to earth – 19mm
2.7 Earthing Terminals Suitable for Conductor:
a)Size REFER SCOPE OF WORK
b)Material
3.0 LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCHES
3.1 Decorative Amps
Amps
3.2 Industrial
3.3 Flame proof Amps
4.0 RECEPTACLE UNITS
4.1 Decorative Amps
4.2 Industrial Amps
4.3 Flame proof Amps
6.0 LIGHTING WIRES*
6.1 Conductor Al/Cu CU
6.2 Size Sq.mm MINIMUM 2.5 SQ.MM
7.0 CONDUITS *
7.1 Rigid Steel Galvanised / Black enamelled
7.2 Rigid Non-metallic
SHEET 132 OF

8.0 FLAME PROOF EQUIPMENT
8.1 Area Classification
8.2 Gases/ Vapour, Group Classification
8.3 Weather proof Yes/No Degree of Protection IP-55
9.0 POLES & TOWERS& HIGH MAST pole
9.1 Poles
Drawing Enclosed Not enclosed
Junction Box with Pole Yes/No
Junction Box protection IP55 for Outdoor
IP54 for Indoor
9.2 Flood Light Tower / High Mast
Drawing Enclosed Not enclosed
Painted / Galvanised
DATA SHEET B : LIGHTING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
1.0 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND

LIGHTING PANELS/ REMOTE LIGHTING
PANELS
1.1 Manufacturer’s Name
1.2 Brief particulars of type of construction
a)Floor mounted lighting distribution boards
b)Wall/structure mounted lighting and other
Panels
1.3 Total Dimensions of
a)Each complete board/panel, LxWxD L (mm)
W (mm)
D (mm)
b)Dimensional drawing enclosed Yes/No
1.4 Have all the Feeders and Components Yes/No
specified in Section-D, Data Sheets A1/A3
been provided
1.5 Indicate the type and routine tests to be
carried out
2.0 AIR-BREAK SWITCHES
2.1 Make
2.2 Type
2.3 Literature enclosed Yes/No
SHEET 133 OF
3.0 2.0 FUSES

3.1 Make
3.2 Type
4.0 MCCB / MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER
4.1 Make
4.2 Type
5.0 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER
5.1 Make
5.2 Type
5.3 Leakage Current I N mA
6.0 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS CTs VTs
6.1 Make
6.2 Type
6.3 Output VA
6.4 Accuracy Class
7.0 METERS VOLTMETER AMMETER
WATTMETER
7.1 Make
7.2 Type
7.3 Accuracy Class
8.0 RELAYS (IF ANY PROVIDED)
8.1 Make
8.2 Type
8.3 Voltage Rating V
8.4 Setting Range %
8.5 No. of Contacts
a)Normally open
b)Normally closed
9.0 FLAME PROOF ENCLOSURES
9.1 Make
9.2 Suitable for use in hazardous area
a)Area classification
b)Gases/Vapour group
SHEET 134 OF
9.3 Dimensional Drawings and Literature of each Yes/No

required equipment flameproof enclosure
including fixing details enclosed
9.4 Approval certificates of relevant statutory Yes/No
authorities enclosed
10.0 LIGHT CONTROL SWITCHES
10.1 Make
10.2 Literature Enclosed Yes/No
11.0 RECEPTACLE, PLUG AND SWITCH
11.1 Make
12.0 LIGHTING WIRES
12.1 Make
12.2 Applicable Standard
12.3 Voltage Grade V
12.4 Conductor Material Cu/Al
12.5 No.of Strands mm²
12.6 Colour Coding
13.0 CONDUITS METALLIC NON-METALLIC
13.1 Make
13.2 Material
13.3 Finish (Galvanised/Black Enamel/Any special
anti-corrosive coating)
13.4 Sizes offered and wall thicknesses
13.5 Supply of necessary couplings, bends, tees, Yes/No
necessary for conduit routing included
14.0 JUNCTION BOXES
14.1 Make
14.2 Material and Gauge
14.3 Painted / Galvanised
14.4 Dimensioned Drawings Enclosed Yes/No
15.0 LIGHTING POLES/TOWERS/HIGH MAST
15.1 Type of Poles/Towers/High mast
15.2 Make
15.3 Dimensioned Drawing/Particulars of Flood Yes/No
Light/High mast Tower enclosed
16.0 CEILING/WALL MOUNTED FANS
16.1 Make
SHEET 135 OF
16.2 Suspension Rod, Regulator and Switch Yes/No

included

VOL V-Electrical PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

VOL V-Electrical PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VOL V-Electrical PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TAMIL NADU GENERATION AND

DISTRIBUTION CORPORATION LTD.

EPC TENDER FOR

SPECIFICATION NO. - SE/C/UP/EE/M/OT No.03/2014-15

VOLUME SECTION TITLE

I COMMERCIAL & GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

II GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

III DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – CIVIL WORKS

IV DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – MECHANICAL

V DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

VI DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – CONTROL &

VII DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – NAVIGATION AIDS,

VIII TENDER DRAWINGS

IX ATTACHMENTS TO TENDER DOCUMENT

2. TCE.7347A-EL-201 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HT SWITCHGEAR

3. TCE.7347A-EL-202 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT SWITCHGEAR

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL

13. TCE.7347A-EL-212 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CABLES

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR H. V. CABLE

18. TCE.7347A-EL-217 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BATTERY CHARGER

19. TCE.7347A-EL-218 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELEVATOR SYSTEM

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

23. TCE.7347A-EL-222 CABLE TRAY GENERAL NOTES

EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

25. TCE.7347A-EL-224 LIGHTING INSTALLATION NOTES

26. TCE.7347A-EL-225 DATA SHEETS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

1. DESIGN CRITERIA – ELECTRICAL

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

1.2.2 Power Distribution

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

with the transformer.

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

Instantaneous over-current (50) & Instantaneous sensitive earth

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

cable trays shall be earthed by interconnecting this grounding conductor at an interval of

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

Rated isolation transformer shall be provided. UPS shall be parallel redundant

SCOPE OF WORK AND DESIGN SPECIFICATION FOR

1.1 The Scope of this specification covers Supply, design, manufacture,